SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_DBSTAT_VTAB
SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_BYTECODE_VTAB
SHELL_OPT += -DSQLITE_ENABLE_OFFSET_SQL_FUNC
-FUZZERSHELL_OPT =
+FUZZERSHELL_OPT =
FUZZCHECK_OPT += -I$(TOP)/test
FUZZCHECK_OPT += -I$(TOP)/ext/recover
FUZZCHECK_OPT += \
#
fiddle: sqlite3.c shell.c
make -C ext/wasm fiddle emcc_opt=-Os
+
+#
+# Spell-checking for source comments
+# The sources checked are either C sources or C source templates.
+# Their comments are extracted and processed through aspell using
+# a custom dictionary that contains scads of odd identifiers that
+# find their way into the comments.
+#
+# Currently, this target is setup to be "made" in-tree only.
+# The output is ephemeral. Redirect it to guide spelling fixups,
+# either to correct spelling or add words to tool/custom.txt.
+#
+./custom.rws: ./tool/custom.txt
+ @echo 'Updating custom dictionary from tool/custom.txt'
+ aspell --lang=en create master ./custom.rws < $<
+
+misspell: ./custom.rws
+ $(TCLSH_CMD) ./tool/spellsift.tcl ./src/*.c ./src/*.h ./src/*.in
-C Fix\scompiler\swarning\sin\ssrc-verify.c.
-D 2023-06-05T17:12:33.077
+C Add\sa\sC-source\sspell-checking\sfacility.\smake\smisspell\s(on\sNix)
+D 2023-06-07T08:40:31.431
F .fossil-settings/empty-dirs dbb81e8fc0401ac46a1491ab34a7f2c7c0452f2f06b54ebb845d024ca8283ef1
F .fossil-settings/ignore-glob 35175cdfcf539b2318cb04a9901442804be81cd677d8b889fcc9149c21f239ea
F LICENSE.md df5091916dbb40e6e9686186587125e1b2ff51f022cc334e886c19a0e9982724
-F Makefile.in 3b155551e8c78751622bc5ce903b1a91beaa6e4c04710161ae51858bbd9e2edc
+F Makefile.in 572a91092815e65bc8d5bfb53a12f31005320048f607fc05b20012ba48afe426
F Makefile.linux-gcc f609543700659711fbd230eced1f01353117621dccae7b9fb70daa64236c5241
F Makefile.msc 9c032cabd86fc0468167459b714478be7fe77e47ce43fdf1bfaf2e48e829a112
F README.md 6f942c2e542d53202dc75b114b0617e9e02f8a6a777508fc23c3d8297951c478
F sqlite3.1 fc7ad8990fc8409983309bb80de8c811a7506786
F sqlite3.pc.in 48fed132e7cb71ab676105d2a4dc77127d8c1f3a
F sqlite_cfg.h.in baf2e409c63d4e7a765e17769b6ff17c5a82bbd9cbf1e284fd2e4cefaff3fcf2
-F src/alter.c 482c534877fbb543f8295992cde925df55443febac5db5438d5aaba6f78c4940
+F src/alter.c f1c686e7325a7449c5a0ebc16207186f52e1b6673da699392caa1de39f219511
F src/analyze.c a1f3061af16c99f73aed0362160176c31a6452de1b02ada1d68f6839f2a37df0
F src/attach.c cc9d00d30da916ff656038211410ccf04ed784b7564639b9b61d1839ed69fd39
-F src/auth.c f4fa91b6a90bbc8e0d0f738aa284551739c9543a367071f55574681e0f24f8cf
+F src/auth.c 19b7ccacae3dfba23fc6f1d0af68134fa216e9040e53b0681b4715445ea030b4
F src/backup.c 5c97e8023aab1ce14a42387eb3ae00ba5a0644569e3476f38661fa6f824c3523
-F src/bitvec.c 7c849aac407230278445cb069bebc5f89bf2ddd87c5ed9459b070a9175707b3d
-F src/btmutex.c 6ffb0a22c19e2f9110be0964d0731d2ef1c67b5f7fabfbaeb7b9dabc4b7740ca
-F src/btree.c 46a97286ef0d6caedfbbb7d2fb4fc66fe2eee5484458efeddfce85fb5152799b
+F src/bitvec.c 9eac5f42c11914d5ef00a75605bb205e934f435c579687f985f1f8b0995c8645
+F src/btmutex.c 79a43670447eacc651519a429f6ece9fd638563cf95b469d6891185ddae2b522
+F src/btree.c 148228f60581e5ecbe4b57d0ba1d0bbc0ff737c6581c841e2dedd58fa07689c0
F src/btree.h aa354b9bad4120af71e214666b35132712b8f2ec11869cb2315c52c81fad45cc
-F src/btreeInt.h b900603c8956bdeb313841f9b67bdeceef32c64d962d35477c07ec25e8cf0f9b
-F src/build.c 5512d5a335334b48d116f1ecd051edef96a60add18ae48e0ea302a395f00f3d9
+F src/btreeInt.h 3b4eff7155c0cea6971dc51f62e3529934a15a6640ec607dd42a767e379cb3a9
+F src/build.c bf900f75fb241130fe59299e00ea07d522080eb7e75811b175f313dcb3ab3291
F src/callback.c db3a45e376deff6a16c0058163fe0ae2b73a2945f3f408ca32cf74960b28d490
F src/complete.c a3634ab1e687055cd002e11b8f43eb75c17da23e
F src/ctime.c 20507cc0b0a6c19cd882fcd0eaeda32ae6a4229fb4b024cfdf3183043d9b703d
F src/date.c cb71f73d5df5303ec6630971b9c8b8c7df466fa3233dbdc643d613806e53e554
F src/dbpage.c f3eea5f7ec47e09ee7da40f42b25092ecbe961fc59566b8e5f705f34335b2387
F src/dbstat.c ec92074baa61d883de58c945162d9e666c13cd7cf3a23bc38b4d1c4d0b2c2bef
-F src/delete.c 05e27e3a55dcfeadf2f7ca95a5c5e0928f182c04640ec1954ffa42f3d5c19341
-F src/expr.c 099cf96cf72f1b8cebf0d91a8f75e111454cd011deed9c6dadcd0241c2abdca8
+F src/delete.c fe728a9ec79a719c2c2fb0c42822fc96a7cb457279eede8314e25d951b0e0dda
+F src/expr.c db2e4870db1577415f796c22ee893175432bd61abce082c5905902257724ad24
F src/fault.c 460f3e55994363812d9d60844b2a6de88826e007
F src/fkey.c 03c134cc8bffe54835f742ddea0b72ebfc8f6b32773d175c71b8afeea6cb5c83
-F src/func.c 03e6b501f3056d0ba398bda17df938b2b566aa0b3ca7e1942a3cd1925d04ec36
+F src/func.c e20ad8a7cf1a8a8237e7cfc5b3b3c82598e40a05c980e3de30b5323a7f8927ab
F src/global.c bd0892ade7289f6e20bff44c07d06371f2ff9b53cea359e7854b9b72f65adc30
-F src/hash.c c6af5f96a7a76d000f07c5402c48c318c2566beecdee9e78b9d9f60ce7119565
+F src/hash.c 9ee4269fb1d6632a6fecfb9479c93a1f29271bddbbaf215dd60420bcb80c7220
F src/hash.h 3340ab6e1d13e725571d7cee6d3e3135f0779a7d8e76a9ce0a85971fa3953c51
-F src/hwtime.h b638809e083b601b618df877b2e89cb87c2a47a01f4def10be4c4ebb54664ac7
+F src/hwtime.h f9c2dfb84dce7acf95ce6d289e46f5f9d3d1afd328e53da8f8e9008e3b3caae6
F src/in-operator.md 10cd8f4bcd225a32518407c2fb2484089112fd71
-F src/insert.c a8de1db43335fc4946370a7a7e47d89975ad678ddb15078a150e993ba2fb37d4
-F src/json.c 39b1c7527f3111923e65f168a87b03b591f12a41400a63d05c119794bee36620
+F src/insert.c a38bbb944a4f2771d70140db9c5d57e36c37e28d5a366497b4f93272a6d2567e
+F src/json.c 89170fc7a484073e84c0573b31c2878bdbf5210e9cc9539b9a74404153c6a779
F src/legacy.c d7874bc885906868cd51e6c2156698f2754f02d9eee1bae2d687323c3ca8e5aa
F src/loadext.c 176d6b2cb18a6ad73b133db17f6fc351c4d9a2d510deebdb76c22bde9cfd1465
-F src/main.c 8024bdacd452fc114e34a6bc9d75d1b33ac64c40222d2aa82d3edd1a1a58f976
+F src/main.c 44a6b08c61b3256634767dd6b91f7c5ce9f9520d2fe4573300fea40b7c766114
F src/malloc.c 47b82c5daad557d9b963e3873e99c22570fb470719082c6658bf64e3012f7d23
F src/mem0.c 6a55ebe57c46ca1a7d98da93aaa07f99f1059645
-F src/mem1.c c12a42539b1ba105e3707d0e628ad70e611040d8f5e38cf942cee30c867083de
+F src/mem1.c 3bb59158c38e05f6270e761a9f435bf19827a264c13d1631c58b84bdc96d73b2
F src/mem2.c c8bfc9446fd0798bddd495eb5d9dbafa7d4b7287d8c22d50a83ac9daa26d8a75
F src/mem3.c 30301196cace2a085cbedee1326a49f4b26deff0af68774ca82c1f7c06fda4f6
F src/mem5.c b7da5c10a726aacacc9ad7cdcb0667deec643e117591cc69cf9b4b9e7f3e96ff
F src/mutex.c 5e3409715552348732e97b9194abe92fdfcd934cfb681df4ba0ab87ac6c18d25
F src/mutex.h a7b2293c48db5f27007c3bdb21d438873637d12658f5a0bf8ad025bb96803c4a
F src/mutex_noop.c 9d4309c075ba9cc7249e19412d3d62f7f94839c4
-F src/mutex_unix.c dd2b3f1cc1863079bc1349ac0fec395a500090c4fe4e11ab775310a49f2f956d
-F src/mutex_w32.c caa50e1c0258ac4443f52e00fe8aaea73b6d0728bd8856bedfff822cae418541
+F src/mutex_unix.c bd52ec50e44a41fe1e3deb5a6e3fe98edb6f2059da3e46d196363d0fa3192cda
+F src/mutex_w32.c 38b56d0bc8d54c17c20cbaaad3719b0c36b92fd07a7e34360d0c6a18d5589912
F src/notify.c 89a97dc854c3aa62ad5f384ef50c5a4a11d70fcc69f86de3e991573421130ed6
-F src/os.c 81c9c1c52eab711e27e33fd51fe5788488d3a02bc1a71439857abbee5d0d2c97
+F src/os.c 509452169d5ea739723e213b8e2481cf0e587f0e88579a912d200db5269f5f6d
F src/os.h 1ff5ae51d339d0e30d8a9d814f4b8f8e448169304d83a7ed9db66a65732f3e63
F src/os_common.h 6c0eb8dd40ef3e12fe585a13e709710267a258e2c8dd1c40b1948a1d14582e06
F src/os_kv.c 4d39e1f1c180b11162c6dc4aa8ad34053873a639bac6baae23272fc03349986a
F src/os_setup.h 6011ad7af5db4e05155f385eb3a9b4470688de6f65d6166b8956e58a3d872107
-F src/os_unix.c 1b3ddb7814c4bf37f494c04d2ab30c1ced5b2c927267e1930ce7cd388787a96d
-F src/os_win.c 2b2411279f7b24f927591561303fc5871845732df42641cbf695c23640b16975
+F src/os_unix.c 95b407307deb902a3bd9a5d5666c7838709cccb337baeee6ef0a53f512d3673e
+F src/os_win.c 79ff2345aafe92be324e8d9062050c6c5ae714c2db6b4b5334d7d28e70ea81e6
F src/os_win.h 7b073010f1451abe501be30d12f6bc599824944a
-F src/pager.c 45e2ef5e9eb5cc0138bcc32b5d2299479be80b206f621873f59149dfb517f496
+F src/pager.c eeb41200c0d0d75b49e0c374eecb8f07f12f2c1deb0f1d3ca5573bcb300b9727
F src/pager.h f82e9844166e1585f5786837ddc7709966138ced17f568c16af7ccf946c2baa3
F src/parse.y 146f9a1db7db5ef4299c6897d335e5abed348c2626190d2877d45ffa210fd4ca
-F src/pcache.c 8ee13acccfd9accbf0af94910b7323dd7f7d55300d92ddafcf40e34fcc8e21be
+F src/pcache.c 4cd4a0043167da9ba7e19b4d179a0e6354e7fe32c16f781ecf9bf0a5ff63b40b
F src/pcache.h 1497ce1b823cf00094bb0cf3bac37b345937e6f910890c626b16512316d3abf5
-F src/pcache1.c dee95e3cd2b61e6512dc814c5ab76d5eb36f0bfc9441dbb4260fccc0d12bbddc
-F src/pragma.c 26ed2cfdc5c12aa1c707178635709684960288cacc9cff9d491a38ff10e395f1
+F src/pcache1.c 602acb23c471bb8d557a6f0083cc2be641d6cafcafa19e481eba7ef4c9ca0f00
+F src/pragma.c 02c8e7b47e88c2afb77fb1f6ebf2cd9331e4469ae97d4a774ce824e2875fbfcb
F src/pragma.h e690a356c18e98414d2e870ea791c1be1545a714ba623719deb63f7f226d8bb7
-F src/prepare.c 6350675966bd0e7ac3a464af9dbfe26db6f0d4237f4e1f1acdb17b12ad371e6e
+F src/prepare.c d6c4354f8ea0dc06962fbabc4b68c4471a45276a2918c929be00f9f537f69eb1
F src/printf.c b9320cdbeca0b336c3f139fd36dd121e4167dd62b35fbe9ccaa9bab44c0af38d
F src/random.c 606b00941a1d7dd09c381d3279a058d771f406c5213c9932bbd93d5587be4b9c
-F src/resolve.c 3e53e02ce87c9582bd7e7d22f13f4094a271678d9dc72820fa257a2abb5e4032
-F src/rowset.c ba9515a922af32abe1f7d39406b9d35730ed65efab9443dc5702693b60854c92
-F src/select.c a42b88d8bb9e824f45ccea16e7dfc5a812a32e2b8a0c5727b893734a14d83ade
-F src/shell.c.in 6915835eee0775c02ea1fb474da19f07ed76acbfc92444aef09e16b963abb46f
-F src/sqlite.h.in 6296fa5886cdf6f337d7b95da962791e352ce4c8b6aa53eff84137c1db62a79e
+F src/resolve.c c1457b920aeb33ed106bf478fad31b7473a8950a755ea898980c428928f3a514
+F src/rowset.c 8432130e6c344b3401a8874c3cb49fefe6873fec593294de077afea2dce5ec97
+F src/select.c d1d9e1e91098763573f15671323cc2fb869b199a889d51b1405b80161c6f6c24
+F src/shell.c.in de1299f089fc8c316a17bfc8ebb1f0a038da894c09920dc0aecee5c850df7b12
+F src/sqlite.h.in ddae9f672352c9e44e1acac99a401e6700752932fd4dc7f35e5569f7e0d609dc
F src/sqlite3.rc 5121c9e10c3964d5755191c80dd1180c122fc3a8
F src/sqlite3ext.h da473ce2b3d0ae407a6300c4a164589b9a6bfdbec9462688a8593ff16f3bb6e4
-F src/sqliteInt.h a531b7f352a0db457b5e0c56f41a3905273252ec8646526f8f897f0815519182
-F src/sqliteLimit.h d7323ffea5208c6af2734574bae933ca8ed2ab728083caa117c9738581a31657
+F src/sqliteInt.h 924ddd5bd9dad8a499005c2c02a492c67dbe784feafbd78fdd70d712cf839499
+F src/sqliteLimit.h 33b1c9baba578d34efe7dfdb43193b366111cdf41476b1e82699e14c11ee1fb6
F src/status.c 160c445d7d28c984a0eae38c144f6419311ed3eace59b44ac6dafc20db4af749
F src/table.c 0f141b58a16de7e2fbe81c308379e7279f4c6b50eb08efeec5892794a0ba30d1
-F src/tclsqlite.c 8522a04fb9c84faa1d80354430ae0ee9349727a3a4b32e3cfe39b9be8324cabd
-F src/test1.c 2b72555fdbf1b5755d40e5f72baed1cdd1dec9154b8a3b9b3de4d6d656b94fab
+F src/tclsqlite.c 9952874a1f1bb9fa6406b334cadf748c273cd2f2d4501152022a95dd37dc7958
+F src/test1.c f6076314e68b5803b962f94628a064aaf77850abed352999ec38db493294f2ae
F src/test2.c 827446e259a3b7ab949da1542953edda7b5117982576d3e6f1c24a0dd20a5cef
-F src/test3.c 61798bb0d38b915067a8c8e03f5a534b431181f802659a6616f9b4ff7d872644
+F src/test3.c e5178558c41ff53236ae0271e9acb3d6885a94981d2eb939536ee6474598840e
F src/test4.c 4533b76419e7feb41b40582554663ed3cd77aaa54e135cf76b3205098cd6e664
F src/test5.c 328aae2c010c57a9829d255dc099d6899311672d
-F src/test6.c ae73a3a42bbc982fb9e301b84d30bda65a307be48c6dff20aba1461e17a9b0ce
-F src/test8.c 0c856d6ff6b0d2ff6696addc467a15ed17c6910f14475302cd5b3b4e54406161
+F src/test6.c e53bc69dc3cb3815fb74df74f38159ec05ba6dd5273216062e26bc797f925530
+F src/test8.c ccc5d3e2a2bf7248f7da185e2afc4c08b4c6840447f5eb4dd106db165fddbdbc
F src/test9.c 12e5ba554d2d1cbe0158f6ab3f7ffcd7a86ee4e5
F src/test_async.c 195ab49da082053fdb0f949c114b806a49ca770a
F src/test_autoext.c 915d245e736652a219a907909bb6710f0d587871
F src/test_config.c 8264637b06a3c1f0727c88d1ea32dcf7986b9e7e358a970cae87cdac8a5b2708
F src/test_delete.c e2fe07646dff6300b48d49b2fee2fe192ed389e834dd635e3b3bac0ce0bf9f8f
F src/test_demovfs.c 38a459d1c78fd9afa770445b224c485e079018d6ac07332ff9bd07b54d2b8ce9
-F src/test_devsym.c aff2255ea290d7718da08af30cdf18e470ff7325a5eff63e0057b1496ed66593
+F src/test_devsym.c 649434ed34d0b03fbd5a6b42df80f0f9a7e53f94dd1710aad5dd8831e91c4e86
F src/test_fs.c ba1e1dc18fd3159fdba0b9c4256f14032159785320dfbd6776eb9973cb75d480
F src/test_func.c 24df3a346c012b1fc9e1001d346db6054deb426db0a7437e92490630e71c9b0a
F src/test_hexio.c 9478e56a0f08e07841a014a93b20e4ba2709ab56d039d1ca8020e26846aa19bd
-F src/test_init.c 4413c211a94b62157ca4c145b3f27c497f03c664
+F src/test_init.c f2cc4774b7c9140f76e45ecbb2ae219f68e3acbbe248c0179db666a70eae9f08
F src/test_intarray.c 39b4181662a0f33a427748d87218e7578d913e683dc27eab7098bb41617cac71
-F src/test_intarray.h d57ae92f420cda25e22790dac474d60961bd0c500cbaa3338a05152d4a669ef7
+F src/test_intarray.h 6c3534641108cd1bea517a8e117dcba237081310a29a4c35bd2190caa8972293
F src/test_journal.c a0b9709b2f12b1ec819eea8a1176f283bca6d688a6d4a502bd6fd79786f4e287
F src/test_loadext.c 337056bae59f80b9eb00ba82088b39d0f4fe6dfd
F src/test_malloc.c 21121ea85b49ec0bdb69995847cef9036ef9beca3ce63bbb776e4ea2ecc44b97
-F src/test_md5.c 7268e1e8c399d4a5e181b64ac20e1e6f3bc4dd9fc87abac02db145a3d951fa8c
-F src/test_multiplex.c d8bc260a57c2028946a9bce9918d24e69e44cebd71ac6be240aa5b6b75e2b369
-F src/test_multiplex.h 5436d03f2d0501d04f3ed50a75819e190495b635
+F src/test_md5.c 0472c86d561f7f9e4ff94080100c2783196f50e583bb83375b759450c5b81802
+F src/test_multiplex.c 70479161239d65af2a231550b270e9d11ece717ad7bf0e13ef42206586e9dd7f
+F src/test_multiplex.h f0ff5b6f4462bfd46dac165d6375b9530d08089b7bcbe75e88e0926110db5363
F src/test_mutex.c abf486e91bd65e2448027d4bb505e7cce6ba110e1afb9bd348d1996961cadf0d
F src/test_onefile.c f31e52e891c5fef6709b9fcef54ce660648a34172423a9cbdf4cbce3ba0049f4
F src/test_osinst.c d341f9d7613e007c8c3f7eba6cd307230047506aa8f97858c1fd21f5069616bd
-F src/test_pcache.c a5cd24730cb43c5b18629043314548c9169abb00
-F src/test_quota.c 6cb9297115b551f433a9ad1741817a9831abed99
+F src/test_pcache.c 3960cd2c1350adc992c4bf7adcfb0d1ac0574733012bd1a5f94e195928577599
+F src/test_quota.c ea44c05f29b995bdb71c55eb0c602604884e55681d59b7736e604bbcc68b0464
F src/test_quota.h 2a8ad1952d1d2ca9af0ce0465e56e6c023b5e15d
F src/test_rtree.c 671f3fae50ff116ef2e32a3bf1fe21b5615b4b7b
F src/test_schema.c f5d6067dfc2f2845c4dd56df63e66ee826fb23877855c785f75cc2ca83fd0c1b
F src/test_thread.c 7ddcf0c8b79fa3c1d172f82f322302c963d923cdb503c6171f3c8081586d0b01
F src/test_vdbecov.c f60c6f135ec42c0de013a1d5136777aa328a776d33277f92abac648930453d43
F src/test_vfs.c 193c18da3dbf62a0e33ae7a240bbef938a50846672ee947664512b77d853fe81
-F src/test_vfstrace.c bab9594adc976cbe696ff3970728830b4c5ed698
+F src/test_vfstrace.c a2ea82df2ed8927e9eba49bdba1aa1aeb1dcb13dbf6558cff036da813031de9a
F src/test_windirent.c a895e2c068a06644eef91a7f0a32182445a893b9a0f33d0cdb4283dca2486ac1
-F src/test_windirent.h 90dfbe95442c9762357fe128dc7ae3dc199d006de93eb33ba3972e0a90484215
+F src/test_windirent.h da2e5b73c32d09905fbdd00f27cd802212a32a58ead882736fe4f5eb775ebc50
F src/test_window.c cdae419fdcea5bad6dcd9368c685abdad6deb59e9fc8b84b153de513d394ba3f
F src/test_wsd.c 41cadfd9d97fe8e3e4e44f61a4a8ccd6f7ca8fe9
F src/threads.c 4ae07fa022a3dc7c5beb373cf744a85d3c5c6c3c
F src/update.c 88f30d38409ddcd2d583bef1a1265a3e8c701e232096505183680b2027439a00
F src/upsert.c 5303dc6c518fa7d4b280ec65170f465c7a70b7ac2b22491598f6d0b4875b3145
F src/utf.c ee39565f0843775cc2c81135751ddd93eceb91a673ea2c57f61c76f288b041a0
-F src/util.c d4bcb560471cd94e6e17d448311f8d5bf81a7e5276295a53501058ef1b95dd1a
-F src/vacuum.c 84ce7f01f8a7a08748e107a441db83bcec13970190ddcb0c9ff522adbc1c23fd
-F src/vdbe.c fedd2dfa5165256c8e372f2ae9454c4a82cf60ce79a04dff80a86ab2116ea15a
-F src/vdbe.h 637ae853b7d42ae3951034cc63ab7c8af837861f79504cdb5399552fcd89a884
-F src/vdbeInt.h a4147a4ddf613cb1bcb555ace9e9e74a9c099d65facd88155f191b1fb4d74cfb
-F src/vdbeapi.c b4982cde547054c4f7341198db3c3008a48e1eb028f757601bf5bf2fc026cbcf
-F src/vdbeaux.c 6ee48db408d4c297a363f1e31145c09793a580e7c508bb36063dd017d67117a2
+F src/util.c 6f9d2f278dcc8d41c618980cd3cfe88e1bafc0626209b917c6773d8202d29ef6
+F src/vacuum.c 604fcdaebe76f3497c855afcbf91b8fa5046b32de3045bab89cc008d68e40104
+F src/vdbe.c c3b6d8d60f2bb89ae771326f48945b8549f68c8f9a573e026b77b444f3d7d32e
+F src/vdbe.h 41485521f68e9437fdb7ec4a90f9d86ab294e9bb8281e33b235915e29122cfc0
+F src/vdbeInt.h 7bd49eef8f89c1a271fbf12d80a206bf56c876814c5fc6bee340f4e1907095ae
+F src/vdbeapi.c de9703f8705afc393cc2864669ce28cf9516983c8331d59aa2b978de01634365
+F src/vdbeaux.c 998e84345fe712e4ab3f28556daefe174e106ae0439faa7bec9f0ca674b3b276
F src/vdbeblob.c 2516697b3ee8154eb8915f29466fb5d4f1ae39ee8b755ea909cefaf57ec5e2ce
F src/vdbemem.c 1cac4028c0dabbf1f3259f107440e2780e05ac9fe419e9709e6eb4e166ba714b
-F src/vdbesort.c 43756031ca7430f7aec3ef904824a7883c4ede783e51f280d99b9b65c0796e35
+F src/vdbesort.c a0d71c5eb15e4da6eae6eea69c482762266adaf34551827d1f77bb49aa90ffed
F src/vdbetrace.c fe0bc29ebd4e02c8bc5c1945f1d2e6be5927ec12c06d89b03ef2a4def34bf823
F src/vdbevtab.c aae4bd769410eb7e1d02c42613eec961d514459b1c3c1c63cfc84e92a137daac
-F src/vtab.c 4758a96d36c9a120848386ae603b1ab32a4876e0a1faf81bfcfb524455e583dc
+F src/vtab.c 1ecf8c3745d29275688d583e12822fa984d421e0286b5ef50c137bc3bf6d7a64
F src/vxworks.h d2988f4e5a61a4dfe82c6524dd3d6e4f2ce3cdb9
-F src/wal.c 7a65f64bfe4a783c5e2df73ffb0efc383dec934dee9e3ac706b2eeb3631d17ac
+F src/wal.c 7dbb27213acbc57819d97953e8434283b751cc5307a21b8847f664de45dc3307
F src/wal.h c3aa7825bfa2fe0d85bef2db94655f99870a285778baa36307c0a16da32b226a
-F src/walker.c f890a3298418d7cba3b69b8803594fdc484ea241206a8dfa99db6dd36f8cbb3b
-F src/where.c b74a83b4c8f65b218c5c1c8d9122433f85ee1300fd9263ba1697d0e1040eeb36
-F src/whereInt.h e25203e5bfee149f5f1225ae0166cfb4f1e65490c998a024249e98bb0647377c
-F src/wherecode.c e63b522e780e92ed80b5e278e88f54e1166cafa272d2e06cd36297478f44bce2
-F src/whereexpr.c 22cf19b0ececeaf838daed1039c5231a8778784eba5ad67b991442a23473fd3f
-F src/window.c e075ea85bea322e30e361fa6e69eddba74f461e99e2a564dc09973f8a1fb27d9
+F src/walker.c 1f1c4743e064873efff71509d8839d9f7509b8960699aa2eeb906dec41a0f667
+F src/where.c efb828cc5f42634918902d352644bb3ddce672930e19859c80748810b29d4b8b
+F src/whereInt.h c7d19902863beadec1d04e66aca39c0bcd60b74f05f0eaa7422c7005dfc5d51a
+F src/wherecode.c bff0bc56cb1a382de266c2db3a691135c18a4360b6ad5e069e5c415d57eb0c38
+F src/whereexpr.c f0a29594a2c143e10af7adf513b32d11223d76c6981c7f428433ec1ccbc33f84
+F src/window.c e25c9c675a56b65c05102f592b895e8b0931a888f88bc66ece7c73cbd2226259
F test/8_3_names.test ebbb5cd36741350040fd28b432ceadf495be25b2
F test/affinity2.test ce1aafc86e110685b324e9a763eab4f2a73f737842ec3b687bd965867de90627
F test/affinity3.test f094773025eddf31135c7ad4cde722b7696f8eb07b97511f98585addf2a510a9
F tool/build-shell.sh 950f47c6174f1eea171319438b93ba67ff5bf367
F tool/cg_anno.tcl c1f875f5a4c9caca3d59937b16aff716f8b1883935f1b4c9ae23124705bc8099 x
F tool/checkSpacing.c 810e51703529a204fc4e1eb060e9ab663e3c06d2
+F tool/custom.txt 7c5402073801047526d59d9ecd770e7bcd8f9e553bc7278ab2b0ac6fac96ad32
F tool/dbhash.c 5da0c61032d23d74f2ab84ffc5740f0e8abec94f2c45c0b4306be7eb3ae96df0
F tool/dbtotxt.c ca48d34eaca6d6b6e4bd6a7be2b72caf34475869054240244c60fa7e69a518d6
F tool/dbtotxt.md c9a57af8739957ef36d2cfad5c4b1443ff3688ed33e4901ee200c8b651f43f3c
F tool/speedtest2.tcl ee2149167303ba8e95af97873c575c3e0fab58ff
F tool/speedtest8.c 2902c46588c40b55661e471d7a86e4dd71a18224
F tool/speedtest8inst1.c 7ce07da76b5e745783e703a834417d725b7d45fd
+F tool/spellsift.tcl 52b4b04dc4333c7ab024f09d9d66ed6b6f7c6eb00b38497a09f338fa55d40618 x
F tool/split-sqlite3c.tcl 5aa60643afca558bc732b1444ae81a522326f91e1dc5665b369c54f09e20de60
F tool/sqldiff.c 2a693b4e7c1818c23f871f82f0c3fe67d80b67e3f087893089d33da29c1e387e
F tool/sqlite3_analyzer.c.in f88615bf33098945e0a42f17733f472083d150b58bdaaa5555a7129d0a51621c
F vsixtest/vsixtest.vcxproj.data 2ed517e100c66dc455b492e1a33350c1b20fbcdc
F vsixtest/vsixtest.vcxproj.filters 37e51ffedcdb064aad6ff33b6148725226cd608e
F vsixtest/vsixtest_TemporaryKey.pfx e5b1b036facdb453873e7084e1cae9102ccc67a0
-P aa8e79e16abf028d50370ae13b6c952a7b7f42985125bc8e7f51b20a10bfc336
-R bda07561c201ad16470d8d134cf52380
-U drh
-Z b7e41c600665e7a3d0b0507159b16a5e
+P 2d58c77448cfaaf12887b60bcfea039d3410a750ac8955a817c45be85c00eb9e
+R 59cd5de4738b59306e8e563e728e2e6a
+T *branch * spell-check
+T *sym-spell-check *
+T -sym-trunk *
+U larrybr
+Z 571f9428e6a0b3c7f2d392953641b395
# Remove this line to create a well-formed Fossil manifest.
-2d58c77448cfaaf12887b60bcfea039d3410a750ac8955a817c45be85c00eb9e
\ No newline at end of file
+26c1bb4bd9e9f56613c3aa87407a7f562fd4ebde5bfd6dece02078001d9a45f8
\ No newline at end of file
int bNoDQS /* Do not allow DQS in the schema */
){
pParse->colNamesSet = 1;
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"SELECT 1 "
"FROM \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " "
"WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'"
);
if( bTemp==0 ){
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"SELECT 1 "
"FROM temp." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " "
"WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'"
/*
** Generate VM code to replace any double-quoted strings (but not double-quoted
-** identifiers) within the "sql" column of the sqlite_schema table in
+** identifiers) within the "sql" column of the sqlite_schema table in
** database zDb with their single-quoted equivalents. If argument bTemp is
** not true, similarly update all SQL statements in the sqlite_schema table
** of the temp db.
*/
static void renameFixQuotes(Parse *pParse, const char *zDb, int bTemp){
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
- "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ "UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE
" SET sql = sqlite_rename_quotefix(%Q, sql)"
"WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'"
" AND sql NOT LIKE 'create virtual%%'" , zDb, zDb
);
if( bTemp==0 ){
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE temp." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE
" SET sql = sqlite_rename_quotefix('temp', sql)"
"WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X'"
}
/*
-** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy"
-** command.
+** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy"
+** command.
*/
void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
Parse *pParse, /* Parser context. */
int iDb; /* Database that contains the table */
char *zDb; /* Name of database iDb */
Table *pTab; /* Table being renamed */
- char *zName = 0; /* NULL-terminated version of pName */
+ char *zName = 0; /* NULL-terminated version of pName */
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */
int nTabName; /* Number of UTF-8 characters in zTabName */
const char *zTabName; /* Original name of the table */
|| sqlite3FindIndex(db, zName, zDb)
|| sqlite3IsShadowTableOf(db, pTab, zName)
){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"there is already another table or index with this name: %s", zName);
goto exit_rename_table;
}
/* Begin a transaction for database iDb. Then modify the schema cookie
** (since the ALTER TABLE modifies the schema). Call sqlite3MayAbort(),
- ** as the scalar functions (e.g. sqlite_rename_table()) invoked by the
+ ** as the scalar functions (e.g. sqlite_rename_table()) invoked by the
** nested SQL may raise an exception. */
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
if( v==0 ){
/* Rewrite all CREATE TABLE, INDEX, TRIGGER or VIEW statements in
** the schema to use the new table name. */
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
"sql = sqlite_rename_table(%Q, type, name, sql, %Q, %Q, %d) "
"WHERE (type!='index' OR tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase)"
"'sqlite_autoindex_' || %Q || substr(name,%d+18) "
"ELSE name END "
"WHERE tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase AND "
- "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');",
+ "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');",
zDb,
- zName, zName, zName,
+ zName, zName, zName,
nTabName, zTabName
);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT
- /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update
+ /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update
** it with the new table name.
*/
if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_sequence", zDb) ){
#endif
/* If the table being renamed is not itself part of the temp database,
- ** edit view and trigger definitions within the temp database
+ ** edit view and trigger definitions within the temp database
** as required. */
if( iDb!=1 ){
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE sqlite_temp_schema SET "
"sql = sqlite_rename_table(%Q, type, name, sql, %Q, %Q, 1), "
"tbl_name = "
return;
}
if( (pCol->colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)==0 ){
- /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a
+ /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a
** literal NULL, then set pDflt to 0. This simplifies checking
** for an SQL NULL default below.
*/
** have to use printf() to translate between these units: */
assert( IsOrdinaryTable(pTab) );
assert( IsOrdinaryTable(pNew) );
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
"sql = printf('%%.%ds, ',sql) || %Q"
" || substr(sql,1+length(printf('%%.%ds',sql))) "
- "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q",
+ "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q",
zDb, pNew->u.tab.addColOffset, zCol, pNew->u.tab.addColOffset,
zTab
);
/*
** This function is called by the parser after the table-name in
-** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument
+** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument
** pSrc is the full-name of the table being altered.
**
** This routine makes a (partial) copy of the Table structure
** for the table being altered and sets Parse.pNewTable to point
** to it. Routines called by the parser as the column definition
-** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to
-** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c
+** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to
+** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c
** after parsing is finished.
**
** Routine sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn() will be called to complete
}
#endif
if( zType ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot %s %s \"%s\"",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot %s %s \"%s\"",
(bDrop ? "drop column from" : "rename columns of"),
zType, pTab->zName
);
if( SQLITE_OK!=isAlterableTable(pParse, pTab) ) goto exit_rename_column;
if( SQLITE_OK!=isRealTable(pParse, pTab, 0) ) goto exit_rename_column;
- /* Which schema holds the table to be altered */
+ /* Which schema holds the table to be altered */
iSchema = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
assert( iSchema>=0 );
zDb = db->aDb[iSchema].zDbSName;
if( !zNew ) goto exit_rename_column;
assert( pNew->n>0 );
bQuote = sqlite3Isquote(pNew->z[0]);
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
"sql = sqlite_rename_column(sql, type, name, %Q, %Q, %d, %Q, %d, %d) "
"WHERE name NOT LIKE 'sqliteX_%%' ESCAPE 'X' "
pTab->zName
);
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE temp." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
"sql = sqlite_rename_column(sql, type, name, %Q, %Q, %d, %Q, %d, 1) "
"WHERE type IN ('trigger', 'view')",
RenameToken *pList; /* List of tokens to overwrite */
int nList; /* Number of tokens in pList */
int iCol; /* Index of column being renamed */
- Table *pTab; /* Table being ALTERed */
+ Table *pTab; /* Table being ALTERed */
const char *zOld; /* Old column name */
};
/*
** This function is only for debugging. It performs two tasks:
**
-** 1. Checks that pointer pPtr does not already appear in the
+** 1. Checks that pointer pPtr does not already appear in the
** rename-token list.
**
** 2. Dereferences each pointer in the rename-token list.
**
** The second is most effective when debugging under valgrind or
-** address-sanitizer or similar. If any of these pointers no longer
-** point to valid objects, an exception is raised by the memory-checking
+** address-sanitizer or similar. If any of these pointers no longer
+** point to valid objects, an exception is raised by the memory-checking
** tool.
**
** The point of this is to prevent comparisons of invalid pointer values.
}
/*
-** Remove all nodes that are part of expression-list pEList from the
+** Remove all nodes that are part of expression-list pEList from the
** rename list.
*/
void sqlite3RenameExprlistUnmap(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pEList){
** the list maintained by the RenameCtx object.
*/
static RenameToken *renameTokenFind(
- Parse *pParse,
- struct RenameCtx *pCtx,
+ Parse *pParse,
+ struct RenameCtx *pCtx,
const void *pPtr
){
RenameToken **pp;
*/
static int renameColumnExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
RenameCtx *p = pWalker->u.pRename;
- if( pExpr->op==TK_TRIGGER
- && pExpr->iColumn==p->iCol
+ if( pExpr->op==TK_TRIGGER
+ && pExpr->iColumn==p->iCol
&& pWalker->pParse->pTriggerTab==p->pTab
){
renameTokenFind(pWalker->pParse, p, (void*)pExpr);
- }else if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN
+ }else if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN
&& pExpr->iColumn==p->iCol
&& ALWAYS(ExprUseYTab(pExpr))
&& p->pTab==pExpr->y.pTab
}
/*
-** An error occured while parsing or otherwise processing a database
+** An error occurred while parsing or otherwise processing a database
** object (either pParse->pNewTable, pNewIndex or pNewTrigger) as part of an
** ALTER TABLE RENAME COLUMN program. The error message emitted by the
** sub-routine is currently stored in pParse->zErrMsg. This function
** adds context to the error message and then stores it in pCtx.
*/
static void renameColumnParseError(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
const char *zWhen,
sqlite3_value *pType,
sqlite3_value *pObject,
const char *zN = (const char*)sqlite3_value_text(pObject);
char *zErr;
- zErr = sqlite3MPrintf(pParse->db, "error in %s %s%s%s: %s",
+ zErr = sqlite3MPrintf(pParse->db, "error in %s %s%s%s: %s",
zT, zN, (zWhen[0] ? " " : ""), zWhen,
pParse->zErrMsg
);
/*
** For each name in the the expression-list pEList (i.e. each
-** pEList->a[i].zName) that matches the string in zOld, extract the
+** pEList->a[i].zName) that matches the string in zOld, extract the
** corresponding rename-token from Parse object pParse and add it
** to the RenameCtx pCtx.
*/
static void renameColumnElistNames(
- Parse *pParse,
- RenameCtx *pCtx,
- const ExprList *pEList,
+ Parse *pParse,
+ RenameCtx *pCtx,
+ const ExprList *pEList,
const char *zOld
){
if( pEList ){
}
/*
-** For each name in the the id-list pIdList (i.e. each pIdList->a[i].zName)
-** that matches the string in zOld, extract the corresponding rename-token
+** For each name in the the id-list pIdList (i.e. each pIdList->a[i].zName)
+** that matches the string in zOld, extract the corresponding rename-token
** from Parse object pParse and add it to the RenameCtx pCtx.
*/
static void renameColumnIdlistNames(
- Parse *pParse,
- RenameCtx *pCtx,
- const IdList *pIdList,
+ Parse *pParse,
+ RenameCtx *pCtx,
+ const IdList *pIdList,
const char *zOld
){
if( pIdList ){
p->nQueryLoop = 1;
rc = sqlite3RunParser(p, zSql);
if( db->mallocFailed ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
- if( rc==SQLITE_OK
+ if( rc==SQLITE_OK
&& NEVER(p->pNewTable==0 && p->pNewIndex==0 && p->pNewTrigger==0)
){
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
char *zBuf2 = 0;
if( zNew ){
- /* Set zQuot to point to a buffer containing a quoted copy of the
- ** identifier zNew. If the corresponding identifier in the original
+ /* Set zQuot to point to a buffer containing a quoted copy of the
+ ** identifier zNew. If the corresponding identifier in the original
** ALTER TABLE statement was quoted (bQuote==1), then set zNew to
** point to zQuot so that all substitutions are made using the
** quoted version of the new column name. */
/* At this point pRename->pList contains a list of RenameToken objects
** corresponding to all tokens in the input SQL that must be replaced
- ** with the new column name, or with single-quoted versions of themselves.
+ ** with the new column name, or with single-quoted versions of themselves.
** All that remains is to construct and return the edited SQL string. */
if( zOut ){
int nOut = nSql;
iOff = pBest->t.z - zSql;
if( pBest->t.n!=nReplace ){
- memmove(&zOut[iOff + nReplace], &zOut[iOff + pBest->t.n],
+ memmove(&zOut[iOff + nReplace], &zOut[iOff + pBest->t.n],
nOut - (iOff + pBest->t.n)
);
nOut += nReplace - pBest->t.n;
/*
** Resolve all symbols in the trigger at pParse->pNewTrigger, assuming
-** it was read from the schema of database zDb. Return SQLITE_OK if
+** it was read from the schema of database zDb. Return SQLITE_OK if
** successful. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code and leave an error
** message in the Parse object.
*/
memset(&sNC, 0, sizeof(sNC));
sNC.pParse = pParse;
assert( pNew->pTabSchema );
- pParse->pTriggerTab = sqlite3FindTable(db, pNew->table,
+ pParse->pTriggerTab = sqlite3FindTable(db, pNew->table,
db->aDb[sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pNew->pTabSchema)].zDbSName
);
pParse->eTriggerOp = pNew->op;
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto renameColumnFunc_done;
for(pStep=sParse.pNewTrigger->step_list; pStep; pStep=pStep->pNext){
- if( pStep->zTarget ){
+ if( pStep->zTarget ){
Table *pTarget = sqlite3LocateTable(&sParse, 0, pStep->zTarget, zDb);
if( pTarget==pTab ){
if( pStep->pUpsert ){
}
/*
-** Walker expression callback used by "RENAME TABLE".
+** Walker expression callback used by "RENAME TABLE".
*/
static int renameTableExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
RenameCtx *p = pWalker->u.pRename;
}
/*
-** Walker select callback used by "RENAME TABLE".
+** Walker select callback used by "RENAME TABLE".
*/
static int renameTableSelectCb(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){
int i;
/*
** This C function implements an SQL user function that is used by SQL code
** generated by the ALTER TABLE ... RENAME command to modify the definition
-** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the
+** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the
** parent table. It is passed three arguments:
**
** 0: The database containing the table being renamed.
else{
Trigger *pTrigger = sParse.pNewTrigger;
TriggerStep *pStep;
- if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp(sParse.pNewTrigger->table, zOld)
+ if( 0==sqlite3_stricmp(sParse.pNewTrigger->table, zOld)
&& sCtx.pTab->pSchema==pTrigger->pTabSchema
){
renameTokenFind(&sParse, &sCtx, sParse.pNewTrigger->table);
**
** CREATE TABLE t1(a, b, c);
**
-** SELECT sqlite_rename_quotefix('main',
+** SELECT sqlite_rename_quotefix('main',
** 'CREATE VIEW v1 AS SELECT "a", "string" FROM t1'
** );
**
** returns the string:
-**
+**
** CREATE VIEW v1 AS SELECT "a", 'string' FROM t1
**
** If there is a error in the input SQL, then raise an error, except
sqlite3WalkExprList(&sWalker, sParse.pNewTable->pCheck);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS
for(i=0; i<sParse.pNewTable->nCol; i++){
- sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker,
- sqlite3ColumnExpr(sParse.pNewTable,
+ sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker,
+ sqlite3ColumnExpr(sParse.pNewTable,
&sParse.pNewTable->aCol[i]));
}
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS */
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER */
}
- if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
+ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = renameEditSql(context, &sCtx, zInput, 0, 0);
}
renameTokenFree(db, sCtx.pList);
/*
** The implementation of internal UDF sqlite_drop_column().
-**
+**
** Arguments:
**
** argv[0]: An integer - the index of the schema containing the table
rc = renameParseSql(&sParse, zDb, db, zSql, iSchema==1);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto drop_column_done;
pTab = sParse.pNewTable;
- if( pTab==0 || pTab->nCol==1 || iCol>=pTab->nCol ){
+ if( pTab==0 || pTab->nCol==1 || iCol>=pTab->nCol ){
/* This can happen if the sqlite_schema table is corrupt */
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
goto drop_column_done;
}
/*
-** This function is called by the parser upon parsing an
+** This function is called by the parser upon parsing an
**
** ALTER TABLE pSrc DROP COLUMN pName
**
pTab = sqlite3LocateTableItem(pParse, 0, &pSrc->a[0]);
if( !pTab ) goto exit_drop_column;
- /* Make sure this is not an attempt to ALTER a view, virtual table or
+ /* Make sure this is not an attempt to ALTER a view, virtual table or
** system table. */
if( SQLITE_OK!=isAlterableTable(pParse, pTab) ) goto exit_drop_column;
if( SQLITE_OK!=isRealTable(pParse, pTab, 1) ) goto exit_drop_column;
goto exit_drop_column;
}
- /* Do not allow the user to drop a PRIMARY KEY column or a column
+ /* Do not allow the user to drop a PRIMARY KEY column or a column
** constrained by a UNIQUE constraint. */
if( pTab->aCol[iCol].colFlags & (COLFLAG_PRIMKEY|COLFLAG_UNIQUE) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot drop %s column: \"%s\"",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot drop %s column: \"%s\"",
(pTab->aCol[iCol].colFlags&COLFLAG_PRIMKEY) ? "PRIMARY KEY" : "UNIQUE",
zCol
);
#endif
renameTestSchema(pParse, zDb, iDb==1, "", 0);
renameFixQuotes(pParse, zDb, iDb==1);
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE \"%w\"." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " SET "
"sql = sqlite_drop_column(%d, sql, %d) "
"WHERE (type=='table' AND tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase)"
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
int rc;
- /* Don't do any authorization checks if the database is initialising
+ /* Don't do any authorization checks if the database is initializing
** or if the parser is being invoked from within sqlite3_declare_vtab.
*/
assert( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT || db->xAuth==0 );
** property. Usually only a few pages are meet either condition.
** So the bitmap is usually sparse and has low cardinality.
** But sometimes (for example when during a DROP of a large table) most
-** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled. In those cases,
-** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality. The algorithm needs
+** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled. In those cases,
+** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality. The algorithm needs
** to handle both cases well.
**
** The size of the bitmap is fixed when the object is created.
/* Size of the Bitvec structure in bytes. */
#define BITVEC_SZ 512
-/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how
+/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how
** it will be aligned within the Bitvec struct. */
#define BITVEC_USIZE \
(((BITVEC_SZ-(3*sizeof(u32)))/sizeof(Bitvec*))*sizeof(Bitvec*))
-/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation.
-** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE.
+/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation.
+** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE.
** Setting this to the "natural word" size of your CPU may improve
** performance. */
#define BITVEC_TELEM u8
/* Number of u32 values in hash table. */
#define BITVEC_NINT (BITVEC_USIZE/sizeof(u32))
-/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before
+/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before
** sub-dividing and re-hashing. */
#define BITVEC_MXHASH (BITVEC_NINT/2)
/* Hashing function for the aHash representation.
-** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier
-** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided
+** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier
+** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided
** no fewer collisions than the no-op *1. */
#define BITVEC_HASH(X) (((X)*1)%BITVEC_NINT)
/*
** Create a new bitmap object able to handle bits between 0 and iSize,
-** inclusive. Return a pointer to the new object. Return NULL if
+** inclusive. Return a pointer to the new object. Return NULL if
** malloc fails.
*/
Bitvec *sqlite3BitvecCreate(u32 iSize){
h = BITVEC_HASH(i++);
/* if there wasn't a hash collision, and this doesn't */
/* completely fill the hash, then just add it without */
- /* worring about sub-dividing and re-hashing. */
+ /* worrying about sub-dividing and re-hashing. */
if( !p->u.aHash[h] ){
if (p->nSet<(BITVEC_NINT-1)) {
goto bitvec_set_end;
break;
}
case 3:
- case 4:
+ case 4:
default: {
nx = 2;
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(i), &i);
**
** There is a corresponding leave-all procedures.
**
-** Enter the mutexes in accending order by BtShared pointer address
+** Enter the mutexes in ascending order by BtShared pointer address
** to avoid the possibility of deadlock when two threads with
** two or more btrees in common both try to lock all their btrees
** at the same instant.
+
/*
** 2004 April 6
**
#define BTALLOC_LE 2 /* Allocate any page <= the parameter */
/*
-** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not
+** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not
** defined, or 0 if it is. For example:
**
** bIncrVacuum = IfNotOmitAV(pBtShared->incrVacuum);
/*
** A list of BtShared objects that are eligible for participation
** in shared cache. This variable has file scope during normal builds,
-** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for
+** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for
** test builds.
**
** Access to this variable is protected by SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MAIN.
** manipulate entries in the BtShared.pLock linked list used to store
** shared-cache table level locks. If the library is compiled with the
** shared-cache feature disabled, then there is only ever one user
- ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary.
+ ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary.
** So define the lock related functions as no-ops.
*/
#define querySharedCacheTableLock(a,b,c) SQLITE_OK
/*
**** This function is only used as part of an assert() statement. ***
**
-** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the
+** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the
** table with root page iRoot. Return 1 if it does and 0 if not.
**
-** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via
+** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via
** Btree connection pBtree:
**
** assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(pBtree, iRoot, 0, WRITE_LOCK) );
**
-** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the
+** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the
** caller should have first obtained a lock specifying the root page of
** the corresponding table. This makes things a bit more complicated,
** as this module treats each table as a separate structure. To determine
BtLock *pLock;
/* If this database is not shareable, or if the client is reading
- ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required.
+ ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required.
** Return true immediately.
*/
if( (pBtree->sharable==0)
iTab = iRoot;
}
- /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a
+ /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a
** write-lock on the schema table, or (if the client is reading) a
** read-lock on iTab will suffice. Return 1 if any of these are found. */
for(pLock=pBtree->pBt->pLock; pLock; pLock=pLock->pNext){
- if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree
+ if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree
&& (pLock->iTable==iTab || (pLock->eLock==WRITE_LOCK && pLock->iTable==1))
- && pLock->eLock>=eLockType
+ && pLock->eLock>=eLockType
){
return 1;
}
static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){
BtCursor *p;
for(p=pBtree->pBt->pCursor; p; p=p->pNext){
- if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot
+ if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot
&& p->pBtree!=pBtree
&& 0==(p->pBtree->db->flags & SQLITE_ReadUncommit)
){
#endif /* #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG */
/*
-** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock
+** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock
** (READ_LOCK or WRITE_LOCK) on the table with root-page iTab. Return
** SQLITE_OK if the lock may be obtained (by calling
** setSharedCacheTableLock()), or SQLITE_LOCKED if not.
assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
assert( p->db!=0 );
assert( !(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit)||eLock==WRITE_LOCK||iTab==1 );
-
+
/* If requesting a write-lock, then the Btree must have an open write
- ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there
+ ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there
** must be an open write transaction on the file itself.
*/
assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || (p==pBt->pWriter && p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE) );
assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE );
-
+
/* This routine is a no-op if the shared-cache is not enabled */
if( !p->sharable ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
for(pIter=pBt->pLock; pIter; pIter=pIter->pNext){
- /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...)
+ /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...)
** statement is a simplification of:
**
** (eLock==WRITE_LOCK || pIter->eLock==WRITE_LOCK)
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
/*
** Add a lock on the table with root-page iTable to the shared-btree used
-** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or
+** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or
** WRITE_LOCK.
**
** This function assumes the following:
** with the requested lock (i.e. querySharedCacheTableLock() has
** already been called and returned SQLITE_OK).
**
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM
** is returned if a malloc attempt fails.
*/
static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
/* A connection with the read-uncommitted flag set will never try to
** obtain a read-lock using this function. The only read-lock obtained
- ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_schema
+ ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_schema
** table, and that lock is obtained in BtreeBeginTrans(). */
assert( 0==(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit) || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
- /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it
+ /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it
** has been determined that no other b-tree holds a conflicting lock. */
assert( p->sharable );
assert( SQLITE_OK==querySharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, eLock) );
** Release all the table locks (locks obtained via calls to
** the setSharedCacheTableLock() procedure) held by Btree object p.
**
-** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write
+** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write
** transaction. If it does not, then the BTS_PENDING flag
** may be incorrectly cleared.
*/
pBt->pWriter = 0;
pBt->btsFlags &= ~(BTS_EXCLUSIVE|BTS_PENDING);
}else if( pBt->nTransaction==2 ){
- /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its
+ /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its
** transaction. If there currently exists a writer, and p is not
** that writer, then the number of locks held by connections other
** than the writer must be about to drop to zero. In this case
}
/* Verify that the cursor and the BtShared agree about what is the current
-** database connetion. This is important in shared-cache mode. If the database
+** database connetion. This is important in shared-cache mode. If the database
** connection pointers get out-of-sync, it is possible for routines like
** btreeInitPage() to reference an stale connection pointer that references a
** a connection that has already closed. This routine is used inside assert()
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */
/*
-** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called
-** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf
+** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called
+** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf
** page.
**
** The BtShared.pHasContent bitvec exists to work around an obscure
** may be lost. In the event of a rollback, it may not be possible
** to restore the database to its original configuration.
**
-** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is
+** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is
** moved to become a free-list leaf page, the corresponding bit is
** set in the bitvec. Whenever a leaf page is extracted from the free-list,
** optimization 2 above is omitted if the corresponding bit is already
** The cursor passed as the only argument must point to a valid entry
** when this function is called (i.e. have eState==CURSOR_VALID). This
** function saves the current cursor key in variables pCur->nKey and
-** pCur->pKey. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful or an SQLite error
+** pCur->pKey. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful or an SQLite error
** code otherwise.
**
** If the cursor is open on an intkey table, then the integer key
** (the rowid) is stored in pCur->nKey and pCur->pKey is left set to
-** NULL. If the cursor is open on a non-intkey table, then pCur->pKey is
-** set to point to a malloced buffer pCur->nKey bytes in size containing
+** NULL. If the cursor is open on a non-intkey table, then pCur->pKey is
+** set to point to a malloced buffer pCur->nKey bytes in size containing
** the key.
*/
static int saveCursorKey(BtCursor *pCur){
/* For an index btree, save the complete key content. It is possible
** that the current key is corrupt. In that case, it is possible that
** the sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack() function may overread the buffer by
- ** up to the size of 1 varint plus 1 8-byte value when the cursor
- ** position is restored. Hence the 17 bytes of padding allocated
+ ** up to the size of 1 varint plus 1 8-byte value when the cursor
+ ** position is restored. Hence the 17 bytes of padding allocated
** below. */
void *pKey;
pCur->nKey = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCur);
}
/*
-** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey
+** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey
** and BtCursor.pKey. The cursor's state is set to CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK.
**
** The caller must ensure that the cursor is valid (has eState==CURSOR_VALID)
-** prior to calling this routine.
+** prior to calling this routine.
*/
static int saveCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
int rc;
** routine is called just before cursor pExcept is used to modify the
** table, for example in BtreeDelete() or BtreeInsert().
**
-** If there are two or more cursors on the same btree, then all such
+** If there are two or more cursors on the same btree, then all such
** cursors should have their BTCF_Multiple flag set. The btreeCursor()
** routine enforces that rule. This routine only needs to be called in
** the uncommon case when pExpect has the BTCF_Multiple flag set.
/*
** Restore the cursor to the position it was in (or as close to as possible)
-** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the
+** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the
** saved position info stored by saveCursorPosition(), so there can be
-** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each
+** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each
** saveCursorPosition().
*/
static int btreeRestoreCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
/*
** This routine restores a cursor back to its original position after it
** has been moved by some outside activity (such as a btree rebalance or
-** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor).
+** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor).
**
** On success, the *pDifferentRow parameter is false if the cursor is left
** pointing at exactly the same row. *pDifferntRow is the row the cursor
if( pgno<2 ) return 0;
nPagesPerMapPage = (pBt->usableSize/5)+1;
iPtrMap = (pgno-2)/nPagesPerMapPage;
- ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2;
+ ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2;
if( ret==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) ){
ret++;
}
}while( *(pIter)>=0x80 && pIter<pEnd );
}
pIter++;
- /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length
+ /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length
** integer. The following block moves pIter to point at the first byte
** past the end of the key value. */
if( (*pIter++)&0x80
/* This block handles pages with two or fewer free blocks and nMaxFrag
** or fewer fragmented bytes. In this case it is faster to move the
** two (or one) blocks of cells using memmove() and add the required
- ** offsets to each pointer in the cell-pointer array than it is to
+ ** offsets to each pointer in the cell-pointer array than it is to
** reconstruct the entire page. */
if( (int)data[hdr+7]<=nMaxFrag ){
int iFree = get2byte(&data[hdr+1]);
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Integer return code */
u8 *pTmp; /* Temp ptr into data[] */
int gap; /* First byte of gap between cell pointers and cell content */
-
+
assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) );
assert( pPage->pBt );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) );
**
** Even though the freeblock list was checked by btreeComputeFreeSpace(),
** that routine will not detect overlap between cells or freeblocks. Nor
-** does it detect cells or freeblocks that encrouch into the reserved bytes
+** does it detect cells or freeblocks that encroach into the reserved bytes
** at the end of the page. So do additional corruption checks inside this
** routine and return SQLITE_CORRUPT if any problems are found.
*/
assert( iSize>=4 ); /* Minimum cell size is 4 */
assert( CORRUPT_DB || iStart<=pPage->pBt->usableSize-4 );
- /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order. Find the
+ /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order. Find the
** spot on the list where iStart should be inserted.
*/
hdr = pPage->hdrOffset;
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage);
}
assert( iFreeBlk>iPtr || iFreeBlk==0 || CORRUPT_DB );
-
+
/* At this point:
** iFreeBlk: First freeblock after iStart, or zero if none
** iPtr: The address of a pointer to iFreeBlk
iSize = iEnd - iStart;
iFreeBlk = get2byte(&data[iFreeBlk]);
}
-
+
/* If iPtr is another freeblock (that is, if iPtr is not the freelist
** pointer in the page header) then check to see if iStart should be
** coalesced onto the end of iPtr.
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-55530-52930 In a well-formed b-tree page, there will
** always be at least one cell before the first freeblock.
*/
- return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage);
+ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage);
}
while( 1 ){
if( pc>iCellLast ){
/*
** Do additional sanity check after btreeInitPage() if
-** PRAGMA cell_size_check=ON
+** PRAGMA cell_size_check=ON
*/
static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeCellSizeCheck(MemPage *pPage){
int iCellFirst; /* First allowable cell or freeblock offset */
** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block.
**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success. If we see that the page does
-** not contain a well-formed database page, then return
+** not contain a well-formed database page, then return
** SQLITE_CORRUPT. Note that a return of SQLITE_OK does not
** guarantee that the page is well-formed. It only shows that
** we failed to detect any corruption.
pPage->hdrOffset = pgno==1 ? 100 : 0;
}
assert( pPage->aData==sqlite3PagerGetData(pDbPage) );
- return pPage;
+ return pPage;
}
/*
** call to btreeInitPage() will likely return SQLITE_CORRUPT.
** But no harm is done by this. And it is very important that
** btreeInitPage() be called on every btree page so we make
- ** the call for every page that comes in for re-initing. */
+ ** the call for every page that comes in for re-initializing. */
btreeInitPage(pPage);
}
}
/*
** Open a database file.
-**
+**
** zFilename is the name of the database file. If zFilename is NULL
** then an ephemeral database is created. The ephemeral database might
** be exclusively in memory, or it might use a disk-based memory cache.
-** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted
+** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted
** when sqlite3BtreeClose() is called.
**
** If zFilename is ":memory:" then an in-memory database is created
/* True if opening an ephemeral, temporary database */
const int isTempDb = zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]==0;
- /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or
+ /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or
** false for a file-based database.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_MEMORYDB
assert( sizeof(u32)==4 );
assert( sizeof(u16)==2 );
assert( sizeof(Pgno)==4 );
-
+
pBt = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(*pBt) );
if( pBt==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
pBt->db = db;
sqlite3PagerSetBusyHandler(pBt->pPager, btreeInvokeBusyHandler, pBt);
p->pBt = pBt;
-
+
pBt->pCursor = 0;
pBt->pPage1 = 0;
if( sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pBt->pPager) ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_READ_ONLY;
if( rc ) goto btree_open_out;
pBt->usableSize = pBt->pageSize - nReserve;
assert( (pBt->pageSize & 7)==0 ); /* 8-byte alignment of pageSize */
-
+
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DISKIO)
/* Add the new BtShared object to the linked list sharable BtShareds.
*/
}
/*
-** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of
+** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of
** MX_CELL_SIZE(pBt) bytes with a 4-byte prefix for a left-child
** pointer.
*/
** can mean that fillInCell() only initializes the first 2 or 3
** bytes of pTmpSpace, but that the first 4 bytes are copied from
** it into a database page. This is not actually a problem, but it
- ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of unitialized
+ ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of uninitialized
** data is passed to system call write(). So to avoid this error,
** zero the first 4 bytes of temp space here.
**
sqlite3BtreeLeave(p);
/* If there are still other outstanding references to the shared-btree
- ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans
+ ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans
** up the shared-btree.
*/
assert( p->wantToLock==0 && p->locked==0 );
/*
** Change the default pages size and the number of reserved bytes per page.
-** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY
+** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY
** without changing anything.
**
** The page size must be a power of 2 between 512 and 65536. If the page
** held.
**
** This is useful in one special case in the backup API code where it is
-** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the
+** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the
** database handle that owns *p is not. In this case if sqlite3BtreeEnter()
** were to be called, it might collide with some other operation on the
** database handle that owns *p, causing undefined behavior.
/*
** Return the number of bytes of space at the end of every page that
-** are intentually left unused. This is the "reserved" space that is
+** are intentionally left unused. This is the "reserved" space that is
** sometimes used by extensions.
**
** The value returned is the larger of the current reserve size and
/*
** Change the 'auto-vacuum' property of the database. If the 'autoVacuum'
** parameter is non-zero, then auto-vacuum mode is enabled. If zero, it
-** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is
+** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is
** determined by the SQLITE_DEFAULT_AUTOVACUUM macro.
*/
int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){
}
/*
-** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is
+** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is
** enabled 1 is returned. Otherwise 0.
*/
int sqlite3BtreeGetAutoVacuum(Btree *p){
Db *pDb;
if( (db=pBt->db)!=0 && (pDb=db->aDb)!=0 ){
while( pDb->pBt==0 || pDb->pBt->pBt!=pBt ){ pDb++; }
- if( pDb->bSyncSet==0
- && pDb->safety_level!=safety_level
- && pDb!=&db->aDb[1]
+ if( pDb->bSyncSet==0
+ && pDb->safety_level!=safety_level
+ && pDb!=&db->aDb[1]
){
pDb->safety_level = safety_level;
sqlite3PagerSetFlags(pBt->pPager,
** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. If the file is not a
** well-formed database file, then SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
** SQLITE_BUSY is returned if the database is locked. SQLITE_NOMEM
-** is returned if we run out of memory.
+** is returned if we run out of memory.
*/
static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
int rc; /* Result code from subfunctions */
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
/* Do some checking to help insure the file we opened really is
- ** a valid database file.
+ ** a valid database file.
*/
nPage = get4byte(28+(u8*)pPage1->aData);
sqlite3PagerPagecount(pBt->pPager, (int*)&nPageFile);
}
/* If the read version is set to 2, this database should be accessed
- ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then
+ ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then
** return SQLITE_OK and return without populating BtShared.pPage1.
** The caller detects this and calls this function again. This is
** required as the version of page 1 currently in the page1 buffer
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-25008-21688 The size of a page is a power of two
** between 512 and 65536 inclusive. */
if( ((pageSize-1)&pageSize)!=0
- || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
- || pageSize<=256
+ || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+ || pageSize<=256
){
goto page1_init_failed;
}
assert( (pageSize & 7)==0 );
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-59310-51205 The "reserved space" size in the 1-byte
** integer at offset 20 is the number of bytes of space at the end of
- ** each page to reserve for extensions.
+ ** each page to reserve for extensions.
**
** EVIDENCE-OF: R-37497-42412 The size of the reserved region is
** determined by the one-byte unsigned integer found at an offset of 20
int r = 0;
for(pCur=pBt->pCursor; pCur; pCur=pCur->pNext){
if( (wrOnly==0 || (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_WriteFlag)!=0)
- && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++;
+ && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++;
}
return r;
}
/*
** If there are no outstanding cursors and we are not in the middle
** of a transaction but there is a read lock on the database, then
-** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which
+** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which
** has the effect of releasing the read lock.
**
** If there is a transaction in progress, this routine is a no-op.
** upgraded to exclusive by calling this routine a second time - the
** exclusivity flag only works for a new transaction.
**
-** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any
-** changes to the database. None of the following routines
+** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any
+** changes to the database. None of the following routines
** will work unless a transaction is started first:
**
** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable()
** If an initial attempt to acquire the lock fails because of lock contention
** and the database was previously unlocked, then invoke the busy handler
** if there is one. But if there was previously a read-lock, do not
-** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY. SQLITE_BUSY is
+** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY. SQLITE_BUSY is
** returned when there is already a read-lock in order to avoid a deadlock.
**
** Suppose there are two processes A and B. A has a read lock and B has
** proceed.
*/
static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeBeginTrans(
- Btree *p, /* The btree in which to start the transactino */
+ Btree *p, /* The btree in which to start the transaction */
int wrflag, /* True to start a write transaction */
int *pSchemaVersion /* Put schema version number here, if not NULL */
){
}
assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE || IfNotOmitAV(pBt->bDoTruncate)==0 );
- if( (p->db->flags & SQLITE_ResetDatabase)
- && sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pPager)==0
+ if( (p->db->flags & SQLITE_ResetDatabase)
+ && sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pPager)==0
){
pBt->btsFlags &= ~BTS_READ_ONLY;
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
{
sqlite3 *pBlock = 0;
- /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction
+ /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction
** on this shared-btree structure and a second write transaction is
** requested, return SQLITE_LOCKED.
*/
}
#endif
- /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on
- ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock
+ /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on
+ ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock
** on page 1, the transaction cannot be opened. */
rc = querySharedCacheTableLock(p, SCHEMA_ROOT, READ_LOCK);
if( SQLITE_OK!=rc ) goto trans_begun;
/* Call lockBtree() until either pBt->pPage1 is populated or
** lockBtree() returns something other than SQLITE_OK. lockBtree()
** may return SQLITE_OK but leave pBt->pPage1 set to 0 if after
- ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database
+ ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database
** file is not pBt->pageSize. In this case lockBtree() will update
** pBt->pageSize to the page-size of the file on disk.
*/
}
}
}
-
+
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
(void)sqlite3PagerWalWriteLock(pPager, 0);
unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
/* If the db-size header field is incorrect (as it may be if an old
** client has been writing the database file), update it now. Doing
- ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely
+ ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely
** re-read the database size from page 1 if a savepoint or transaction
** rollback occurs within the transaction.
*/
** that it points to iTo. Parameter eType describes the type of pointer to
** be modified, as follows:
**
-** PTRMAP_BTREE: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child
+** PTRMAP_BTREE: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child
** page of pPage.
**
** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at an overflow
}
}
}
-
+
if( i==nCell ){
- if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE ||
+ if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE ||
get4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8])!=iFrom ){
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pPage);
}
/*
-** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the
+** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the
** database. The pDbPage reference remains valid.
**
** The isCommit flag indicates that there is no need to remember that
-** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno
+** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno
** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to that
** page.
*/
Pager *pPager = pBt->pPager;
int rc;
- assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 ||
+ assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 ||
eType==PTRMAP_BTREE || eType==PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
assert( pDbPage->pBt==pBt );
if( iDbPage<3 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
/* Move page iDbPage from its current location to page number iFreePage */
- TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %u to free page %u (ptr page %u type %u)\n",
+ TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %u to free page %u (ptr page %u type %u)\n",
iDbPage, iFreePage, iPtrPage, eType));
rc = sqlite3PagerMovepage(pPager, pDbPage->pDbPage, iFreePage, isCommit);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
/*
** Perform a single step of an incremental-vacuum. If successful, return
-** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in
-** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error
+** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in
+** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error
** occurs, return some other error code.
**
-** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so
+** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so
** that the last page of the file currently in use is no longer in use.
**
** Parameter nFin is the number of pages that this database would contain
** were this function called until it returns SQLITE_DONE.
**
-** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the
-** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE
-** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit
+** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the
+** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE
+** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit
** operation, or false for an incremental vacuum.
*/
static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
if( bCommit==0 ){
/* Remove the page from the files free-list. This is not required
** if bCommit is non-zero. In that case, the free-list will be
- ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't
+ ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't
** matter if it still contains some garbage entries.
*/
Pgno iFreePg;
}
}while( bCommit && iFreePg>nFin );
assert( iFreePg<iLastPg );
-
+
rc = relocatePage(pBt, pLastPg, eType, iPtrPage, iFreePg, bCommit);
releasePage(pLastPg);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
/*
** The database opened by the first argument is an auto-vacuum database
-** nOrig pages in size containing nFree free pages. Return the expected
+** nOrig pages in size containing nFree free pages. Return the expected
** size of the database in pages following an auto-vacuum operation.
*/
static Pgno finalDbSize(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nOrig, Pgno nFree){
**
** If the incremental vacuum is finished after this function has run,
** SQLITE_DONE is returned. If it is not finished, but no error occurred,
-** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code.
+** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code.
*/
int sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(Btree *p){
int rc;
VVA_ONLY( int nRef );
assert( p!=0 );
- pBt = p->pBt;
+ pBt = p->pBt;
pPager = pBt->pPager;
VVA_ONLY( nRef = sqlite3PagerRefcount(pPager); )
**
** Otherwise, sync the database file for the btree pBt. zSuperJrnl points to
** the name of a super-journal file that should be written into the
-** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no super-journal file
+** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no super-journal file
** (single database transaction).
**
** When this is called, the super-journal should already have been
downgradeAllSharedCacheTableLocks(p);
p->inTrans = TRANS_READ;
}else{
- /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the
- ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count
+ /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the
+ ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count
** reaches 0, set the shared state to TRANS_NONE. The unlockBtreeIfUnused()
** call below will unlock the pager. */
if( p->inTrans!=TRANS_NONE ){
}
}
- /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the
+ /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the
** pager if this call closed the only read or write transaction. */
p->inTrans = TRANS_NONE;
unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
** the rollback journal (which causes the transaction to commit) and
** drop locks.
**
-** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to
+** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to
** finalize the underlying journal file, this function returns an error and
** the upper layer will attempt a rollback. However, if the second argument
-** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file
-** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed
-** (by deleting a super-journal file) and the caller will ignore this
+** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file
+** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed
+** (by deleting a super-journal file) and the caller will ignore this
** functions return code. So, even if an error occurs in the pager layer,
** reset the b-tree objects internal state to indicate that the write
** transaction has been closed. This is quite safe, as the pager will have
sqlite3BtreeEnter(p);
btreeIntegrity(p);
- /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees
+ /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees
** transaction and set the shared state to TRANS_READ.
*/
if( p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE ){
**
** This routine gets called when a rollback occurs. If the writeOnly
** flag is true, then only write-cursors need be tripped - read-only
-** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue
-** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are
+** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue
+** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are
** tripped. In general, writeOnly is false if the transaction being
** rolled back modified the database schema. In this case b-tree root
** pages may be moved or deleted from the database altogether, making
** it unsafe for read cursors to continue.
**
-** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while
-** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors,
+** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while
+** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors,
** including all read-cursors are tripped.
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or if an error occurs while
/*
** Start a statement subtransaction. The subtransaction can be rolled
-** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction
-** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically
+** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction
+** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically
** if the main transaction commits or rolls back.
**
** Statement subtransactions are used around individual SQL statements
/*
** The second argument to this function, op, is always SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK
** or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. This function either releases or rolls back the
-** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value
+** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value
** of op.
**
** Normally, iSavepoint is greater than or equal to zero. However, if op is
-** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the
+** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the
** contents of the entire transaction are rolled back. This is different
** from a normal transaction rollback, as no locks are released and the
** transaction remains open.
rc = newDatabase(pBt);
btreeSetNPage(pBt, pBt->pPage1);
- /* pBt->nPage might be zero if the database was corrupt when
+ /* pBt->nPage might be zero if the database was corrupt when
** the transaction was started. Otherwise, it must be at least 1. */
assert( CORRUPT_DB || pBt->nPage>0 );
}
** is set. If FORDELETE is set, that is a hint to the implementation that
** this cursor will only be used to seek to and delete entries of an index
** as part of a larger DELETE statement. The FORDELETE hint is not used by
-** this implementation. But in a hypothetical alternative storage engine
+** this implementation. But in a hypothetical alternative storage engine
** in which index entries are automatically deleted when corresponding table
** rows are deleted, the FORDELETE flag is a hint that all SEEK and DELETE
-** operations on this cursor can be no-ops and all READ operations can
+** operations on this cursor can be no-ops and all READ operations can
** return a null row (2-bytes: 0x01 0x00).
**
** No checking is done to make sure that page iTable really is the
BtCursor *pX; /* Looping over other all cursors */
assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) );
- assert( wrFlag==0
- || wrFlag==BTREE_WRCSR
- || wrFlag==(BTREE_WRCSR|BTREE_FORDELETE)
+ assert( wrFlag==0
+ || wrFlag==BTREE_WRCSR
+ || wrFlag==(BTREE_WRCSR|BTREE_FORDELETE)
);
- /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable
- ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks,
- ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with
+ /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable
+ ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks,
+ ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with
** this lock. The iTable<1 term disables the check for corrupt schemas. */
assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, pKeyInfo!=0, (wrFlag?2:1))
|| iTable<1 );
** routine always returns 2147483647 (which is the largest record
** that SQLite can handle) or more. But returning a smaller value might
** prevent large memory allocations when trying to interpret a
-** corrupt datrabase.
+** corrupt database.
**
** The current implementation merely returns the size of the underlying
** database file.
/*
** Given the page number of an overflow page in the database (parameter
-** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the
+** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the
** linked list of overflow pages. If possible, it uses the auto-vacuum
-** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so.
+** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so.
**
** If an error occurs an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise:
**
-** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is
-** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked
-** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero.
+** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is
+** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked
+** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero.
**
** If ppPage is not NULL, and a reference to the MemPage object corresponding
** to page number pOvfl was obtained, then *ppPage is set to point to that
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
/* Try to find the next page in the overflow list using the
- ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in
- ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns
- ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page
+ ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in
+ ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns
+ ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page
** number ovfl to determine the next page number.
*/
if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
**
** If the current cursor entry uses one or more overflow pages
** this function may allocate space for and lazily populate
-** the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow).
-** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset
+** the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow).
+** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset
** more efficient.
**
** Once an overflow page-list cache has been allocated, it must be
BtCursor *pCur, /* Cursor pointing to entry to read from */
u32 offset, /* Begin reading this far into payload */
u32 amt, /* Read this many bytes */
- unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */
+ unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */
int eOp /* zero to read. non-zero to write. */
){
unsigned char *aPayload;
Pgno nextPage;
nextPage = get4byte(&aPayload[pCur->info.nLocal]);
-
+
/* If the BtCursor.aOverflow[] has not been allocated, allocate it now.
**
** The aOverflow[] array is sized at one entry for each overflow page
#ifdef SQLITE_DIRECT_OVERFLOW_READ
/* If all the following are true:
**
- ** 1) this is a read operation, and
+ ** 1) this is a read operation, and
** 2) data is required from the start of this overflow page, and
** 3) there are no dirty pages in the page-cache
** 4) the database is file-backed, and
** 5) the page is not in the WAL file
- ** 6) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer
+ ** 6) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer
**
** then data can be read directly from the database file into the
** output buffer, bypassing the page-cache altogether. This speeds
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */
/*
-** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the
+** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the
** pCur cursor is pointing to. The pointer is to the beginning of
** the key if index btrees (pPage->intKey==0) and is the data for
** table btrees (pPage->intKey==1). The number of bytes of available
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
/*
-** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function
+** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function
** asserts that page number iChild is the left-child if the iIdx'th
** cell in page pParent. Or, if iIdx is equal to the total number of
** cells in pParent, that page number iChild is the right-child of
}
}
#else
-# define assertParentIndex(x,y,z)
+# define assertParentIndex(x,y,z)
#endif
/*
assert( pCur->iPage>0 );
assert( pCur->pPage );
assertParentIndex(
- pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1],
- pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1],
+ pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1],
+ pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1],
pCur->pPage->pgno
);
testcase( pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1] > pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1]->nCell );
**
** If the table has a virtual root page, then the cursor is moved to point
** to the virtual root page instead of the actual root page. A table has a
-** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a
+** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a
** single child page. This can only happen with the table rooted at page 1.
**
-** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to
+** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to
** CURSOR_INVALID and this routine returns SQLITE_EMPTY. Otherwise,
** the cursor is set to point to the first cell located on the root
** (or virtual root) page and the cursor state is set to CURSOR_VALID.
**
** If this function returns successfully, it may be assumed that the
-** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected
+** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected
** kind of b-tree page (i.e. if when opening the cursor the caller did not
** specify a KeyInfo structure the flags byte is set to 0x05 or 0x0D,
-** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo
+** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo
** structure the flags byte is set to 0x02 or 0x0A, indicating an index
** b-tree).
*/
/* If pCur->pKeyInfo is not NULL, then the caller that opened this cursor
** expected to open it on an index b-tree. Otherwise, if pKeyInfo is
** NULL, the caller expects a table b-tree. If this is not the case,
- ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error.
+ ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error.
**
** Earlier versions of SQLite assumed that this test could not fail
** if the root page was already loaded when this function was called (i.e.
- ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted
- ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table
+ ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted
+ ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table
** (or the freelist). */
assert( pRoot->intKey==1 || pRoot->intKey==0 );
if( pRoot->isInit==0 || (pCur->pKeyInfo==0)!=pRoot->intKey ){
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_PAGE(pCur->pPage);
}
-skip_init:
+skip_init:
pCur->ix = 0;
pCur->info.nSize = 0;
pCur->curFlags &= ~(BTCF_AtLast|BTCF_ValidNKey|BTCF_ValidOvfl);
/* If the cursor already points to the last entry, this is a no-op. */
if( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState && (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_AtLast)!=0 ){
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point
+ /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point
** to the last entry in the b-tree. */
int ii;
for(ii=0; ii<pCur->iPage; ii++){
** before or after the key.
**
** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of
-** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
+** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
** pointing. The meaning of the integer written into
** *pRes is as follows:
**
/* If the requested key is one more than the previous key, then
** try to get there using sqlite3BtreeNext() rather than a full
** binary search. This is an optimization only. The correct answer
- ** is still obtained without this case, only a little more slowely */
+ ** is still obtained without this case, only a little more slowly. */
if( pCur->info.nKey+1==intKey ){
*pRes = 0;
rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pCur, 0);
** b-tree page. */
testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd );
c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey);
- }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
+ }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
&& (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal
){
- /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
+ /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
** fits entirely on the main b-tree page. */
testcase( pCell+nCell+2==pPage->aDataEnd );
c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey);
** before or after the key.
**
** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of
-** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
+** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
** pointing. The meaning of the integer written into
** *pRes is as follows:
**
** is larger than pIdxKey.
**
** The pIdxKey->eqSeen field is set to 1 if there
-** exists an entry in the table that exactly matches pIdxKey.
+** exists an entry in the table that exactly matches pIdxKey.
*/
int sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(
BtCursor *pCur, /* The cursor to be moved */
xRecordCompare = sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(pIdxKey);
pIdxKey->errCode = 0;
- assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1
- || pIdxKey->default_rc==0
+ assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1
+ || pIdxKey->default_rc==0
|| pIdxKey->default_rc==-1
);
*pRes = c;
return SQLITE_OK; /* Cursor already pointing at the correct spot */
}
- if( pCur->iPage>0
+ if( pCur->iPage>0
&& indexCellCompare(pCur, 0, pIdxKey, xRecordCompare)<=0
&& pIdxKey->errCode==SQLITE_OK
){
/* The maximum supported page-size is 65536 bytes. This means that
** the maximum number of record bytes stored on an index B-Tree
** page is less than 16384 bytes and may be stored as a 2-byte
- ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing
- ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is
- ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first
+ ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing
+ ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is
+ ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first
** 2 bytes of the cell.
*/
nCell = pCell[0];
** b-tree page. */
testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd );
c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey);
- }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
+ }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
&& (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal
){
- /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
+ /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
** fits entirely on the main b-tree page. */
testcase( pCell+nCell+2==pPage->aDataEnd );
c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey);
/* The record flows over onto one or more overflow pages. In
** this case the whole cell needs to be parsed, a buffer allocated
** and accessPayload() used to retrieve the record into the
- ** buffer before VdbeRecordCompare() can be called.
+ ** buffer before VdbeRecordCompare() can be called.
**
** If the record is corrupt, the xRecordCompare routine may read
- ** up to two varints past the end of the buffer. An extra 18
+ ** up to two varints past the end of the buffer. An extra 18
** bytes of padding is allocated at the end of the buffer in
** case this happens. */
void *pCellKey;
c = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nCell, pCellKey, pIdxKey);
sqlite3_free(pCellKey);
}
- assert(
+ assert(
(pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_CORRUPT || c==0)
&& (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_NOMEM || pCur->pBtree->db->mallocFailed)
);
/*
** Return an estimate for the number of rows in the table that pCur is
-** pointing to. Return a negative number if no estimate is currently
+** pointing to. Return a negative number if no estimate is currently
** available.
*/
i64 sqlite3BtreeRowCountEst(BtCursor *pCur){
}
/*
-** Advance the cursor to the next entry in the database.
+** Advance the cursor to the next entry in the database.
** Return value:
**
** SQLITE_OK success
** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. Any other return value indicates
** an error. *ppPage is set to NULL in the event of an error.
**
-** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to
+** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to
** locate a page close to the page number "nearby". This can be used in an
** attempt to keep related pages close to each other in the database file,
** which in turn can make database access faster.
Pgno iTrunk;
u8 searchList = 0; /* If the free-list must be searched for 'nearby' */
u32 nSearch = 0; /* Count of the number of search attempts */
-
+
/* If eMode==BTALLOC_EXACT and a query of the pointer-map
** shows that the page 'nearby' is somewhere on the free-list, then
** the entire-list will be searched for that page.
** is the number of leaf page pointers to follow. */
k = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[4]);
if( k==0 && !searchList ){
- /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched.
- ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly
+ /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched.
+ ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly
** allocated page */
assert( pPrevTrunk==0 );
rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pTrunk->pDbPage);
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk);
goto end_allocate_page;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
- }else if( searchList
- && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunk<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE))
+ }else if( searchList
+ && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunk<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE))
){
/* The list is being searched and this trunk page is the page
** to allocate, regardless of whether it has leaves.
memcpy(&pPrevTrunk->aData[0], &pTrunk->aData[0], 4);
}
}else{
- /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains
+ /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains
** pointers to free-list leaves. The first leaf becomes a trunk
** page in this case.
*/
MemPage *pNewTrunk;
Pgno iNewTrunk = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[8]);
- if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){
+ if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_PGNO(iTrunk);
goto end_allocate_page;
}
goto end_allocate_page;
}
testcase( iPage==mxPage );
- if( !searchList
- || (iPage==nearby || (iPage<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE))
+ if( !searchList
+ || (iPage==nearby || (iPage<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE))
){
int noContent;
*pPgno = iPage;
** not set the no-content flag. This causes the pager to load and journal
** the current page content before overwriting it.
**
- ** Note that the pager will not actually attempt to load or journal
+ ** Note that the pager will not actually attempt to load or journal
** content for any page that really does lie past the end of the database
** file on disk. So the effects of disabling the no-content optimization
** here are confined to those pages that lie between the end of the
}
/*
-** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list.
+** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list.
** It is assumed that the page is not already a part of the free-list.
**
** The value passed as the second argument to this function is optional.
-** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object
-** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value.
+** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object
+** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value.
** Otherwise, it may pass NULL.
**
** If a pointer to a MemPage object is passed as the second argument,
*/
static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){
MemPage *pTrunk = 0; /* Free-list trunk page */
- Pgno iTrunk = 0; /* Page number of free-list trunk page */
+ Pgno iTrunk = 0; /* Page number of free-list trunk page */
MemPage *pPage1 = pBt->pPage1; /* Local reference to page 1 */
MemPage *pPage; /* Page being freed. May be NULL. */
int rc; /* Return Code */
/* If control flows to this point, then it was not possible to add the
** the page being freed as a leaf page of the first trunk in the free-list.
- ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the
+ ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the
** first trunk in the free-list is full. Either way, the page being freed
** will become the new first trunk page in the free-list.
*/
assert( pBt->usableSize > 4 );
ovflPageSize = pBt->usableSize - 4;
nOvfl = (pInfo->nPayload - pInfo->nLocal + ovflPageSize - 1)/ovflPageSize;
- assert( nOvfl>0 ||
+ assert( nOvfl>0 ||
(CORRUPT_DB && (pInfo->nPayload + ovflPageSize)<ovflPageSize)
);
while( nOvfl-- ){
Pgno iNext = 0;
MemPage *pOvfl = 0;
if( ovflPgno<2 || ovflPgno>btreePagecount(pBt) ){
- /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an
- ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the
+ /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an
+ ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the
** file the database must be corrupt. */
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
if( ( pOvfl || ((pOvfl = btreePageLookup(pBt, ovflPgno))!=0) )
&& sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pOvfl->pDbPage)!=1
){
- /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference
+ /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference
** to an overflow page belonging to a cell that is being deleted/updated.
- ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it
- ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt.
- ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as
+ ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it
+ ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt.
+ ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as
** freePage2() may zero the page contents if secure-delete mode is
** enabled. If this 'overflow' page happens to be a page that the
** caller is iterating through or using in some other way, this
/* Call xParseCell to compute the size of a cell. If the cell contains
** overflow, then invoke cellClearOverflow to clear out that overflow.
-** STore the result code (SQLITE_OK or some error code) in rc.
+** Store the result code (SQLITE_OK or some error code) in rc.
**
** Implemented as macro to force inlining for performance.
*/
pSrc = pX->pKey;
nHeader += putVarint32(&pCell[nHeader], nPayload);
}
-
+
/* Fill in the payload */
pPayload = &pCell[nHeader];
if( nPayload<=pPage->maxLocal ){
if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
do{
pgnoOvfl++;
- } while(
- PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt)
+ } while(
+ PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt)
);
}
#endif
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
/* If the database supports auto-vacuum, and the second or subsequent
** overflow page is being allocated, add an entry to the pointer-map
- ** for that page now.
+ ** for that page now.
**
- ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry
+ ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry
** to the pointer-map. If we write nothing to this pointer-map slot,
** then the optimistic overflow chain processing in clearCell()
** may misinterpret the uninitialized values and delete the
** will not fit, then make a copy of the cell content into pTemp if
** pTemp is not null. Regardless of pTemp, allocate a new entry
** in pPage->apOvfl[] and make it point to the cell content (either
-** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index.
-** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that
+** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index.
+** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that
** pPage->nOverflow is incremented.
**
** The insertCellFast() routine below works exactly the same as
}
/*
-** Array apCell[] contains pointers to nCell b-tree page cells. The
+** Array apCell[] contains pointers to nCell b-tree page cells. The
** szCell[] array contains the size in bytes of each cell. This function
** replaces the current contents of page pPg with the contents of the cell
** array.
**
** Some of the cells in apCell[] may currently be stored in pPg. This
-** function works around problems caused by this by making a copy of any
+** function works around problems caused by this by making a copy of any
** such cells before overwriting the page data.
**
-** The MemPage.nFree field is invalidated by this function. It is the
+** The MemPage.nFree field is invalidated by this function. It is the
** responsibility of the caller to set it correctly.
*/
static int rebuildPage(
** cell in the array. It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure
** that it is safe to overwrite this part of the cell-pointer array.
**
-** When this function is called, *ppData points to the start of the
+** When this function is called, *ppData points to the start of the
** content area on page pPg. If the size of the content area is extended,
** *ppData is updated to point to the new start of the content area
** before returning.
** Finally, argument pBegin points to the byte immediately following the
** end of the space required by this page for the cell-pointer area (for
** all cells - not just those inserted by the current call). If the content
-** area must be extended to before this point in order to accomodate all
+** area must be extended to before this point in order to accommodate all
** cells in apCell[], then the cells do not fit and non-zero is returned.
*/
static int pageInsertArray(
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) );
assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) );
assert( pPage->nOverflow==1 );
-
+
if( pPage->nCell==0 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; /* dbfuzz001.test */
assert( pPage->nFree>=0 );
assert( pParent->nFree>=0 );
- /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of
+ /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of
** pPage. Make the parent page writable, so that the new divider cell
** may be inserted. If both these operations are successful, proceed.
*/
pNew->nFree = pBt->usableSize - pNew->cellOffset - 2 - szCell;
/* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer map
- ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the
+ ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the
** cell on the page to an overflow page. If either of these
** operations fails, the return code is set, but the contents
- ** of the parent page are still manipulated by thh code below.
+ ** of the parent page are still manipulated by the code below.
** That is Ok, at this point the parent page is guaranteed to
** be marked as dirty. Returning an error code will cause a
** rollback, undoing any changes made to the parent page.
ptrmapPutOvflPtr(pNew, pNew, pCell, &rc);
}
}
-
+
/* Create a divider cell to insert into pParent. The divider cell
** consists of a 4-byte page number (the page number of pPage) and
** a variable length key value (which must be the same value as the
** largest key on pPage).
**
- ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most
- ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the
+ ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most
+ ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the
** record-length (a variable length integer at most 32-bits in size)
** and the key value (a variable length integer, may have any value).
** The first of the while(...) loops below skips over the record-length
/* Set the right-child pointer of pParent to point to the new page. */
put4byte(&pParent->aData[pParent->hdrOffset+8], pgnoNew);
-
+
/* Release the reference to the new page. */
releasePage(pNew);
}
#if 0
/*
** This function does not contribute anything to the operation of SQLite.
-** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible
+** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible
** for setting pointer-map entries.
*/
static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
for(j=0; j<pPage->nCell; j++){
CellInfo info;
u8 *z;
-
+
z = findCell(pPage, j);
pPage->xParseCell(pPage, z, &info);
if( info.nLocal<info.nPayload ){
#endif
/*
-** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored
+** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored
** on page pFrom to page pTo. If page pFrom was not a leaf page, then
** the pointer-map entries for each child page are updated so that the
** parent page stored in the pointer map is page pTo. If pFrom contained
** map entries are also updated so that the parent page is page pTo.
**
** If pFrom is currently carrying any overflow cells (entries in the
-** MemPage.apOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo.
+** MemPage.apOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo.
**
** Before returning, page pTo is reinitialized using btreeInitPage().
**
-** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by
+** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by
** the balance_shallower() and balance_deeper() procedures, neither of
** which are called often under normal circumstances.
*/
int const iToHdr = ((pTo->pgno==1) ? 100 : 0);
int rc;
int iData;
-
-
+
+
assert( pFrom->isInit );
assert( pFrom->nFree>=iToHdr );
assert( get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]) <= (int)pBt->usableSize );
-
+
/* Copy the b-tree node content from page pFrom to page pTo. */
iData = get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]);
memcpy(&aTo[iData], &aFrom[iData], pBt->usableSize-iData);
memcpy(&aTo[iToHdr], &aFrom[iFromHdr], pFrom->cellOffset + 2*pFrom->nCell);
-
+
/* Reinitialize page pTo so that the contents of the MemPage structure
** match the new data. The initialization of pTo can actually fail under
- ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized
+ ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized
** page pFrom.
*/
pTo->isInit = 0;
*pRC = rc;
return;
}
-
+
/* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer-map entries
** for any b-tree or overflow pages that pTo now contains the pointers to.
*/
** (hereafter "the page") and up to 2 siblings so that all pages have about the
** same amount of free space. Usually a single sibling on either side of the
** page are used in the balancing, though both siblings might come from one
-** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page
+** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page
** has fewer than 2 siblings (something which can only happen if the page
** is a root page or a child of a root page) then all available siblings
** participate in the balancing.
**
-** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by
-** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full.
+** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by
+** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full.
**
** Note that when this routine is called, some of the cells on the page
** might not actually be stored in MemPage.aData[]. This can happen
** inserted into or removed from the parent page (pParent). Doing so
** may cause the parent page to become overfull or underfull. If this
** happens, it is the responsibility of the caller to invoke the correct
-** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine).
+** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine).
**
** If this routine fails for any reason, it might leave the database
** in a corrupted state. So if this routine fails, the database should
** of the page-size, the aOvflSpace[] buffer is guaranteed to be large
** enough for all overflow cells.
**
-** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns
+** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns
** SQLITE_NOMEM.
*/
static int balance_nonroot(
assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pParent->pDbPage) );
/* At this point pParent may have at most one overflow cell. And if
- ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with
+ ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with
** index iParentIdx. This scenario comes about when this function
** is called (indirectly) from sqlite3BtreeDelete().
*/
}
assert( pParent->nFree>=0 );
- /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent
- ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on
- ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however,
+ /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent
+ ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on
+ ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however,
** if there are fewer than NN siblings on the other side. If pParent
- ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken.
+ ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken.
**
** This loop also drops the divider cells from the parent page. This
** way, the remainder of the function does not have to deal with any
nxDiv = 0;
}else{
assert( bBulk==0 || bBulk==1 );
- if( iParentIdx==0 ){
+ if( iParentIdx==0 ){
nxDiv = 0;
}else if( iParentIdx==i ){
nxDiv = i-2+bBulk;
** This is safe because dropping a cell only overwrites the first
** four bytes of it, and this function does not need the first
** four bytes of the divider cell. So the pointer is safe to use
- ** later on.
+ ** later on.
**
** But not if we are in secure-delete mode. In secure-delete mode,
** the dropCell() routine will overwrite the entire cell with zeroes.
** Figure out the number of pages needed to hold all b.nCell cells.
** Store this number in "k". Also compute szNew[] which is the total
** size of all cells on the i-th page and cntNew[] which is the index
- ** in b.apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1.
+ ** in b.apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1.
** cntNew[k] should equal b.nCell.
**
** Values computed by this block:
** cntNew[i]: Index in b.apCell[] and b.szCell[] for the first cell to
** the right of the i-th sibling page.
** usableSpace: Number of bytes of space available on each sibling.
- **
+ **
*/
usableSpace = pBt->usableSize - 12 + leafCorrection;
for(i=k=0; i<nOld; i++, k++){
}
}
- /* Sanity check: For a non-corrupt database file one of the follwing
+ /* Sanity check: For a non-corrupt database file one of the following
** must be true:
** (1) We found one or more cells (cntNew[0])>0), or
** (2) pPage is a virtual root page. A virtual root page is when
}
/*
- ** Reassign page numbers so that the new pages are in ascending order.
+ ** Reassign page numbers so that the new pages are in ascending order.
** This helps to keep entries in the disk file in order so that a scan
- ** of the table is closer to a linear scan through the file. That in turn
+ ** of the table is closer to a linear scan through the file. That in turn
** helps the operating system to deliver pages from the disk more rapidly.
**
** An O(N*N) sort algorithm is used, but since N is never more than NB+2
** (5), that is not a performance concern.
**
- ** When NB==3, this one optimization makes the database about 25% faster
+ ** When NB==3, this one optimization makes the database about 25% faster
** for large insertions and deletions.
*/
for(i=0; i<nNew; i++){
put4byte(pRight, apNew[nNew-1]->pgno);
/* If the sibling pages are not leaves, ensure that the right-child pointer
- ** of the right-most new sibling page is set to the value that was
+ ** of the right-most new sibling page is set to the value that was
** originally in the same field of the right-most old sibling page. */
if( (pageFlags & PTF_LEAF)==0 && nOld!=nNew ){
MemPage *pOld = (nNew>nOld ? apNew : apOld)[nOld-1];
memcpy(&apNew[nNew-1]->aData[8], &pOld->aData[8], 4);
}
- /* Make any required updates to pointer map entries associated with
+ /* Make any required updates to pointer map entries associated with
** cells stored on sibling pages following the balance operation. Pointer
** map entries associated with divider cells are set by the insertCell()
** routine. The associated pointer map entries are:
** b) if the sibling pages are not leaves, the child page associated
** with the cell.
**
- ** If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the pointer map entry
- ** associated with the right-child of each sibling may also need to be
- ** updated. This happens below, after the sibling pages have been
+ ** If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the pointer map entry
+ ** associated with the right-child of each sibling may also need to be
+ ** updated. This happens below, after the sibling pages have been
** populated, not here.
*/
if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) ){
}
/* Cell pCell is destined for new sibling page pNew. Originally, it
- ** was either part of sibling page iOld (possibly an overflow cell),
+ ** was either part of sibling page iOld (possibly an overflow cell),
** or else the divider cell to the left of sibling page iOld. So,
** if sibling page iOld had the same page number as pNew, and if
** pCell really was a part of sibling page iOld (not a divider or
if( !pNew->leaf ){
memcpy(&pNew->aData[8], pCell, 4);
}else if( leafData ){
- /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves,
- ** then there is no divider cell in b.apCell[]. Instead, the divider
- ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of
+ /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves,
+ ** then there is no divider cell in b.apCell[]. Instead, the divider
+ ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of
** the sibling-page assembled above only.
*/
CellInfo info;
pCell -= 4;
/* Obscure case for non-leaf-data trees: If the cell at pCell was
** previously stored on a leaf node, and its reported size was 4
- ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this
+ ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this
** (see btreeParseCellPtr(), 4 bytes is the minimum size of
- ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to
+ ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to
** insertCell(), so reparse the cell now.
**
** This can only happen for b-trees used to evaluate "IN (SELECT ...)"
** b-tree structure by one. This is described as the "balance-shallower"
** sub-algorithm in some documentation.
**
- ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent()
- ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages
+ ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent()
+ ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages
** for which the pointer is stored within the content being copied.
**
** It is critical that the child page be defragmented before being
assert( nNew==1 || CORRUPT_DB );
rc = defragmentPage(apNew[0], -1);
testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
- assert( apNew[0]->nFree ==
+ assert( apNew[0]->nFree ==
(get2byteNotZero(&apNew[0]->aData[5]) - apNew[0]->cellOffset
- apNew[0]->nCell*2)
|| rc!=SQLITE_OK
#if 0
if( ISAUTOVACUUM(pBt) && rc==SQLITE_OK && apNew[0]->isInit ){
/* The ptrmapCheckPages() contains assert() statements that verify that
- ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while
+ ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while
** debugging. This is usually disabled because a corrupt database may
** cause an assert() statement to fail. */
ptrmapCheckPages(apNew, nNew);
**
** A new child page is allocated and the contents of the current root
** page, including overflow cells, are copied into the child. The root
-** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child
+** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child
** pointer pointing to the new page.
**
-** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages
+** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages
** that the new child-page now contains pointers to are updated. The
** entry corresponding to the new right-child pointer of the root
** page is also updated.
**
-** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child
+** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child
** page and SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case the caller is required
** to call releasePage() on *ppChild exactly once. If an error occurs,
** an error code is returned and *ppChild is set to 0.
assert( pRoot->nOverflow>0 );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
- /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new
+ /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new
** page that will become the new right-child of pPage. Copy the contents
** of the node stored on pRoot into the new child page.
*/
/*
** The page that pCur currently points to has just been modified in
** some way. This function figures out if this modification means the
-** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing
+** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing
** routine. Balancing routines are:
**
** balance_quick()
** balance_deeper() function to create a new child for the root-page
** and copy the current contents of the root-page to it. The
** next iteration of the do-loop will balance the child page.
- */
+ */
assert( balance_deeper_called==0 );
VVA_ONLY( balance_deeper_called++ );
rc = balance_deeper(pPage, &pCur->apPage[1]);
}
}else if( sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pPage->pDbPage)>1 ){
/* The page being written is not a root page, and there is currently
- ** more than one reference to it. This only happens if the page is one
+ ** more than one reference to it. This only happens if the page is one
** of its own ancestor pages. Corruption. */
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}else{
/* Call balance_quick() to create a new sibling of pPage on which
** to store the overflow cell. balance_quick() inserts a new cell
** into pParent, which may cause pParent overflow. If this
- ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent
+ ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent
** use either balance_nonroot() or balance_deeper(). Until this
** happens, the overflow cell is stored in the aBalanceQuickSpace[]
- ** buffer.
+ ** buffer.
**
** The purpose of the following assert() is to check that only a
** single call to balance_quick() is made for each call to this
** function. If this were not verified, a subtle bug involving reuse
** of the aBalanceQuickSpace[] might sneak in.
*/
- assert( balance_quick_called==0 );
+ assert( balance_quick_called==0 );
VVA_ONLY( balance_quick_called++ );
rc = balance_quick(pParent, pPage, aBalanceQuickSpace);
}else
** modifying the contents of pParent, which may cause pParent to
** become overfull or underfull. The next iteration of the do-loop
** will balance the parent page to correct this.
- **
+ **
** If the parent page becomes overfull, the overflow cell or cells
- ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below.
+ ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below.
** A subsequent iteration of the do-loop will deal with this by
** calling balance_nonroot() (balance_deeper() may be called first,
** but it doesn't deal with overflow cells - just moves them to a
- ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot()
+ ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot()
** has completed, it is safe to release the pSpace buffer used by
- ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been
+ ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been
** copied either into the body of a database page or into the new
** pSpace buffer passed to the latter call to balance_nonroot().
*/
rc = balance_nonroot(pParent, iIdx, pSpace, iPage==1,
pCur->hints&BTREE_BULKLOAD);
if( pFree ){
- /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used
+ /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used
** by a previous call to balance_nonroot(). Its contents are
- ** now stored either on real database pages or within the
+ ** now stored either on real database pages or within the
** new pSpace buffer, so it may be safely freed here. */
sqlite3PageFree(pFree);
}
if( rc ) return rc;
iOffset += ovflPageSize;
}while( iOffset<nTotal );
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** hold the content of the row.
**
** For an index btree (used for indexes and WITHOUT ROWID tables), the
-** key is an arbitrary byte sequence stored in pX.pKey,nKey. The
+** key is an arbitrary byte sequence stored in pX.pKey,nKey. The
** pX.pData,nData,nZero fields must be zero.
**
** If the seekResult parameter is non-zero, then a successful call to
**
** In some cases, the call to btreeMoveto() below is a no-op. For
** example, when inserting data into a table with auto-generated integer
- ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the
- ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the
+ ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the
+ ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the
** data into the intkey B-Tree. In this case btreeMoveto() recognizes
** that the cursor is already where it needs to be and returns without
** doing any work. To avoid thwarting these optimizations, it is important
if( pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ){
assert( pX->pKey==0 );
- /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob
+ /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob
** cursors open on the row being replaced */
if( p->hasIncrblobCur ){
invalidateIncrblobCursors(p, pCur->pgnoRoot, pX->nKey, 0);
}
- /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing
+ /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing
** to a row with the same key as the new entry being inserted.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
** to an adjacent cell. Move the cursor so that it is pointing either
** to the cell to be overwritten or an adjacent cell.
*/
- rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pCur, pX->nKey,
+ rc = sqlite3BtreeTableMoveto(pCur, pX->nKey,
(flags & BTREE_APPEND)!=0, &loc);
if( rc ) return rc;
}
}else{
/* This is an index or a WITHOUT ROWID table */
- /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing
+ /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing
** to a row with the same key as the new entry being inserted.
*/
assert( (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)==0 || loc==0 );
r.eqSeen = 0;
rc = sqlite3BtreeIndexMoveto(pCur, &r, &loc);
}else{
- rc = btreeMoveto(pCur, pX->pKey, pX->nKey,
+ rc = btreeMoveto(pCur, pX->pKey, pX->nKey,
(flags & BTREE_APPEND)!=0, &loc);
}
if( rc ) return rc;
}
}
}
- assert( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID
+ assert( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID
|| (pCur->eState==CURSOR_INVALID && loc) || CORRUPT_DB );
pPage = pCur->pPage;
BTREE_CLEAR_CELL(rc, pPage, oldCell, info);
testcase( pCur->curFlags & BTCF_ValidOvfl );
invalidateOverflowCache(pCur);
- if( info.nSize==szNew && info.nLocal==info.nPayload
+ if( info.nSize==szNew && info.nLocal==info.nPayload
&& (!ISAUTOVACUUM(p->pBt) || szNew<pPage->minLocal)
){
/* Overwrite the old cell with the new if they are the same size.
** We could also try to do this if the old cell is smaller, then add
** the leftover space to the free list. But experiments show that
** doing that is no faster then skipping this optimization and just
- ** calling dropCell() and insertCell().
+ ** calling dropCell() and insertCell().
**
** This optimization cannot be used on an autovacuum database if the
** new entry uses overflow pages, as the insertCell() call below is
assert( pPage->nOverflow==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK );
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || pPage->nCell>0 || pPage->nOverflow>0 );
- /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance()
+ /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance()
** to redistribute the cells within the tree. Since balance() may move
** the cursor, zero the BtCursor.info.nSize and BTCF_ValidNKey
** variables.
rc = balance(pCur);
/* Must make sure nOverflow is reset to zero even if the balance()
- ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise.
+ ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise.
** Also, set the cursor state to invalid. This stops saveCursorPosition()
** from trying to save the current position of the cursor. */
pCur->pPage->nOverflow = 0;
pPgnoOut = &aOut[nOut];
pBt->nPreformatSize += 4;
}
-
+
if( nRem>nIn ){
if( aIn+nIn+4>pSrc->pPage->aDataEnd ){
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
ovflIn = get4byte(&pSrc->info.pPayload[nIn]);
}
-
+
do {
nRem -= nOut;
do{
}
}
}while( rc==SQLITE_OK && nOut>0 );
-
+
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && nRem>0 && ALWAYS(pPgnoOut) ){
Pgno pgnoNew;
MemPage *pNew = 0;
}
}
}while( nRem>0 && rc==SQLITE_OK );
-
+
releasePage(pPageOut);
sqlite3PagerUnref(pPageIn);
return rc;
}
/*
-** Delete the entry that the cursor is pointing to.
+** Delete the entry that the cursor is pointing to.
**
** If the BTREE_SAVEPOSITION bit of the flags parameter is zero, then
** the cursor is left pointing at an arbitrary location after the delete.
*/
int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
Btree *p = pCur->pBtree;
- BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;
+ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;
int rc; /* Return code */
MemPage *pPage; /* Page to delete cell from */
unsigned char *pCell; /* Pointer to cell to delete */
int iCellIdx; /* Index of cell to delete */
- int iCellDepth; /* Depth of node containing pCell */
+ int iCellDepth; /* Depth of node containing pCell */
CellInfo info; /* Size of the cell being deleted */
u8 bPreserve; /* Keep cursor valid. 2 for CURSOR_SKIPNEXT */
/* If the BTREE_SAVEPOSITION bit is on, then the cursor position must
** be preserved following this delete operation. If the current delete
** will cause a b-tree rebalance, then this is done by saving the cursor
- ** key and leaving the cursor in CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK state before
- ** returning.
+ ** key and leaving the cursor in CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK state before
+ ** returning.
**
** If the current delete will not cause a rebalance, then the cursor
** will be left in CURSOR_SKIPNEXT state pointing to the entry immediately
*/
bPreserve = (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)!=0;
if( bPreserve ){
- if( !pPage->leaf
+ if( !pPage->leaf
|| (pPage->nFree+pPage->xCellSize(pPage,pCell)+2) >
(int)(pBt->usableSize*2/3)
|| pPage->nCell==1 /* See dbfuzz001.test for a test case */
** on the leaf node first. If the balance proceeds far enough up the
** tree that we can be sure that any problem in the internal node has
** been corrected, so be it. Otherwise, after balancing the leaf node,
- ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as
+ ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as
** well. */
assert( pCur->pPage->nOverflow==0 );
assert( pCur->pPage->nFree>=0 );
MemPage *pRoot;
Pgno pgnoRoot;
int rc;
- int ptfFlags; /* Page-type flage for the root page of new table */
+ int ptfFlags; /* Page-type flags for the root page of new table */
assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) );
assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE );
}
}else{
pRoot = pPageMove;
- }
+ }
/* Update the pointer-map and meta-data with the new root-page number. */
ptrmapPut(pBt, pgnoRoot, PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE, 0, &rc);
}
rc = getAndInitPage(pBt, pgno, &pPage, 0, 0);
if( rc ) return rc;
- if( (pBt->openFlags & BTREE_SINGLE)==0
+ if( (pBt->openFlags & BTREE_SINGLE)==0
&& sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pPage->pDbPage) != (1 + (pgno==1))
){
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
** cursors on the table.
**
** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled and the page at iTable is not the last
-** root page in the database file, then the last root page
+** root page in the database file, then the last root page
** in the database file is moved into the slot formerly occupied by
** iTable and that last slot formerly occupied by the last root page
** is added to the freelist instead of iTable. In this say, all
** root pages are kept at the beginning of the database file, which
-** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right. *piMoved is set to the
+** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right. *piMoved is set to the
** page number that used to be the last root page in the file before
** the move. If no page gets moved, *piMoved is set to 0.
** The last root page is recorded in meta[3] and the value of
if( iTable==maxRootPgno ){
/* If the table being dropped is the table with the largest root-page
- ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list.
+ ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list.
*/
freePage(pPage, &rc);
releasePage(pPage);
}
}else{
/* The table being dropped does not have the largest root-page
- ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the
+ ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the
** gap left by the deleted root-page.
*/
MemPage *pMove;
releasePage(pPage);
}
#endif
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){
int rc;
** is the number of free pages currently in the database. Meta[1]
** through meta[15] are available for use by higher layers. Meta[0]
** is read-only, the others are read/write.
-**
+**
** The schema layer numbers meta values differently. At the schema
** layer (and the SetCookie and ReadCookie opcodes) the number of
** free pages is not visible. So Cookie[0] is the same as Meta[1].
** The first argument, pCur, is a cursor opened on some b-tree. Count the
** number of entries in the b-tree and write the result to *pnEntry.
**
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed.
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed.
** Otherwise, if an error is encountered (i.e. an IO error or database
** corruption) an SQLite error code is returned.
*/
}
/* Unless an error occurs, the following loop runs one iteration for each
- ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages).
+ ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages).
*/
while( rc==SQLITE_OK && !AtomicLoad(&db->u1.isInterrupted) ){
int iIdx; /* Index of child node in parent */
MemPage *pPage; /* Current page of the b-tree */
- /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then
+ /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then
** this page contains countable entries. Increment the entry counter
** accordingly.
*/
nEntry += pPage->nCell;
}
- /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it
+ /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it
** points to the first interior cell that it points to the parent of
** the next page in the tree that has not yet been visited. The
** pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage] value is set to the index of the parent cell
pPage = pCur->pPage;
}
- /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently
+ /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently
** points at. This is the right-child if (iIdx==pPage->nCell).
*/
iIdx = pCur->ix;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
/*
-** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to
+** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to
** page iParent, pointer type ptrType. If not, append an error message
** to pCheck.
*/
if( ePtrmapType!=eType || iPtrmapParent!=iParent ){
checkAppendMsg(pCheck,
- "Bad ptr map entry key=%u expected=(%u,%u) got=(%u,%u)",
+ "Bad ptr map entry key=%u expected=(%u,%u) got=(%u,%u)",
iChild, eType, iParent, ePtrmapType, iPtrmapParent);
}
}
** property.
**
** This heap is used for cell overlap and coverage testing. Each u32
-** entry represents the span of a cell or freeblock on a btree page.
+** entry represents the span of a cell or freeblock on a btree page.
** The upper 16 bits are the index of the first byte of a range and the
** lower 16 bits are the index of the last byte of that range.
*/
aHeap[j] = x;
i = j;
}
- return 1;
+ return 1;
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK
** Do various sanity checks on a single page of a tree. Return
** the tree depth. Root pages return 0. Parents of root pages
** return 1, and so forth.
-**
+**
** These checks are done:
**
** 1. Make sure that cells and freeblocks do not overlap
**
** EVIDENCE-OF: R-20690-50594 The second field of the b-tree page header
** is the offset of the first freeblock, or zero if there are no
- ** freeblocks on the page.
+ ** freeblocks on the page.
*/
i = get2byte(&data[hdr+1]);
while( i>0 ){
assert( (u32)j<=usableSize-4 ); /* Enforced by btreeComputeFreeSpace() */
i = j;
}
- /* Analyze the min-heap looking for overlap between cells and/or
+ /* Analyze the min-heap looking for overlap between cells and/or
** freeblocks, and counting the number of untracked bytes in nFrag.
- **
+ **
** Each min-heap entry is of the form: (start_address<<16)|end_address.
** There is an implied first entry the covers the page header, the cell
** pointer index, and the gap between the cell pointer index and the start
- ** of cell content.
+ ** of cell content.
**
** The loop below pulls entries from the min-heap in order and compares
** the start_address against the previous end_address. If there is an
/* If the database supports auto-vacuum, make sure no tables contain
** references to pointer-map pages.
*/
- if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 &&
+ if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 &&
(PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)!=i || !pBt->autoVacuum) ){
checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %u: never used", i);
}
- if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 &&
+ if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 &&
(PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)==i && pBt->autoVacuum) ){
checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %u: pointer map referenced", i);
}
/*
** Run a checkpoint on the Btree passed as the first argument.
**
-** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open
+** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open
** transaction on the shared-cache the argument Btree is connected to.
**
** Parameter eMode is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL or RESTART.
/*
** This function returns a pointer to a blob of memory associated with
** a single shared-btree. The memory is used by client code for its own
-** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with
+** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with
** the shared-btree). The btree layer manages reference counting issues.
**
** The first time this is called on a shared-btree, nBytes bytes of memory
-** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent
+** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent
** call the nBytes parameter is ignored and a pointer to the same blob
-** of memory returned.
+** of memory returned.
**
** If the nBytes parameter is 0 and the blob of memory has not yet been
** allocated, a null pointer is returned. If the blob has already been
** allocated, it is returned as normal.
**
-** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the
-** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the
+** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the
+** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the
** blob of allocated memory. The xFree function should not call sqlite3_free()
** on the memory, the btree layer does that.
*/
}
/*
-** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared
-** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the
+** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared
+** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the
** sqlite_schema table. Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
*/
int sqlite3BtreeSchemaLocked(Btree *p){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB
/*
-** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an
-** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry.
+** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an
+** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry.
** This function modifies the data stored as part of that entry.
**
-** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to
+** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to
** change the length of the data stored. If this function is called with
** parameters that attempt to write past the end of the existing data,
** no modifications are made and SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
VVA_ONLY(rc =) saveAllCursors(pCsr->pBt, pCsr->pgnoRoot, pCsr);
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
- /* Check some assumptions:
+ /* Check some assumptions:
** (a) the cursor is open for writing,
** (b) there is a read/write transaction open,
** (c) the connection holds a write-lock on the table (if required),
return accessPayload(pCsr, offset, amt, (unsigned char *)z, 1);
}
-/*
+/*
** Mark this cursor as an incremental blob cursor.
*/
void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
#endif
/*
-** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and
+** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and
** "write version" (single byte at byte offset 19) fields in the database
** header to iVersion.
*/
int sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(Btree *pBtree, int iVersion){
BtShared *pBt = pBtree->pBt;
int rc; /* Return code */
-
+
assert( iVersion==1 || iVersion==2 );
/* If setting the version fields to 1, do not automatically open the
/*
** Return the number of connections to the BtShared object accessed by
-** the Btree handle passed as the only argument. For private caches
+** the Btree handle passed as the only argument. For private caches
** this is always 1. For shared caches it may be 1 or greater.
*/
int sqlite3BtreeConnectionCount(Btree *p){
** page that has been loaded into memory. The information in this object
** is derived from the raw on-disk page content.
**
-** As each database page is loaded into memory, the pager allocats an
+** As each database page is loaded into memory, the pager allocates an
** instance of this object and zeros the first 8 bytes. (This is the
** "extra" information associated with each page of the pager.)
**
/*
** get2byteAligned(), unlike get2byte(), requires that its argument point to a
-** two-byte aligned address. get2bytea() is only used for accessing the
+** two-byte aligned address. get2byteAligned() is only used for accessing the
** cell addresses in a btree header.
*/
#if SQLITE_BYTEORDER==4321
};
/*
-** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time.
+** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time.
**
** The table to be locked has root page iTab and is found in database iDb.
** A read or a write lock can be taken depending on isWritelock.
*/
static void codeTableLocks(Parse *pParse){
int i;
- Vdbe *pVdbe = pParse->pVdbe;
+ Vdbe *pVdbe = pParse->pVdbe;
assert( pVdbe!=0 );
for(i=0; i<pParse->nTableLock; i++){
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
if( v==0 ) pParse->rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
- assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite
+ assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite
|| sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(v, pParse->mayAbort));
if( v ){
if( pParse->bReturning ){
pParse->nVtabLock = 0;
#endif
- /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened,
- ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the
+ /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened,
+ ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the
** shared-cache feature is enabled.
*/
codeTableLocks(pParse);
|| sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0
|| sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0
){
- p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash,
+ p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash,
LEGACY_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE);
}
}else{
if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){
p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[0].pSchema->tblHash, LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE);
}else if( sqlite3StrICmp(zName+7, &PREFERRED_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE[7])==0 ){
- p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash,
+ p = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aDb[1].pSchema->tblHash,
LEGACY_TEMP_SCHEMA_TABLE);
}
}
/* Read the database schema. If an error occurs, leave an error message
** and code in pParse and return NULL. */
- if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_SchemaKnownOk)==0
+ if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_SchemaKnownOk)==0
&& SQLITE_OK!=sqlite3ReadSchema(pParse)
){
return 0;
** sqlite3FixSrcList() for details.
*/
Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem(
- Parse *pParse,
+ Parse *pParse,
u32 flags,
SrcItem *p
){
}
/*
-** Locate the in-memory structure that describes
+** Locate the in-memory structure that describes
** a particular index given the name of that index
** and the name of the database that contains the index.
** Return NULL if not found.
}
/*
-** Return the collating squence name for a column
+** Return the collating sequence name for a column
*/
const char *sqlite3ColumnColl(Column *pCol){
const char *z;
**
** This routine just deletes the data structure. It does not unlink
** the table data structure from the hash table. But it does destroy
-** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with
+** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with
** the table.
**
-** The db parameter is optional. It is needed if the Table object
+** The db parameter is optional. It is needed if the Table object
** contains lookaside memory. (Table objects in the schema do not use
** lookaside memory, but some ephemeral Table objects do.) Or the
** db parameter can be used with db->pnBytesFreed to measure the memory
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
/* Record the number of outstanding lookaside allocations in schema Tables
** prior to doing any free() operations. Since schema Tables do not use
- ** lookaside, this number should not change.
+ ** lookaside, this number should not change.
**
** If malloc has already failed, it may be that it failed while allocating
** a Table object that was going to be marked ephemeral. So do not check
assert( pIndex->pSchema==pTable->pSchema
|| (IsVirtual(pTable) && pIndex->idxType!=SQLITE_IDXTYPE_APPDEF) );
if( db->pnBytesFreed==0 && !IsVirtual(pTable) ){
- char *zName = pIndex->zName;
+ char *zName = pIndex->zName;
TESTONLY ( Index *pOld = ) sqlite3HashInsert(
&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, zName, 0
);
/*
** The token *pName contains the name of a database (either "main" or
** "temp" or the name of an attached db). This routine returns the
-** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db
+** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db
** does not exist.
*/
int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){
** pName1 and pName2. If the table name was fully qualified, for example:
**
** CREATE TABLE xxx.yyy (...);
-**
+**
** Then pName1 is set to "xxx" and pName2 "yyy". On the other hand if
** the table name is not fully qualified, i.e.:
**
** The storage column number (0,1,2,....) is the index of the value
** as it appears in the record on disk. Or, if the input column is
** the N-th virtual column (zero-based) then the storage number is
-** the number of non-virtual columns in the table plus N.
+** the number of non-virtual columns in the table plus N.
**
** The true column number is the index (0,1,2,...) of the column in
** the CREATE TABLE statement.
iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pName1, pName2, &pName);
if( iDb<0 ) return;
if( !OMIT_TEMPDB && isTemp && pName2->n>0 && iDb!=1 ){
- /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless
+ /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless
** the database name is "temp" anyway. */
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "temporary table name must be unqualified");
return;
** the schema table. Note in particular that we must go ahead
** and allocate the record number for the table entry now. Before any
** PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE keywords are parsed. Those keywords will cause
- ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the
+ ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the
** indices. Hence, the record number for the table must be allocated
** now.
*/
}
#endif
- /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set,
+ /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set,
** set them now.
*/
reg1 = pParse->regRowid = ++pParse->nMem;
}
if( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT ) sqlite3DequoteToken(&sName);
- /* Because keywords GENERATE ALWAYS can be converted into indentifiers
+ /* Because keywords GENERATE ALWAYS can be converted into identifiers
** by the parser, we can sometimes end up with a typename that ends
** with "generated always". Check for this case and omit the surplus
** text. */
pCol->zCnName = z;
pCol->hName = hName;
sqlite3ColumnPropertiesFromName(p, pCol);
-
+
if( sType.n==0 ){
/* If there is no type specified, columns have the default affinity
** 'BLOB' with a default size of 4 bytes. */
** Scan the column type name zType (length nType) and return the
** associated affinity type.
**
-** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the
+** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the
** substrings in the following table. If one of the substrings is
** found, the corresponding affinity is returned. If zType contains
-** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of
-** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT',
+** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of
+** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT',
** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER is returned.
**
** Substring | Affinity
Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */
Expr *pExpr, /* The parsed expression of the default value */
const char *zStart, /* Start of the default value text */
- const char *zEnd /* First character past end of defaut value text */
+ const char *zEnd /* First character past end of default value text */
){
Table *p;
Column *pCol;
/*
** Backwards Compatibility Hack:
-**
+**
** Historical versions of SQLite accepted strings as column names in
** indexes and PRIMARY KEY constraints and in UNIQUE constraints. Example:
**
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"generated columns cannot be part of the PRIMARY KEY");
}
-#endif
+#endif
}
/*
-** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table. pList is a list of names
+** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table. pList is a list of names
** of columns that form the primary key. If pList is NULL, then the
** most recently added column of the table is the primary key.
**
int nTerm;
if( pTab==0 ) goto primary_key_exit;
if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"table \"%s\" has more than one primary key", pTab->zName);
goto primary_key_exit;
}
while( sqlite3Isspace(zEnd[-1]) ){ zEnd--; }
t.z = zStart;
t.n = (int)(zEnd - t.z);
- sqlite3ExprListSetName(pParse, pTab->pCheck, &t, 1);
+ sqlite3ExprListSetName(pParse, pTab->pCheck, &t, 1);
}
}else
#endif
if( sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, zColl) ){
Index *pIdx;
sqlite3ColumnSetColl(db, &p->aCol[i], zColl);
-
+
/* If the column is declared as "<name> PRIMARY KEY COLLATE <type>",
** then an index may have been created on this column before the
** collation type was added. Correct this if it is the case.
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe;
assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) );
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SetCookie, iDb, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SetCookie, iDb, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION,
(int)(1+(unsigned)db->aDb[iDb].pSchema->schema_cookie));
}
}
/*
-** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second
+** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second
** parameter is a pointer to an integer that contains the offset at
** which to write into the output buffer. This function copies the
** nul-terminated string pointed to by the third parameter, zSignedIdent,
** to the specified offset in the buffer and updates *pIdx to refer
** to the first byte after the last byte written before returning.
-**
+**
** If the string zSignedIdent consists entirely of alpha-numeric
** characters, does not begin with a digit and is not an SQL keyword,
** then it is copied to the output buffer exactly as it is. Otherwise,
n += identLength(pCol->zCnName) + 5;
}
n += identLength(p->zName);
- if( n<50 ){
+ if( n<50 ){
zSep = "";
zSep2 = ",";
zEnd = ")";
testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER );
testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL );
testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_FLEXNUM );
-
+
zType = azType[pCol->affinity - SQLITE_AFF_BLOB];
len = sqlite3Strlen30(zType);
assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB
assert( j!=XN_ROWID && j!=XN_EXPR );
for(i=0; i<nKey; i++){
assert( pIdx->aiColumn[i]>=0 || j>=0 );
- if( pIdx->aiColumn[i]==j
+ if( pIdx->aiColumn[i]==j
&& sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->azColl[i], pPk->azColl[iCol])==0
){
return 1;
** Changes include:
**
** (1) Set all columns of the PRIMARY KEY schema object to be NOT NULL.
-** (2) Convert P3 parameter of the OP_CreateBtree from BTREE_INTKEY
+** (2) Convert P3 parameter of the OP_CreateBtree from BTREE_INTKEY
** into BTREE_BLOBKEY.
** (3) Bypass the creation of the sqlite_schema table entry
** for the PRIMARY KEY as the primary key index is now
}
/* Locate the PRIMARY KEY index. Or, if this table was originally
- ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index.
+ ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index.
*/
if( pTab->iPKey>=0 ){
ExprList *pList;
Token ipkToken;
sqlite3TokenInit(&ipkToken, pTab->aCol[pTab->iPKey].zCnName);
- pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0,
+ pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0,
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &ipkToken, 0));
if( pList==0 ){
pTab->tabFlags &= ~TF_WithoutRowid;
** the sqlite_schema table. We do not want to create it again.
**
** If the pSelect argument is not NULL, it means that this routine
-** was called to create a table generated from a
+** was called to create a table generated from a
** "CREATE TABLE ... AS SELECT ..." statement. The column names of
** the new table will match the result set of the SELECT.
*/
pCol->notNull = OE_Abort;
p->tabFlags |= TF_HasNotNull;
}
- }
+ }
}
assert( (p->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey)==0
** tree that have been allocated from lookaside memory, which is
** illegal in a schema and will lead to errors or heap corruption
** when the database connection closes. */
- sqlite3ColumnSetExpr(pParse, p, &p->aCol[ii],
+ sqlite3ColumnSetExpr(pParse, p, &p->aCol[ii],
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_NULL, 0, 0));
}
}else{
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, 0);
- /*
+ /*
** Initialize zType for the new view or table.
*/
if( IsOrdinaryTable(p) ){
Token *pEnd2 = tabOpts ? &pParse->sLastToken : pEnd;
n = (int)(pEnd2->z - pParse->sNameToken.z);
if( pEnd2->z[0]!=';' ) n += pEnd2->n;
- zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"CREATE %s %.*s", zType2, n, pParse->sNameToken.z
);
}
- /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
+ /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
** schema table. We just need to update that slot with all
** the information we've collected.
*/
** Actually, the error above is now caught prior to reaching this point.
** But the following test is still important as it does come up
** in the following:
- **
+ **
** CREATE TABLE main.ex1(a);
** CREATE TEMP VIEW ex1 AS SELECT a FROM ex1;
** SELECT * FROM temp.ex1;
** normally holds CHECK constraints on an ordinary table, but for
** a VIEW it holds the list of column names.
*/
- sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(pParse, pTable->pCheck,
+ sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(pParse, pTable->pCheck,
&pTable->nCol, &pTable->aCol);
if( pParse->nErr==0
&& pTable->nCol==pSel->pEList->nExpr
sqlite3DeleteColumnNames(db, pTable);
}
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW */
- return nErr;
+ return nErr;
}
int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
assert( pTable!=0 );
** on tables and/or indices that are the process of being deleted.
** If you are unlucky, one of those deleted indices or tables might
** have the same rootpage number as the real table or index that is
-** being moved. So we cannot stop searching after the first match
+** being moved. So we cannot stop searching after the first match
** because the first match might be for one of the deleted indices
** or tables and not the table/index that is actually being moved.
** We must continue looping until all tables and indices with
** Also write code to modify the sqlite_schema table and internal schema
** if a root-page of another table is moved by the btree-layer whilst
** erasing iTable (this can happen with an auto-vacuum database).
-*/
+*/
static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
** is in register NNN. See grammar rules associated with the TK_REGISTER
** token for additional information.
*/
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE
" SET rootpage=%d WHERE #%d AND rootpage=#%d",
pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, iTable, r1, r1);
static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
/* If the database may be auto-vacuum capable (if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
** is not defined), then it is important to call OP_Destroy on the
- ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically
+ ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically
** largest root-page number. This guarantees that none of the root-pages
** to be destroyed is relocated by an earlier OP_Destroy. i.e. if the
** following were coded:
** OP_Destroy 5 0
**
** and root page 5 happened to be the largest root-page number in the
- ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the
+ ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the
** "OP_Destroy 4 0" opcode. The subsequent "OP_Destroy 5 0" would hit
** a free-list page.
*/
*/
pTrigger = sqlite3TriggerList(pParse, pTab);
while( pTrigger ){
- assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema ||
+ assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema ||
pTrigger->pSchema==db->aDb[1].pSchema );
sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(pParse, pTrigger);
pTrigger = pTrigger->pNext;
** created in the temp database that refers to a table in another
** database.
*/
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"DELETE FROM %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE
" WHERE tbl_name=%Q and type!='trigger'",
pDb->zDbSName, pTab->zName);
}
}
if( j>=p->nCol ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
- "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition",
pFromCol->a[i].zEName);
goto fk_end;
}
pFKey->aAction[1] = (u8)((flags >> 8 ) & 0xff); /* ON UPDATE action */
assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, p->pSchema) );
- pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash,
+ pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash,
pFKey->zTo, (void *)pFKey
);
if( pNextTo==pFKey ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iTab, addr1+1); VdbeCoverage(v);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1);
if( memRootPage<0 ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Clear, tnum, iDb);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, (int)tnum, iDb,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, (int)tnum, iDb,
(char *)pKey, P4_KEYINFO);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_BULKCSR|((memRootPage>=0)?OPFLAG_P2ISREG:0));
** user function that throws an exception when it is evaluated. But the
** overhead of adding a statement journal to a CREATE INDEX statement is
** very small (since most of the pages written do not contain content that
- ** needs to be restored if the statement aborts), so we call
+ ** needs to be restored if the statement aborts), so we call
** sqlite3MayAbort() for all CREATE INDEX statements. */
sqlite3MayAbort(pParse);
addr2 = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
for(i=0; i<pList->nExpr; i++){
if( pList->a[i].fg.bNulls ){
u8 sf = pList->a[i].fg.sortFlags;
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unsupported use of NULLS %s",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unsupported use of NULLS %s",
(sf==0 || sf==3) ? "FIRST" : "LAST"
);
return 1;
}
/*
-** Create a new index for an SQL table. pName1.pName2 is the name of the index
-** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed. Both will
+** Create a new index for an SQL table. pName1.pName2 is the name of the index
+** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed. Both will
** be NULL for a primary key or an index that is created to satisfy a
** UNIQUE constraint. If pTable and pIndex are NULL, use pParse->pNewTable
** as the table to be indexed. pParse->pNewTable is a table that is
**
** pList is a list of columns to be indexed. pList will be NULL if this
** is a primary key or unique-constraint on the most recent column added
-** to the table currently under construction.
+** to the table currently under construction.
*/
void sqlite3CreateIndex(
Parse *pParse, /* All information about this parse */
*/
if( pTblName!=0 ){
- /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database
+ /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database
** to search for the table. 'Fix' the table name to this db
** before looking up the table.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TEMPDB
/* If the index name was unqualified, check if the table
** is a temp table. If so, set the database to 1. Do not do this
- ** if initialising a database schema.
+ ** if initializing a database schema.
*/
if( !db->init.busy ){
pTab = sqlite3SrcListLookup(pParse, pTblName);
assert( db->mallocFailed==0 || pTab==0 );
if( pTab==0 ) goto exit_create_index;
if( iDb==1 && db->aDb[iDb].pSchema!=pTab->pSchema ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"cannot create a TEMP index on non-TEMP table \"%s\"",
pTab->zName);
goto exit_create_index;
pDb = &db->aDb[iDb];
assert( pTab!=0 );
- if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
+ if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
&& db->init.busy==0
&& pTblName!=0
#if SQLITE_USER_AUTHENTICATION
/*
** Find the name of the index. Make sure there is not already another
- ** index or table with the same name.
+ ** index or table with the same name.
**
** Exception: If we are reading the names of permanent indices from the
** sqlite_schema table (because some other process changed the schema) and
}
}
- /*
- ** Allocate the index structure.
+ /*
+ ** Allocate the index structure.
*/
nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName);
nExtraCol = pPk ? pPk->nKeyCol : 1;
int x = pPk->aiColumn[j];
assert( x>=0 );
if( isDupColumn(pIndex, pIndex->nKeyCol, pPk, j) ){
- pIndex->nColumn--;
+ pIndex->nColumn--;
}else{
testcase( hasColumn(pIndex->aiColumn,pIndex->nKeyCol,x) );
pIndex->aiColumn[i] = x;
/* If this index contains every column of its table, then mark
** it as a covering index */
- assert( HasRowid(pTab)
+ assert( HasRowid(pTab)
|| pTab->iPKey<0 || sqlite3TableColumnToIndex(pIndex, pTab->iPKey)>=0 );
recomputeColumnsNotIndexed(pIndex);
if( pTblName!=0 && pIndex->nColumn>=pTab->nCol ){
if( pIdx->onError!=pIndex->onError ){
/* This constraint creates the same index as a previous
** constraint specified somewhere in the CREATE TABLE statement.
- ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this
+ ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this
** constraint and the previous equivalent constraint have explicit
** ON CONFLICT clauses this is an error. Otherwise, use the
** explicitly specified behavior for the index.
*/
if( !(pIdx->onError==OE_Default || pIndex->onError==OE_Default) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"conflicting ON CONFLICT clauses specified", 0);
}
if( pIdx->onError==OE_Default ){
if( !IN_RENAME_OBJECT ){
/* Link the new Index structure to its table and to the other
- ** in-memory database structures.
+ ** in-memory database structures.
*/
assert( pParse->nErr==0 );
if( db->init.busy ){
goto exit_create_index;
}
}
- p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash,
+ p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash,
pIndex->zName, pIndex);
if( p ){
assert( p==pIndex ); /* Malloc must have failed */
sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, 1, iDb);
/* Create the rootpage for the index using CreateIndex. But before
- ** doing so, code a Noop instruction and store its address in
- ** Index.tnum. This is required in case this index is actually a
- ** PRIMARY KEY and the table is actually a WITHOUT ROWID table. In
+ ** doing so, code a Noop instruction and store its address in
+ ** Index.tnum. This is required in case this index is actually a
+ ** PRIMARY KEY and the table is actually a WITHOUT ROWID table. In
** that case the convertToWithoutRowidTable() routine will replace
** the Noop with a Goto to jump over the VDBE code generated below. */
pIndex->tnum = (Pgno)sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Noop);
/* Add an entry in sqlite_schema for this index
*/
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"INSERT INTO %Q." LEGACY_SCHEMA_TABLE " VALUES('index',%Q,%Q,#%d,%Q);",
db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName,
pIndex->zName,
/* Indexes with default row estimates should not have stat1 data */
assert( !pIdx->hasStat1 );
- /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated
+ /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated
** number of rows in the table, or half the number of rows in the table
** for a partial index.
**
** database name prefix. Like this: "database.table". The pDatabase
** points to the table name and the pTable points to the database name.
** The SrcList.a[].zName field is filled with the table name which might
-** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase.
+** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase.
** SrcList.a[].zDatabase is filled with the database name from pTable,
** or with NULL if no database is specified.
**
SrcItem *pItem;
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
if( !p && pOnUsing!=0 && (pOnUsing->pOn || pOnUsing->pUsing) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s",
(pOnUsing->pOn ? "ON" : "USING")
);
goto append_from_error;
}
/*
-** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added
+** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added
** element of the source-list passed as the second argument.
*/
void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pIndexedBy){
assert( pItem->fg.isIndexedBy==0 );
assert( pItem->fg.isTabFunc==0 );
if( pIndexedBy->n==1 && !pIndexedBy->z ){
- /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y
+ /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y
** construct "indexed_opt" for details. */
pItem->fg.notIndexed = 1;
}else{
** Append the contents of SrcList p2 to SrcList p1 and return the resulting
** SrcList. Or, if an error occurs, return NULL. In all cases, p1 and p2
** are deleted by this function.
-*/
+*/
SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendList(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p1, SrcList *p2){
assert( p1 && p1->nSrc==1 );
if( p2 ){
assert( pParse->db!=0 );
assert( eType==TK_COMMIT || eType==TK_END || eType==TK_ROLLBACK );
isRollback = eType==TK_ROLLBACK;
- if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_TRANSACTION,
+ if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_TRANSACTION,
isRollback ? "ROLLBACK" : "COMMIT", 0, 0) ){
return;
}
/*
** This function is called by the parser when it parses a command to create,
-** release or rollback an SQL savepoint.
+** release or rollback an SQL savepoint.
*/
void sqlite3Savepoint(Parse *pParse, int op, Token *pName){
char *zName = sqlite3NameFromToken(pParse->db, pName);
if( db->aDb[1].pBt==0 && !pParse->explain ){
int rc;
Btree *pBt;
- static const int flags =
+ static const int flags =
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
/*
-** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each
+** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each
** attached database. Otherwise, invoke it for the database named zDb only.
*/
void sqlite3CodeVerifyNamedSchema(Parse *pParse, const char *zDb){
pToplevel->isMultiWrite = 1;
}
-/*
+/*
** The code generator calls this routine if is discovers that it is
-** possible to abort a statement prior to completion. In order to
+** possible to abort a statement prior to completion. In order to
** perform this abort without corrupting the database, we need to make
** sure that the statement is protected by a statement transaction.
**
** such that the abort must occur after the multiwrite. This makes
** some statements involving the REPLACE conflict resolution algorithm
** go a little faster. But taking advantage of this time dependency
-** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in
+** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in
** particular, it prevents us from writing an effective
** implementation of sqlite3AssertMayAbort()) and so we have chosen
** to take the safe route and skip the optimization.
StrAccum errMsg;
Table *pTab = pIdx->pTable;
- sqlite3StrAccumInit(&errMsg, pParse->db, 0, 0,
+ sqlite3StrAccumInit(&errMsg, pParse->db, 0, 0,
pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH]);
if( pIdx->aColExpr ){
sqlite3_str_appendf(&errMsg, "index '%q'", pIdx->zName);
}
}
zErr = sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&errMsg);
- sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse,
- IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY
+ sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse,
+ IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY
: SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_UNIQUE,
onError, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC, P5_ConstraintUnique);
}
void sqlite3RowidConstraint(
Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */
int onError, /* Conflict resolution algorithm */
- Table *pTab /* The table with the non-unique rowid */
+ Table *pTab /* The table with the non-unique rowid */
){
char *zMsg;
int rc;
sqlite3DbFree(db, pCte);
}
-/*
-** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a
-** WITH clause. The CTE described by teh third argument is added to
+/*
+** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a
+** WITH clause. The CTE described by the third argument is added to
** the WITH clause of the second argument. If the second argument is
** NULL, then a new WITH argument is created.
*/
** (as in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement) in this case it contains
** the name of a single table, as one might find in an INSERT, DELETE,
** or UPDATE statement. Look up that table in the symbol table and
-** return a pointer. Set an error message and return NULL if the table
+** return a pointer. Set an error message and return NULL if the table
** name is not found or if any other error occurs.
**
** The following fields are initialized appropriate in pSrc:
return pTab;
}
-/* Generate byte-code that will report the number of rows modified
+/* Generate byte-code that will report the number of rows modified
** by a DELETE, INSERT, or UPDATE statement.
*/
void sqlite3CodeChangeCount(Vdbe *v, int regCounter, const char *zColName){
** the table is not SQLITE_VTAB_INNOCUOUS.
**
** 3) It is a system table (i.e. sqlite_schema), this call is not
-** part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not
+** part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not
** been specified
**
** 4) The table is a shadow table, the database connection is in
** virtual tables if PRAGMA trusted_schema=ON.
*/
if( pParse->pToplevel!=0
- && pTab->u.vtab.p->eVtabRisk >
+ && pTab->u.vtab.p->eVtabRisk >
((pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_TrustedSchema)!=0)
){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unsafe use of virtual table \"%s\"",
}
/*
-** Check to make sure the given table is writable.
+** Check to make sure the given table is writable.
**
** If pTab is not writable -> generate an error message and return 1.
** If pTab is writable but other errors have occurred -> return 1.
return 1;
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW
- if( IsView(pTab)
+ if( IsView(pTab)
&& (pTrigger==0 || (pTrigger->bReturning && pTrigger->pNext==0))
){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,"cannot modify %s because it is a view",pTab->zName);
assert( pFrom->a[0].fg.isUsing==0 );
assert( pFrom->a[0].u3.pOn==0 );
}
- pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 0, pFrom, pWhere, 0, 0, pOrderBy,
+ pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 0, pFrom, pWhere, 0, 0, pOrderBy,
SF_IncludeHidden, pLimit);
sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, SRT_EphemTab, iCur);
sqlite3Select(pParse, pSel, &dest);
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
Expr *pLhs = NULL; /* LHS of IN(SELECT...) operator */
Expr *pInClause = NULL; /* WHERE rowid IN ( select ) */
- ExprList *pEList = NULL; /* Expression list contaning only pSelectRowid */
+ ExprList *pEList = NULL; /* Expression list containing only pSelectRowid*/
SrcList *pSelectSrc = NULL; /* SELECT rowid FROM x ... (dup of pSrc) */
Select *pSelect = NULL; /* Complete SELECT tree */
Table *pTab;
return pWhere;
}
- /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset
+ /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset
** term for the DELETE or UPDATE statement. For example:
** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
** becomes:
- ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN (
+ ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN (
** SELECT rowid FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
** );
*/
}
/* generate the SELECT expression tree. */
- pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, pEList, pSelectSrc, pWhere, 0 ,0,
+ pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, pEList, pSelectSrc, pWhere, 0 ,0,
pOrderBy,0,pLimit
);
int addrEphOpen = 0; /* Instruction to open the Ephemeral table */
int bComplex; /* True if there are triggers or FKs or
** subqueries in the WHERE clause */
-
+
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
int isView; /* True if attempting to delete from a view */
Trigger *pTrigger; /* List of table triggers, if required */
}
iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
assert( iDb<db->nDb );
- rcauth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_DELETE, pTab->zName, 0,
+ rcauth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_DELETE, pTab->zName, 0,
db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName);
assert( rcauth==SQLITE_OK || rcauth==SQLITE_DENY || rcauth==SQLITE_IGNORE );
if( rcauth==SQLITE_DENY ){
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER)
if( isView ){
- sqlite3MaterializeView(pParse, pTab,
+ sqlite3MaterializeView(pParse, pTab,
pWhere, pOrderBy, pLimit, iTabCur
);
iDataCur = iIdxCur = iTabCur;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRUNCATE_OPTIMIZATION
/* Special case: A DELETE without a WHERE clause deletes everything.
** It is easier just to erase the whole table. Prior to version 3.6.5,
- ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by
+ ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by
** API function sqlite3_count_changes) to be set incorrectly.
**
** The "rcauth==SQLITE_OK" terms is the
addrEphOpen = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, iEphCur, nPk);
sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk);
}
-
+
/* Construct a query to find the rowid or primary key for every row
** to be deleted, based on the WHERE clause. Set variable eOnePass
** to indicate the strategy used to implement this delete:
if( sqlite3WhereUsesDeferredSeek(pWInfo) ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_FinishSeek, iTabCur);
}
-
+
/* Keep track of the number of rows to be deleted */
if( memCnt ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, memCnt, 1);
}
-
+
/* Extract the rowid or primary key for the current row */
if( pPk ){
for(i=0; i<nPk; i++){
iKey = ++pParse->nMem;
sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iTabCur, -1, iKey);
}
-
+
if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
/* For ONEPASS, no need to store the rowid/primary-key. There is only
** one, so just keep it in its register(s) and fall through to the
}
sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo);
}
-
- /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are
+
+ /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are
** deleting from and all its indices. If this is a view, then the
- ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF
+ ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF
** triggers.
*/
if( !isView ){
sqlite3VdbeJumpHereOrPopInst(v, iAddrOnce);
}
}
-
+
/* Set up a loop over the rowids/primary-keys that were found in the
** where-clause loop above.
*/
addrLoop = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowSetRead, iRowSet, 0, iKey);
VdbeCoverage(v);
assert( nKey==1 );
- }
-
+ }
+
/* Delete the row */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){
sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(pParse, pTab, pTrigger, iDataCur, iIdxCur,
iKey, nKey, count, OE_Default, eOnePass, aiCurOnePass[1]);
}
-
+
/* End of the loop over all rowids/primary-keys. */
if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrBypass);
}else{
sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, addrLoop);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrLoop);
- }
+ }
} /* End non-truncate path */
/* Update the sqlite_sequence table by storing the content of the
sqlite3AutoincrementEnd(pParse);
}
- /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is
+ /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is
** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
** invoke the callback function.
*/
sqlite3AuthContextPop(&sContext);
sqlite3SrcListDelete(db, pTabList);
sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pWhere);
-#if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_UPDATE_DELETE_LIMIT)
+#if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_UPDATE_DELETE_LIMIT)
sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pOrderBy);
sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pLimit);
#endif
** and nPk before reading from it.
**
** If eMode is ONEPASS_MULTI, then this call is being made as part
-** of a ONEPASS delete that affects multiple rows. In this case, if
+** of a ONEPASS delete that affects multiple rows. In this case, if
** iIdxNoSeek is a valid cursor number (>=0) and is not the same as
** iDataCur, then its position should be preserved following the delete
** operation. Or, if iIdxNoSeek is not a valid cursor number, the
VdbeModuleComment((v, "BEGIN: GenRowDel(%d,%d,%d,%d)",
iDataCur, iIdxCur, iPk, (int)nPk));
- /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists
+ /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists
** (this can happen if a trigger program has already deleted it), do
** not attempt to delete it or fire any DELETE triggers. */
iLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotExists);
VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotFound);
}
-
+
/* If there are any triggers to fire, allocate a range of registers to
** use for the old.* references in the triggers. */
if( sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, 0, 0) || pTrigger ){
iOld = pParse->nMem+1;
pParse->nMem += (1 + pTab->nCol);
- /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be
+ /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be
** used by any BEFORE and AFTER triggers that exist. */
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, iPk, iOld);
for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){
/* Invoke BEFORE DELETE trigger programs. */
addrStart = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
);
- /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the
+ /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the
** row to be deleted again. It may be that the BEFORE triggers moved
** the cursor or already deleted the row that the cursor was
** pointing to.
}
/* Do FK processing. This call checks that any FK constraints that
- ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables)
+ ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables)
** are not violated by deleting this row. */
sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, iOld, 0, 0, 0);
}
/* Delete the index and table entries. Skip this step if pTab is really
** a view (in which case the only effect of the DELETE statement is to
- ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers).
+ ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers).
**
** If variable 'count' is non-zero, then this OP_Delete instruction should
** invoke the update-hook. The pre-update-hook, on the other hand should
** be invoked unless table pTab is a system table. The difference is that
- ** the update-hook is not invoked for rows removed by REPLACE, but the
+ ** the update-hook is not invoked for rows removed by REPLACE, but the
** pre-update-hook is.
- */
+ */
if( !IsView(pTab) ){
u8 p5 = 0;
sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur,0,iIdxNoSeek);
/* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to
** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key
- ** to the row just deleted. */
+ ** to the row just deleted. */
sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, 0, iOld, 0, 0);
/* Invoke AFTER DELETE trigger programs. */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
);
/* Jump here if the row had already been deleted before any BEFORE
- ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a
+ ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a
** RAISE(IGNORE) exception. */
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, iLabel);
VdbeModuleComment((v, "END: GenRowDel()"));
** its key into the same sequence of registers and if pPrior and pIdx share
** a column in common, then the register corresponding to that column already
** holds the correct value and the loading of that register is skipped.
-** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK
+** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK
** on a table with multiple indices, and especially with the ROWID or
** PRIMARY KEY columns of the index.
*/
if( pIdx->pPartIdxWhere ){
*piPartIdxLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
pParse->iSelfTab = iDataCur + 1;
- sqlite3ExprIfFalseDup(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel,
+ sqlite3ExprIfFalseDup(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel,
SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
pParse->iSelfTab = 0;
pPrior = 0; /* Ticket a9efb42811fa41ee 2019-11-02;
** Return the 'affinity' of the expression pExpr if any.
**
** If pExpr is a column, a reference to a column via an 'AS' alias,
-** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the
+** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the
** affinity of that column is returned. Otherwise, 0x00 is returned,
** indicating no affinity for the expression.
**
while( pExpr && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Skip) ){
assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE );
pExpr = pExpr->pLeft;
- }
+ }
return pExpr;
}
assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE );
pExpr = pExpr->pLeft;
}
- }
+ }
return pExpr;
}
while( p ){
int op = p->op;
if( op==TK_REGISTER ) op = p->op2;
- if( (op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && p->y.pTab!=0)
+ if( (op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && p->y.pTab!=0)
|| op==TK_COLUMN || op==TK_TRIGGER
){
int j;
break;
}
}
- if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){
+ if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){
pColl = 0;
}
return pColl;
/*
** Return the collation sequence for the expression pExpr. If
** there is no defined collating sequence, return a pointer to the
-** defautl collation sequence.
+** default collation sequence.
**
** See also: sqlite3ExprCollSeq()
**
** it is not considered.
*/
CollSeq *sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(
- Parse *pParse,
- const Expr *pLeft,
+ Parse *pParse,
+ const Expr *pLeft,
const Expr *pRight
){
CollSeq *pColl;
return pColl;
}
-/* Expresssion p is a comparison operator. Return a collation sequence
+/* Expression p is a comparison operator. Return a collation sequence
** appropriate for the comparison operator.
**
** This is normally just a wrapper around sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq().
}
/*
-** If the expression passed as the only argument is of type TK_VECTOR
+** If the expression passed as the only argument is of type TK_VECTOR
** return the number of expressions in the vector. Or, if the expression
** is a sub-select, return the number of columns in the sub-select. For
** any other type of expression, return 1.
** sqlite3ExprCode() will generate all necessary code to compute
** the iField-th column of the vector expression pVector.
**
-** It is ok for pVector to be a scalar (as long as iField==0).
+** It is ok for pVector to be a scalar (as long as iField==0).
** In that case, this routine works like sqlite3ExprDup().
**
** The caller owns the returned Expr object and is responsible for
/*
** If expression pExpr is of type TK_SELECT, generate code to evaluate
-** it. Return the register in which the result is stored (or, if the
+** it. Return the register in which the result is stored (or, if the
** sub-select returns more than one column, the first in an array
** of registers in which the result is stored).
**
** the register number of a register that contains the value of
** element iField of the vector.
**
-** If pVector is a TK_SELECT expression, then code for it must have
+** If pVector is a TK_SELECT expression, then code for it must have
** already been generated using the exprCodeSubselect() routine. In this
** case parameter regSelect should be the first in an array of registers
-** containing the results of the sub-select.
+** containing the results of the sub-select.
**
** If pVector is of type TK_VECTOR, then code for the requested field
** is generated. In this case (*pRegFree) may be set to the number of
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused");
return;
}
- assert( pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_NE
- || pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
- || pExpr->op==TK_LT || pExpr->op==TK_GT
- || pExpr->op==TK_LE || pExpr->op==TK_GE
+ assert( pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_NE
+ || pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
+ || pExpr->op==TK_LT || pExpr->op==TK_GT
+ || pExpr->op==TK_LE || pExpr->op==TK_GE
);
assert( pExpr->op==op || (pExpr->op==TK_IS && op==TK_EQ)
|| (pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT && op==TK_NE) );
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 1, dest);
for(i=0; 1 /*Loop exits by "break"*/; i++){
int regFree1 = 0, regFree2 = 0;
- Expr *pL = 0, *pR = 0;
+ Expr *pL = 0, *pR = 0;
int r1, r2;
assert( i>=0 && i<nLeft );
if( addrCmp ) sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrCmp);
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int mxHeight = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_EXPR_DEPTH];
if( nHeight>mxHeight ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", mxHeight
);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
/*
-** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an
-** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or
+** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an
+** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or
** Expr.pSelect member has a height of 1. Any other expression
-** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other
+** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other
** referenced Expr plus one.
**
** Also propagate EP_Propagate flags up from Expr.x.pList to Expr.flags,
** leave an error in pParse.
**
** Also propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into
-** Expr.flags.
+** Expr.flags.
*/
void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){
if( pParse->nErr ) return;
#else /* ABOVE: Height enforcement enabled. BELOW: Height enforcement off */
/*
** Propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into
-** Expr.flags.
+** Expr.flags.
*/
void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){
if( pParse->nErr ) return;
}
#if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0
pNew->nHeight = 1;
-#endif
+#endif
}
return pNew;
}
/*
** Expression list pEList is a list of vector values. This function
** converts the contents of pEList to a VALUES(...) Select statement
-** returning 1 row for each element of the list. For example, the
+** returning 1 row for each element of the list. For example, the
** expression list:
**
** ( (1,2), (3,4) (5,6) )
nExprElem = 1;
}
if( nExprElem!=nElem ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "IN(...) element has %d term%s - expected %d",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "IN(...) element has %d term%s - expected %d",
nExprElem, nExprElem>1?"s":"", nElem
);
break;
return pLeft;
}else{
u32 f = pLeft->flags | pRight->flags;
- if( (f&(EP_OuterON|EP_InnerON|EP_IsFalse))==EP_IsFalse
+ if( (f&(EP_OuterON|EP_InnerON|EP_IsFalse))==EP_IsFalse
&& !IN_RENAME_OBJECT
){
sqlite3ExprDeferredDelete(pParse, pLeft);
}
assert( !ExprHasProperty(pNew, EP_InnerON|EP_OuterON) );
pNew->w.iOfst = (int)(pToken->z - pParse->zTail);
- if( pList
+ if( pList
&& pList->nExpr > pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_FUNCTION_ARG]
&& !pParse->nested
){
/* Functions prohibited in triggers and views if:
** (1) tagged with SQLITE_DIRECTONLY
** (2) not tagged with SQLITE_INNOCUOUS (which means it
- ** is tagged with SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE) and
+ ** is tagged with SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE) and
** SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRUSTED_SCHEMA is off (meaning
** that the schema is possibly tainted).
*/
/*
** Assign a variable number to an expression that encodes a wildcard
-** in the original SQL statement.
+** in the original SQL statement.
**
** Wildcards consisting of a single "?" are assigned the next sequential
** variable number.
/*
** Arrange to cause pExpr to be deleted when the pParse is deleted.
** This is similar to sqlite3ExprDelete() except that the delete is
-** deferred untilthe pParse is deleted.
+** deferred until the pParse is deleted.
**
** The pExpr might be deleted immediately on an OOM error.
**
}
/*
-** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure
+** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure
** passed as the first argument. This is always one of EXPR_FULLSIZE,
** EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE or EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE.
*/
** to store a copy of an expression or expression tree. They differ in
** how much of the tree is measured.
**
-** dupedExprStructSize() Size of only the Expr structure
+** dupedExprStructSize() Size of only the Expr structure
** dupedExprNodeSize() Size of Expr + space for token
** dupedExprSize() Expr + token + subtree components
**
***************************************************************************
**
-** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together:
-** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and
+** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together:
+** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and
** (2) the EP_xxx flags that indicate what the structure size should be.
** The return values is always one of:
**
assert( flags==EXPRDUP_REDUCE || flags==0 ); /* Only one flag value allowed */
assert( EXPR_FULLSIZE<=0xfff );
assert( (0xfff & (EP_Reduced|EP_TokenOnly))==0 );
- if( 0==flags || p->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN
+ if( 0==flags || p->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC
|| ExprHasProperty(p, EP_WinFunc)
#endif
nSize = EXPR_FULLSIZE;
}else{
assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) );
- assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_OuterON) );
+ assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_OuterON) );
assert( !ExprHasVVAProperty(p, EP_NoReduce) );
if( p->pLeft || p->x.pList ){
nSize = EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE | EP_Reduced;
}
/*
-** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy
+** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy
** of the Expr structure and a copy of the Expr.u.zToken string (if that
** string is defined.)
*/
}
/*
-** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the
+** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the
** expression passed as the first argument. The second argument is a
** mask containing EXPRDUP_XXX flags.
**
** The value returned includes space to create a copy of the Expr struct
** itself and the buffer referred to by Expr.u.zToken, if any.
**
-** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes
-** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft
-** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or
+** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes
+** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft
+** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or
** descended from the Expr.x.pList or Expr.x.pSelect variables).
*/
static int dupedExprSize(const Expr *p, int flags){
}
/*
-** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer
-** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough
+** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer
+** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough
** to store the copy of expression p, the copies of p->u.zToken
** (if applicable), and the copies of the p->pLeft and p->pRight expressions,
** if any. Before returning, *pzBuffer is set to the first byte past the
}else{
u32 nSize = (u32)exprStructSize(p);
memcpy(zAlloc, p, nSize);
- if( nSize<EXPR_FULLSIZE ){
+ if( nSize<EXPR_FULLSIZE ){
memset(&zAlloc[nSize], 0, EXPR_FULLSIZE-nSize);
}
}
}
/*
-** Create and return a deep copy of the object passed as the second
+** Create and return a deep copy of the object passed as the second
** argument. If an OOM condition is encountered, NULL is returned
** and the db->mallocFailed flag set.
*/
** without effecting the originals.
**
** The expression list, ID, and source lists return by sqlite3ExprListDup(),
-** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded
+** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded
** by subsequent calls to sqlite*ListAppend() routines.
**
** Any tables that the SrcList might point to are not duplicated.
Expr *pOldExpr = pOldItem->pExpr;
Expr *pNewExpr;
pItem->pExpr = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pOldExpr, flags);
- if( pOldExpr
+ if( pOldExpr
&& pOldExpr->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN
- && (pNewExpr = pItem->pExpr)!=0
+ && (pNewExpr = pItem->pExpr)!=0
){
if( pNewExpr->pRight ){
pPriorSelectColOld = pOldExpr->pRight;
/*
** If cursors, triggers, views and subqueries are all omitted from
-** the build, then none of the following routines, except for
+** the build, then none of the following routines, except for
** sqlite3SelectDup(), can be called. sqlite3SelectDup() is sometimes
** called with a NULL argument.
*/
pNewItem->u2.pCteUse->nUse++;
}
if( pNewItem->fg.isTabFunc ){
- pNewItem->u1.pFuncArg =
+ pNewItem->u1.pFuncArg =
sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pOldItem->u1.pFuncArg, flags);
}
pTab = pNewItem->pTab = pOldItem->pTab;
struct ExprList_item *pItem;
ExprList *pNew;
pList->nAlloc *= 2;
- pNew = sqlite3DbRealloc(db, pList,
+ pNew = sqlite3DbRealloc(db, pList,
sizeof(*pList)+(pList->nAlloc-1)*sizeof(pList->a[0]));
if( pNew==0 ){
sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pList);
if( NEVER(pColumns==0) ) goto vector_append_error;
if( pExpr==0 ) goto vector_append_error;
- /* If the RHS is a vector, then we can immediately check to see that
- ** the size of the RHS and LHS match. But if the RHS is a SELECT,
+ /* If the RHS is a vector, then we can immediately check to see that
+ ** the size of the RHS and LHS match. But if the RHS is a SELECT,
** wildcards ("*") in the result set of the SELECT must be expanded before
** we can do the size check, so defer the size check until code generation.
*/
Expr *pFirst = pList->a[iFirst].pExpr;
assert( pFirst!=0 );
assert( pFirst->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN );
-
+
/* Store the SELECT statement in pRight so it will be deleted when
** sqlite3ExprListDelete() is called */
pFirst->pRight = pExpr;
assert( p->nExpr>0 );
assert( SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED<0 && SQLITE_SO_ASC==0 && SQLITE_SO_DESC>0 );
- assert( iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED
- || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_ASC
- || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_DESC
+ assert( iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED
+ || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_ASC
+ || iSortOrder==SQLITE_SO_DESC
);
- assert( eNulls==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED
- || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_ASC
- || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_DESC
+ assert( eNulls==SQLITE_SO_UNDEFINED
+ || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_ASC
+ || eNulls==SQLITE_SO_DESC
);
pItem = &p->a[p->nExpr-1];
** when parsing an existing schema out of the sqlite_schema table and 4
** when processing a new CREATE TABLE statement. A bound parameter raises
** an error for new statements, but is silently converted
-** to NULL for existing schemas. This allows sqlite_schema tables that
+** to NULL for existing schemas. This allows sqlite_schema tables that
** contain a bound parameter because they were generated by older versions
** of SQLite to be parsed by newer versions of SQLite without raising a
** malformed schema error.
/*
** Walk the expression tree passed as the first argument. Return non-zero
-** if the expression consists entirely of constants or copies of terms
+** if the expression consists entirely of constants or copies of terms
** in pGroupBy that sort with the BINARY collation sequence.
**
** This routine is used to determine if a term of the HAVING clause can
/*
** Walk an expression tree for the DEFAULT field of a column definition
-** in a CREATE TABLE statement. Return non-zero if the expression is
+** in a CREATE TABLE statement. Return non-zero if the expression is
** acceptable for use as a DEFAULT. That is to say, return non-zero if
** the expression is constant or a function call with constant arguments.
** Return and 0 if there are any variables.
** Return FALSE if there is no chance that the expression can be NULL.
**
** If the expression might be NULL or if the expression is too complex
-** to tell return TRUE.
+** to tell return TRUE.
**
** This routine is used as an optimization, to skip OP_IsNull opcodes
** when we know that a value cannot be NULL. Hence, a false positive
}
/*
-** pX is the RHS of an IN operator. If pX is a SELECT statement
+** pX is the RHS of an IN operator. If pX is a SELECT statement
** that can be simplified to a direct table access, then return
** a pointer to the SELECT statement. If pX is not a SELECT statement,
** or if the SELECT statement needs to be materialized into a transient
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
/*
-** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the
+** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the
** right-hand side. Return TRUE if that list is constant.
*/
static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
** an ephemeral table might need to be generated from the RHS and then
** pX->iTable made to point to the ephemeral table instead of an
** existing table. In this case, the creation and initialization of the
-** ephmeral table might be put inside of a subroutine, the EP_Subrtn flag
+** ephemeral table might be put inside of a subroutine, the EP_Subrtn flag
** will be set on pX and the pX->y.sub fields will be set to show where
** the subroutine is coded.
**
** to be unique - either because it is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or due to
** a UNIQUE constraint or index.
**
-** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used
-** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must
-** be used unless <columns> is a single INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column or an
+** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used
+** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must
+** be used unless <columns> is a single INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column or an
** index can be found with the specified <columns> as its left-most.
**
** If the IN_INDEX_NOOP_OK and IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP are both set and
**
** When the b-tree is being used for membership tests, the calling function
** might need to know whether or not the RHS side of the IN operator
-** contains a NULL. If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and
+** contains a NULL. If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and
** if there is any chance that the (...) might contain a NULL value at
** runtime, then a register is allocated and the register number written
** to *prRhsHasNull. If there is no chance that the (...) contains a
mustBeUnique = (inFlags & IN_INDEX_LOOP)!=0;
iTab = pParse->nTab++;
- /* If the RHS of this IN(...) operator is a SELECT, and if it matters
+ /* If the RHS of this IN(...) operator is a SELECT, and if it matters
** whether or not the SELECT result contains NULL values, check whether
- ** or not NULL is actually possible (it may not be, for example, due
+ ** or not NULL is actually possible (it may not be, for example, due
** to NOT NULL constraints in the schema). If no NULL values are possible,
** set prRhsHasNull to 0 before continuing. */
if( prRhsHasNull && ExprUseXSelect(pX) ){
}
/* Check to see if an existing table or index can be used to
- ** satisfy the query. This is preferable to generating a new
+ ** satisfy the query. This is preferable to generating a new
** ephemeral table. */
if( pParse->nErr==0 && (p = isCandidateForInOpt(pX))!=0 ){
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */
int affinity_ok = 1;
int i;
- /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform each
+ /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform each
** comparison is the same as the affinity of each column in table
** on the RHS of the IN operator. If it not, it is not possible to
** use any index of the RHS table. */
continue; /* This index is not unique over the IN RHS columns */
}
}
-
+
colUsed = 0; /* Columns of index used so far */
for(i=0; i<nExpr; i++){
Expr *pLhs = sqlite3VectorFieldSubexpr(pX->pLeft, i);
Expr *pRhs = pEList->a[i].pExpr;
CollSeq *pReq = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(pParse, pLhs, pRhs);
int j;
-
+
for(j=0; j<nExpr; j++){
if( pIdx->aiColumn[j]!=pRhs->iColumn ) continue;
assert( pIdx->azColl[j] );
colUsed |= mCol;
if( aiMap ) aiMap[i] = j;
}
-
+
assert( i==nExpr || colUsed!=(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) );
if( colUsed==(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) ){
/* If we reach this point, that means the index pIdx is usable */
VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->zName));
assert( IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC == IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC+1 );
eType = IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC + pIdx->aSortOrder[0];
-
+
if( prRhsHasNull ){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK
i64 mask = (1<<nExpr)-1;
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Dup8(v, OP_ColumnsUsed,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Dup8(v, OP_ColumnsUsed,
iTab, 0, 0, (u8*)&mask, P4_INT64);
#endif
*prRhsHasNull = ++pParse->nMem;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
/*
-** Argument pExpr is an (?, ?...) IN(...) expression. This
-** function allocates and returns a nul-terminated string containing
+** Argument pExpr is an (?, ?...) IN(...) expression. This
+** function allocates and returns a nul-terminated string containing
** the affinities to be used for each column of the comparison.
**
** It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure that the returned
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
/*
-** Load the Parse object passed as the first argument with an error
+** Load the Parse object passed as the first argument with an error
** message of the form:
**
** "sub-select returns N columns - expected M"
-*/
+*/
void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpect){
if( pParse->nErr==0 ){
const char *zFmt = "sub-select returns %d columns - expected %d";
/*
** Expression pExpr is a vector that has been used in a context where
-** it is not permitted. If pExpr is a sub-select vector, this routine
+** it is not permitted. If pExpr is a sub-select vector, this routine
** loads the Parse object with a message of the form:
**
** "sub-select returns N columns - expected 1"
** Or, if it is a regular scalar vector:
**
** "row value misused"
-*/
+*/
void sqlite3VectorErrorMsg(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
if( ExprUseXSelect(pExpr) ){
** x IN (SELECT a FROM b) -- IN operator with subquery on the right
**
** The pExpr parameter is the IN operator. The cursor number for the
-** constructed ephermeral table is returned. The first time the ephemeral
+** constructed ephemeral table is returned. The first time the ephemeral
** table is computed, the cursor number is also stored in pExpr->iTable,
** however the cursor number returned might not be the same, as it might
** have been duplicated using OP_OpenDup.
if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_VarSelect) && pParse->iSelfTab==0 ){
/* Reuse of the RHS is allowed */
/* If this routine has already been coded, but the previous code
- ** might not have been invoked yet, so invoke it now as a subroutine.
+ ** might not have been invoked yet, so invoke it now as a subroutine.
*/
if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Subrtn) ){
addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v);
if( rc ){
sqlite3KeyInfoUnref(pKeyInfo);
return;
- }
+ }
assert( pKeyInfo!=0 ); /* OOM will cause exit after sqlite3Select() */
assert( pEList!=0 );
assert( pEList->nExpr>0 );
**
** The pExpr parameter is the SELECT or EXISTS operator to be coded.
**
-** Return the register that holds the result. For a multi-column SELECT,
+** Return the register that holds the result. For a multi-column SELECT,
** the result is stored in a contiguous array of registers and the
** return value is the register of the left-most result column.
** Return 0 if an error occurs.
if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_VarSelect) ){
addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v);
}
-
+
/* For a SELECT, generate code to put the values for all columns of
** the first row into an array of registers and return the index of
** the first register.
** If this is an EXISTS, write an integer 0 (not exists) or 1 (exists)
** into a register and return that register number.
**
- ** In both cases, the query is augmented with "LIMIT 1". Any
+ ** In both cases, the query is augmented with "LIMIT 1". Any
** preexisting limit is discarded in place of the new LIMIT 1.
*/
ExplainQueryPlan2(addrExplain, (pParse, 1, "%sSCALAR SUBQUERY %d",
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
/*
-** Expr pIn is an IN(...) expression. This function checks that the
-** sub-select on the RHS of the IN() operator has the same number of
-** columns as the vector on the LHS. Or, if the RHS of the IN() is not
+** Expr pIn is an IN(...) expression. This function checks that the
+** sub-select on the RHS of the IN() operator has the same number of
+** columns as the vector on the LHS. Or, if the RHS of the IN() is not
** a sub-query, that the LHS is a vector of size 1.
*/
int sqlite3ExprCheckIN(Parse *pParse, Expr *pIn){
** x IN (SELECT ...)
** x IN (value, value, ...)
**
-** The left-hand side (LHS) is a scalar or vector expression. The
+** The left-hand side (LHS) is a scalar or vector expression. The
** right-hand side (RHS) is an array of zero or more scalar values, or a
** subquery. If the RHS is a subquery, the number of result columns must
** match the number of columns in the vector on the LHS. If the RHS is
-** a list of values, the LHS must be a scalar.
+** a list of values, the LHS must be a scalar.
**
** The IN operator is true if the LHS value is contained within the RHS.
-** The result is false if the LHS is definitely not in the RHS. The
-** result is NULL if the presence of the LHS in the RHS cannot be
+** The result is false if the LHS is definitely not in the RHS. The
+** result is NULL if the presence of the LHS in the RHS cannot be
** determined due to NULLs.
**
-** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not
+** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not
** contained within the RHS. If due to NULLs we cannot determine if the LHS
** is contained in the RHS then jump to destIfNull. If the LHS is contained
** within the RHS then fall through.
int destStep6 = 0; /* Start of code for Step 6 */
int addrTruthOp; /* Address of opcode that determines the IN is true */
int destNotNull; /* Jump here if a comparison is not true in step 6 */
- int addrTop; /* Top of the step-6 loop */
+ int addrTop; /* Top of the step-6 loop */
int iTab = 0; /* Index to use */
u8 okConstFactor = pParse->okConstFactor;
aiMap, &iTab);
assert( pParse->nErr || nVector==1 || eType==IN_INDEX_EPH
- || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC
+ || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC
);
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
/* Confirm that aiMap[] contains nVector integer values between 0 and
}
#endif
- /* Code the LHS, the <expr> from "<expr> IN (...)". If the LHS is a
- ** vector, then it is stored in an array of nVector registers starting
+ /* Code the LHS, the <expr> from "<expr> IN (...)". If the LHS is a
+ ** vector, then it is stored in an array of nVector registers starting
** at r1.
**
** sqlite3FindInIndex() might have reordered the fields of the LHS vector
}
/* Step 5. If we do not care about the difference between NULL and
- ** FALSE, then just return false.
+ ** FALSE, then just return false.
*/
if( destIfFalse==destIfNull ) sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, destIfFalse);
** Generate an instruction that will put the floating point
** value described by z[0..n-1] into register iMem.
**
-** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the
+** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the
** z[n] character is guaranteed to be something that does not look
** like the continuation of the number.
*/
/*
** Generate code that will extract the iColumn-th column from
-** table pTab and store the column value in register iReg.
+** table pTab and store the column value in register iReg.
**
** There must be an open cursor to pTab in iTable when this routine
** is called. If iColumn<0 then code is generated that extracts the rowid.
/*
** Evaluate an expression (either a vector or a scalar expression) and store
-** the result in continguous temporary registers. Return the index of
+** the result in contiguous temporary registers. Return the index of
** the first register used to store the result.
**
** If the returned result register is a temporary scalar, then also write
*/
static void setDoNotMergeFlagOnCopy(Vdbe *v){
if( sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp(v)->opcode==OP_Copy ){
- sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1); /* Tag trailing OP_Copy as not mergable */
+ sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1); /* Tag trailing OP_Copy as not mergeable */
}
}
break;
}
#endif
- default: {
+ default: {
/* The UNLIKELY() function is a no-op. The result is the value
** of the first argument.
*/
case INLINEFUNC_expr_compare: {
/* Compare two expressions using sqlite3ExprCompare() */
assert( nFarg==2 );
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer,
sqlite3ExprCompare(0,pFarg->a[0].pExpr, pFarg->a[1].pExpr,-1),
target);
break;
case INLINEFUNC_expr_implies_expr: {
/* Compare two expressions using sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr() */
assert( nFarg==2 );
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer,
sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr(pParse,pFarg->a[0].pExpr, pFarg->a[1].pExpr,-1),
target);
break;
}
case INLINEFUNC_implies_nonnull_row: {
- /* REsult of sqlite3ExprImpliesNonNullRow() */
+ /* Result of sqlite3ExprImpliesNonNullRow() */
Expr *pA1;
assert( nFarg==2 );
pA1 = pFarg->a[1].pExpr;
if( pA1->op==TK_COLUMN ){
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer,
sqlite3ExprImpliesNonNullRow(pFarg->a[0].pExpr,pA1->iTable,1),
target);
}else{
expr_code_doover:
if( pExpr==0 ){
op = TK_NULL;
- }else if( pParse->pIdxEpr!=0
+ }else if( pParse->pIdxEpr!=0
&& !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_Leaf)
&& (r1 = sqlite3IndexedExprLookup(pParse, pExpr, target))>=0
){
}else if( pCol->iColumn<0 ){
VdbeComment((v,"%s.rowid",pTab->zName));
}else{
- VdbeComment((v,"%s.%s",
+ VdbeComment((v,"%s.%s",
pTab->zName, pTab->aCol[pCol->iColumn].zCnName));
if( pTab->aCol[pCol->iColumn].affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_RealAffinity, target);
case TK_BITOR:
case TK_SLASH:
case TK_LSHIFT:
- case TK_RSHIFT:
+ case TK_RSHIFT:
case TK_CONCAT: {
assert( TK_AND==OP_And ); testcase( op==TK_AND );
assert( TK_OR==OP_Or ); testcase( op==TK_OR );
assert( SQLITE_FUNC_LENGTH==OPFLAG_LENGTHARG );
assert( SQLITE_FUNC_TYPEOF==OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG );
testcase( pDef->funcFlags & OPFLAG_LENGTHARG );
- pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 =
+ pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 =
pDef->funcFlags & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG);
}
}
** see if it is a column in a virtual table. This is done because
** the left operand of infix functions (the operand we want to
** control overloading) ends up as the second argument to the
- ** function. The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to
+ ** function. The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to
** "glob(B,A). We want to use the A in "A glob B" to test
** for function overloading. But we use the B term in "glob(B,A)".
*/
}
#endif
if( pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){
- if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl;
+ if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl;
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0, 0, 0, (char *)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ);
}
sqlite3VdbeAddFunctionCall(pParse, constMask, r1, target, nFarg,
**
** The expression is implemented using an OP_Param opcode. The p1
** parameter is set to 0 for an old.rowid reference, or to (i+1)
- ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where
+ ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where
** i is the index of the column. For a new.rowid reference, p1 is
** set to (n+1), where n is the number of columns in each pseudo-table.
** For a reference to any other column in the new.* pseudo-table, p1
**
** p1==0 -> old.rowid p1==3 -> new.rowid
** p1==1 -> old.a p1==4 -> new.a
- ** p1==2 -> old.b p1==5 -> new.b
+ ** p1==2 -> old.b p1==5 -> new.b
*/
Table *pTab;
int iCol;
assert( ExprUseYTab(pExpr) );
pTab = pExpr->y.pTab;
iCol = pExpr->iColumn;
- p1 = pExpr->iTable * (pTab->nCol+1) + 1
+ p1 = pExpr->iTable * (pTab->nCol+1) + 1
+ sqlite3TableColumnToStorage(pTab, iCol);
assert( pExpr->iTable==0 || pExpr->iTable==1 );
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
case TK_RAISE: {
- assert( pExpr->affExpr==OE_Rollback
+ assert( pExpr->affExpr==OE_Rollback
|| pExpr->affExpr==OE_Abort
|| pExpr->affExpr==OE_Fail
|| pExpr->affExpr==OE_Ignore
** the end of the prepared statement in the initialization section.
**
** If regDest>=0 then the result is always stored in that register and the
-** result is not reusable. If regDest<0 then this routine is free to
-** store the value whereever it wants. The register where the expression
+** result is not reusable. If regDest<0 then this routine is free to
+** store the value wherever it wants. The register where the expression
** is stored is returned. When regDest<0, two identical expressions might
** code to the same register, if they do not contain function calls and hence
** are factored out into the initialization section at the end of the
**
** x BETWEEN y AND z
**
-** The above is equivalent to
+** The above is equivalent to
**
** x>=y AND x<=z
**
}
}
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree1);
- sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2);
+ sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2);
}
/*
}
#endif
default: {
- default_expr:
+ default_expr:
if( ExprAlwaysFalse(pExpr) ){
sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, dest);
}else if( ExprAlwaysTrue(pExpr) ){
int res = 0;
int iVar;
sqlite3_value *pL, *pR = 0;
-
+
sqlite3ValueFromExpr(pParse->db, pExpr, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB, &pR);
if( pR ){
iVar = pVar->iColumn;
** an incorrect 0 or 1 could lead to a malfunction.
**
** If pParse is not NULL then TK_VARIABLE terms in pA with bindings in
-** pParse->pReprepare can be matched against literals in pB. The
+** pParse->pReprepare can be matched against literals in pB. The
** pParse->pVdbe->expmask bitmask is updated for each variable referenced.
-** If pParse is NULL (the normal case) then any TK_VARIABLE term in
+** If pParse is NULL (the normal case) then any TK_VARIABLE term in
** Argument pParse should normally be NULL. If it is not NULL and pA or
** pB causes a return value of 2.
*/
if( pB->op==TK_COLLATE && sqlite3ExprCompare(pParse, pA,pB->pLeft,iTab)<2 ){
return 1;
}
- if( pA->op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && pB->op==TK_COLUMN
+ if( pA->op==TK_AGG_COLUMN && pB->op==TK_COLUMN
&& pB->iTable<0 && pA->iTable==iTab
){
/* fall through */
return 0;
}else if( pA->op==TK_COLLATE ){
if( sqlite3_stricmp(pA->u.zToken,pB->u.zToken)!=0 ) return 2;
- }else
+ }else
if( pB->u.zToken!=0
&& pA->op!=TK_COLUMN
&& pA->op!=TK_AGG_COLUMN
/*
** Compare two ExprList objects. Return 0 if they are identical, 1
-** if they are certainly different, or 2 if it is not possible to
+** if they are certainly different, or 2 if it is not possible to
** determine if they are identical or not.
**
** If any subelement of pB has Expr.iTable==(-1) then it is allowed
case TK_MINUS:
case TK_BITOR:
case TK_LSHIFT:
- case TK_RSHIFT:
- case TK_CONCAT:
+ case TK_RSHIFT:
+ case TK_CONCAT:
seenNot = 1;
/* no break */ deliberate_fall_through
case TK_STAR:
** pE1: x!=123 pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: true
** pE1: x!=?1 pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: true
** pE1: x IS NULL pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: false
-** pE1: x IS ?2 pE2: x IS NOT NULL Reuslt: false
+** pE1: x IS ?2 pE2: x IS NOT NULL Result: false
**
** When comparing TK_COLUMN nodes between pE1 and pE2, if pE2 has
** Expr.iTable<0 then assume a table number given by iTab.
**
-** If pParse is not NULL, then the values of bound variables in pE1 are
+** If pParse is not NULL, then the values of bound variables in pE1 are
** compared against literal values in pE2 and pParse->pVdbe->expmask is
-** modified to record which bound variables are referenced. If pParse
+** modified to record which bound variables are referenced. If pParse
** is NULL, then false will be returned if pE1 contains any bound variables.
**
** When in doubt, return false. Returning true might give a performance
**
** pWalker->mWFlags is non-zero if this inquiry is being undertaking on
** behalf of a RIGHT JOIN (or FULL JOIN). That makes a difference when
-** evaluting terms in the ON claue of an inner join.
+** evaluating terms in the ON clause of an inner join.
**
** This routine controls an optimization. False positives (setting
** pWalker->eCode to 1 when it should not be) are deadly, but false-negatives
testcase( pExpr->op==TK_AND );
bothImplyNotNullRow(pWalker, pExpr->pLeft, pExpr->pRight);
return WRC_Prune;
-
+
case TK_IN:
/* Beware of "x NOT IN ()" and "x NOT IN (SELECT 1 WHERE false)",
** both of which can be true. But apart from these cases, if
};
/*
-** Check to see if there are references to columns in table
+** Check to see if there are references to columns in table
** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->iCur can be satisfied using the index
** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->pIdx.
*/
}
-/* Structure used to pass information throught the Walker in order to
+/* Structure used to pass information throughout the Walker in order to
** implement sqlite3ReferencesSrcList().
*/
struct RefSrcList {
}
/* This is the Walker EXPR callback for sqlite3ReferencesSrcList().
-**
+**
** Set the 0x01 bit of pWalker->eCode if there is a reference to any
** of the tables shown in RefSrcList.pRef.
**
&i
);
return i;
-}
+}
/*
** Add a new element to the pAggInfo->aFunc[] array. Return the index of
static int addAggInfoFunc(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
int i;
pInfo->aFunc = sqlite3ArrayAllocate(
- db,
+ db,
pInfo->aFunc,
sizeof(pInfo->aFunc[0]),
&pInfo->nFunc,
/*
** Search the AggInfo object for an aCol[] entry that has iTable and iColumn.
-** Return the index in aCol[] of the entry that describes that column.
+** Return the index in aCol[] of the entry that describes that column.
**
** If no prior entry is found, create a new one and return -1. The
-** new column will have an idex of pAggInfo->nColumn-1.
+** new column will have an index of pAggInfo->nColumn-1.
*/
static void findOrCreateAggInfoColumn(
Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */
if( (pNC->ncFlags & NC_InAggFunc)==0
&& pWalker->walkerDepth==pExpr->op2
){
- /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate
+ /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate
** function that is already in the pAggInfo structure
*/
struct AggInfo_func *pItem = pAggInfo->aFunc;
pItem->pFExpr = pExpr;
assert( ExprUseUToken(pExpr) );
pItem->pFunc = sqlite3FindFunction(pParse->db,
- pExpr->u.zToken,
+ pExpr->u.zToken,
pExpr->x.pList ? pExpr->x.pList->nExpr : 0, enc, 0);
if( pExpr->flags & EP_Distinct ){
pItem->iDistinct = pParse->nTab++;
** Implementation of the abs() function.
**
** IMP: R-23979-26855 The abs(X) function returns the absolute value of
-** the numeric argument X.
+** the numeric argument X.
*/
static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
assert( argc==1 );
return;
}
iVal = -iVal;
- }
+ }
sqlite3_result_int64(context, iVal);
break;
}
*/
if( r<-4503599627370496.0 || r>+4503599627370496.0 ){
/* The value has no fractional part so there is nothing to round */
- }else if( n==0 ){
+ }else if( n==0 ){
r = (double)((sqlite_int64)(r+(r<0?-0.5:+0.5)));
}else{
zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf("%.*f",n,r);
#define noopFunc versionFunc /* Substitute function - never called */
/*
-** Implementation of random(). Return a random integer.
+** Implementation of random(). Return a random integer.
*/
static void randomFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
UNUSED_PARAMETER2(NotUsed, NotUsed2);
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(r), &r);
if( r<0 ){
- /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000
+ /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000
** (or -9223372036854775808) since when you do abs() of that
** number of you get the same value back again. To do this
** in a way that is testable, mask the sign bit off of negative
- ** values, resulting in a positive value. Then take the
+ ** values, resulting in a positive value. Then take the
** 2s complement of that positive value. The end result can
** therefore be no less than -9223372036854775807.
*/
** value is the same as the sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() API function.
*/
static void last_insert_rowid(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int NotUsed,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int NotUsed,
sqlite3_value **NotUsed2
){
sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context);
/*
** For LIKE and GLOB matching on EBCDIC machines, assume that every
-** character is exactly one byte in size. Also, provde the Utf8Read()
+** character is exactly one byte in size. Also, provide the Utf8Read()
** macro for fast reading of the next character in the common case where
** the next character is ASCII.
*/
** it the last character in the list.
**
** Like matching rules:
-**
+**
** '%' Matches any sequence of zero or more characters
**
*** '_' Matches any one character
u32 matchAll = pInfo->matchAll; /* "*" or "%" */
u8 noCase = pInfo->noCase; /* True if uppercase==lowercase */
const u8 *zEscaped = 0; /* One past the last escaped input char */
-
+
while( (c = Utf8Read(zPattern))!=0 ){
if( c==matchAll ){ /* Match "*" */
/* Skip over multiple "*" characters in the pattern. If there
** are also "?" characters, skip those as well, but consume a
** single character of the input string for each "?" skipped */
- while( (c=Utf8Read(zPattern)) == matchAll
+ while( (c=Utf8Read(zPattern)) == matchAll
|| (c == matchOne && matchOne!=0) ){
if( c==matchOne && sqlite3Utf8Read(&zString)==0 ){
return SQLITE_NOWILDCARDMATCH;
** the GLOB operator.
*/
static void likeFunc(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int argc,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
const unsigned char *zA, *zB;
const unsigned char *zEsc = sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]);
if( zEsc==0 ) return;
if( sqlite3Utf8CharLen((char*)zEsc, -1)!=1 ){
- sqlite3_result_error(context,
+ sqlite3_result_error(context,
"ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1);
return;
}
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function.
-** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options
+** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function.
+** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options
** used to build SQLite.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS
** digits. */
static const char hexdigits[] = {
'0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7',
- '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'
+ '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'
};
/*
}
/*
-** Implementation of the QUOTE() function.
+** Implementation of the QUOTE() function.
**
** The quote(X) function returns the text of an SQL literal which is the
** value of its argument suitable for inclusion into an SQL statement.
/*
** The unicode() function. Return the integer unicode code-point value
-** for the first character of the input string.
+** for the first character of the input string.
*/
static void unicodeFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
** Or, if there is a second argument, then any character that appears in
** the second argument is also allowed to appear between pairs of hexadecimal
** digits in the first argument. If any other character appears in the
-** first argument, or if one of the allowed characters appears between
+** first argument, or if one of the allowed characters appears between
** two hexadecimal digits that make up a single byte, NULL is returned.
**
** The following expressions are all true:
if( zOut==0 ){
return;
}
- loopLimit = nStr - nPattern;
+ loopLimit = nStr - nPattern;
cntExpand = 0;
for(i=j=0; i<=loopLimit; i++){
if( zStr[i]!=zPattern[0] || memcmp(&zStr[i], zPattern, nPattern) ){
SQLITE_SKIP_UTF8(z);
}
if( nChar>0 ){
- azChar = contextMalloc(context,
+ azChar = contextMalloc(context,
((i64)nChar)*(sizeof(char*)+sizeof(unsigned)));
if( azChar==0 ){
return;
** Compute the soundex encoding of a word.
**
** IMP: R-59782-00072 The soundex(X) function returns a string that is the
-** soundex encoding of the string X.
+** soundex encoding of the string X.
*/
static void soundexFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
typedef struct SumCtx SumCtx;
struct SumCtx {
double rSum; /* Floating point sum */
- i64 iSum; /* Integer sum */
+ i64 iSum; /* Integer sum */
i64 cnt; /* Number of elements summed */
u8 overflow; /* True if integer overflow seen */
u8 approx; /* True if non-integer value was input to the sum */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
/* The sqlite3_aggregate_count() function is deprecated. But just to make
- ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our
+ ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our
** internal count when using count(*) and when the total count can be
** expressed as a 32-bit integer. */
assert( argc==1 || p==0 || p->n>0x7fffffff || p->bInverse
|| p->n==sqlite3_aggregate_count(context) );
#endif
-}
+}
static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){
CountCtx *p;
p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, 0);
p->bInverse = 1;
#endif
}
-}
+}
#else
# define countInverse 0
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC */
** Routines to implement min() and max() aggregate functions.
*/
static void minmaxStep(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int NotUsed,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int NotUsed,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
Mem *pArg = (Mem *)argv[0];
if( sqlite3_value_type(argv[0])==SQLITE_NULL ) return;
pGCC = (GroupConcatCtx*)sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, sizeof(*pGCC));
/* pGCC is always non-NULL since groupConcatStep() will have always
- ** run frist to initialize it */
+ ** run first to initialize it */
if( ALWAYS(pGCC) ){
int nVS;
/* Must call sqlite3_value_text() to convert the argument into text prior
sqlite3_result_error_toobig(context);
}else if( pAccum->accError==SQLITE_NOMEM ){
sqlite3_result_error_nomem(context);
- }else{
+ }else{
const char *zText = sqlite3_str_value(pAccum);
sqlite3_result_text(context, zText, pAccum->nChar, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
}
** pExpr points to an expression which implements a function. If
** it is appropriate to apply the LIKE optimization to that function
** then set aWc[0] through aWc[2] to the wildcard characters and the
-** escape character and then return TRUE. If the function is not a
+** escape character and then return TRUE. If the function is not a
** LIKE-style function then return FALSE.
**
** The expression "a LIKE b ESCAPE c" is only considered a valid LIKE
WAGGREGATE(sum, 1,0,0, sumStep, sumFinalize, sumFinalize, sumInverse, 0),
WAGGREGATE(total, 1,0,0, sumStep,totalFinalize,totalFinalize,sumInverse, 0),
WAGGREGATE(avg, 1,0,0, sumStep, avgFinalize, avgFinalize, sumInverse, 0),
- WAGGREGATE(count, 0,0,0, countStep,
+ WAGGREGATE(count, 0,0,0, countStep,
countFinalize, countFinalize, countInverse,
SQLITE_FUNC_COUNT|SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER ),
- WAGGREGATE(count, 1,0,0, countStep,
+ WAGGREGATE(count, 1,0,0, countStep,
countFinalize, countFinalize, countInverse, SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER ),
- WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 1, 0, 0, groupConcatStep,
+ WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 1, 0, 0, groupConcatStep,
groupConcatFinalize, groupConcatValue, groupConcatInverse, 0),
- WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 2, 0, 0, groupConcatStep,
+ WAGGREGATE(group_concat, 2, 0, 0, groupConcatStep,
groupConcatFinalize, groupConcatValue, groupConcatInverse, 0),
-
+
LIKEFUNC(glob, 2, &globInfo, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
#ifdef SQLITE_CASE_SENSITIVE_LIKE
LIKEFUNC(like, 2, &likeInfoAlt, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
}
-/* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets.
+/* Resize the hash table so that it contains "new_size" buckets.
**
** The hash table might fail to resize if sqlite3_malloc() fails or
** if the new size is the same as the prior size.
#define SQLITE_HWTIME_H
/*
-** The following routine only works on pentium-class (or newer) processors.
+** The following routine only works on Pentium-class (or newer) processors.
** It uses the RDTSC opcode to read the cycle count value out of the
** processor and returns that value. This can be used for high-res
** profiling.
#include "sqliteInt.h"
/*
-** Generate code that will
+** Generate code that will
**
** (1) acquire a lock for table pTab then
** (2) open pTab as cursor iCur.
assert( pParse->pVdbe!=0 );
v = pParse->pVdbe;
assert( opcode==OP_OpenWrite || opcode==OP_OpenRead );
- sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum,
+ sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum,
(opcode==OP_OpenWrite)?1:0, pTab->zName);
if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, opcode, iCur, pTab->tnum, iDb, pTab->nNVCol);
/*
** Return a pointer to the column affinity string associated with index
-** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in
+** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in
** the table, according to the affinity of the column:
**
** Character Column affinity
zColAff[j--] = 0;
}while( j>=0 && zColAff[j]<=SQLITE_AFF_BLOB );
}
- return zColAff;
+ return zColAff;
}
/*
** For STRICT tables:
** ------------------
**
-** Generate an appropropriate OP_TypeCheck opcode that will verify the
+** Generate an appropriate OP_TypeCheck opcode that will verify the
** datatypes against the column definitions in pTab. If iReg==0, that
** means an OP_MakeRecord opcode has already been generated and should be
** the last opcode generated. The new OP_TypeCheck needs to be inserted
/*
** Return non-zero if the table pTab in database iDb or any of its indices
-** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if
-** a statement of the form "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can
-** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT.
+** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if
+** a statement of the form "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can
+** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT.
*/
static int readsTable(Parse *p, int iDb, Table *pTab){
Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(p);
/*
** This routine generates code that will initialize all of the
-** register used by the autoincrement tracker.
+** register used by the autoincrement tracker.
*/
void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){
AutoincInfo *p; /* Information about an AUTOINCREMENT */
/* 8 */ {OP_Goto, 0, 11, 0},
/* 9 */ {OP_Next, 0, 2, 0},
/* 10 */ {OP_Integer, 0, 0, 0},
- /* 11 */ {OP_Close, 0, 0, 0}
+ /* 11 */ {OP_Close, 0, 0, 0}
};
VdbeOp *aOp;
pDb = &db->aDb[p->iDb];
**
** This is the 2nd template.
*/
- if( pColumn==0
+ if( pColumn==0
&& pSelect!=0
&& pTrigger==0
&& xferOptimization(pParse, pTab, pSelect, onError, iDb)
regData = regRowid+1;
/* If the INSERT statement included an IDLIST term, then make sure
- ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and
+ ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and
** remember the column indices.
**
** If the table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and that column
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_GENERATED_COLUMNS
if( pTab->aCol[j].colFlags & (COLFLAG_STORED|COLFLAG_VIRTUAL) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"cannot INSERT into generated column \"%s\"",
pTab->aCol[j].zCnName);
goto insert_cleanup;
** the destination table (template 3).
**
** A temp table must be used if the table being updated is also one
- ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement. Also use a
+ ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement. Also use a
** temp table in the case of row triggers.
*/
if( pTrigger || readsTable(pParse, iDb, pTab) ){
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTempRowid);
}
}else{
- /* This is the case if the data for the INSERT is coming from a
+ /* This is the case if the data for the INSERT is coming from a
** single-row VALUES clause
*/
NameContext sNC;
}
/* If there is no IDLIST term but the table has an integer primary
- ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key
+ ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key
** column index in the original table definition.
*/
if( pColumn==0 && nColumn>0 ){
}
}
if( nColumn!=(pTab->nCol-nHidden) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"table %S has %d columns but %d values were supplied",
pTabList->a, pTab->nCol-nHidden, nColumn);
goto insert_cleanup;
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%d values for %d columns", nColumn, pColumn->nId);
goto insert_cleanup;
}
-
+
/* Initialize the count of rows to be inserted
*/
if( (db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows)!=0
}else if( pColumn==0 ){
/* Hidden columns that are not explicitly named in the INSERT
** get there default value */
- sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse,
+ sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse,
sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab, &pTab->aCol[i]),
iRegStore);
continue;
if( j>=pColumn->nId ){
/* A column not named in the insert column list gets its
** default value */
- sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse,
+ sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse,
sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab, &pTab->aCol[i]),
iRegStore);
continue;
k = j;
}else if( nColumn==0 ){
/* This is INSERT INTO ... DEFAULT VALUES. Load the default value. */
- sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse,
+ sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse,
sqlite3ColumnExpr(pTab, &pTab->aCol[i]),
iRegStore);
continue;
}
if( useTempTable ){
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, k, iRegStore);
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, k, iRegStore);
}else if( pSelect ){
if( regFromSelect!=regData ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, regFromSelect+k, iRegStore);
}
/* Fire BEFORE or INSTEAD OF triggers */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE,
pTab, regCols-pTab->nCol-1, onError, endOfLoop);
sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regCols, pTab->nCol+1);
** constraints or (b) there are no triggers and this table is not a
** parent table in a foreign key constraint. It is safe to set the
** flag in the second case as if any REPLACE constraint is hit, an
- ** OP_Delete or OP_IdxDelete instruction will be executed on each
+ ** OP_Delete or OP_IdxDelete instruction will be executed on each
** cursor that is disturbed. And these instructions both clear the
** VdbeCursor.seekResult variable, disabling the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT
** functionality. */
if( pTrigger ){
/* Code AFTER triggers */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER,
pTab, regData-2-pTab->nCol, onError, endOfLoop);
}
}
/*
- ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is
+ ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is
** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
** invoke the callback function.
*/
#endif
/*
-** Meanings of bits in of pWalker->eCode for
+** Meanings of bits in of pWalker->eCode for
** sqlite3ExprReferencesUpdatedColumn()
*/
#define CKCNSTRNT_COLUMN 0x01 /* CHECK constraint uses a changing column */
/* This is the Walker callback from sqlite3ExprReferencesUpdatedColumn().
* Set bit 0x01 of pWalker->eCode if pWalker->eCode to 0 and if this
** expression node references any of the
-** columns that are being modifed by an UPDATE statement.
+** columns that are being modified by an UPDATE statement.
*/
static int checkConstraintExprNode(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
if( pExpr->op==TK_COLUMN ){
union {
struct { /* Use this object for eType==0: A Index.pNext list */
Index *pIdx; /* The current Index */
- } lx;
+ } lx;
struct { /* Use this object for eType==1; Array of IndexListTerm */
int nIdx; /* Size of the array */
IndexListTerm *aIdx; /* Array of IndexListTerms */
return pIter->u.lx.pIdx;
}
}
-
+
/*
** Generate code to do constraint checks prior to an INSERT or an UPDATE
** on table pTab.
int *aiChng, /* column i is unchanged if aiChng[i]<0 */
Upsert *pUpsert /* ON CONFLICT clauses, if any. NULL otherwise */
){
- Vdbe *v; /* VDBE under constrution */
+ Vdbe *v; /* VDBE under construction */
Index *pIdx; /* Pointer to one of the indices */
Index *pPk = 0; /* The PRIMARY KEY index for WITHOUT ROWID tables */
sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */
assert( v!=0 );
assert( !IsView(pTab) ); /* This table is not a VIEW */
nCol = pTab->nCol;
-
+
/* pPk is the PRIMARY KEY index for WITHOUT ROWID tables and NULL for
- ** normal rowid tables. nPkField is the number of key fields in the
+ ** normal rowid tables. nPkField is the number of key fields in the
** pPk index or 1 for a rowid table. In other words, nPkField is the
** number of fields in the true primary key of the table. */
if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
** the triggers and remove both the table and index b-tree entries.
**
** Otherwise, if there are no triggers or the recursive-triggers
- ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call
- ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries
- ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry
- ** when it is inserted.
+ ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call
+ ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries
+ ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry
+ ** when it is inserted.
**
** If either GenerateRowDelete() or GenerateRowIndexDelete() is called,
** also invoke MultiWrite() to indicate that this VDBE may require
pIdx;
pIdx = indexIteratorNext(&sIdxIter, &ix)
){
- int regIdx; /* Range of registers hold conent for pIdx */
+ int regIdx; /* Range of registers holding content for pIdx */
int regR; /* Range of registers holding conflicting PK */
int iThisCur; /* Cursor for this UNIQUE index */
int addrUniqueOk; /* Jump here if the UNIQUE constraint is satisfied */
#endif
sqlite3VdbeReleaseRegisters(pParse, regIdx, pIdx->nColumn, 0, 0);
- /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index
+ /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index
** of a WITHOUT ROWID table and there has been no change the
** primary key, then no collision is possible. The collision detection
** logic below can all be skipped. */
/* Find out what action to take in case there is a uniqueness conflict */
onError = pIdx->onError;
- if( onError==OE_None ){
+ if( onError==OE_None ){
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk);
continue; /* pIdx is not a UNIQUE index */
}
/* Check to see if the new index entry will be unique */
sqlite3VdbeVerifyAbortable(v, onError);
- addrConflictCk =
+ addrConflictCk =
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_NoConflict, iThisCur, addrUniqueOk,
regIdx, pIdx->nKeyCol); VdbeCoverage(v);
}
}
if( isUpdate ){
- /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID
+ /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID
** table, only conflict if the new PRIMARY KEY values are actually
** different from the old. See TH3 withoutrowid04.test.
**
int addrJump = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+pPk->nKeyCol;
int op = OP_Ne;
int regCmp = (IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? regIdx : regR);
-
+
for(i=0; i<pPk->nKeyCol; i++){
char *p4 = (char*)sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, pPk->azColl[i]);
x = pPk->aiColumn[i];
op = OP_Eq;
}
x = sqlite3TableColumnToStorage(pTab, x);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op,
regOldData+1+x, addrJump, regCmp+i, p4, P4_COLLSEQ
);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NOTNULL);
}
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk);
if( regR!=regIdx ) sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regR, nPkField);
- if( pUpsertClause
+ if( pUpsertClause
&& upsertIpkReturn
&& sqlite3UpsertNextIsIPK(pUpsertClause)
){
**
** INSERT INTO tab1 SELECT * FROM tab2;
**
-** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1.
+** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1.
** Columns are not decoded and reassembled, which greatly improves
** performance. Raw index records are transferred in the same way.
**
Column *pDestCol = &pDest->aCol[i];
Column *pSrcCol = &pSrc->aCol[i];
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_HIDDEN_COLUMNS
- if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0
- && (pDestCol->colFlags | pSrcCol->colFlags) & COLFLAG_HIDDEN
+ if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0
+ && (pDestCol->colFlags | pSrcCol->colFlags) & COLFLAG_HIDDEN
){
return 0; /* Neither table may have __hidden__ columns */
}
**
** Nevertheless, this is a useful notational shorthand to tell SQLite
** to do a bulk transfer all of the content from t1 over to t2.
- **
+ **
** We could, in theory, disable this (except for internal use by the
** VACUUM command where it is actually needed). But why do that? It
** seems harmless enough, and provides a useful service.
if( pDestCol->affinity!=pSrcCol->affinity ){
return 0; /* Affinity must be the same on all columns */
}
- if( sqlite3_stricmp(sqlite3ColumnColl(pDestCol),
+ if( sqlite3_stricmp(sqlite3ColumnColl(pDestCol),
sqlite3ColumnColl(pSrcCol))!=0 ){
return 0; /* Collating sequence must be the same on all columns */
}
assert( pDestExpr==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pDestExpr, EP_IntValue) );
assert( pSrcExpr==0 || pSrcExpr->op==TK_SPAN );
assert( pSrcExpr==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pSrcExpr, EP_IntValue) );
- if( (pDestExpr==0)!=(pSrcExpr==0)
+ if( (pDestExpr==0)!=(pSrcExpr==0)
|| (pDestExpr!=0 && strcmp(pDestExpr->u.zToken,
pSrcExpr->u.zToken)!=0)
){
}
#endif
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
- /* Disallow the transfer optimization if the destination table constains
+ /* Disallow the transfer optimization if the destination table contains
** any foreign key constraints. This is more restrictive than necessary.
- ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM
+ ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM
** command, and the VACUUM command disables foreign key constraints. So
** the extra complication to make this rule less restrictive is probably
** not worth the effort. Ticket [6284df89debdfa61db8073e062908af0c9b6118e]
** (If the destination is not initially empty, the rowid fields
** of index entries might need to change.)
**
- ** (2) The destination has a unique index. (The xfer optimization
+ ** (2) The destination has a unique index. (The xfer optimization
** is unable to test uniqueness.)
**
** (3) onError is something other than OE_Abort and OE_Rollback.
/* This INSERT command is part of a VACUUM operation, which guarantees
** that the destination table is empty. If all indexed columns use
** collation sequence BINARY, then it can also be assumed that the
- ** index will be populated by inserting keys in strictly sorted
+ ** index will be populated by inserting keys in strictly sorted
** order. In this case, instead of seeking within the b-tree as part
** of every OP_IdxInsert opcode, an OP_SeekEnd is added before the
- ** OP_IdxInsert to seek to the point within the b-tree where each key
+ ** OP_IdxInsert to seek to the point within the b-tree where each key
** should be inserted. This is faster.
**
** If any of the indexed columns use a collation sequence other than
- ** BINARY, this optimization is disabled. This is because the user
+ ** BINARY, this optimization is disabled. This is because the user
** might change the definition of a collation sequence and then run
** a VACUUM command. In that case keys may not be written in strictly
** sorted order. */
}
if( idxInsFlags!=(OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT) ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowData, iSrc, regData, 1);
- if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0
- && !HasRowid(pDest)
- && IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pDestIdx)
+ if( (db->mDbFlags & DBFLAG_Vacuum)==0
+ && !HasRowid(pDest)
+ && IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pDestIdx)
){
codeWithoutRowidPreupdate(pParse, pDest, iDest, regData);
}
}
/*
-** Return a JsonNode and all its descendents as a JSON string.
+** Return a JsonNode and all its descendants as a JSON string.
*/
static void jsonReturnJson(
JsonNode *pNode, /* Node to return */
#endif
/* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-53536-42575 The sqlite3_libversion() function returns
-** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant.
+** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant.
*/
const char *sqlite3_libversion(void){ return sqlite3_version; }
char *sqlite3_data_directory = 0;
/*
-** Initialize SQLite.
+** Initialize SQLite.
**
** This routine must be called to initialize the memory allocation,
** VFS, and mutex subsystems prior to doing any serious work with
** SQLite. But as long as you do not compile with SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINIT
** this routine will be called automatically by key routines such as
-** sqlite3_open().
+** sqlite3_open().
**
** This routine is a no-op except on its very first call for the process,
** or for the first call after a call to sqlite3_shutdown.
return SQLITE_OK;
}
- /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized. If unable to
+ /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized. If unable to
** initialize the mutex subsystem, return early with the error.
** If the system is so sick that we are unable to allocate a mutex,
** there is not much SQLite is going to be able to do.
}
#endif
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage,
+ sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage,
sqlite3GlobalConfig.szPage, sqlite3GlobalConfig.nPage);
sqlite3MemoryBarrier();
sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit = 1;
** a single parameter which is a pointer to an integer and writes into
** that integer the number of extra bytes per page required for each page
** in SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE. */
- *va_arg(ap, int*) =
+ *va_arg(ap, int*) =
sqlite3HeaderSizeBtree() +
sqlite3HeaderSizePcache() +
sqlite3HeaderSizePcache1();
sqlite3GlobalConfig.nLookaside = va_arg(ap, int);
break;
}
-
+
/* Record a pointer to the logger function and its first argument.
** The default is NULL. Logging is disabled if the function pointer is
** NULL.
/*
** Set up the lookaside buffers for a database connection.
-** Return SQLITE_OK on success.
+** Return SQLITE_OK on success.
** If lookaside is already active, return SQLITE_BUSY.
**
** The sz parameter is the number of bytes in each lookaside slot.
sqlite3_int64 szAlloc = sz*(sqlite3_int64)cnt;
int nBig; /* Number of full-size slots */
int nSm; /* Number smaller LOOKASIDE_SMALL-byte slots */
-
+
if( sqlite3LookasideUsed(db,0)>0 ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
/* Free any existing lookaside buffer for this handle before
- ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for
+ ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for
** both at the same time.
*/
if( db->lookaside.bMalloced ){
}
/*
-** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE.
+** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE.
**
** This collating sequence is intended to be used for "case independent
** comparison". SQLite's knowledge of upper and lower case equivalents
/*
** Return TRUE if database connection db has unfinalized prepared
-** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects.
+** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects.
*/
static int connectionIsBusy(sqlite3 *db){
int j;
/* The temp-database schema is allocated differently from the other schema
** objects (using sqliteMalloc() directly, instead of sqlite3BtreeSchema()).
** So it needs to be freed here. Todo: Why not roll the temp schema into
- ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database
+ ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database
** structure?
*/
sqlite3DbFree(db, db->aDb[1].pSchema);
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
- /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback().
+ /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback().
** This is important in case the transaction being rolled back has
** modified the database schema. If the b-tree mutexes are not taken
** here, then another shared-cache connection might sneak in between
}else{
p->nBusy++;
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
/*
** be invoked every nOps opcodes.
*/
void sqlite3_progress_handler(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
int nOps,
- int (*xProgress)(void*),
+ int (*xProgress)(void*),
void *pArg
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
** This function is exactly the same as sqlite3_create_function(), except
** that it is designed to be called by internal code. The difference is
** that if a malloc() fails in sqlite3_create_function(), an error code
-** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared.
+** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared.
*/
int sqlite3CreateFunc(
sqlite3 *db,
assert( SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE==SQLITE_INNOCUOUS );
extraFlags ^= SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE; /* tag-20230109-1 */
-
+
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
/* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
** to one of SQLITE_UTF16LE or SQLITE_UTF16BE using the
#else
enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
#endif
-
+
/* Check if an existing function is being overridden or deleted. If so,
** and there are active VMs, then return SQLITE_BUSY. If a function
** is being overridden/deleted but there are no active VMs, allow the
p = sqlite3FindFunction(db, zFunctionName, nArg, (u8)enc, 0);
if( p && (p->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK)==(u32)enc && p->nArg==nArg ){
if( db->nVdbeActive ){
- sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
+ sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
"unable to delete/modify user-function due to active statements");
assert( !db->mallocFailed );
return SQLITE_BUSY;
pArg->xDestroy = xDestroy;
pArg->pUserData = p;
}
- rc = sqlite3CreateFunc(db, zFunc, nArg, enc, p,
+ rc = sqlite3CreateFunc(db, zFunc, nArg, enc, p,
xSFunc, xStep, xFinal, xValue, xInverse, pArg
);
if( pArg && pArg->nRef==0 ){
**
** If the function already exists as a regular global function, then
** this routine is a no-op. If the function does not exist, then create
-** a new one that always throws a run-time error.
+** a new one that always throws a run-time error.
**
** When virtual tables intend to provide an overloaded function, they
** should call this routine to make sure the global function exists.
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE
/*
** Register a trace function. The pArg from the previously registered trace
-** is returned.
+** is returned.
**
** A NULL trace function means that no tracing is executes. A non-NULL
** trace is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the start of each
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
/*
-** Register a profile function. The pArg from the previously registered
-** profile function is returned.
+** Register a profile function. The pArg from the previously registered
+** profile function is returned.
**
** A NULL profile function means that no profiling is executes. A non-NULL
** profile is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the conclusion of
*/
int sqlite3_autovacuum_pages(
sqlite3 *db, /* Attach the hook to this database */
- unsigned int (*xCallback)(void*,const char*,u32,u32,u32),
+ unsigned int (*xCallback)(void*,const char*,u32,u32,u32),
void *pArg, /* Argument to the function */
void (*xDestructor)(void*) /* Destructor for pArg */
){
** Invoke sqlite3_wal_checkpoint if the number of frames in the log file
** is greater than sqlite3.pWalArg cast to an integer (the value configured by
** wal_autocheckpoint()).
-*/
+*/
int sqlite3WalDefaultHook(
void *pClientData, /* Argument */
sqlite3 *db, /* Connection */
/*
** Checkpoint database zDb. If zDb is NULL, or if the buffer zDb points
-** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are
+** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are
** checkpointed.
*/
int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
** Run a checkpoint on database iDb. This is a no-op if database iDb is
** not currently open in WAL mode.
**
-** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this
-** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If
-** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is
+** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this
+** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If
+** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is
** returned (i.e. SQLITE_IOERR). Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
**
** The mutex on database handle db should be held by the caller. The mutex
}
int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3 *db){
return db ? db->iSysErrno : 0;
-}
+}
/*
** Return a string that describes the kind of error specified in the
*/
static int createCollation(
sqlite3* db,
- const char *zName,
+ const char *zName,
u8 enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
){
CollSeq *pColl;
int enc2;
-
+
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
/* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
}
- /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation
+ /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation
** sequence. If so, and there are active VMs, return busy. If there
** are no active VMs, invalidate any pre-compiled statements.
*/
pColl = sqlite3FindCollSeq(db, (u8)enc2, zName, 0);
if( pColl && pColl->xCmp ){
if( db->nVdbeActive ){
- sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
+ sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
"unable to delete/modify collation sequence due to active statements");
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
** then any copies made by synthCollSeq() need to be invalidated.
** Also, collation destructor - CollSeq.xDel() - function may need
** to be called.
- */
+ */
if( (pColl->enc & ~SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED)==enc2 ){
CollSeq *aColl = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aCollSeq, zName);
int j;
** query parameter. The second argument contains the URI (or non-URI filename)
** itself. When this function is called the *pFlags variable should contain
** the default flags to open the database handle with. The value stored in
-** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains
+** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains
** "cache=xxx" or "mode=xxx" query parameters.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case *ppVfs is set to point to
** the value returned in *pzFile to avoid a memory leak.
**
** If an error occurs, then an SQLite error code is returned and *pzErrMsg
-** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error
+** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error
** message. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually release
** this buffer by calling sqlite3_free().
*/
const char *zDefaultVfs, /* VFS to use if no "vfs=xxx" query option */
const char *zUri, /* Nul-terminated URI to parse */
unsigned int *pFlags, /* IN/OUT: SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags */
- sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs, /* OUT: VFS to use */
+ sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs, /* OUT: VFS to use */
char **pzFile, /* OUT: Filename component of URI */
char **pzErrMsg /* OUT: Error message (if rc!=SQLITE_OK) */
){
int iOut = 0; /* Output character index */
u64 nByte = nUri+8; /* Bytes of space to allocate */
- /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen
+ /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen
** method that there may be extra parameters following the file-name. */
flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_URI;
/* The following condition causes URIs with five leading / characters
** like file://///host/path to be converted into UNCs like //host/path.
** The correct URI for that UNC has only two or four leading / characters
- ** file://host/path or file:////host/path. But 5 leading slashes is a
+ ** file://host/path or file:////host/path. But 5 leading slashes is a
** common error, we are told, so we handle it as a special case. */
if( strncmp(zUri+7, "///", 3)==0 ){ iIn++; }
}else if( strncmp(zUri+5, "//localhost/", 12)==0 ){
iIn = 7;
while( zUri[iIn] && zUri[iIn]!='/' ) iIn++;
if( iIn!=7 && (iIn!=16 || memcmp("localhost", &zUri[7], 9)) ){
- *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s",
+ *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s",
iIn-7, &zUri[7]);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
goto parse_uri_out;
}
#endif
- /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer.
- ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way.
+ /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer.
+ ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way.
**
** Within this loop, variable eState may be set to 0, 1 or 2, depending
** on the parsing context. As follows:
eState = 0;
while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' ){
iIn++;
- if( c=='%'
- && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn])
- && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1])
+ if( c=='%'
+ && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn])
+ && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1])
){
int octet = (sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]) << 4);
octet += sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]);
** case we ignore all text in the remainder of the path, name or
** value currently being parsed. So ignore the current character
** and skip to the next "?", "=" or "&", as appropriate. */
- while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#'
+ while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#'
&& (eState!=0 || c!='?')
&& (eState!=1 || (c!='=' && c!='&'))
&& (eState!=2 || c!='&')
if( eState==1 ) zFile[iOut++] = '\0';
memset(zFile+iOut, 0, 4); /* end-of-options + empty journal filenames */
- /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted
+ /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted
** here. Options that are interpreted here include "vfs" and those that
** correspond to flags that may be passed to the sqlite3_open_v2()
** method. */
if( nOpt==4 && memcmp("mode", zOpt, 4)==0 ){
static struct OpenMode aOpenMode[] = {
{ "ro", SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY },
- { "rw", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE },
+ { "rw", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE },
{ "rwc", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE },
{ "memory", SQLITE_OPEN_MEMORY },
{ 0, 0 }
/*
** This routine does the work of opening a database on behalf of
-** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename"
+** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename"
** is UTF-8 encoded.
*/
static int openDatabase(
flags &= ~( SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE |
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB |
- SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB |
- SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB |
- SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL |
- SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL |
- SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL |
SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL |
SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX |
SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX |
/* Allocate the sqlite data structure */
db = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(sqlite3) );
if( db==0 ) goto opendb_out;
- if( isThreadsafe
+ if( isThreadsafe
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MULTITHREADED_CHECKS
|| sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex
#endif
db->nextPagesize = 0;
db->init.azInit = sqlite3StdType; /* Any array of string ptrs will do */
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_MMAP
- /* Beginning with version 3.37.0, using the VFS xFetch() API to memory-map
+ /* Beginning with version 3.37.0, using the VFS xFetch() API to memory-map
** the temporary files used to do external sorts (see code in vdbesort.c)
** is disabled. It can still be used either by defining
** SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_MMAP at compile time or by using the
**
** SQLITE_DQS SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DQS_DDL SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DQS_DML
** ---------- ----------------------- -----------------------
-** undefined on on
+** undefined on on
** 3 on on
** 2 on off
** 1 off on
** 0 off off
**
** Legacy behavior is 3 (double-quoted string literals are allowed anywhere)
-** and so that is the default. But developers are encouranged to use
+** and so that is the default. But developers are encouraged to use
** -DSQLITE_DQS=0 (best) or -DSQLITE_DQS=1 (second choice) if possible.
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_DQS)
/* Parse the filename/URI argument
**
- ** Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument.
+ ** Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument.
** Throw an error if any non-sense combination is used. If we
** do not block illegal combinations here, it could trigger
** assert() statements in deeper layers. Sensible combinations
db->aDb[1].pSchema = sqlite3SchemaGet(db, 0);
/* The default safety_level for the main database is FULL; for the temp
- ** database it is OFF. This matches the pager layer defaults.
+ ** database it is OFF. This matches the pager layer defaults.
*/
db->aDb[0].zDbSName = "main";
db->aDb[0].safety_level = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS+1;
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_INTERNAL_FUNCTIONS
/* Testing use only!!! The -DSQLITE_ENABLE_INTERNAL_FUNCTIONS=1 compile-time
- ** option gives access to internal functions by default.
+ ** option gives access to internal functions by default.
** Testing use only!!! */
db->mDbFlags |= DBFLAG_InternalFunc;
#endif
** Open a new database handle.
*/
int sqlite3_open(
- const char *zFilename,
- sqlite3 **ppDb
+ const char *zFilename,
+ sqlite3 **ppDb
){
return openDatabase(zFilename, ppDb,
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, 0);
** Open a new database handle.
*/
int sqlite3_open16(
- const void *zFilename,
+ const void *zFilename,
sqlite3 **ppDb
){
char const *zFilename8; /* zFilename encoded in UTF-8 instead of UTF-16 */
** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
*/
int sqlite3_create_collation(
- sqlite3* db,
- const char *zName,
- int enc,
+ sqlite3* db,
+ const char *zName,
+ int enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
){
** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
*/
int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
- sqlite3* db,
- const char *zName,
- int enc,
+ sqlite3* db,
+ const char *zName,
+ int enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
void(*xDel)(void*)
** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
*/
int sqlite3_create_collation16(
- sqlite3* db,
+ sqlite3* db,
const void *zName,
- int enc,
+ int enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
){
** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
*/
int sqlite3_collation_needed(
- sqlite3 *db,
- void *pCollNeededArg,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ void *pCollNeededArg,
void(*xCollNeeded)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*)
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
*/
int sqlite3_collation_needed16(
- sqlite3 *db,
- void *pCollNeededArg,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ void *pCollNeededArg,
void(*xCollNeeded16)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*)
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
/* Find the column for which info is requested */
if( zColumnName==0 ){
- /* Query for existance of table only */
+ /* Query for existence of table only */
}else{
for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){
pCol = &pTab->aCol[iCol];
/* The following block stores the meta information that will be returned
** to the caller in local variables zDataType, zCollSeq, notnull, primarykey
** and autoinc. At this point there are two possibilities:
- **
- ** 1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_"
- ** and there is no explicitly declared IPK column.
**
- ** 2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an
+ ** 1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_"
+ ** and there is no explicitly declared IPK column.
+ **
+ ** 2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an
** explicitly declared column. Copy meta information from *pCol.
- */
+ */
if( pCol ){
zDataType = sqlite3ColumnType(pCol,0);
zCollSeq = sqlite3ColumnColl(pCol);
pVfs = sqlite3_vfs_find(0);
if( pVfs==0 ) return 0;
- /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep()
+ /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep()
** API uses microseconds. Hence the 1000's.
*/
rc = (sqlite3OsSleep(pVfs, ms<0 ? 0 : 1000*ms)/1000);
/*
** sqlite3_test_control(BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS, xBegin, xEnd)
**
- ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures
+ ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures
** are benign.
*/
case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS: {
** 10 little-endian, determined at run-time
** 432101 big-endian, determined at compile-time
** 123410 little-endian, determined at compile-time
- */
+ */
case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BYTEORDER: {
rc = SQLITE_BYTEORDER*100 + SQLITE_LITTLEENDIAN*10 + SQLITE_BIGENDIAN;
break;
/* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZATIONS, sqlite3 *db, int N)
**
- ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes. The
+ ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes. The
** argument N is a bitmask of optimizations to be disabled. For normal
** operation N should be 0. The idea is that a test program (like the
** SQL Logic Test or SLT test module) can run the same SQL multiple times
** formed and never corrupt. This flag is clear by default, indicating that
** database files might have arbitrary corruption. Setting the flag during
** testing causes certain assert() statements in the code to be activated
- ** that demonstrat invariants on well-formed database files.
+ ** that demonstrate invariants on well-formed database files.
*/
case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_NEVER_CORRUPT: {
sqlite3GlobalConfig.neverCorrupt = va_arg(ap, int);
/* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE, xCallback, ptr);
**
- ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context
+ ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context
** pointer ptr.
*/
case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE: {
/* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TRACEFLAGS, op, ptr)
**
- ** "ptr" is a pointer to a u32.
+ ** "ptr" is a pointer to a u32.
**
** op==0 Store the current sqlite3TreeTrace in *ptr
** op==1 Set sqlite3TreeTrace to the value *ptr
*pI2 = sqlite3LogEst(*pU64);
break;
}
-
+
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_WSD)
/* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TUNE, id, *piValue)
/*
** This is a utility routine, useful to VFS implementations, that checks
-** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
+** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
** parameter, and if so obtains the value of the query parameter.
**
** The zFilename argument is the filename pointer passed into the xOpen()
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
/*
-** Obtain a snapshot handle for the snapshot of database zDb currently
+** Obtain a snapshot handle for the snapshot of database zDb currently
** being read by handle db.
*/
int sqlite3_snapshot_get(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
const char *zDb,
sqlite3_snapshot **ppSnapshot
){
}
/*
-** Open a read-transaction on the snapshot idendified by pSnapshot.
+** Open a read-transaction on the snapshot identified by pSnapshot.
*/
int sqlite3_snapshot_open(
- sqlite3 *db,
- const char *zDb,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ const char *zDb,
sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot
){
int rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
int i, n;
int nOpt;
const char **azCompileOpt;
-
+
#if SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
if( zOptName==0 ){
(void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
if( sqlite3StrNICmp(zOptName, "SQLITE_", 7)==0 ) zOptName += 7;
n = sqlite3Strlen30(zOptName);
- /* Since nOpt is normally in single digits, a linear search is
+ /* Since nOpt is normally in single digits, a linear search is
** adequate. No need for a binary search. */
for(i=0; i<nOpt; i++){
if( sqlite3StrNICmp(zOptName, azCompileOpt[i], n)==0
** or sqlite3MemRealloc().
**
** For this low-level routine, we already know that pPrior!=0 since
-** cases where pPrior==0 will have been intecepted and dealt with
+** cases where pPrior==0 will have been intercepted and dealt with
** by higher-level routines.
*/
static void sqlite3MemFree(void *pPrior){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
len = sizeof(cpuCount);
- /* One usually wants to use hw.acctivecpu for MT decisions, but not here */
+ /* One usually wants to use hw.activecpu for MT decisions, but not here */
sysctlbyname("hw.ncpu", &cpuCount, &len, NULL, 0);
if( cpuCount>1 ){
/* defer MT decisions to system malloc */
_sqliteZone_ = malloc_default_zone();
}else{
- /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks,
+ /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks,
** e.g. we have our own dedicated locks */
_sqliteZone_ = malloc_create_zone(4096, 0);
malloc_set_zone_name(_sqliteZone_, "Sqlite_Heap");
/*
** The sqlite3_mutex.id, sqlite3_mutex.nRef, and sqlite3_mutex.owner fields
-** are necessary under two condidtions: (1) Debug builds and (2) using
+** are necessary under two conditions: (1) Debug builds and (2) using
** home-grown mutexes. Encapsulate these conditions into a single #define.
*/
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(SQLITE_HOMEGROWN_RECURSIVE_MUTEX)
** there might be race conditions that can cause these routines to
** deliver incorrect results. In particular, if pthread_equal() is
** not an atomic operation, then these routines might delivery
-** incorrect results. On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a
+** incorrect results. On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a
** comparison of two integers and is therefore atomic. But we are
** told that HPUX is not such a platform. If so, then these routines
** will not always work correctly on HPUX.
**
** Note that if one of the dynamic mutex parameters (SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST
** or SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE) is used then sqlite3_mutex_alloc()
-** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static
+** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static
** mutex types, the same mutex is returned on every call that has
** the same type number.
*/
** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
- ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
+ ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions
** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
- ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
+ ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions
** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
CRITICAL_SECTION mutex; /* Mutex controlling the lock */
int id; /* Mutex type */
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- volatile int nRef; /* Number of enterances */
+ volatile int nRef; /* Number of entrances */
volatile DWORD owner; /* Thread holding this mutex */
volatile LONG trace; /* True to trace changes */
#endif
/* Faults are not injected into COMMIT_PHASETWO because, assuming SQLite
** is using a regular VFS, it is called after the corresponding
** transaction has been committed. Injecting a fault at this point
- ** confuses the test scripts - the COMMIT comand returns SQLITE_NOMEM
+ ** confuses the test scripts - the COMMIT command returns SQLITE_NOMEM
** but the transaction is committed anyway.
**
** The core must call OsFileControl() though, not OsFileControlHint(),
}else{
return pVfs->xRandomness(pVfs, nByte, zBufOut);
}
-
+
}
int sqlite3OsSleep(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int nMicro){
return pVfs->xSleep(pVfs, nMicro);
** This source file is organized into divisions where the logic for various
** subfunctions is contained within the appropriate division. PLEASE
** KEEP THE STRUCTURE OF THIS FILE INTACT. New code should be placed
-** in the correct division and should be clearly labeled.
+** in the correct division and should be clearly labelled.
**
** The layout of divisions is as follows:
**
** Styles 4, 5, and 7 are only available of SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
** is defined to 1. The SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE also enables automatic
** selection of the appropriate locking style based on the filesystem
-** where the database is located.
+** where the database is located.
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE)
# if defined(__APPLE__)
#endif
/*
-** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not
+** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not
** a normal expected return code of SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_OK
*/
#define IS_LOCK_ERROR(x) ((x != SQLITE_OK) && (x != SQLITE_BUSY))
** whenever any part of the database changes. An assertion fault will
** occur if a file is updated without also updating the transaction
** counter. This test is made to avoid new problems similar to the
- ** one described by ticket #3584.
+ ** one described by ticket #3584.
*/
unsigned char transCntrChng; /* True if the transaction counter changed */
unsigned char dbUpdate; /* True if any part of database file changed */
#endif
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
- /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that
+ /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that
** it is larger than the struct CrashFile defined in test6.c.
*/
char aPadding[32];
#ifdef __DJGPP__
{ "fstat", 0, 0 },
#define osFstat(a,b,c) 0
-#else
+#else
{ "fstat", (sqlite3_syscall_ptr)fstat, 0 },
#define osFstat ((int(*)(int,struct stat*))aSyscall[5].pCurrent)
#endif
/*
** This is the xSetSystemCall() method of sqlite3_vfs for all of the
-** "unix" VFSes. Return SQLITE_OK opon successfully updating the
+** "unix" VFSes. Return SQLITE_OK upon successfully updating the
** system call pointer, or SQLITE_NOTFOUND if there is no configurable
** system call named zName.
*/
/*
** Do not accept any file descriptor less than this value, in order to avoid
-** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for
+** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for
** standard input, output, and error.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR
(void)osUnlink(z);
}
osClose(fd);
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING,
"attempt to open \"%s\" as file descriptor %d", z, fd);
fd = -1;
if( osOpen("/dev/null", O_RDONLY, m)<0 ) break;
if( fd>=0 ){
if( m!=0 ){
struct stat statbuf;
- if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0
+ if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0
&& statbuf.st_size==0
- && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m
+ && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m
){
osFchmod(fd, m);
}
/*
** Helper functions to obtain and relinquish the global mutex. The
** global mutex is used to protect the unixInodeInfo and
-** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be
+** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be
** shared by multiple threads.
**
-** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex
-** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert()
+** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex
+** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert()
** statements. e.g.
**
** unixEnterMutex()
static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){
int rc;
#ifdef __ANDROID__
- /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if
+ /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if
** _FILE_OFFSET_BITS=64 is defined. This means it is unsafe to attempt to
** truncate a file to any size larger than 2GiB. Silently ignore any
** such attempts. */
** This routine translates a standard POSIX errno code into something
** useful to the clients of the sqlite3 functions. Specifically, it is
** intended to translate a variety of "try again" errors into SQLITE_BUSY
-** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into
+** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into
** SQLITE_IOERR
-**
+**
** Errors during initialization of locks, or file system support for locks,
** should handle ENOLCK, ENOTSUP, EOPNOTSUPP separately.
*/
static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) {
- assert( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) ||
- (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) ||
+ assert( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) ||
+ (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) ||
(sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK) ||
(sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK) );
switch (posixError) {
- case EACCES:
+ case EACCES:
case EAGAIN:
case ETIMEDOUT:
case EBUSY:
case EINTR:
- case ENOLCK:
- /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support
+ case ENOLCK:
+ /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support
* introspection, in which it actually means what it says */
return SQLITE_BUSY;
-
- case EPERM:
+
+ case EPERM:
return SQLITE_PERM;
-
- default:
+
+ default:
return sqliteIOErr;
}
}
**
** A pointer to an instance of the following structure can be used as a
** unique file ID in VxWorks. Each instance of this structure contains
-** a copy of the canonical filename. There is also a reference count.
+** a copy of the canonical filename. There is also a reference count.
** The structure is reclaimed when the number of pointers to it drops to
** zero.
**
};
#if OS_VXWORKS
-/*
+/*
** All unique filenames are held on a linked list headed by this
** variable:
*/
*/
unixEnterMutex();
for(pCandidate=vxworksFileList; pCandidate; pCandidate=pCandidate->pNext){
- if( pCandidate->nName==n
+ if( pCandidate->nName==n
&& memcmp(pCandidate->zCanonicalName, pNew->zCanonicalName, n)==0
){
sqlite3_free(pNew);
** cnt>0 means there are cnt shared locks on the file.
**
** Any attempt to lock or unlock a file first checks the locking
-** structure. The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a
+** structure. The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a
** POSIX lock if the internal lock structure transitions between
** a locked and an unlocked state.
**
** If you close a file descriptor that points to a file that has locks,
** all locks on that file that are owned by the current process are
** released. To work around this problem, each unixInodeInfo object
-** maintains a count of the number of pending locks on tha inode.
+** maintains a count of the number of pending locks on the inode.
** When an attempt is made to close an unixFile, if there are
** other unixFile open on the same inode that are holding locks, the call
** to close() the file descriptor is deferred until all of the locks clear.
** not posix compliant. Under LinuxThreads, a lock created by thread
** A cannot be modified or overridden by a different thread B.
** Only thread A can modify the lock. Locking behavior is correct
-** if the appliation uses the newer Native Posix Thread Library (NPTL)
+** if the application uses the newer Native Posix Thread Library (NPTL)
** on linux - with NPTL a lock created by thread A can override locks
** in thread B. But there is no way to know at compile-time which
** threading library is being used. So there is no way to know at
**
** SQLite used to support LinuxThreads. But support for LinuxThreads
** was dropped beginning with version 3.7.0. SQLite will still work with
-** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection
+** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection
** per database file in the same process and (2) database connections
** do not move across threads.
*/
/* We are told that some versions of Android contain a bug that
** sizes ino_t at only 32-bits instead of 64-bits. (See
** https://android-review.googlesource.com/#/c/115351/3/dist/sqlite3.c)
- ** To work around this, always allocate 64-bits for the inode number.
+ ** To work around this, always allocate 64-bits for the inode number.
** On small machines that only have 32-bit inodes, this wastes 4 bytes,
** but that should not be a big deal. */
/* WAS: ino_t ino; */
** strerror_r().
**
** The first argument passed to the macro should be the error code that
-** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN).
+** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN).
** The two subsequent arguments should be the name of the OS function that
** failed (e.g. "unlink", "open") and the associated file-system path,
** if any.
/* If this is not a threadsafe build (SQLITE_THREADSAFE==0), then use
** the strerror() function to obtain the human-readable error message
** equivalent to errno. Otherwise, use strerror_r().
- */
+ */
#if SQLITE_THREADSAFE && defined(HAVE_STRERROR_R)
char aErr[80];
memset(aErr, 0, sizeof(aErr));
/* If STRERROR_R_CHAR_P (set by autoconf scripts) or __USE_GNU is defined,
** assume that the system provides the GNU version of strerror_r() that
- ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer
- ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere.
- ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of
+ ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer
+ ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere.
+ ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of
** strerror_r(), which always writes an error message into aErr[].
**
** If the code incorrectly assumes that it is the POSIX version that is
** available, the error message will often be an empty string. Not a
- ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available
+ ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available
** could lead to a segfault though.
*/
#if defined(STRERROR_R_CHAR_P) || defined(__USE_GNU)
- zErr =
+ zErr =
# endif
strerror_r(iErrno, aErr, sizeof(aErr)-1);
}
/*
-** Close all file descriptors accumuated in the unixInodeInfo->pUnused list.
-*/
+** Close all file descriptors accumulated in the unixInodeInfo->pUnused list.
+*/
static void closePendingFds(unixFile *pFile){
unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode;
UnixUnusedFd *p;
#else
struct stat buf;
return pFile->pInode!=0 &&
- (osStat(pFile->zPath, &buf)!=0
+ (osStat(pFile->zPath, &buf)!=0
|| (u64)buf.st_ino!=pFile->pInode->fileId.ino);
#endif
}
}
}
#endif
-
+
sqlite3_mutex_leave(pFile->pInode->pLockMutex);
OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (unix)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
/*
-** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile. The lock is
+** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile. The lock is
** described by pLock.
**
** If the pFile was opened read/write from unix-excl, then the only lock
** slightly in order to be compatible with Windows95 systems simultaneously
** accessing the same database file, in case that is ever required.
**
- ** Symbols defined in os.h indentify the 'pending byte' and the 'reserved
+ ** Symbols defined in os.h identify the 'pending byte' and the 'reserved
** byte', each single bytes at well known offsets, and the 'shared byte
** range', a range of 510 bytes at a well known offset.
**
** byte'. If this is successful, 'shared byte range' is read-locked
** and the lock on the 'pending byte' released. (Legacy note: When
** SQLite was first developed, Windows95 systems were still very common,
- ** and Widnows95 lacks a shared-lock capability. So on Windows95, a
+ ** and Windows95 lacks a shared-lock capability. So on Windows95, a
** single randomly selected by from the 'shared byte range' is locked.
** Windows95 is now pretty much extinct, but this work-around for the
** lack of shared-locks on Windows95 lives on, for backwards
**
** A process may only obtain a RESERVED lock after it has a SHARED lock.
** A RESERVED lock is implemented by grabbing a write-lock on the
- ** 'reserved byte'.
+ ** 'reserved byte'.
**
** An EXCLUSIVE lock may only be requested after either a SHARED or
- ** RESERVED lock is held. An EXCLUSIVE lock is implemented by obtaining
- ** a write-lock on the entire 'shared byte range'. Since all other locks
- ** require a read-lock on one of the bytes within this range, this ensures
- ** that no other locks are held on the database.
+ ** RESERVED lock is held. An EXCLUSIVE lock is implemented by obtaining
+ ** a write-lock on the entire 'shared byte range'. Since all other locks
+ ** require a read-lock on one of the bytes within this range, this ensures
+ ** that no other locks are held on the database.
**
** If a process that holds a RESERVED lock requests an EXCLUSIVE, then
- ** a PENDING lock is obtained first. A PENDING lock is implemented by
- ** obtaining a write-lock on the 'pending byte'. This ensures that no new
- ** SHARED locks can be obtained, but existing SHARED locks are allowed to
+ ** a PENDING lock is obtained first. A PENDING lock is implemented by
+ ** obtaining a write-lock on the 'pending byte'. This ensures that no new
+ ** SHARED locks can be obtained, but existing SHARED locks are allowed to
** persist. If the call to this function fails to obtain the EXCLUSIVE
- ** lock in this case, it holds the PENDING lock intead. The client may
+ ** lock in this case, it holds the PENDING lock instead. The client may
** then re-attempt the EXCLUSIVE lock later on, after existing SHARED
** locks have cleared.
*/
/* Make sure the locking sequence is correct.
** (1) We never move from unlocked to anything higher than shared lock.
- ** (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pendig lock.
+ ** (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pending lock.
** (3) A shared lock is always held when a reserve lock is requested.
*/
assert( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK || eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
/* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
*/
- if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
+ if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
(pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK))
){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
** return SQLITE_OK.
*/
- if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
+ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
(pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 );
*/
lock.l_len = 1L;
lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
- if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
+ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
|| (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK)
){
lock.l_type = (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK?F_RDLCK:F_WRLCK);
if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
/* This could happen with a network mount */
tErrno = errno;
- rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
+ rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
}
if( rc ){
}
}
}
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
/* Set up the transaction-counter change checking flags when
end_lock:
sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex);
- OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
+ OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
return rc;
}
**
** If the locking level of the file descriptor is already at or below
** the requested locking level, this routine is a no-op.
-**
+**
** If handleNFSUnlock is true, then on downgrading an EXCLUSIVE_LOCK to SHARED
** the byte range is divided into 2 parts and the first part is unlocked then
-** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked. This works
-** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to
+** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked. This works
+** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to
** remove the write lock on a region when a read lock is set.
*/
static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
/* downgrading to a shared lock on NFS involves clearing the write lock
** before establishing the readlock - to avoid a race condition we downgrade
- ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a
+ ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a
** write lock until the rest is covered by a read lock:
** 1: [WWWWW]
** 2: [....W]
if( handleNFSUnlock ){
int tErrno; /* Error code from system call errors */
off_t divSize = SHARED_SIZE - 1;
-
+
lock.l_type = F_UNLCK;
lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
lock.l_start = SHARED_FIRST;
lock.l_len = SHARED_SIZE;
if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) ){
/* In theory, the call to unixFileLock() cannot fail because another
- ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this
+ ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this
** indicates that the other process is not following the locking
** protocol. If this happens, return SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK. Returning
- ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes
- ** an assert to fail). */
+ ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes
+ ** an assert to fail). */
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK;
storeLastErrno(pFile, errno);
goto end_unlock;
#endif
/*
-** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation
+** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation
** common to all locking schemes. It closes the directory and file
** handles, if they are valid, and sets all fields of the unixFile
** structure to 0.
if( pInode->nLock ){
/* If there are outstanding locks, do not actually close the file just
** yet because that would clear those locks. Instead, add the file
- ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list. It will be automatically closed
+ ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list. It will be automatically closed
** when the last lock is cleared.
*/
setPendingFd(pFile);
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
reserved = osAccess((const char*)pFile->lockingContext, 0)==0;
OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
#endif
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* grab an exclusive lock */
rc = osMkdir(zLockFile, 0777);
if( rc<0 ){
}
}
return rc;
- }
-
+ }
+
/* got it, set the type and return ok */
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
return rc;
OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* no-op if possible */
if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
return SQLITE_OK;
pFile->eFileLock = SHARED_LOCK;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* To fully unlock the database, delete the lock file */
assert( eFileLock==NO_LOCK );
rc = osRmdir(zLockFile);
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK;
return SQLITE_OK;
#else
# define robust_flock(a,b) flock(a,b)
#endif
-
+
/*
** This routine checks if there is a RESERVED lock held on the specified
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int reserved = 0;
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-
+
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
-
+
/* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
reserved = 1;
}
-
+
/* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
if( !reserved ){
/* attempt to get the lock */
if ( lrc ) {
int tErrno = errno;
/* unlock failed with an error */
- lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
+ lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
rc = lrc;
}
int tErrno = errno;
reserved = 1;
/* someone else might have it reserved */
- lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK);
+ lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK);
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){
storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
rc = lrc;
assert( pFile );
- /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
+ /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) {
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* grab an exclusive lock */
-
+
if (robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_EX | LOCK_NB)) {
int tErrno = errno;
/* didn't get, must be busy */
/* got it, set the type and return ok */
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
}
- OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
+ OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
#ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS
if( (rc & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR ){
*/
static int flockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-
+
assert( pFile );
OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (flock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* no-op if possible */
if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) {
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* no, really, unlock. */
if( robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_UN) ){
#ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
/* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
reserved = 1;
}
-
+
/* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
if( !reserved ){
sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem;
sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
- /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
+ /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) {
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
rc = SQLITE_OK;
goto sem_end_lock;
}
-
+
/* lock semaphore now but bail out when already locked. */
if( sem_trywait(pSem)==-1 ){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (sem)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* no-op if possible */
if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) {
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* no, really unlock. */
if ( sem_post(pSem)==-1 ) {
int rc, tErrno = errno;
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){
storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK;
return SQLITE_OK;
/*
** This is a utility for setting or clearing a bit-range lock on an
** AFP filesystem.
-**
+**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success, SQLITE_BUSY on failure.
*/
static int afpSetLock(
){
struct ByteRangeLockPB2 pb;
int err;
-
+
pb.unLockFlag = setLockFlag ? 0 : 1;
pb.startEndFlag = 0;
pb.offset = offset;
- pb.length = length;
+ pb.length = length;
pb.fd = pFile->h;
-
- OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n",
+
+ OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n",
(setLockFlag?"ON":"OFF"), pFile->h, (pb.fd==-1?"[testval-1]":""),
offset, length));
err = fsctl(path, afpfsByteRangeLock2FSCTL, &pb, 0);
int reserved = 0;
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
afpLockingContext *context;
-
+
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
if( context->reserved ){
if( pFile->pInode->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
reserved = 1;
}
-
+
/* Otherwise see if some other process holds it.
*/
if( !reserved ){
/* lock the RESERVED byte */
- int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);
+ int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);
if( SQLITE_OK==lrc ){
/* if we succeeded in taking the reserved lock, unlock it to restore
** the original state */
rc=lrc;
}
}
-
+
sqlite3_mutex_leave(pFile->pInode->pLockMutex);
OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (afp)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
-
+
*pResOut = reserved;
return rc;
}
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode;
afpLockingContext *context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
-
+
assert( pFile );
OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s was %s(%s,%d) pid=%d (afp)\n", pFile->h,
azFileLock(eFileLock), azFileLock(pFile->eFileLock),
/* Make sure the locking sequence is correct
** (1) We never move from unlocked to anything higher than shared lock.
- ** (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pendig lock.
+ ** (2) SQLite never explicitly requests a pending lock.
** (3) A shared lock is always held when a reserve lock is requested.
*/
assert( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK || eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
assert( eFileLock!=PENDING_LOCK );
assert( eFileLock!=RESERVED_LOCK || pFile->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* This mutex is needed because pFile->pInode is shared across threads
*/
pInode = pFile->pInode;
/* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
*/
- if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
+ if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
(pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK))
){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
goto afp_end_lock;
}
-
+
/* If a SHARED lock is requested, and some thread using this PID already
** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
** return SQLITE_OK.
*/
- if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
+ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
(pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 );
pInode->nLock++;
goto afp_end_lock;
}
-
+
/* A PENDING lock is needed before acquiring a SHARED lock and before
** acquiring an EXCLUSIVE lock. For the SHARED lock, the PENDING will
** be released.
*/
- if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
+ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
|| (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock<PENDING_LOCK)
){
int failed;
goto afp_end_lock;
}
}
-
+
/* If control gets to this point, then actually go ahead and make
** operating system calls for the specified lock.
*/
if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ){
int lrc1, lrc2, lrc1Errno = 0;
long lk, mask;
-
+
assert( pInode->nShared==0 );
assert( pInode->eFileLock==0 );
-
+
mask = (sizeof(long)==8) ? LARGEST_INT64 : 0x7fffffff;
/* Now get the read-lock SHARED_LOCK */
/* note that the quality of the randomness doesn't matter that much */
- lk = random();
+ lk = random();
pInode->sharedByte = (lk & mask)%(SHARED_SIZE - 1);
- lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
+ lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
SHARED_FIRST+pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1);
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ){
lrc1Errno = pFile->lastErrno;
}
/* Drop the temporary PENDING lock */
lrc2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
-
+
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ) {
storeLastErrno(pFile, lrc1Errno);
rc = lrc1;
}
if (!failed && eFileLock == EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) {
/* Acquire an EXCLUSIVE lock */
-
- /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range. we'll need to
+
+ /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range. we'll need to
** reestablish the shared lock if we can't get the afpUnlock
*/
if( !(failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST +
pInode->sharedByte, 1, 0)) ){
int failed2 = SQLITE_OK;
- /* now attemmpt to get the exclusive lock range */
- failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST,
+ /* now attempt to get the exclusive lock range */
+ failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST,
SHARED_SIZE, 1);
- if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
+ if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
SHARED_FIRST + pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1)) ){
/* Can't reestablish the shared lock. Sqlite can't deal, this is
** a critical I/O error
*/
- rc = ((failed & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 :
+ rc = ((failed & 0xff) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 :
SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
goto afp_end_lock;
- }
+ }
}else{
- rc = failed;
+ rc = failed;
}
}
if( failed ){
rc = failed;
}
}
-
+
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
pInode->eFileLock = eFileLock;
pFile->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK;
pInode->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK;
}
-
+
afp_end_lock:
sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex);
- OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
+ OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
return rc;
}
SimulateIOErrorBenign(1);
SimulateIOError( h=(-1) )
SimulateIOErrorBenign(0);
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
/* When reducing a lock such that other processes can start
** reading the database file again, make sure that the
|| pFile->transCntrChng==1 );
pFile->inNormalWrite = 0;
#endif
-
+
if( pFile->eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){
rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, SHARED_SIZE, 0);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1) ){
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK ){
rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
- }
+ }
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=RESERVED_LOCK && context->reserved ){
rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1, 0);
- if( !rc ){
- context->reserved = 0;
+ if( !rc ){
+ context->reserved = 0;
}
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1)){
if( pInode->nLock==0 ) closePendingFds(pFile);
}
}
-
+
sqlite3_mutex_leave(pInode->pLockMutex);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
}
/*
-** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context
+** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context
*/
static int afpClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
/*
** The code above is the NFS lock implementation. The code is specific
** to MacOSX and does not work on other unix platforms. No alternative
-** is available.
+** is available.
**
********************* End of the NFS lock implementation **********************
******************************************************************************/
/******************************************************************************
**************** Non-locking sqlite3_file methods *****************************
**
-** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the
+** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the
** sqlite3_file object other than the locking methods. The locking
** methods were defined in divisions above (one locking method per
** division). Those methods that are common to all locking modes
*/
/*
-** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt
+** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt
** bytes into pBuf. Return the number of bytes actually read.
**
** To avoid stomping the errno value on a failed read the lastErrno value
** wrong.
*/
static int unixRead(
- sqlite3_file *id,
- void *pBuf,
+ sqlite3_file *id,
+ void *pBuf,
int amt,
sqlite3_int64 offset
){
#if 0
assert( pFile->pPreallocatedUnused==0
|| offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
- || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
+ || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
);
#endif
#if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
- /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transfering
+ /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transferring
** data from the memory mapping using memcpy(). */
if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){
if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){
/*
** Attempt to seek the file-descriptor passed as the first argument to
** absolute offset iOff, then attempt to write nBuf bytes of data from
-** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise,
+** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise,
** return the actual number of bytes written (which may be less than
** nBuf).
*/
** or some other error code on failure.
*/
static int unixWrite(
- sqlite3_file *id,
- const void *pBuf,
+ sqlite3_file *id,
+ const void *pBuf,
int amt,
- sqlite3_int64 offset
+ sqlite3_int64 offset
){
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
int wrote = 0;
#if 0
assert( pFile->pPreallocatedUnused==0
|| offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
- || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
+ || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
);
#endif
#endif
#if defined(SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE) && SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
- /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transfering
+ /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transferring
** data from the memory mapping using memcpy(). */
if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){
if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){
}
}
#endif
-
+
while( (wrote = seekAndWrite(pFile, offset, pBuf, amt))<amt && wrote>0 ){
amt -= wrote;
offset += wrote;
**
** SQLite sets the dataOnly flag if the size of the file is unchanged.
** The idea behind dataOnly is that it should only write the file content
-** to disk, not the inode. We only set dataOnly if the file size is
-** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode. However,
+** to disk, not the inode. We only set dataOnly if the file size is
+** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode. However,
** Ted Ts'o tells us that fdatasync() will also write the inode if the
** file size has changed. The only real difference between fdatasync()
** and fsync(), Ted tells us, is that fdatasync() will not flush the
int rc;
/* The following "ifdef/elif/else/" block has the same structure as
- ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering
+ ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering
** up the real code with the UNUSED_PARAMETER() macros.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC
UNUSED_PARAMETER(dataOnly);
#endif
- /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and
+ /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and
** FULLSYNC. This is used during testing to verify that this procedure
** gets called with the correct arguments.
*/
/* If we compiled with the SQLITE_NO_SYNC flag, then syncing is a
** no-op. But go ahead and call fstat() to validate the file
** descriptor as we need a method to provoke a failure during
- ** coverate testing.
+ ** coverage testing.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC
{
rc = 1;
}
/* If the FULLFSYNC failed, fall back to attempting an fsync().
- ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local
+ ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local
** file system (on OSX), so failure indicates that FULLFSYNC
- ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync
- ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.
- ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid
+ ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync
+ ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.
+ ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid
** the fcntl call every time sync is called.
*/
if( rc ) rc = fsync(fd);
** so currently we default to the macro that redefines fdatasync to fsync
*/
rc = fsync(fd);
-#else
+#else
rc = fdatasync(fd);
#if OS_VXWORKS
if( rc==-1 && errno==ENOTSUP ){
#if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
/* If the file was just truncated to a size smaller than the currently
** mapped region, reduce the effective mapping size as well. SQLite will
- ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on.
+ ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on.
*/
if( nByte<pFile->mmapSize ){
pFile->mmapSize = nByte;
static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file*,int,void*);
#endif
-/*
-** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT
+/*
+** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT
** file-control operation. Enlarge the database to nBytes in size
** (rounded up to the next chunk-size). If the database is already
** nBytes or larger, this routine is a no-op.
if( pFile->szChunk>0 ){
i64 nSize; /* Required file size */
struct stat buf; /* Used to hold return values of fstat() */
-
+
if( osFstat(pFile->h, &buf) ){
return SQLITE_IOERR_FSTAT;
}
if( nSize>(i64)buf.st_size ){
#if defined(HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE) && HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE
- /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate()
- ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success,
+ /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate()
+ ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success,
** or an error number on failure". See the manpage for details. */
int err;
do{
}while( err==EINTR );
if( err && err!=EINVAL ) return SQLITE_IOERR_WRITE;
#else
- /* If the OS does not have posix_fallocate(), fake it. Write a
+ /* If the OS does not have posix_fallocate(), fake it. Write a
** single byte to the last byte in each block that falls entirely
** within the extended region. Then, if required, a single byte
** at offset (nSize-1), to set the size of the file correctly.
/*
** If pFd->sectorSize is non-zero when this function is called, it is a
-** no-op. Otherwise, the values of pFd->sectorSize and
-** pFd->deviceCharacteristics are set according to the file-system
-** characteristics.
+** no-op. Otherwise, the values of pFd->sectorSize and
+** pFd->deviceCharacteristics are set according to the file-system
+** characteristics.
**
** There are two versions of this function. One for QNX and one for all
** other systems.
static void setDeviceCharacteristics(unixFile *pFile){
if( pFile->sectorSize == 0 ){
struct statvfs fsInfo;
-
+
/* Set defaults for non-supported filesystems */
pFile->sectorSize = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE;
pFile->deviceCharacteristics = 0;
/*
** Return the system page size.
**
-** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file.
+** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file.
** Instead, it should be called via macro osGetpagesize().
*/
static int unixGetpagesize(void){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
/*
-** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer.
+** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer.
**
** When multiple threads all reference the same wal-index, each thread
** has its own unixShm object, but they all point to a single instance
** nRef
**
** The following fields are read-only after the object is created:
-**
+**
** hShm
** zFilename
**
/*
** Use F_GETLK to check whether or not there are any readers with open
** wal-mode transactions in other processes on database file pFile. If
-** no error occurs, return SQLITE_OK and set (*piOut) to 1 if there are
+** no error occurs, return SQLITE_OK and set (*piOut) to 1 if there are
** such transactions, or 0 otherwise. If an error occurs, return an
** SQLite error code. The final value of *piOut is undefined in this
** case.
}
#endif
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
/*
** take it now. Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error
** code otherwise.
**
-** If the DMS cannot be locked because this is a readonly_shm=1
+** If the DMS cannot be locked because this is a readonly_shm=1
** connection and no other process already holds a lock, return
** SQLITE_READONLY_CANTINIT and set pShmNode->isUnlocked=1.
*/
/* Use F_GETLK to determine the locks other processes are holding
** on the DMS byte. If it indicates that another process is holding
** a SHARED lock, then this process may also take a SHARED lock
- ** and proceed with opening the *-shm file.
+ ** and proceed with opening the *-shm file.
**
** Or, if no other process is holding any lock, then this process
** is the first to open it. In this case take an EXCLUSIVE lock on the
}
/*
-** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd.
+** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd.
** This particular implementation uses mmapped files.
**
** The file used to implement shared-memory is in the same directory
** as the open database file and has the same name as the open database
** file with the "-shm" suffix added. For example, if the database file
** is "/home/user1/config.db" then the file that is created and mmapped
-** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm".
+** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm".
**
** Another approach to is to use files in /dev/shm or /dev/tmp or an
** some other tmpfs mount. But if a file in a different directory
** from the database file is used, then differing access permissions
** or a chroot() might cause two different processes on the same
-** database to end up using different files for shared memory -
+** database to end up using different files for shared memory -
** meaning that their memory would not really be shared - resulting
** in database corruption. Nevertheless, this tmpfs file usage
** can be enabled at compile-time using -DSQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY="/dev/shm"
memset(pShmNode, 0, sizeof(*pShmNode)+nShmFilename);
zShm = pShmNode->zFilename = (char*)&pShmNode[1];
#ifdef SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY
- sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShm,
+ sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShm,
SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY "/sqlite-shm-%x-%x",
(u32)sStat.st_ino, (u32)sStat.st_dev);
#else
}
/*
-** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the
-** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions
-** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion
+** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the
+** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions
+** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion
** bytes in size.
**
** If an error occurs, an error code is returned and *pp is set to NULL.
**
** Otherwise, if the bExtend parameter is 0 and the requested shared-memory
** region has not been allocated (by any client, including one running in a
-** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If
-** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet
+** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If
+** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet
** been allocated, it is allocated by this function.
**
** If the shared-memory region has already been allocated or is allocated by
-** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes
-** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped
+** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes
+** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped
** memory and SQLITE_OK returned.
*/
static int unixShmMap(
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_SHMSIZE;
goto shmpage_out;
}
-
+
if( sStat.st_size<nByte ){
/* The requested memory region does not exist. If bExtend is set to
** false, exit early. *pp will be set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned.
void *pMem;
if( pShmNode->hShm>=0 ){
pMem = osMmap(0, nMap,
- pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE,
+ pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE,
MAP_SHARED, pShmNode->hShm, szRegion*(i64)pShmNode->nRegion
);
if( pMem==MAP_FAILED ){
**
** In other words, if this is a blocking lock, none of the locks that
** occur later in the above list than the lock being obtained may be
- ** held.
+ ** held.
**
** It is not permitted to block on the RECOVER lock.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
p->exclMask &= ~mask;
p->sharedMask &= ~mask;
- }
+ }
}
}else if( flags & SQLITE_SHM_SHARED ){
assert( n==1 );
}
/*
-** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory.
+** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory.
**
** All loads and stores begun before the barrier must complete before
** any load or store begun after the barrier.
){
UNUSED_PARAMETER(fd);
sqlite3MemoryBarrier(); /* compiler-defined memory barrier */
- assert( fd->pMethods->xLock==nolockLock
- || unixFileMutexNotheld((unixFile*)fd)
+ assert( fd->pMethods->xLock==nolockLock
+ || unixFileMutexNotheld((unixFile*)fd)
);
unixEnterMutex(); /* Also mutex, for redundancy */
unixLeaveMutex();
}
/*
-** Close a connection to shared-memory. Delete the underlying
+** Close a connection to shared-memory. Delete the underlying
** storage if deleteFlag is true.
**
** If there is no shared memory associated with the connection then this
}
/*
-** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file
+** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file
** descriptor pFd to nNew bytes. Any existing mapping is discarded.
**
** If successful, this function sets the following variables:
/*
** Memory map or remap the file opened by file-descriptor pFd (if the file
-** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if
-** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still
+** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if
+** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still
** outstanding xFetch() references to it, this function is a no-op.
**
-** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of
-** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the
+** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of
+** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the
** requested size is the size of the file on disk. The actual size of the
-** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured
+** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured
** using SQLITE_FCNTL_MMAP_LIMIT, whichever is smaller.
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs (even if the mapping is not
** Finally, if an error does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final
** value of *pp is undefined in this case.
**
-** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually
+** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually
** release the reference by calling unixUnfetch().
*/
static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){
}
/*
-** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a
+** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a
** reference obtained by an earlier call to unixFetch(). The second
** argument passed to this function must be the same as the corresponding
-** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation.
+** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation.
**
-** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called
-** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping
+** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called
+** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping
** may now be invalid and should be unmapped.
*/
static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){
unixFile *pFd = (unixFile *)fd; /* The underlying database file */
UNUSED_PARAMETER(iOff);
- /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding
+ /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding
** xFetch references. Or, if p!=0 (meaning it is an xFetch reference),
** then there must be at least one outstanding. */
assert( (p==0)==(pFd->nFetchOut==0) );
#endif
#if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
-/*
-** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
+/*
+** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
** for the database file "filePath". It then returns the sqlite3_io_methods
** object that implements that strategy.
**
}
/* Default case. Handles, amongst others, "nfs".
- ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds,
- ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks.
+ ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds,
+ ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks.
*/
lockInfo.l_len = 1;
lockInfo.l_start = 0;
return &dotlockIoMethods;
}
}
-static const sqlite3_io_methods
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
*(*const autolockIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = autolockIoFinderImpl;
#endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
return &semIoMethods;
}
}
-static const sqlite3_io_methods
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
*(*const vxworksIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = vxworksIoFinderImpl;
#endif /* OS_VXWORKS */
robust_close(pNew, h, __LINE__);
h = -1;
}
- unixLeaveMutex();
+ unixLeaveMutex();
}
}
#endif
else if( pLockingStyle == &dotlockIoMethods ){
/* Dotfile locking uses the file path so it needs to be included in
- ** the dotlockLockingContext
+ ** the dotlockLockingContext
*/
char *zLockFile;
int nFilename;
unixLeaveMutex();
}
#endif
-
+
storeLastErrno(pNew, 0);
#if OS_VXWORKS
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
/* It's odd to simulate an io-error here, but really this is just
** using the io-error infrastructure to test that SQLite handles this
- ** function failing.
+ ** function failing.
*/
zBuf[0] = 0;
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR );
#endif
/*
-** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database
+** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database
** file (not a journal or super-journal file) identified by pathname
** zPath with SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags matching those passed as the second
** argument to this function.
** but the associated file descriptor could not be closed because some
** other file descriptor open on the same file is holding a file-lock.
** Refer to comments in the unixClose() function and the lengthy comment
-** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for
+** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for
** further details. Also, ticket #4018.
**
** If a suitable file descriptor is found, then it is returned. If no
/* Do not search for an unused file descriptor on vxworks. Not because
** vxworks would not benefit from the change (it might, we're not sure),
- ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better
- ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure
+ ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better
+ ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure
** feature. */
#if !OS_VXWORKS
struct stat sStat; /* Results of stat() call */
}
/*
-** Find the mode, uid and gid of file zFile.
+** Find the mode, uid and gid of file zFile.
*/
static int getFileMode(
const char *zFile, /* File name */
** This function is called by unixOpen() to determine the unix permissions
** to create new files with. If no error occurs, then SQLITE_OK is returned
** and a value suitable for passing as the third argument to open(2) is
-** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is
+** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is
** returned and the value of *pMode is not modified.
**
** In most cases, this routine sets *pMode to 0, which will become
** an indication to robust_open() to create the file using
** SQLITE_DEFAULT_FILE_PERMISSIONS adjusted by the umask.
-** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then
-** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the
-** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever
-** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions
+** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then
+** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the
+** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever
+** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions
** as the associated database file.
**
** If the SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES option is enabled, then the
** "<path to db>-journalNN"
** "<path to db>-walNN"
**
- ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are
+ ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are
** used by the test_multiplex.c module.
**
** In normal operation, the journal file name will always contain
/*
** Open the file zPath.
-**
+**
** Previously, the SQLite OS layer used three functions in place of this
** one:
**
** These calls correspond to the following combinations of flags:
**
** ReadWrite() -> (READWRITE | CREATE)
-** ReadOnly() -> (READONLY)
+** ReadOnly() -> (READONLY)
** OpenExclusive() -> (READWRITE | CREATE | EXCLUSIVE)
**
** The old OpenExclusive() accepted a boolean argument - "delFlag". If
** true, the file was configured to be automatically deleted when the
-** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new
-** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for
+** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new
+** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for
** OpenExclusive().
*/
static int unixOpen(
** is called the directory file descriptor will be fsync()ed and close()d.
*/
int isNewJrnl = (isCreate && (
- eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL
- || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
+ eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL
+ || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
|| eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL
));
char zTmpname[MAX_PATHNAME+2];
const char *zName = zPath;
- /* Check the following statements are true:
+ /* Check the following statements are true:
**
- ** (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and
+ ** (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and
** (b) if CREATE is set, then READWRITE must also be set, and
** (c) if EXCLUSIVE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
** (d) if DELETEONCLOSE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
assert(isExclusive==0 || isCreate);
assert(isDelete==0 || isCreate);
- /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and super-journal are never
+ /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and super-journal are never
** automatically deleted. Nor are they ever temporary files. */
assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB );
assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL );
assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_WAL );
/* Assert that the upper layer has set one of the "file-type" flags. */
- assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB
- || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL
- || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL
+ assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB
+ || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL
+ || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL
|| eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL
);
/* Determine the value of the flags parameter passed to POSIX function
** open(). These must be calculated even if open() is not called, as
- ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the
+ ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the
** 'conch file' locking functions later on. */
if( isReadonly ) openFlags |= O_RDONLY;
if( isReadWrite ) openFlags |= O_RDWR;
if( p->pPreallocatedUnused ){
p->pPreallocatedUnused->fd = fd;
- p->pPreallocatedUnused->flags =
+ p->pPreallocatedUnused->flags =
flags & (SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY|SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE);
}
p->openFlags = openFlags;
}
#endif
-
+
#if defined(__APPLE__) || SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
if( fstatfs(fd, &fsInfo) == -1 ){
storeLastErrno(p, errno);
char *envforce = getenv("SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING");
int useProxy = 0;
- /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means
+ /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means
** never use proxy, NULL means use proxy for non-local files only. */
if( envforce!=NULL ){
useProxy = atoi(envforce)>0;
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = proxyTransformUnixFile((unixFile*)pFile, ":auto:");
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
- /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile
- ** and clear all the structure's references. Specifically,
- ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op
+ /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile
+ ** and clear all the structure's references. Specifically,
+ ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op
*/
unixClose(pFile);
return rc;
}
}
#endif
-
- assert( zPath==0 || zPath[0]=='/'
- || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
+
+ assert( zPath==0 || zPath[0]=='/'
+ || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
);
rc = fillInUnixFile(pVfs, fd, pFile, zPath, ctrlFlags);
/*
** Turn a relative pathname into a full pathname. The relative path
** is stored as a nul-terminated string in the buffer pointed to by
-** zPath.
+** zPath.
**
-** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes
+** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes
** (in this case, MAX_PATHNAME bytes). The full-path is written to
** this buffer before returning.
*/
unixLeaveMutex();
}
static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){
- /*
+ /*
** GCC with -pedantic-errors says that C90 does not allow a void* to be
** cast into a pointer to a function. And yet the library dlsym() routine
** returns a void* which is really a pointer to a function. So how do we
** parameters void* and const char* and returning a pointer to a function.
** We initialize x by assigning it a pointer to the dlsym() function.
** (That assignment requires a cast.) Then we call the function that
- ** x points to.
+ ** x points to.
**
** This work-around is unlikely to work correctly on any system where
** you really cannot cast a function pointer into void*. But then, on the
** tests repeatable.
*/
memset(zBuf, 0, nBuf);
- randomnessPid = osGetpid(0);
+ randomnessPid = osGetpid(0);
#if !defined(SQLITE_TEST) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_RANDOMNESS)
{
int fd, got;
** epoch of noon in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C according to the
** proleptic Gregorian calendar.
**
-** On success, return SQLITE_OK. Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date
+** On success, return SQLITE_OK. Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date
** cannot be found.
*/
static int unixCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, sqlite3_int64 *piNow){
** To address the performance and cache coherency issues, proxy file locking
** changes the way database access is controlled by limiting access to a
** single host at a time and moving file locks off of the database file
-** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.
+** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.
**
**
** Using proxy locks
** actual proxy file name is generated from the name and path of the
** database file. For example:
**
-** For database path "/Users/me/foo.db"
+** For database path "/Users/me/foo.db"
** The lock path will be "<tmpdir>/sqliteplocks/_Users_me_foo.db:auto:")
**
** Once a lock proxy is configured for a database connection, it can not
** be removed, however it may be switched to a different proxy path via
** the above APIs (assuming the conch file is not being held by another
-** connection or process).
+** connection or process).
**
**
** How proxy locking works
** -----------------------
**
-** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files:
+** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files:
**
** * conch file to limit access to the database file to a single host
** at a time
** host (the conch ensures that they all use the same local lock file).
**
** Requesting the lock proxy does not immediately take the conch, it is
-** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.
+** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.
** This matches the semantics of the traditional locking behavior, where
** opening a connection to a database file does not take a lock on it.
-** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until
-** the connection to the database is closed.
+** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until
+** the connection to the database is closed.
**
** The proxy file and the lock file are never deleted so they only need
** to be created the first time they are used.
** automatically configured for proxy locking, lock files are
** named automatically using the same logic as
** PRAGMA lock_proxy_file=":auto:"
-**
+**
** SQLITE_PROXY_DEBUG
**
** Enables the logging of error messages during host id file
**
** Permissions to use when creating a directory for storing the
** lock proxy files, only used when LOCKPROXYDIR is not set.
-**
-**
+**
+**
** As mentioned above, when compiled with SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING,
** setting the environment variable SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING to 1 will
** force proxy locking to be used for every database file opened, and 0
*/
/*
-** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX
+** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX
*/
#if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
/*
-** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote
+** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote
** and local proxy files in it
*/
typedef struct proxyLockingContext proxyLockingContext;
sqlite3_io_methods const *pOldMethod; /* Original I/O methods for close */
};
-/*
-** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath,
+/*
+** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath,
** which must point to valid, writable memory large enough for a maxLen length
-** file path.
+** file path.
*/
static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
int len;
lPath, errno, osGetpid(0)));
return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
}
- len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);
+ len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);
}
# else
len = strlcpy(lPath, "/tmp/", maxLen);
if( lPath[len-1]!='/' ){
len = strlcat(lPath, "/", maxLen);
}
-
+
/* transform the db path to a unique cache name */
dbLen = (int)strlen(dbPath);
for( i=0; i<dbLen && (i+len+7)<(int)maxLen; i++){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** Creates the lock file and any missing directories in lockPath
*/
static int proxyCreateLockPath(const char *lockPath){
int i, len;
char buf[MAXPATHLEN];
int start = 0;
-
+
assert(lockPath!=NULL);
/* try to create all the intermediate directories */
len = (int)strlen(lockPath);
for( i=1; i<len; i++ ){
if( lockPath[i] == '/' && (i - start > 0) ){
/* only mkdir if leaf dir != "." or "/" or ".." */
- if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/')
+ if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/')
|| (i-start==2 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start+1] != '.') ){
buf[i]='\0';
if( osMkdir(buf, SQLITE_DEFAULT_PROXYDIR_PERMISSIONS) ){
switch (terrno) {
case EACCES:
return SQLITE_PERM;
- case EIO:
+ case EIO:
return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; /* even though it is the conch */
default:
return SQLITE_CANTOPEN_BKPT;
}
}
-
+
pNew = (unixFile *)sqlite3_malloc64(sizeof(*pNew));
if( pNew==NULL ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
pUnused->fd = fd;
pUnused->flags = openFlags;
pNew->pPreallocatedUnused = pUnused;
-
+
rc = fillInUnixFile(&dummyVfs, fd, (sqlite3_file*)pNew, path, 0);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
*ppFile = pNew;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-end_create_proxy:
+end_create_proxy:
robust_close(pNew, fd, __LINE__);
sqlite3_free(pNew);
sqlite3_free(pUnused);
extern int gethostuuid(uuid_t id, const struct timespec *wait);
#endif
-/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN
+/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN
** bytes of writable memory.
*/
static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
pHostID[0] = (char)(pHostID[0] + (char)(sqlite3_hostid_num & 0xFF));
}
#endif
-
+
return SQLITE_OK;
}
#define PROXY_PATHINDEX (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN)
#define PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN+MAXPATHLEN)
-/*
-** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves
+/*
+** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves
** it back. The newly created file's file descriptor is assigned to the
-** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is
+** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is
** closed. Returns zero if successful.
*/
static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
char tPath[MAXPATHLEN];
char buf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
/* create a new path by replace the trailing '-conch' with '-break' */
pathLen = strlcpy(tPath, cPath, MAXPATHLEN);
- if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 ||
+ if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 ||
(strlcpy(&tPath[pathLen-5], "break", 6) != 5) ){
sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(errmsg),errmsg,"path error (len %d)",(int)pathLen);
goto end_breaklock;
return rc;
}
-/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the
+/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the
** host id matches.
*/
static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int nTries = 0;
struct timespec conchModTime;
-
+
memset(&conchModTime, 0, sizeof(conchModTime));
do {
rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType);
nTries ++;
if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){
/* If the lock failed (busy):
- * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again.
- * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait
+ * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again.
+ * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait
* 10 sec and try again
* 3rd try: break the lock unless the mod time has changed.
*/
storeLastErrno(pFile, errno);
return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
}
-
+
if( nTries==1 ){
conchModTime = buf.st_mtimespec;
unixSleep(0,500000); /* wait 0.5 sec and try the lock again*/
- continue;
+ continue;
}
assert( nTries>1 );
- if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec ||
+ if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec ||
conchModTime.tv_nsec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_nsec ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
-
- if( nTries==2 ){
+
+ if( nTries==2 ){
char tBuf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
int len = osPread(conchFile->h, tBuf, PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN, 0);
if( len<0 ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
unixSleep(0,10000000); /* wait 10 sec and try the lock again */
- continue;
+ continue;
}
-
+
assert( nTries==3 );
if( 0==proxyBreakConchLock(pFile, myHostID) ){
rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
}
} while( rc==SQLITE_BUSY && nTries<3 );
-
+
return rc;
}
-/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if
-** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match. A NULL
-** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the
-** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically
+/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if
+** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match. A NULL
+** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the
+** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically
** and written to the conch file.
*/
static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
-
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+
if( pCtx->conchHeld!=0 ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}else{
int readLen = 0;
int tryOldLockPath = 0;
int forceNewLockPath = 0;
-
+
OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
(pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
osGetpid(0)));
storeLastErrno(pFile, conchFile->lastErrno);
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_READ;
goto end_takeconch;
- }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) ||
+ }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) ||
readBuf[0]!=(char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION ){
- /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new
- ** conch file.
+ /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new
+ ** conch file.
*/
createConch = 1;
}
/* if the host id matches and the lock path already exists in the conch
- ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll
- ** retry with a new auto-generated path
+ ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll
+ ** retry with a new auto-generated path
*/
do { /* in case we need to try again for an :auto: named lock file */
if( !createConch && !forceNewLockPath ){
- hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID,
+ hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID,
PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
/* if the conch has data compare the contents */
if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
*/
if( hostIdMatch ){
size_t pathLen = (readLen - PROXY_PATHINDEX);
-
+
if( pathLen>=MAXPATHLEN ){
pathLen=MAXPATHLEN-1;
}
readLen-PROXY_PATHINDEX)
){
/* conch host and lock path match */
- goto end_takeconch;
+ goto end_takeconch;
}
}
-
+
/* if the conch isn't writable and doesn't match, we can't take it */
if( (conchFile->openFlags&O_RDWR) == 0 ){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
goto end_takeconch;
}
-
+
/* either the conch didn't match or we need to create a new one */
if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
proxyGetLockPath(pCtx->dbPath, lockPath, MAXPATHLEN);
tempLockPath = lockPath;
/* create a copy of the lock path _only_ if the conch is taken */
}
-
+
/* update conch with host and path (this will fail if other process
** has a shared lock already), if the host id matches, use the big
** stick.
/* We are trying for an exclusive lock but another thread in this
** same process is still holding a shared lock. */
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
- } else {
+ } else {
rc = proxyConchLock(pFile, myHostID, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
}
}else{
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
char writeBuffer[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
int writeSize = 0;
-
+
writeBuffer[0] = (char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION;
memcpy(&writeBuffer[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
if( pCtx->lockProxyPath!=NULL ){
robust_ftruncate(conchFile->h, writeSize);
rc = unixWrite((sqlite3_file *)conchFile, writeBuffer, writeSize, 0);
full_fsync(conchFile->h,0,0);
- /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a
- ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database
+ /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a
+ ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && createConch ){
struct stat buf;
}
}else{
int code = errno;
- fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n",
+ fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n",
err, code, strerror(code));
#endif
}
}
}
conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK);
-
+
end_takeconch:
OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY: CLOSE %d\n", pFile->h));
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->openFlags ){
rc = proxyCreateUnixFile(path, &pCtx->lockProxy, 1);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK && rc!=SQLITE_NOMEM && tryOldLockPath ){
/* we couldn't create the proxy lock file with the old lock file path
- ** so try again via auto-naming
+ ** so try again via auto-naming
*/
forceNewLockPath = 1;
tryOldLockPath = 0;
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pCtx->conchHeld = 1;
-
+
if( pCtx->lockProxy->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
afpLockingContext *afpCtx;
afpCtx = (afpLockingContext *)pCtx->lockProxy->lockingContext;
OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH %d %s\n", conchFile->h,
rc==SQLITE_OK?"ok":"failed"));
return rc;
- } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file -
+ } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file -
** we should never get here except via the 'continue' call. */
}
}
pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
OSTRACE(("RELEASECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
- (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
+ (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
osGetpid(0)));
if( pCtx->conchHeld>0 ){
rc = conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, NO_LOCK);
char *conchPath; /* buffer in which to construct conch name */
/* Allocate space for the conch filename and initialize the name to
- ** the name of the original database file. */
+ ** the name of the original database file. */
*pConchPath = conchPath = (char *)sqlite3_malloc64(len + 8);
if( conchPath==0 ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}
memcpy(conchPath, dbPath, len+1);
-
+
/* now insert a "." before the last / character */
for( i=(len-1); i>=0; i-- ){
if( conchPath[i]=='/' ){
/* Takes a fully configured proxy locking-style unix file and switches
-** the local lock file path
+** the local lock file path
*/
static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
- }
+ }
/* nothing to do if the path is NULL, :auto: or matches the existing path */
if( !path || path[0]=='\0' || !strcmp(path, ":auto:") ||
sqlite3_free(oldPath);
pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, path);
}
-
+
return rc;
}
static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){
#if defined(__APPLE__)
if( pFile->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
- /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field
+ /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field
** of the struct */
assert( (int)strlen((char*)pFile->lockingContext)<=MAXPATHLEN );
strlcpy(dbPath, ((afpLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext)->dbPath,
}
/*
-** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking
+** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking
** will be performed on the local proxy lock file. The following fields
-** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and
+** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and
** the unix structure properly cleaned up at close time:
** ->lockingContext
** ->pMethod
char dbPath[MAXPATHLEN+1]; /* Name of the database file */
char *lockPath=NULL;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-
+
if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
}else{
lockPath=(char *)path;
}
-
+
OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY %d for %s pid=%d\n", pFile->h,
(lockPath ? lockPath : ":auto:"), osGetpid(0)));
rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
}
- }
+ }
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && lockPath ){
pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, lockPath);
}
}
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned,
+ /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned,
** switch the locking context and pMethod then return.
*/
pCtx->oldLockingContext = pFile->lockingContext;
pCtx->pOldMethod = pFile->pMethod;
pFile->pMethod = &proxyIoMethods;
}else{
- if( pCtx->conchFile ){
+ if( pCtx->conchFile ){
pCtx->conchFile->pMethod->xClose((sqlite3_file *)pCtx->conchFile);
sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFile);
}
sqlite3DbFree(0, pCtx->lockProxyPath);
- sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath);
+ sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath);
sqlite3_free(pCtx);
}
OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY %d %s\n", pFile->h,
if( isProxyStyle ){
/* turn off proxy locking - not supported. If support is added for
** switching proxy locking mode off then it will need to fail if
- ** the journal mode is WAL mode.
+ ** the journal mode is WAL mode.
*/
rc = SQLITE_ERROR /*SQLITE_PROTOCOL? SQLITE_MISUSE?*/;
}else{
}else{
const char *proxyPath = (const char *)pArg;
if( isProxyStyle ){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx =
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx =
(proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
- if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:")
+ if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:")
|| (pCtx->lockProxyPath &&
!strncmp(pCtx->lockProxyPath, proxyPath, MAXPATHLEN))
){
unixFile *lockProxy = pCtx->lockProxy;
unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-
+
if( lockProxy ){
rc = lockProxy->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)lockProxy, NO_LOCK);
if( rc ) return rc;
** The proxy locking style is intended for use with AFP filesystems.
** And since AFP is only supported on MacOSX, the proxy locking is also
** restricted to MacOSX.
-**
+**
**
******************* End of the proxy lock implementation **********************
******************************************************************************/
** necessarily been initialized when this routine is called, and so they
** should not be used.
*/
-int sqlite3_os_init(void){
- /*
+int sqlite3_os_init(void){
+ /*
** The following macro defines an initializer for an sqlite3_vfs object.
** The name of the VFS is NAME. The pAppData is a pointer to a pointer
** to the "finder" function. (pAppData is a pointer to a pointer because
**
** Most finders simply return a pointer to a fixed sqlite3_io_methods
** object. But the "autolockIoFinder" available on MacOSX does a little
- ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the
+ ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the
** database file and tries to choose an locking method appropriate for
** that filesystem time.
*/
/* Initialize temp file dir array. */
unixTempFileInit();
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** to release dynamically allocated objects. But not on unix.
** This routine is a no-op for unix.
*/
-int sqlite3_os_end(void){
+int sqlite3_os_end(void){
unixBigLock = 0;
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
#endif /* SQLITE_OS_UNIX */
/*
** This is the xSetSystemCall() method of sqlite3_vfs for all of the
-** "win32" VFSes. Return SQLITE_OK opon successfully updating the
+** "win32" VFSes. Return SQLITE_OK upon successfully updating the
** system call pointer, or SQLITE_NOTFOUND if there is no configurable
** system call named zName.
*/
pFile->h, pBuf, amt, offset, pFile->locktype));
#if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
- /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transfering
+ /* Deal with as much of this read request as possible by transferring
** data from the memory mapping using memcpy(). */
if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){
if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){
pFile->h, pBuf, amt, offset, pFile->locktype));
#if defined(SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE) && SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
- /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transfering
+ /* Deal with as much of this write request as possible by transferring
** data from the memory mapping using memcpy(). */
if( offset<pFile->mmapSize ){
if( offset+amt <= pFile->mmapSize ){
** all references to memory-mapped content are closed. That is doable,
** but involves adding a few branches in the common write code path which
** could slow down normal operations slightly. Hence, we have decided for
- ** now to simply make trancations a no-op if there are pending reads. We
+ ** now to simply make transactions a no-op if there are pending reads. We
** can maybe revisit this decision in the future.
*/
return SQLITE_OK;
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
/*
** Count the number of fullsyncs and normal syncs. This is used to test
-** that syncs and fullsyncs are occuring at the right times.
+** that syncs and fullsyncs are occurring at the right times.
*/
int sqlite3_sync_count = 0;
int sqlite3_fullsync_count = 0;
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the implementation of the page cache subsystem or "pager".
-**
+**
** The pager is used to access a database disk file. It implements
** atomic commit and rollback through the use of a journal file that
** is separate from the database file. The pager also implements file
**
** Definition: A page of the database file is said to be "overwriteable" if
** one or more of the following are true about the page:
-**
+**
** (a) The original content of the page as it was at the beginning of
** the transaction has been written into the rollback journal and
** synced.
-**
+**
** (b) The page was a freelist leaf page at the start of the transaction.
-**
+**
** (c) The page number is greater than the largest page that existed in
** the database file at the start of the transaction.
-**
+**
** (1) A page of the database file is never overwritten unless one of the
** following are true:
-**
+**
** (a) The page and all other pages on the same sector are overwriteable.
-**
+**
** (b) The atomic page write optimization is enabled, and the entire
** transaction other than the update of the transaction sequence
** number consists of a single page change.
-**
+**
** (2) The content of a page written into the rollback journal exactly matches
** both the content in the database when the rollback journal was written
** and the content in the database at the beginning of the current
** transaction.
-**
+**
** (3) Writes to the database file are an integer multiple of the page size
** in length and are aligned on a page boundary.
-**
+**
** (4) Reads from the database file are either aligned on a page boundary and
** an integer multiple of the page size in length or are taken from the
** first 100 bytes of the database file.
-**
+**
** (5) All writes to the database file are synced prior to the rollback journal
** being deleted, truncated, or zeroed.
-**
+**
** (6) If a super-journal file is used, then all writes to the database file
** are synced prior to the super-journal being deleted.
-**
+**
** Definition: Two databases (or the same database at two points it time)
** are said to be "logically equivalent" if they give the same answer to
** all queries. Note in particular the content of freelist leaf
** pages can be changed arbitrarily without affecting the logical equivalence
** of the database.
-**
+**
** (7) At any time, if any subset, including the empty set and the total set,
-** of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the
+** of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the
** journal is rolled back, the resulting database file will be logically
** equivalent to the database file at the beginning of the transaction.
-**
+**
** (8) When a transaction is rolled back, the xTruncate method of the VFS
** is called to restore the database file to the same size it was at
** the beginning of the transaction. (In some VFSes, the xTruncate
** method is a no-op, but that does not change the fact the SQLite will
** invoke it.)
-**
+**
** (9) Whenever the database file is modified, at least one bit in the range
** of bytes from 24 through 39 inclusive will be changed prior to releasing
** the EXCLUSIVE lock, thus signaling other connections on the same
/*
** The following two macros are used within the PAGERTRACE() macros above
-** to print out file-descriptors.
+** to print out file-descriptors.
**
** PAGERID() takes a pointer to a Pager struct as its argument. The
** associated file-descriptor is returned. FILEHANDLEID() takes an sqlite3_file
** | | |
** | V |
** |<-------WRITER_LOCKED------> ERROR
-** | | ^
+** | | ^
** | V |
** |<------WRITER_CACHEMOD-------->|
** | | |
**
**
** List of state transitions and the C [function] that performs each:
-**
+**
** OPEN -> READER [sqlite3PagerSharedLock]
** READER -> OPEN [pager_unlock]
**
**
** WRITER_*** -> ERROR [pager_error]
** ERROR -> OPEN [pager_unlock]
-**
+**
**
** OPEN:
**
**
** READER:
**
-** In this state all the requirements for reading the database in
+** In this state all the requirements for reading the database in
** rollback (non-WAL) mode are met. Unless the pager is (or recently
-** was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is
+** was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is
** open. The database size is known in this state.
**
** A connection running with locking_mode=normal enters this state when
** this state even after the read-transaction is closed. The only way
** a locking_mode=exclusive connection can transition from READER to OPEN
** is via the ERROR state (see below).
-**
+**
** * A read transaction may be active (but a write-transaction cannot).
** * A SHARED or greater lock is held on the database file.
-** * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read
+** * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read
** transaction is not active). The dbOrigSize and dbFileSize variables
** may not be trusted at this point.
** * If the database is a WAL database, then the WAL connection is open.
-** * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that
+** * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that
** there is no hot-journal in the file-system.
**
** WRITER_LOCKED:
**
** The pager moves to this state from READER when a write-transaction
-** is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks
-** required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual
+** is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks
+** required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual
** modifications to the cache or database have taken place.
**
-** In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with
+** In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with
** BEGIN EXCLUSIVE) EXCLUSIVE lock is obtained on the database file when
-** moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened
-** to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while
-** in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database
+** moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened
+** to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while
+** in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database
** file.
**
** IN WAL mode, WalBeginWriteTransaction() is called to lock the log file.
** is made to obtain an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file.
**
** * A write transaction is active.
-** * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater
+** * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater
** lock is held on the database file.
** * If the connection is open in WAL-mode, a WAL write transaction
** is open (i.e. sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction() has been successfully
**
** * A write transaction is active.
** * A RESERVED or greater lock is held on the database file.
-** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
+** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
** to it, but the header has not been synced to disk.
** * The contents of the page cache have been modified.
**
**
** * A write transaction is active.
** * An EXCLUSIVE or greater lock is held on the database file.
-** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
+** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
** and synced to disk.
** * The contents of the page cache have been modified (and possibly
** written to disk).
** A rollback-mode pager changes to WRITER_FINISHED state from WRITER_DBMOD
** state after the entire transaction has been successfully written into the
** database file. In this state the transaction may be committed simply
-** by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is
-** not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper
+** by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is
+** not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper
** layer must either commit or rollback the transaction.
**
** * A write transaction is active.
** * All writing and syncing of journal and database data has finished.
** If no error occurred, all that remains is to finalize the journal to
** commit the transaction. If an error did occur, the caller will need
-** to rollback the transaction.
+** to rollback the transaction.
**
** ERROR:
**
** The ERROR state is entered when an IO or disk-full error (including
-** SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it
-** difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents,
+** SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it
+** difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents,
** db size etc.) are consistent with the contents of the file-system.
**
** Temporary pager files may enter the ERROR state, but in-memory pagers
** cannot.
**
-** For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback,
+** For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback,
** the contents of the page-cache may be left in an inconsistent state.
** At this point it would be dangerous to change back to READER state
** (as usually happens after a rollback). Any subsequent readers might
** instead of READER following such an error.
**
** Once it has entered the ERROR state, any attempt to use the pager
-** to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all
+** to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all
** outstanding transactions have been abandoned, the pager is able to
-** transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the
+** transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the
** page-cache and any other in-memory state at the same time. Everything
-** is reloaded from disk (and, if necessary, hot-journal rollback peformed)
+** is reloaded from disk (and, if necessary, hot-journal rollback performed)
** when a read-transaction is next opened on the pager (transitioning
-** the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered
+** the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered
** from the error.
**
** Specifically, the pager jumps into the ERROR state if:
** memory.
**
** In other cases, the error is returned to the b-tree layer. The b-tree
-** layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition
+** layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition
** persists, the pager enters the ERROR state via condition (1) above.
**
** Condition (3) is necessary because it can be triggered by a read-only
** statement executed within a transaction. In this case, if the error
** code were simply returned to the user, the b-tree layer would not
** automatically attempt a rollback, as it assumes that an error in a
-** read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent
+** read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent
** state.
**
** * The Pager.errCode variable is set to something other than SQLITE_OK.
** * There are one or more outstanding references to pages (after the
** last reference is dropped the pager should move back to OPEN state).
** * The pager is not an in-memory pager.
-**
+**
**
** Notes:
**
**
** * Normally, a connection open in exclusive mode is never in PAGER_OPEN
** state. There are two exceptions: immediately after exclusive-mode has
-** been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are
+** been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are
** executed), and when the pager is leaving the "error state".
**
** * See also: assert_pager_state().
#define PAGER_ERROR 6
/*
-** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the
+** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the
** following locking-states, according to the lock currently held on
** the database file: NO_LOCK, SHARED_LOCK, RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
** This variable is kept up to date as locks are taken and released by
** to a less exclusive (lower) value than the lock that is actually held
** at the system level, but it is never set to a more exclusive value.
**
-** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may
+** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may
** be a few redundant xLock() calls or a lock may be held for longer than
** required, but nothing really goes wrong.
**
** The exception is when the database file is unlocked as the pager moves
-** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file
+** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file
** in the file-system that needs to be rolled back (as part of an OPEN->SHARED
** transition, by the same pager or any other). If the call to xUnlock()
** fails at this point and the pager is left holding an EXCLUSIVE lock, this
** can confuse the call to xCheckReservedLock() call made later as part
** of hot-journal detection.
**
-** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED
-** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may
+** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED
+** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may
** return true because the caller itself is holding an EXCLUSIVE lock (but
** doesn't know it because of a previous error in xUnlock). If this happens
** a hot-journal may be mistaken for a journal being created by an active
** database in the ERROR state, Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK. It
** is only changed back to a real locking state after a successful call
** to xLock(EXCLUSIVE). Also, the code to do the OPEN->SHARED state transition
-** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK
+** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK
** lock. Instead, it assumes a hot-journal exists and obtains an EXCLUSIVE
** lock on the database file before attempting to roll it back. See function
** PagerSharedLock() for more detail.
**
-** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in
+** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in
** PAGER_OPEN state.
*/
#define UNKNOWN_LOCK (EXCLUSIVE_LOCK+1)
/*
-** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method
+** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method
** returns a value larger than this, then MAX_SECTOR_SIZE is used instead.
** This could conceivably cause corruption following a power failure on
** such a system. This is currently an undocumented limit.
**
** When a savepoint is created, the PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset field is
** set to 0. If a journal-header is written into the main journal while
-** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset
+** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset
** immediately following the last journal record written into the main
** journal before the journal-header. This is required during savepoint
** rollback (see pagerPlaybackSavepoint()).
**
** changeCountDone
**
-** This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter
-** (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is
-** not updated more often than necessary.
+** This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter
+** (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is
+** not updated more often than necessary.
**
-** It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which
+** It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which
** can only happen if an exclusive lock is held on the database file.
-** It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is
+** It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is
** relinquished on the database file. Each time a transaction is committed,
** The changeCountDone flag is inspected. If it is true, the work of
** updating the change-counter is omitted for the current transaction.
**
-** This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection
+** This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection
** need only update the change-counter once, for the first transaction
** committed.
**
** setSuper
**
** When PagerCommitPhaseOne() is called to commit a transaction, it may
-** (or may not) specify a super-journal name to be written into the
+** (or may not) specify a super-journal name to be written into the
** journal file before it is synced to disk.
**
-** Whether or not a journal file contains a super-journal pointer affects
-** the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is
+** Whether or not a journal file contains a super-journal pointer affects
+** the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is
** committed or rolled back when running in "journal_mode=PERSIST" mode.
** If a journal file does not contain a super-journal pointer, it is
** finalized by overwriting the first journal header with zeroes. If
-** it does contain a super-journal pointer the journal file is finalized
-** by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were
+** it does contain a super-journal pointer the journal file is finalized
+** by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were
** running in "journal_mode=truncate" mode.
**
** Journal files that contain super-journal pointers cannot be finalized
** to allocate a new page to prevent the journal file from being written
** while it is being traversed by code in pager_playback(). The SPILLFLAG_OFF
** case is a user preference.
-**
+**
** If the SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC bit is set, writing to the database from
** pagerStress() is permitted, but syncing the journal file is not.
** This flag is set by sqlite3PagerWrite() when the file-system sector-size
** is larger than the database page-size in order to prevent a journal sync
-** from happening in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector.
+** from happening in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector.
**
** subjInMemory
**
** is opened as an in-memory journal file. If false, then in-memory
** sub-journals are only used for in-memory pager files.
**
-** This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new
+** This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new
** write-transaction is opened.
**
** dbSize, dbOrigSize, dbFileSize
**
** Variable dbSize is set to the number of pages in the database file.
** It is valid in PAGER_READER and higher states (all states except for
-** OPEN and ERROR).
+** OPEN and ERROR).
**
-** dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be
+** dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be
** larger than the size of the database (the value stored at offset
** 28 of the database header by the btree). If the size of the file
** is not an integer multiple of the page-size, the value stored in
**
** During a write-transaction, if pages with page-numbers greater than
** dbSize are modified in the cache, dbSize is updated accordingly.
-** Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(),
+** Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(),
** dbSize is updated.
**
-** Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states
+** Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states
** PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED and higher. dbOrigSize is a copy of the dbSize
** variable at the start of the transaction. It is used during rollback,
** and to determine whether or not pages need to be journalled before
** Throughout a write-transaction, dbFileSize contains the size of
** the file on disk in pages. It is set to a copy of dbSize when the
** write-transaction is first opened, and updated when VFS calls are made
-** to write or truncate the database file on disk.
+** to write or truncate the database file on disk.
**
-** The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress
-** unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If,
-** when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates
-** that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize),
+** The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress
+** unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If,
+** when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates
+** that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize),
** pager_truncate() is called. The pager_truncate() call uses xFilesize()
** to measure the database file on disk, and then truncates it if required.
** dbFileSize is not used when rolling back a transaction. In this case
** dbHintSize
**
** The dbHintSize variable is used to limit the number of calls made to
-** the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method.
+** the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method.
**
** dbHintSize is set to a copy of the dbSize variable when a
** write-transaction is opened (at the same time as dbFileSize and
** dbOrigSize). If the xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method is called,
** dbHintSize is increased to the number of pages that correspond to the
-** size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for
+** size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for
** details.
**
** errCode
**
** The Pager.errCode variable is only ever used in PAGER_ERROR state. It
-** is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode
-** is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX
+** is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode
+** is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX
** sub-codes.
**
** syncFlags, walSyncFlags
/*
** Indexes for use with Pager.aStat[]. The Pager.aStat[] array contains
-** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS
+** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS
** or CACHE_WRITE to sqlite3_db_status().
*/
#define PAGER_STAT_HIT 0
#define JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager) ((pPager->pageSize) + 8)
/*
-** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same
+** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same
** size as a single disk sector. See also setSectorSize().
*/
#define JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) (pPager->sectorSize)
# define pagerBeginReadTransaction(z) SQLITE_OK
#endif
-#ifndef NDEBUG
+#ifndef NDEBUG
/*
** Usage:
**
assert( p->tempFile==0 || p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
assert( p->tempFile==0 || pPager->changeCountDone );
- /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF".
+ /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF".
** And if the journal-mode is "OFF", the journal file must not be open.
*/
assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->useJournal );
assert( p->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || !isOpen(p->jfd) );
- /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since
- ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter
- ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing
- ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may
- ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It
- ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR
+ /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since
+ ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter
+ ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing
+ ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may
+ ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It
+ ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR
** state.
*/
if( MEMDB ){
assert( !isOpen(p->fd) );
assert( p->noSync );
- assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+ assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
);
assert( p->eState!=PAGER_ERROR && p->eState!=PAGER_OPEN );
assert( pagerUseWal(p)==0 );
** to journal_mode=wal.
*/
assert( p->eLock>=RESERVED_LOCK );
- assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
);
}
assert( pPager->dbOrigSize==pPager->dbFileSize );
assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK );
assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
assert( p->eLock>=EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
- assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
|| (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(p->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC)
);
assert( pPager->dbOrigSize<=pPager->dbHintSize );
assert( p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK );
assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
- assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
|| (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(p->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC)
);
break;
}
#endif /* ifndef NDEBUG */
-#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
+#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
/*
** Return a pointer to a human readable string in a static buffer
** containing the state of the Pager object passed as an argument. This
** succeeds, set the Pager.eLock variable to match the (attempted) new lock.
**
** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
-** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of
+** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of
** UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation of this.
*/
static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
/*
** Lock the database file to level eLock, which must be either SHARED_LOCK,
** RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. If the caller is successful, set the
-** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state.
+** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state.
**
-** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
-** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
-** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation
+** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
+** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
+** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation
** of this.
*/
static int pagerLockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
** (b) the value returned by OsSectorSize() is less than or equal
** to the page size.
**
-** If it can be used, then the value returned is the size of the journal
+** If it can be used, then the value returned is the size of the journal
** file when it contains rollback data for exactly one page.
**
** The atomic-batch-write optimization can be used if OsDeviceCharacteristics()
/*
** When this is called the journal file for pager pPager must be open.
-** This function attempts to read a super-journal file name from the
-** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied
+** This function attempts to read a super-journal file name from the
+** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied
** by the caller. See comments above writeSuperJournal() for the format
** used to store a super-journal file name at the end of a journal file.
**
** nul-terminator byte is appended to the buffer following the
** super-journal file name.
**
-** If it is determined that no super-journal file name is present
+** If it is determined that no super-journal file name is present
** zSuper[0] is set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned.
**
** If an error occurs while reading from the journal file, an SQLite
if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pJrnl, &szJ))
|| szJ<16
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-16, &len))
- || len>=nSuper
+ || len>=nSuper
|| len>szJ-16
- || len==0
+ || len==0
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-12, &cksum))
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsRead(pJrnl, aMagic, 8, szJ-8))
|| memcmp(aMagic, aJournalMagic, 8)
}
zSuper[len] = '\0';
zSuper[len+1] = '\0';
-
+
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
-** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately
-** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector
+** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately
+** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector
** size of pPager->sectorSize bytes.
**
** i.e for a sector size of 512:
** 512 512
** 100 512
** 2000 2048
-**
+**
*/
static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){
i64 offset = 0;
**
** If doTruncate is non-zero or the Pager.journalSizeLimit variable is
** set to 0, then truncate the journal file to zero bytes in size. Otherwise,
-** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case,
-** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately
+** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case,
+** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately
** after writing or truncating it.
**
** If Pager.journalSizeLimit is set to a positive, non-zero value, and
-** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the
+** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the
** journal file in bytes is larger than this value, then truncate the
** journal file to Pager.journalSizeLimit bytes. The journal file does
** not need to be synced following this operation.
rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY|pPager->syncFlags);
}
- /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock
- ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for
+ /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock
+ ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for
** the persistent journal and the journal file currently consumes more
** space than that limit allows for, truncate it now. There is no need
** to sync the file following this operation.
** - 4 bytes: Initial database page count.
** - 4 bytes: Sector size used by the process that wrote this journal.
** - 4 bytes: Database page size.
-**
+**
** Followed by (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes of unused space.
*/
static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
nHeader = JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager);
}
- /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created
- ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the
+ /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created
+ ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the
** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset fields now.
*/
for(ii=0; ii<pPager->nSavepoint; ii++){
pPager->journalHdr = pPager->journalOff = journalHdrOffset(pPager);
- /*
+ /*
** Write the nRec Field - the number of page records that follow this
** journal header. Normally, zero is written to this value at this time.
- ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced,
+ ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced,
** if in full-sync mode), the zero is overwritten with the true number
** of records (see syncJournal()).
**
*/
assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->noSync );
if( pPager->noSync || (pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY)
- || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND)
+ || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND)
){
memcpy(zHeader, aJournalMagic, sizeof(aJournalMagic));
put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)], 0xffffffff);
memset(zHeader, 0, sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4);
}
- /* The random check-hash initializer */
+ /* The random check-hash initializer */
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(pPager->cksumInit), &pPager->cksumInit);
put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4], pPager->cksumInit);
/* The initial database size */
memset(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20], 0,
nHeader-(sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20));
- /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the
- ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the
- ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next
+ /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the
+ ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the
+ ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next
** record is written to the following sector (leaving a gap in the file
** that will be implicitly filled in by the OS).
**
- ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can
+ ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can
** be significantly slower than contiguously writing data to the file,
- ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of
+ ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of
** (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes that will not be used. So that is what
- ** is done.
+ ** is done.
**
- ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the
+ ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the
** database page size. Since the zHeader buffer is only Pager.pageSize
** bytes in size, more than one call to sqlite3OsWrite() may be required
** to populate the entire journal header sector.
- */
+ */
for(nWrite=0; rc==SQLITE_OK&&nWrite<JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager); nWrite+=nHeader){
IOTRACE(("JHDR %p %lld %d\n", pPager, pPager->journalHdr, nHeader))
rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, zHeader, nHeader, pPager->journalOff);
/* Check that the values read from the page-size and sector-size fields
** are within range. To be 'in range', both values need to be a power
- ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their
+ ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their
** respective compile time maximum limits.
*/
if( iPageSize<512 || iSectorSize<32
|| iPageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE || iSectorSize>MAX_SECTOR_SIZE
- || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0 || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0
+ || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0 || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0
){
- /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is
- ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have
- ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading
+ /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is
+ ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have
+ ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading
** the journal file here.
*/
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
- /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal.
- ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within
+ /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal.
+ ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within
** PagerSetPagesize() is tested.
*/
rc = sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(pPager, &iPageSize, -1);
testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
- /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by
+ /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by
** the process that created this journal. If this journal was
** created by a process other than this one, then this routine
** is being called from within pager_playback(). The local value
** + 4 bytes: super-journal name checksum.
** + 8 bytes: aJournalMagic[].
**
-** The super-journal page checksum is the sum of the bytes in thesuper-journal
+** The super-journal page checksum is the sum of the bytes in the super-journal
** name, where each byte is interpreted as a signed 8-bit integer.
**
-** If zSuper is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction),
+** If zSuper is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction),
** this call is a no-op.
*/
static int writeSuperJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){
assert( pPager->setSuper==0 );
assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
- if( !zSuper
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+ if( !zSuper
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
|| !isOpen(pPager->jfd)
){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
pPager->journalOff += (nSuper+20);
- /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical
+ /* If the pager is in persistent-journal mode, then the physical
** journal-file may extend past the end of the super-journal name
- ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is
+ ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is
** dangerous because the code to rollback a hot-journal file
- ** will not be able to find the super-journal name to determine
- ** whether or not the journal is hot.
+ ** will not be able to find the super-journal name to determine
+ ** whether or not the journal is hot.
**
- ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal
+ ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal
** file to the required size.
- */
+ */
if( SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->jfd, &jrnlSize))
&& jrnlSize>pPager->journalOff
){
}
/*
-** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint
+** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint
** bitvecs of all open savepoints. Return SQLITE_OK if successful
** or SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc failure occurs.
*/
** not exhibit the UNDELETABLE_WHEN_OPEN property, the journal file is
** closed (if it is open).
**
-** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the
-** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to
+** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the
+** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to
** the OPEN state. Regardless of whether the pager is in exclusive-mode
** or not, any journal file left in the file-system will be treated
** as a hot-journal and rolled back the next time a read-transaction
*/
static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){
- assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER
- || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN
- || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR
+ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER
+ || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN
+ || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR
);
sqlite3BitvecDestroy(pPager->pInJournal);
/*
** This function is called whenever an IOERR or FULL error that requires
-** the pager to transition into the ERROR state may ahve occurred.
-** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second
-** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The
-** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function.
+** the pager to transition into the ERROR state may have occurred.
+** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second
+** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The
+** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function.
**
** If the second argument is SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the
** IOERR sub-codes, the pager enters the ERROR state and the error code
** is stored in Pager.errCode. While the pager remains in the ERROR state,
** all major API calls on the Pager will immediately return Pager.errCode.
**
-** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache
-** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding
+** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache
+** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding
** the contents of the pager-cache. If a transaction was active when
** the persistent error occurred, then the rollback journal may need
** to be replayed to restore the contents of the database file (as if
}
/*
-** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by
-** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called
+** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by
+** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called
** after rollback of a hot-journal, or if an error occurs while opening
** the journal file or writing the very first journal-header of a
** database transaction.
-**
+**
** This routine is never called in PAGER_ERROR state. If it is called
** in PAGER_NONE or PAGER_SHARED state and the lock held is less
** exclusive than a RESERVED lock, it is a no-op.
**
** Otherwise, any active savepoints are released.
**
-** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal
-** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a
+** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal
+** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a
** transaction. Nor will it be considered to be a hot-journal by this
** or any other database connection. Exactly how a journal is finalized
** depends on whether or not the pager is running in exclusive mode and
** the current journal-mode (Pager.journalMode value), as follows:
**
** journalMode==MEMORY
-** Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an
+** Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an
** in-memory journal.
**
** journalMode==TRUNCATE
** journalMode==PERSIST is used instead.
**
** After the journal is finalized, the pager moves to PAGER_READER state.
-** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is
+** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is
** downgraded to a SHARED_LOCK.
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs. If an error occurs during
** any of the IO operations to finalize the journal file or unlock the
-** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the
+** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the
** operation to finalize the journal file fails, then the code still
** tries to unlock the database file if not in exclusive mode. If the
** unlock operation fails as well, then the first error code related
** 1. After a successful hot-journal rollback, it is called with
** eState==PAGER_NONE and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
**
- ** 2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE
+ ** 2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE
** lock switches back to locking_mode=normal and then executes a
- ** read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER
+ ** read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER
** and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK when the read-transaction is closed.
*/
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
}
releaseAllSavepoints(pPager);
- assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->pInJournal==0
+ assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->pInJournal==0
|| (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_BATCH_ATOMIC)
);
if( isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){
*/
int bDelete = !pPager->tempFile;
assert( sqlite3JournalIsInMemory(pPager->jfd)==0 );
- assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
);
sqlite3OsClose(pPager->jfd);
if( bDelete ){
}
if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
- /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in
- ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE
+ /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in
+ ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE
** lock held on the database file.
*/
rc2 = sqlite3WalEndWriteTransaction(pPager->pWal);
}else if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bCommit && pPager->dbFileSize>pPager->dbSize ){
/* This branch is taken when committing a transaction in rollback-journal
** mode if the database file on disk is larger than the database image.
- ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction
+ ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction
** successfully committed, but the EXCLUSIVE lock is still held on the
** file. So it is safe to truncate the database file to its minimum
** required size. */
if( rc==SQLITE_NOTFOUND ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
- if( !pPager->exclusiveMode
+ if( !pPager->exclusiveMode
&& (!pagerUseWal(pPager) || sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(pPager->pWal, 0))
){
rc2 = pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK);
}
/*
-** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the
-** database file.
+** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the
+** database file.
**
-** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt
+** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt
** the rollback at this time. Instead, pager_unlock() is called. The
** call to pager_unlock() will discard all in-memory pages, unlock
-** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this
-** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next
-** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one)
+** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this
+** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next
+** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one)
** will roll it back.
**
** If the pager has not already entered the ERROR state, but an IO or
-** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause
+** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause
** the pager to enter the ERROR state. Which will be cleared by the
** call to pager_unlock(), as described above.
*/
/*
** Parameter aData must point to a buffer of pPager->pageSize bytes
-** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the
+** of data. Compute and return a checksum based on the contents of the
** page of data and the current value of pPager->cksumInit.
**
-** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the
+** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the
** random initial value (pPager->cksumInit) and every 200th byte
** of the page data, starting with byte offset (pPager->pageSize%200).
** Each byte is interpreted as an 8-bit unsigned integer.
** Changing the formula used to compute this checksum results in an
** incompatible journal file format.
**
-** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely
-** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed.
+** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely
+** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed.
** It is much less likely that the two ends of the journal record will be
** correct and the middle be corrupt. Thus, this "checksum" scheme,
** though fast and simple, catches the mostly likely kind of corruption.
** The page begins at offset *pOffset into the file. The *pOffset
** value is increased to the start of the next page in the journal.
**
-** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does
+** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does
** not.
**
** If the page number of the page record read from the (sub-)journal file
** is successfully read from the (sub-)journal file but appears to be
** corrupted, SQLITE_DONE is returned. Data is considered corrupted in
** two circumstances:
-**
+**
** * If the record page-number is illegal (0 or PAGER_SJ_PGNO), or
** * If the record is being rolled back from the main journal file
** and the checksum field does not match the record content.
assert( aData ); /* Temp storage must have already been allocated */
assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)==0 || (!isMainJrnl && isSavepnt) );
- /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction
+ /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction
** or savepoint rollback done at the request of the caller) or this is
** a hot-journal rollback. If it is a hot-journal rollback, the pager
** is in state OPEN and holds an EXCLUSIVE lock. Hot-journal rollback
** assert()able.
**
** If in WRITER_DBMOD, WRITER_FINISHED or OPEN state, then we update the
- ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked
+ ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked
** not dirty. Since this code is only executed in PAGER_OPEN state for
** a hot-journal rollback, it is guaranteed that the page-cache is empty
** if the pager is in OPEN state.
}else if( !isMainJrnl && pPg==0 ){
/* If this is a rollback of a savepoint and data was not written to
** the database and the page is not in-memory, there is a potential
- ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it
- ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be
- ** current.
+ ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it
+ ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be
+ ** current.
**
** There are a couple of different ways this can happen. All are quite
- ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen
+ ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen
** if the page is on the free-list at the start of the transaction, then
** populated, then moved using sqlite3PagerMovepage().
**
** The solution is to add an in-memory page to the cache containing
- ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty
- ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as
+ ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty
+ ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as
** requiring a journal-sync before it is written.
*/
assert( isSavepnt );
** This routine checks if it is possible to delete the super-journal file,
** and does so if it is.
**
-** Argument zSuper may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not
+** Argument zSuper may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not
** available for use within this function.
**
-** When a super-journal file is created, it is populated with the names
-** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8
-** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a
+** When a super-journal file is created, it is populated with the names
+** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8
+** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a
** nul-terminator byte (0x00). i.e. the entire contents of a super-journal
** file for a transaction involving two databases might be:
**
** "/home/bill/a.db-journal\x00/home/bill/b.db-journal\x00"
**
-** A super-journal file may only be deleted once all of its child
+** A super-journal file may only be deleted once all of its child
** journals have been rolled back.
**
-** This function reads the contents of the super-journal file into
+** This function reads the contents of the super-journal file into
** memory and loops through each of the child journal names. For
** each child journal, it checks if:
**
** * if the child journal exists, and if so
-** * if the child journal contains a reference to super-journal
+** * if the child journal contains a reference to super-journal
** file zSuper
**
** If a child journal can be found that matches both of the criteria
**
** If an IO error within this function, an error code is returned. This
** function allocates memory by calling sqlite3Malloc(). If an allocation
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors
** occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** TODO: This function allocates a single block of memory to load
** the entire contents of the super-journal file. This could be
-** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page
+** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page
** size.
*/
static int pager_delsuper(Pager *pPager, const char *zSuper){
/* One of the journals pointed to by the super-journal exists.
** Open it and check if it points at the super-journal. If
** so, return without deleting the super-journal file.
- ** NB: zJournal is really a MAIN_JOURNAL. But call it a
+ ** NB: zJournal is really a MAIN_JOURNAL. But call it a
** SUPER_JOURNAL here so that the VFS will not send the zJournal
** name into sqlite3_database_file_object().
*/
}
zJournal += (sqlite3Strlen30(zJournal)+1);
}
-
+
sqlite3OsClose(pSuper);
rc = sqlite3OsDelete(pVfs, zSuper, 0);
/*
-** This function is used to change the actual size of the database
+** This function is used to change the actual size of the database
** file in the file-system. This only happens when committing a transaction,
** or rolling back a transaction (including rolling back a hot-journal).
**
** If the main database file is not open, or the pager is not in either
-** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size
-** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes).
+** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size
+** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes).
** If the file on disk is currently larger than nPage pages, then use the VFS
** xTruncate() method to truncate it.
**
-** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than
-** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if
-** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it
-** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to
+** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than
+** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if
+** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it
+** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to
** the end of the new file instead.
**
** If successful, return SQLITE_OK. If an IO error occurs while modifying
assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_READER );
PAGERTRACE(("Truncate %d npage %u\n", PAGERID(pPager), nPage));
-
- if( isOpen(pPager->fd)
- && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN)
+
+ if( isOpen(pPager->fd)
+ && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN)
){
i64 currentSize, newSize;
int szPage = pPager->pageSize;
/*
** Set the value of the Pager.sectorSize variable for the given
** pager based on the value returned by the xSectorSize method
-** of the open database file. The sector size will be used
-** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and
+** of the open database file. The sector size will be used
+** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and
** super-journal pointers within created journal files.
**
** For temporary files the effective sector size is always 512 bytes.
assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->tempFile );
if( pPager->tempFile
- || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) &
+ || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) &
SQLITE_IOCAP_POWERSAFE_OVERWRITE)!=0
){
/* Sector size doesn't matter for temporary files. Also, the file
/*
** Playback the journal and thus restore the database file to
-** the state it was in before we started making changes.
+** the state it was in before we started making changes.
**
-** The journal file format is as follows:
+** The journal file format is as follows:
**
** (1) 8 byte prefix. A copy of aJournalMagic[].
** (2) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the number of valid page records
** in the journal. If this value is 0xffffffff, then compute the
** number of page records from the journal size.
-** (3) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the
+** (3) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the
** sanity checksum.
** (4) 4 byte integer which is the number of pages to truncate the
** database to during a rollback.
** from the file size. This value is used when the user selects the
** no-sync option for the journal. A power failure could lead to corruption
** in this case. But for things like temporary table (which will be
-** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care.
+** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care.
**
** If the file opened as the journal file is not a well-formed
** journal file then all pages up to the first corrupted page are rolled
** and an error code is returned.
**
** The isHot parameter indicates that we are trying to rollback a journal
-** that might be a hot journal. Or, it could be that the journal is
+** that might be a hot journal. Or, it could be that the journal is
** preserved because of JOURNALMODE_PERSIST or JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE.
** If the journal really is hot, reset the pager cache prior rolling
** back any content. If the journal is merely persistent, no reset is
pPager->journalOff = 0;
needPagerReset = isHot;
- /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or
- ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error
- ** occurs.
+ /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or
+ ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error
+ ** occurs.
*/
while( 1 ){
/* Read the next journal header from the journal file. If there are
** This indicates nothing more needs to be rolled back.
*/
rc = readJournalHdr(pPager, isHot, szJ, &nRec, &mxPg);
- if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
+ if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){
rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
** chunk of the journal contains zero pages to be rolled back. But
** when doing a ROLLBACK and the nRec==0 chunk is the last chunk in
** the journal, it means that the journal might contain additional
- ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages
+ ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages
** should be computed based on the journal file size.
*/
if( nRec==0 && !isHot &&
}
}
- /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the
+ /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the
** database file and/or page cache.
*/
for(u=0; u<nRec; u++){
sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pPager->fd,SQLITE_FCNTL_DB_UNCHANGED,0);
#endif
- /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or
- ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but
- ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter
- ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive
+ /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or
+ ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but
+ ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter
+ ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive
** mode, then subsequent transactions performed by the connection will not
** update the change-counter at all. This may lead to cache inconsistency
** problems for other processes at some point in the future. So, just
/*
** Read the content for page pPg out of the database file (or out of
-** the WAL if that is where the most recent copy if found) into
+** the WAL if that is where the most recent copy if found) into
** pPg->pData. A shared lock or greater must be held on the database
** file before this function is called.
**
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
/*
-** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been
+** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been
** written into the log file when a WAL transaction is rolled back.
-** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument
+** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument
** is actually a pointer to the Pager structure.
**
** If page iPg is present in the cache, and has no outstanding references,
** it is discarded. Otherwise, if there are one or more outstanding
** references, the page content is reloaded from the database. If the
-** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails,
+** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails,
** return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
*/
static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){
** updated as data is copied out of the rollback journal and into the
** database. This is not generally possible with a WAL database, as
** rollback involves simply truncating the log file. Therefore, if one
- ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore
+ ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore
** also copied into the backup databases) as part of this transaction,
** the backups must be restarted.
*/
PgHdr *pList; /* List of dirty pages to revert */
/* For all pages in the cache that are currently dirty or have already
- ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the
+ ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the
** following:
**
** + Discard the cached page (if refcount==0), or
** This function is a wrapper around sqlite3WalFrames(). As well as logging
** the contents of the list of pages headed by pList (connected by pDirty),
** this function notifies any active backup processes that the pages have
-** changed.
+** changed.
**
** The list of pages passed into this routine is always sorted by page number.
** Hence, if page 1 appears anywhere on the list, it will be the first page.
-*/
+*/
static int pagerWalFrames(
Pager *pPager, /* Pager object */
PgHdr *pList, /* List of frames to log */
assert( pPager->pWal );
assert( pList );
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* Verify that the page list is in accending order */
+ /* Verify that the page list is in ascending order */
for(p=pList; p && p->pDirty; p=p->pDirty){
assert( p->pgno < p->pDirty->pgno );
}
pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_WRITE] += nList;
if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList);
- rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal,
+ rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal,
pPager->pageSize, pList, nTruncate, isCommit, pPager->walSyncFlags
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->pBackup ){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
/*
** Check if the *-wal file that corresponds to the database opened by pPager
-** exists if the database is not empy, or verify that the *-wal file does
+** exists if the database is not empty, or verify that the *-wal file does
** not exist (by deleting it) if the database file is empty.
**
** If the database is not empty and the *-wal file exists, open the pager
** Return SQLITE_OK or an error code.
**
** The caller must hold a SHARED lock on the database file to call this
-** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete
-** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition
-** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some
+** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete
+** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition
+** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some
** other connection.
*/
static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
/*
** Playback savepoint pSavepoint. Or, if pSavepoint==NULL, then playback
-** the entire super-journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when
-** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction
+** the entire super-journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when
+** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction
** savepoint.
**
-** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is
+** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is
** being rolled back), then the rollback consists of up to three stages,
** performed in the order specified:
**
** * Pages are played back from the main journal starting at byte
-** offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to
+** offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to
** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset, or to the end of the main journal
** file if PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is zero.
**
** * If PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is not zero, then pages are played
-** back starting from the journal header immediately following
+** back starting from the journal header immediately following
** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset to the end of the main journal file.
**
** * Pages are then played back from the sub-journal file, starting
** journal file. There is no need for a bitvec in this case.
**
** In either case, before playback commences the Pager.dbSize variable
-** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint
+** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint
** (or transaction). No page with a page-number greater than this value
** is played back. If one is encountered it is simply skipped.
*/
}
}
- /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint
+ /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint
** being reverted was opened.
*/
pPager->dbSize = pSavepoint ? pSavepoint->nOrig : pPager->dbOrigSize;
** test is related to ticket #2565. See the discussion in the
** pager_playback() function for additional information.
*/
- if( nJRec==0
+ if( nJRec==0
&& pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff
){
nJRec = (u32)((szJ - pPager->journalOff)/JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager));
/*
** The following global variable is incremented whenever the library
** attempts to open a temporary file. This information is used for
-** testing and analysis only.
+** testing and analysis only.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0;
/*
** Open a temporary file.
**
-** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success
-** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically
+** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success
+** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically
** delete the temporary file when it is closed.
**
** The flags passed to the VFS layer xOpen() call are those specified
/*
** Set the busy handler function.
**
-** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns
+** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns
** SQLITE_BUSY when trying to upgrade from no-lock to a SHARED lock,
-** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE
+** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE
** lock. It does *not* invoke the busy handler when upgrading from
** SHARED to RESERVED, or when upgrading from SHARED to EXCLUSIVE
** (which occurs during hot-journal rollback). Summary:
** SHARED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | No
** RESERVED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | Yes
**
-** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is
+** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is
** retried. If it returns zero, then the SQLITE_BUSY error is
** returned to the caller of the pager API function.
*/
}
/*
-** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size
+** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size
** is passed in *pPageSize.
**
** If the pager is in the error state when this function is called, it
-** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e.
+** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e.
** one of SQLITE_IOERR, an SQLITE_IOERR_xxx sub-code or SQLITE_FULL).
**
** Otherwise, if all of the following are true:
**
-** * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power
+** * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power
** of two between 512 and SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, inclusive), and
**
** * there are no outstanding page references, and
**
** then the pager object page size is set to *pPageSize.
**
-** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc()
-** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged.
+** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc()
+** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged.
** In all other cases, SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** If the page size is not changed, either because one of the enumerated
** conditions above is not true, the pager was in error state when this
-** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed,
+** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed,
** then *pPageSize is set to the old, retained page size before returning.
*/
int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nReserve){
** function may be called from within PagerOpen(), before the state
** of the Pager object is internally consistent.
**
- ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in
+ ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in
** PAGER_ERROR state. But since PAGER_ERROR state guarantees that
** there is at least one outstanding page reference, this function
** is a no-op for that case anyhow.
u32 pageSize = *pPageSize;
assert( pageSize==0 || (pageSize>=512 && pageSize<=SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE) );
if( (pPager->memDb==0 || pPager->dbSize==0)
- && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0
- && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize
+ && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0
+ && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize
){
char *pNew = NULL; /* New temp space */
i64 nByte = 0;
}
/*
-** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive.
+** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive.
** Make no changes if mxPage is zero or negative. And never reduce the
** maximum page count below the current size of the database.
**
/*
** Read the first N bytes from the beginning of the file into memory
-** that pDest points to.
+** that pDest points to.
**
** If the pager was opened on a transient file (zFilename==""), or
** opened on a file less than N bytes in size, the output buffer is
-** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this
+** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this
** function is used to read database headers, and a new transient or
** zero sized database has a header than consists entirely of zeroes.
**
** This function may only be called when a read-transaction is open on
** the pager. It returns the total number of pages in the database.
**
-** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then
+** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then
** this is considered a 1 page file.
*/
void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){
** a similar or greater lock is already held, this function is a no-op
** (returning SQLITE_OK immediately).
**
-** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke
-** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat
-** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to
+** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke
+** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat
+** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to
** obtain the lock succeeds.
**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success and an error code if we cannot obtain
-** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state
+** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state
** variable to locktype before returning.
*/
static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
int rc; /* Return code */
- /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is
+ /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is
** already held), or one of the transitions that the busy-handler
** may be invoked during, according to the comment above
** sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler().
}
/*
-** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the
+** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the
** following is true for all dirty pages currently in the page-cache:
**
-** a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the
+** a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the
** current database image, in pages, OR
**
** b) if the page content were written at this time, it would not
** the database file. If a savepoint transaction were rolled back after
** this happened, the correct behavior would be to restore the current
** content of the page. However, since this content is not present in either
-** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and
+** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and
** sub-journal rolled back the content could not be restored and the
-** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that
+** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that
** this circumstance cannot arise.
*/
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
#endif
/*
-** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This
-** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It
-** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the
+** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This
+** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It
+** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the
** truncation will be done when the current transaction is committed.
**
** This function is only called right before committing a transaction.
/* At one point the code here called assertTruncateConstraint() to
** ensure that all pages being truncated away by this operation are,
- ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint
+ ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint
** journal so that they can be restored if the savepoint is rolled
** back. This is no longer necessary as this function is now only
- ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the
- ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0),
+ ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the
+ ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0),
** they cannot be rolled back. So the assertTruncateConstraint() call
** is no longer correct. */
}
** size of the journal file so that the pager_playback() routine knows
** that the entire journal file has been synced.
**
-** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures
+** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures
** that if a power-failure occurs during the rollback, the process that
** attempts rollback following system recovery sees the same journal
** content as this process.
**
-** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise,
+** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise,
** an SQLite error code.
*/
static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){
#if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
/*
-** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno.
+** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno.
** The new object will use the pointer pData, obtained from xFetch().
** If successful, set *ppPage to point to the new page reference
** and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code and set
PgHdr **ppPage /* OUT: Acquired page object */
){
PgHdr *p; /* Memory mapped page to return */
-
+
if( pPager->pMmapFreelist ){
*ppPage = p = pPager->pMmapFreelist;
pPager->pMmapFreelist = p->pDirty;
#endif
/*
-** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an
+** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an
** earlier call to pagerAcquireMapPage().
*/
static void pagerReleaseMapPage(PgHdr *pPg){
** result in a coredump.
**
** This function always succeeds. If a transaction is active an attempt
-** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback
+** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback
** a hot journal may be left in the filesystem but no error is returned
** to the caller.
*/
{
u8 *a = 0;
assert( db || pPager->pWal==0 );
- if( db && 0==(db->flags & SQLITE_NoCkptOnClose)
+ if( db && 0==(db->flags & SQLITE_NoCkptOnClose)
&& SQLITE_OK==databaseIsUnmoved(pPager)
){
a = pTmp;
pager_unlock(pPager);
}else{
/* If it is open, sync the journal file before calling UnlockAndRollback.
- ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal
- ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs
+ ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal
+ ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs
** while this is happening, the database could become corrupt.
**
** If an error occurs while trying to sync the journal, shift the pager
** disk and can be restored in the event of a hot-journal rollback.
**
** If the Pager.noSync flag is set, then this function is a no-op.
-** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the
+** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the
** device characteristics of the file-system, as follows:
**
** * If the journal file is an in-memory journal file, no action need
** been written following it. If the pager is operating in full-sync
** mode, then the journal file is synced before this field is updated.
**
-** * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then
+** * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then
** journal file is synced.
**
** Or, in pseudo-code:
** if( NOT SAFE_APPEND ){
** if( <full-sync mode> ) xSync(<journal file>);
** <update nRec field>
-** }
+** }
** if( NOT SEQUENTIAL ) xSync(<journal file>);
** }
**
-** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every
+** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every
** page currently held in memory before returning SQLITE_OK. If an IO
** error is encountered, then the IO error code is returned to the caller.
*/
** mode, then the journal file may at this point actually be larger
** than Pager.journalOff bytes. If the next thing in the journal
** file happens to be a journal-header (written as part of the
- ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure
- ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes
- ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its
- ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the
+ ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure
+ ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes
+ ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its
+ ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the
** hot-journal rollback following recovery. It may roll back all
** of this connections data, then proceed to rolling back the old,
** out-of-date data that follows it. Database corruption.
** byte to the start of it to prevent it from being recognized.
**
** Variable iNextHdrOffset is set to the offset at which this
- ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used
+ ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used
** as a temporary buffer to inspect the first couple of bytes of
** the potential journal header.
*/
** it as a candidate for rollback.
**
** This is not required if the persistent media supports the
- ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible
+ ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible
** for garbage data to be appended to the file, the nRec field
** is populated with 0xFFFFFFFF when the journal header is written
** and never needs to be updated.
if( 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){
PAGERTRACE(("SYNC journal of %d\n", PAGERID(pPager)));
IOTRACE(("JSYNC %p\n", pPager))
- rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags|
+ rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags|
(pPager->syncFlags==SQLITE_SYNC_FULL?SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY:0)
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
}
}
- /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just
- ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on
+ /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just
+ ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on
** all pages.
*/
sqlite3PcacheClearSyncFlags(pPager->pPCache);
** is called. Before writing anything to the database file, this lock
** is upgraded to an EXCLUSIVE lock. If the lock cannot be obtained,
** SQLITE_BUSY is returned and no data is written to the database file.
-**
+**
** If the pager is a temp-file pager and the actual file-system file
-** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is
+** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is
** written out.
**
** Once the lock has been upgraded and, if necessary, the file opened,
** in Pager.dbFileVers[] is updated to match the new value stored in
** the database file.
**
-** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
+** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
** occurs, an IO error code is returned. Or, if the EXCLUSIVE lock cannot
** be obtained, SQLITE_BUSY is returned.
*/
** file size will be.
*/
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->fd) );
- if( rc==SQLITE_OK
+ if( rc==SQLITE_OK
&& pPager->dbHintSize<pPager->dbSize
&& (pList->pDirty || pList->pgno>pPager->dbHintSize)
){
*/
if( pgno<=pPager->dbSize && 0==(pList->flags&PGHDR_DONT_WRITE) ){
i64 offset = (pgno-1)*(i64)pPager->pageSize; /* Offset to write */
- char *pData; /* Data to write */
+ char *pData; /* Data to write */
assert( (pList->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 );
if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList);
rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->fd, pData, pPager->pageSize, offset);
/* If page 1 was just written, update Pager.dbFileVers to match
- ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this
- ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize.
+ ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this
+ ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize.
*/
if( pgno==1 ){
memcpy(&pPager->dbFileVers, &pData[24], sizeof(pPager->dbFileVers));
}
/*
-** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this
+** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this
** function is a no-op.
**
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An
-** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen()
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An
+** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen()
** fails.
*/
static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
if( !isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ){
- const int flags = SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE
- | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE
+ const int flags = SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE
+ | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE
| SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE;
int nStmtSpill = sqlite3Config.nStmtSpill;
if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || pPager->subjInMemory ){
}
/*
-** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal.
+** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal.
**
** If successful, set the bit corresponding to pPg->pgno in the bitvecs
** for all open savepoints before returning.
**
** This function returns SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, an IO
-** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or
+** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or
** SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc fails while setting a bit in a savepoint
** bitvec.
*/
assert( pPager->useJournal );
assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pagerUseWal(pPager) );
assert( isOpen(pPager->sjfd) || pPager->nSubRec==0 );
- assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)
- || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg)
- || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize
+ assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)
+ || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg)
+ || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize
);
rc = openSubJournal(pPager);
** This function is called by the pcache layer when it has reached some
** soft memory limit. The first argument is a pointer to a Pager object
** (cast as a void*). The pager is always 'purgeable' (not an in-memory
-** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is
+** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is
** currently dirty but has no outstanding references. The page
-** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first
+** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first
** argument.
**
** The job of this function is to make pPg clean by writing its contents
** out to the database file, if possible. This may involve syncing the
-** journal file.
+** journal file.
**
** If successful, sqlite3PcacheMakeClean() is called on the page and
** SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying to make the
** a rollback or by user request, respectively.
**
** Spilling is also prohibited when in an error state since that could
- ** lead to database corruption. In the current implementation it
+ ** lead to database corruption. In the current implementation it
** is impossible for sqlite3PcacheFetch() to be called with createFlag==3
** while in the error state, hence it is impossible for this routine to
** be called in the error state. Nevertheless, we include a NEVER()
pPg->pDirty = 0;
if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
/* Write a single frame for this page to the log. */
- rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg);
+ rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = pagerWalFrames(pPager, pPg, 0, 0);
}
}else{
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE
if( pPager->tempFile==0 ){
rc = sqlite3JournalCreate(pPager->jfd);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return pager_error(pPager, rc);
}
#endif
-
+
/* Sync the journal file if required. */
- if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
+ if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
|| pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
){
rc = syncJournal(pPager, 1);
}
-
+
/* Write the contents of the page out to the database file. */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
assert( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 );
sqlite3PcacheMakeClean(pPg);
}
- return pager_error(pPager, rc);
+ return pager_error(pPager, rc);
}
/*
** The zFilename argument is the path to the database file to open.
** If zFilename is NULL then a randomly-named temporary file is created
** and used as the file to be cached. Temporary files are be deleted
-** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then
-** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk.
+** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then
+** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk.
** This can be used to implement an in-memory database.
**
** The nExtra parameter specifies the number of bytes of space allocated
** of the PAGER_* flags.
**
** The vfsFlags parameter is a bitmask to pass to the flags parameter
-** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files.
+** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files.
**
-** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened
+** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened
** successfully, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppPager set to point to
** the new pager object. If an error occurs, *ppPager is set to NULL
** and error code returned. This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM
-** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or
+** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or
** various SQLITE_IO_XXX errors.
*/
int sqlite3PagerOpen(
}
/* Allocate memory for the Pager structure, PCache object, the
- ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal
+ ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal
** file name. The layout in memory is as follows:
**
** Pager object (sizeof(Pager) bytes)
** disk and uses an in-memory rollback journal.
**
** This branch also runs for files marked as immutable.
- */
+ */
act_like_temp_file:
tempFile = 1;
pPager->eState = PAGER_READER; /* Pretend we already have a lock */
readOnly = (vfsFlags&SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY);
}
- /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of
+ /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of
** Pager.pageSize and to allocate the Pager.pTmpSpace buffer.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
/* pPager->state = PAGER_UNLOCK; */
/* pPager->errMask = 0; */
pPager->tempFile = (u8)tempFile;
- assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL
+ assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL
|| tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE );
assert( PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE==1 );
- pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile;
+ pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile;
pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile;
pPager->memDb = (u8)memDb;
pPager->readOnly = (u8)readOnly;
/*
** This function is called after transitioning from PAGER_UNLOCK to
** PAGER_SHARED state. It tests if there is a hot journal present in
-** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that
+** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that
** needs to be played back. According to this function, a hot-journal
** file exists if the following criteria are met:
**
** at the end of the file. If there is, and that super-journal file
** does not exist, then the journal file is not really hot. In this
** case this routine will return a false-positive. The pager_playback()
-** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and
-** will not roll it back.
+** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and
+** will not roll it back.
**
-** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and
+** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and
** SQLITE_OK returned. If no hot-journal file is present, *pExists is
** set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying
** to determine whether or not a hot-journal file exists, the IO error
int locked = 0; /* True if some process holds a RESERVED lock */
/* Race condition here: Another process might have been holding the
- ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess()
+ ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess()
** call above, but then delete the journal and drop the lock before
** we get to the following sqlite3OsCheckReservedLock() call. If that
** is the case, this routine might think there is a hot journal when
/* The journal file exists and no other connection has a reserved
** or greater lock on the database file. Now check that there is
** at least one non-zero bytes at the start of the journal file.
- ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not,
+ ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not,
** it can be ignored.
*/
if( !jrnlOpen ){
** on the database file), then an attempt is made to obtain a
** SHARED lock on the database file. Immediately after obtaining
** the SHARED lock, the file-system is checked for a hot-journal,
-** which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal
+** which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal
** rollback, the contents of the cache are validated by checking
** the 'change-counter' field of the database file header and
** discarded if they are found to be invalid.
** the contents of the page cache and rolling back any open journal
** file.
**
-** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
-** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or
+** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
+** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or
** rolling back a journal file, the IO error code is returned.
*/
int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
/* This routine is only called from b-tree and only when there are no
** outstanding pages. This implies that the pager state should either
- ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in
+ ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in
** exclusive access mode. */
assert( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 );
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
** important that a RESERVED lock is not obtained on the way to the
** EXCLUSIVE lock. If it were, another process might open the
** database file, detect the RESERVED lock, and conclude that the
- ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the
+ ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the
** hot-journal back.
- **
+ **
** Because the intermediate RESERVED lock is not requested, any
- ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to
- ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock
+ ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to
+ ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock
** on the database file.
**
** Unless the pager is in locking_mode=exclusive mode, the lock is
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
goto failed;
}
-
- /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the
- ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because
- ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open
- ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access
- ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist
+
+ /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the
+ ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because
+ ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open
+ ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access
+ ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist
** mode (and also for journal_mode=truncate on some systems).
**
- ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some
- ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before
- ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it
+ ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some
+ ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before
+ ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it
** may mean that the pager was in the error-state when this
** function was called and the journal file does not exist.
*/
}
}
}
-
+
/* Playback and delete the journal. Drop the database write
** lock and reacquire the read lock. Purge the cache before
** playing back the hot-journal so that we don't end up with
** or roll back a hot-journal while holding an EXCLUSIVE lock. The
** pager_unlock() routine will be called before returning to unlock
** the file. If the unlock attempt fails, then Pager.eLock must be
- ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for
- ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation).
+ ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for
+ ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation).
**
** In order to get pager_unlock() to do this, set Pager.eState to
** PAGER_ERROR now. This is not actually counted as a transition
** since we know that the same call to pager_unlock() will very
** shortly transition the pager object to the OPEN state. Calling
** assert_pager_state() would fail now, as it should not be possible
- ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page
+ ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page
** references.
*/
pager_error(pPager, rc);
** a 32-bit counter that is incremented with each change. The
** other bytes change randomly with each file change when
** a codec is in use.
- **
- ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be
+ **
+ ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be
** detected. The chance of an undetected change is so small that
** it can be neglected.
*/
** Except, in locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE when there is nothing to in
** the rollback journal, the unlock is not performed and there is
** nothing to rollback, so this routine is a no-op.
-*/
+*/
static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
if( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 ){
assert( pPager->nMmapOut==0 ); /* because page1 is never memory mapped */
/*
** The page getter methods each try to acquire a reference to a
-** page with page number pgno. If the requested reference is
+** page with page number pgno. If the requested reference is
** successfully obtained, it is copied to *ppPage and SQLITE_OK returned.
**
** There are different implementations of the getter method depending
** getPageError() -- Used if the pager is in an error state
** getPageMmap() -- Used if memory-mapped I/O is enabled
**
-** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned.
+** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned.
** Otherwise, a new page object is allocated and populated with data
** read from the database file. In some cases, the pcache module may
** choose not to allocate a new page object and may reuse an existing
** object with no outstanding references.
**
-** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the
-** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is
+** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the
+** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is
** already in the cache when this function is called, then the extra
** data is left as it was when the page object was last used.
**
-** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if
-** the flags parameter contains the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT bit and the
-** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no
-** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the
-** page is initialized to all zeros.
+** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if
+** the flags parameter contains the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT bit and the
+** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no
+** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the
+** page is initialized to all zeros.
**
** If PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT is true, it means that we do not care about
** the contents of the page. This occurs in two scenarios:
return SQLITE_OK;
}else{
- /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to
+ /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to
** be initialized. But first some error checks:
**
** (*) obsolete. Was: maximum page number is 2^31
}
if( noContent ){
/* Failure to set the bits in the InJournal bit-vectors is benign.
- ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a
- ** page that does not need to be journaled. Nevertheless, be sure
- ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set
+ ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a
+ ** page that does not need to be journaled. Nevertheless, be sure
+ ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set
** a bit in a bit vector.
*/
sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
/* It is acceptable to use a read-only (mmap) page for any page except
** page 1 if there is no write-transaction open or the ACQUIRE_READONLY
- ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a
+ ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a
** temporary or in-memory database. */
const int bMmapOk = (pgno>1
&& (pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || (flags & PAGER_GET_READONLY))
}
if( bMmapOk && iFrame==0 ){
void *pData = 0;
- rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd,
+ rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd,
(i64)(pgno-1) * pPager->pageSize, pPager->pageSize, &pData
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pData ){
/*
** Acquire a page if it is already in the in-memory cache. Do
** not read the page from disk. Return a pointer to the page,
-** or 0 if the page is not in cache.
+** or 0 if the page is not in cache.
**
** See also sqlite3PagerGet(). The difference between this routine
** and sqlite3PagerGet() is that _get() will go to the disk and read
** in the page if the page is not already in cache. This routine
-** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error
+** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error
** has ever happened.
*/
DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
/*
** This function is called at the start of every write transaction.
-** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database
+** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database
** file when this routine is called.
**
** Open the journal file for pager pPager and write a journal header
** to the start of it. If there are active savepoints, open the sub-journal
-** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being
-** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used
+** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being
+** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used
** when opening a hot journal file to roll it back.
**
** If the journal file is already open (as it may be in exclusive mode),
** then this function just writes a journal header to the start of the
-** already open file.
+** already open file.
**
** Whether or not the journal file is opened by this function, the
** Pager.pInJournal bitvec structure is allocated.
**
-** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return
-** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or
+** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return
+** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or
** an IO error code if opening or writing the journal file fails.
*/
static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED );
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
assert( pPager->pInJournal==0 );
-
+
/* If already in the error state, this function is a no-op. But on
** the other hand, this routine is never called if we are already in
** an error state. */
if( pPager->pInJournal==0 ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}
-
+
/* Open the journal file if it is not already open. */
if( !isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){
if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){
flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL;
nSpill = jrnlBufferSize(pPager);
}
-
+
/* Verify that the database still has the same name as it did when
** it was originally opened. */
rc = databaseIsUnmoved(pPager);
}
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->jfd) );
}
-
-
- /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open
+
+
+ /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open
** the sub-journal if necessary.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
}
/*
-** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a
+** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a
** write-transaction has already been opened, this function is a no-op.
**
** If the exFlag argument is false, then acquire at least a RESERVED
** lock on the database file. If exFlag is true, then acquire at least
-** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking
+** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking
** functions need be called.
**
** If the subjInMemory argument is non-zero, then any sub-journal opened
** has no effect if the sub-journal is already opened (as it may be when
** running in exclusive mode) or if the transaction does not require a
** sub-journal. If the subjInMemory argument is zero, then any required
-** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database,
+** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database,
** or using a temporary file otherwise.
*/
int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory){
**
** WAL mode sets Pager.eState to PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED or CACHEMOD
** when it has an open transaction, but never to DBMOD or FINISHED.
- ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint
- ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database
- ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in
+ ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint
+ ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database
+ ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in
** WAL mode.
*/
pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED;
rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, iOff+pPager->pageSize+4, cksum);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
- IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno,
+ IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno,
pPager->journalOff, pPager->pageSize));
PAGER_INCR(sqlite3_pager_writej_count);
PAGERTRACE(("JOURNAL %d page %d needSync=%d hash(%08x)\n",
- PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno,
+ PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno,
((pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0), pager_pagehash(pPg)));
pPager->journalOff += 8 + pPager->pageSize;
}
/*
-** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the
+** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the
** main journal or sub-journal as required. If the page is written into
-** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the
+** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the
** Pager.pInJournal bitvec and the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint bitvecs
** of any open savepoints as appropriate.
*/
Pager *pPager = pPg->pPager;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
- /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already
+ /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already
** been started. The journal file may or may not be open at this point.
** It is never called in the ERROR state.
*/
** obtained the necessary locks to begin the write-transaction, but the
** rollback journal might not yet be open. Open it now if this is the case.
**
- ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page.
+ ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page.
** Otherwise, if it were done after calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty(), then
** an error might occur and the pager would end up in WRITER_LOCKED state
** with pages marked as dirty in the cache.
** PGHDR_WRITEABLE bit that indicates that the page can be safely modified.
*/
pPg->flags |= PGHDR_WRITEABLE;
-
+
/* If the statement journal is open and the page is not in it,
** then write the page into the statement journal.
*/
}
}
- /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages
+ /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages
** starting at pg1, then it needs to be set for all of them. Because
** writing to any of these nPage pages may damage the others, the
** journal file must contain sync()ed copies of all of them
}
/*
-** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before
-** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value
-** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless
+** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before
+** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value
+** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless
** this routine returns SQLITE_OK.
**
** The difference between this function and pager_write() is that this
** on the given page is unused. The pager marks the page as clean so
** that it does not get written to disk.
**
-** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large
+** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large
** DELETE operations.
**
** This optimization cannot be used with a temp-file, as the page may
** have been dirty at the start of the transaction. In that case, if
-** memory pressure forces page pPg out of the cache, the data does need
-** to be written out to disk so that it may be read back in if the
+** memory pressure forces page pPg out of the cache, the data does need
+** to be written out to disk so that it may be read back in if the
** current transaction is rolled back.
*/
void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
}
/*
-** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file
-** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at
+** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file
+** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at
** byte offset 24 of the pager file. The secondary change counter at
** 92 is also updated, as is the SQLite version number at offset 96.
**
** But this only happens if the pPager->changeCountDone flag is false.
** To avoid excess churning of page 1, the update only happens once.
-** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an
+** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an
** unconditional update of the change counters.
**
-** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling
+** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling
** sqlite3PagerWrite() on page 1, then modifying the contents of the
** page data. In this case the file will be updated when the current
** transaction is committed.
** The isDirectMode flag may only be non-zero if the library was compiled
** with the SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE macro defined. In this case,
** if isDirect is non-zero, then the database file is updated directly
-** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the
+** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the
** sqlite3OsWrite() function.
*/
static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){
assert( pPgHdr==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK );
/* If page one was fetched successfully, and this function is not
- ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable. When not in
+ ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable. When not in
** direct mode, page 1 is always held in cache and hence the PagerGet()
** above is always successful - hence the ALWAYS on rc==SQLITE_OK.
*/
/*
** This function may only be called while a write-transaction is active in
-** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op.
-** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on
+** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op.
+** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on
** the database file, an attempt is made to obtain one.
**
** If the EXCLUSIVE lock is already held or the attempt to obtain it is
** successful, or the connection is in WAL mode, SQLITE_OK is returned.
-** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is
+** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is
** returned.
*/
int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
int rc = pPager->errCode;
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
- || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD
- || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
+ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
+ || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD
+ || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
);
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
if( 0==pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
/*
** Sync the database file for the pager pPager. zSuper points to the name
** of a super-journal file that should be written into the individual
-** journal file. zSuper may be NULL, which is interpreted as no
+** journal file. zSuper may be NULL, which is interpreted as no
** super-journal (a single database transaction).
**
** This routine ensures that:
**
** * The database file change-counter is updated,
** * the journal is synced (unless the atomic-write optimization is used),
-** * all dirty pages are written to the database file,
+** * all dirty pages are written to the database file,
** * the database file is truncated (if required), and
-** * the database file synced.
+** * the database file synced.
**
-** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize
-** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or
+** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize
+** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or
** delete the super-journal file if specified).
**
** Note that if zSuper==NULL, this does not overwrite a previous value
/* Provide the ability to easily simulate an I/O error during testing */
if( sqlite3FaultSim(400) ) return SQLITE_IOERR;
- PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zSuper=%s nSize=%d\n",
+ PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zSuper=%s nSize=%d\n",
pPager->zFilename, zSuper, pPager->dbSize));
/* If no database changes have been made, return early. */
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE
/* The following block updates the change-counter. Exactly how it
** does this depends on whether or not the atomic-update optimization
- ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the
- ** runtime criteria to use the operation:
+ ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the
+ ** runtime criteria to use the operation:
**
** * The file-system supports the atomic-write property for
- ** blocks of size page-size, and
+ ** blocks of size page-size, and
** * This commit is not part of a multi-file transaction, and
** * Exactly one page has been modified and store in the journal file.
**
** is not applicable to this transaction, call sqlite3JournalCreate()
** to make sure the journal file has actually been created, then call
** pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter in indirect
- ** mode.
+ ** mode.
**
** Otherwise, if the optimization is both enabled and applicable,
** then call pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter
*/
if( bBatch==0 ){
PgHdr *pPg;
- assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd)
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd)
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
);
- if( !zSuper && isOpen(pPager->jfd)
- && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager)
+ if( !zSuper && isOpen(pPager->jfd)
+ && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager)
&& pPager->dbSize>=pPager->dbOrigSize
&& (!(pPg = sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache)) || 0==pPg->pDirty)
){
- /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The
- ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1
- ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1
- ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write
+ /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The
+ ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1
+ ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1
+ ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write
** property of the host file-system, this is safe.
*/
rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 1);
rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 0);
#endif /* !SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE */
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
-
+
/* Write the super-journal name into the journal file. If a
- ** super-journal file name has already been written to the journal file,
+ ** super-journal file name has already been written to the journal file,
** or if zSuper is NULL (no super-journal), then this call is a no-op.
*/
rc = writeSuperJournal(pPager, zSuper);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
-
+
/* Sync the journal file and write all dirty pages to the database.
- ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not
+ ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not
** create the journal file or perform any real IO.
**
** Because the change-counter page was just modified, unless the
** atomic-update optimization is used it is almost certain that the
** journal requires a sync here. However, in locking_mode=exclusive
- ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is
+ ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is
** not the case. In this case it is likely enough that the redundant
- ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow.
+ ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow.
*/
rc = syncJournal(pPager, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
}
sqlite3PcacheCleanAll(pPager->pPCache);
- /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use
+ /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use
** pager_truncate to grow the file here. This can happen if the database
** image was extended as part of the current transaction and then the
** last page in the db image moved to the free-list. In this case the
rc = pager_truncate(pPager, nNew);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
}
-
+
/* Finally, sync the database file. */
if( !noSync ){
rc = sqlite3PagerSync(pPager, zSuper);
/*
** When this function is called, the database file has been completely
** updated to reflect the changes made by the current transaction and
-** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system
+** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system
** though, and if a failure occurs at this point it will eventually
** be used as a hot-journal and the current transaction rolled back.
**
-** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting,
-** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used
+** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting,
+** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used
** for hot-journal rollback. Once this is done the transaction is
** irrevocably committed.
**
** this transaction, the pager is running in exclusive-mode and is
** using persistent journals, then this function is a no-op.
**
- ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal
+ ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal
** header with the nRec field set to 0. If such a journal is used as
** a hot-journal during hot-journal rollback, 0 changes will be made
- ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal
+ ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal
** header. Since the pager is in exclusive mode, there is no need
** to drop any locks either.
*/
- if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
- && pPager->exclusiveMode
+ if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
+ && pPager->exclusiveMode
&& pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
){
assert( pPager->journalOff==JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) || !pPager->journalOff );
}
/*
-** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the
+** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the
** transaction are reverted and the current write-transaction is closed.
** The pager falls back to PAGER_READER state if successful, or PAGER_ERROR
** state if an error occurs.
**
** Otherwise, in rollback mode, this function performs two functions:
**
-** 1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and
+** 1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and
** in-memory cache pages to the state they were in when the transaction
** was opened, and
**
** 2) It finalizes the journal file, so that it is not used for hot
** rollback at any point in the future.
**
-** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the
+** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the
** rollback is successful.
**
** In WAL mode, all cache-entries containing data modified within the
PAGERTRACE(("ROLLBACK %d\n", PAGERID(pPager)));
/* PagerRollback() is a no-op if called in READER or OPEN state. If
- ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not
+ ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not
** attempted here. Instead, the error code is returned to the caller.
*/
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
int eState = pPager->eState;
rc = pager_end_transaction(pPager, 0, 0);
if( !MEMDB && eState>PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ){
- /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error
+ /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error
** state to indicate that the contents of the cache may not be trusted.
** Any active readers will get SQLITE_ABORT.
*/
assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || rc!=SQLITE_OK );
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_FULL || rc==SQLITE_CORRUPT
- || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR
+ || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR
|| rc==SQLITE_CANTOPEN
);
** it was added later.
**
** Before returning, *pnVal is incremented by the
-** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the
-** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before
+** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the
+** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before
** returning.
*/
void sqlite3PagerCacheStat(Pager *pPager, int eStat, int reset, int *pnVal){
** to make up the difference. If the number of savepoints is already
** equal to nSavepoint, then this function is a no-op.
**
-** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error
+** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error
** occurs while opening the sub-journal file, then an IO error code is
** returned. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
*/
assert( nSavepoint>nCurrent && pPager->useJournal );
/* Grow the Pager.aSavepoint array using realloc(). Return SQLITE_NOMEM
- ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a
+ ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a
** malloc failure occurs while populating it in the for(...) loop below.
*/
aNew = (PagerSavepoint *)sqlite3Realloc(
/*
** This function is called to rollback or release (commit) a savepoint.
-** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently
+** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently
** created savepoint.
**
** Parameter op is always either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE.
** index iSavepoint. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then rollback all changes
** that have occurred since the specified savepoint was created.
**
-** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter
+** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter
** iSavepoint. A value of 0 means to operate on the outermost savepoint
** (the first created). A value of (Pager.nSavepoint-1) means operate
** on the most recently created savepoint. If iSavepoint is greater than
** (Pager.nSavepoint-1), then this function is a no-op.
**
** If a negative value is passed to this function, then the current
-** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling
+** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling
** sqlite3PagerRollback() because this function does not terminate
-** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the
-** contents of the database to its original state.
+** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the
+** contents of the database to its original state.
**
-** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint
+** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint
** are destroyed. If this is a release operation (op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE),
** then savepoint iSavepoint is also destroyed.
**
** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation fails,
-** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a
+** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a
** savepoint. If no errors occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
-*/
+*/
int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
int rc = pPager->errCode;
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS
if( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
#endif
int nNew; /* Number of remaining savepoints after this op. */
/* Figure out how many savepoints will still be active after this
- ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated
+ ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated
** with any savepoints that are destroyed by this operation.
*/
nNew = iSavepoint + (( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) ? 0 : 1);
rc = pagerPlaybackSavepoint(pPager, pSavepoint);
assert(rc!=SQLITE_DONE);
}
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS
- /* If the cache has been modified but the savepoint cannot be rolled
+ /* If the cache has been modified but the savepoint cannot be rolled
** back journal_mode=off, put the pager in the error state. This way,
** if the VFS used by this pager includes ZipVFS, the entire transaction
** can be rolled back at the ZipVFS level. */
- else if(
- pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ else if(
+ pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
&& pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
){
pPager->errCode = SQLITE_ABORT;
** transaction is active).
**
** If the fourth argument, isCommit, is non-zero, then this page is being
-** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction
-** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page
+** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction
+** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page
** pPg refers to will not be written to again within this transaction.
**
** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM or an IO error code if an error
}
/* If the page being moved is dirty and has not been saved by the latest
- ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the
+ ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the
** sub-journal now. This is required to handle the following scenario:
**
** BEGIN;
return rc;
}
- PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n",
+ PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n",
PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0, pgno));
IOTRACE(("MOVE %p %d %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, pgno))
** be written to, store pPg->pgno in local variable needSyncPgno.
**
** If the isCommit flag is set, there is no need to remember that
- ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno
+ ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno
** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to it.
*/
if( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC) && !isCommit ){
}
/* If the cache contains a page with page-number pgno, remove it
- ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for
- ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained
+ ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for
+ ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained
** for the page moved there.
*/
pPg->flags &= ~PGHDR_NEED_SYNC;
}
if( needSyncPgno ){
- /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be
+ /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be
** sync()ed before any data is written to database file page needSyncPgno.
- ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the
+ ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the
** "is journaled" bitvec flag has been set. This needs to be remedied by
** loading the page into the pager-cache and setting the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
** flag.
#endif
/*
-** The page handle passed as the first argument refers to a dirty page
-** with a page number other than iNew. This function changes the page's
-** page number to iNew and sets the value of the PgHdr.flags field to
+** The page handle passed as the first argument refers to a dirty page
+** with a page number other than iNew. This function changes the page's
+** page number to iNew and sets the value of the PgHdr.flags field to
** the value passed as the third parameter.
*/
void sqlite3PagerRekey(DbPage *pPg, Pgno iNew, u16 flags){
}
/*
-** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space
+** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space
** allocated along with the specified page.
*/
void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){
/*
** Get/set the locking-mode for this pager. Parameter eMode must be one
-** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or
+** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or
** PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE. If the parameter is not _QUERY, then
** the locking-mode is set to the value specified.
**
assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR );
pPager->journalMode = (u8)eMode;
- /* When transistioning from TRUNCATE or PERSIST to any other journal
+ /* When transitioning from TRUNCATE or PERSIST to any other journal
** mode except WAL, unless the pager is in locking_mode=exclusive mode,
** delete the journal file.
*/
eOrigLock = pPager->eLock;
rc = pagerLockDb(pPager, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
- /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the
+ /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the
** pending lock that may have been obtained instead. */
pagerUnlockDb(pPager, eOrigLock);
}
}
/*
-** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in
+** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in
** exclusive-locking mode when this function is called, take an EXCLUSIVE
** lock on the database file and use heap-memory to store the wal-index
** in. Otherwise, use the normal shared-memory.
assert( pPager->pWal==0 && pPager->tempFile==0 );
assert( pPager->eLock==SHARED_LOCK || pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
- /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use
- ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory
+ /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use
+ ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory
** implementation. Take the exclusive lock now, before opening the WAL
** file, to make sure this is safe.
*/
rc = pagerExclusiveLock(pPager);
}
- /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails,
+ /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails,
** (e.g. due to malloc() failure), return an error code.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
** If the pager passed as the first argument is open on a real database
** file (not a temp file or an in-memory database), and the WAL file
** is not already open, make an attempt to open it now. If successful,
-** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does
+** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does
** not support the xShmXXX() methods, return an error code. *pbOpen is
** not modified in either case.
**
** This function is called to close the connection to the log file prior
** to switching from WAL to rollback mode.
**
-** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an
+** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an
** EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. If this cannot be obtained, an
** error (SQLITE_BUSY) is returned and the log connection is not closed.
** If successful, the EXCLUSIVE lock is not released before returning.
rc = pagerOpenWal(pPager);
}
}
-
+
/* Checkpoint and close the log. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock is held on
** the database file, the log and log-summary files will be deleted.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT
/*
** If pager pPager is a wal-mode database not in exclusive locking mode,
-** invoke the sqlite3WalWriteLock() function on the associated Wal object
+** invoke the sqlite3WalWriteLock() function on the associated Wal object
** with the same db and bLock parameters as were passed to this function.
** Return an SQLite error code if an error occurs, or SQLITE_OK otherwise.
*/
}
/*
-** Set the database handle used by the wal layer to determine if
+** Set the database handle used by the wal layer to determine if
** blocking locks are required.
*/
void sqlite3PagerWalDb(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
/*
** If this is a WAL database, store a pointer to pSnapshot. Next time a
-** read transaction is opened, attempt to read from the snapshot it
+** read transaction is opened, attempt to read from the snapshot it
** identifies. If this is not a WAL database, return an error.
*/
int sqlite3PagerSnapshotOpen(
- Pager *pPager,
+ Pager *pPager,
sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
-** If this is a WAL database, call sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(). If this
+** If this is a WAL database, call sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(). If this
** is not a WAL database, return an error.
*/
int sqlite3PagerSnapshotRecover(Pager *pPager){
** The caller currently has a read transaction open on the database.
** If this is not a WAL database, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. Otherwise,
** this function takes a SHARED lock on the CHECKPOINTER slot and then
-** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still
+** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still
** available. If so, SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** If the snapshot is not available, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. Or, if
return p->szCache;
}else{
i64 n;
- /* IMPLEMANTATION-OF: R-59858-46238 If the argument N is negative, then the
+ /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-59858-46238 If the argument N is negative, then the
** number of cache pages is adjusted to be a number of pages that would
** use approximately abs(N*1024) bytes of memory based on the current
** page size. */
}
/*
-** Sort the list of pages in accending order by pgno. Pages are
+** Sort the list of pages in ascending order by pgno. Pages are
** connected by pDirty pointers. The pDirtyPrev pointers are
** corrupted by this sort.
**
**
** The third case is a chunk of heap memory (defaulting to 100 pages worth)
** that is allocated when the page cache is created. The size of the local
-** bulk allocation can be adjusted using
+** bulk allocation can be adjusted using
**
** sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, (void*)0, 0, N).
**
** If N is positive, then N pages worth of memory are allocated using a single
** sqlite3Malloc() call and that memory is used for the first N pages allocated.
** Or if N is negative, then -1024*N bytes of memory are allocated and used
-** for as many pages as can be accomodated.
+** for as many pages as can be accommodated.
**
** Only one of (2) or (3) can be used. Once the memory available to (2) or
** (3) is exhausted, subsequent allocations fail over to the general-purpose
typedef struct PGroup PGroup;
/*
-** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following
+** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following
** structure. A buffer of PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated
** directly before this structure and is used to cache the page content.
**
** overrun area, so that overreads are harmless.
**
** Variables isBulkLocal and isAnchor were once type "u8". That works,
-** but causes a 2-byte gap in the structure for most architectures (since
+** but causes a 2-byte gap in the structure for most architectures (since
** pointers must be either 4 or 8-byte aligned). As this structure is located
** in memory directly after the associated page data, if the database is
-** corrupt, code at the b-tree layer may overread the page buffer and
+** corrupt, code at the b-tree layer may overread the page buffer and
** read part of this structure before the corruption is detected. This
-** can cause a valgrind error if the unitialized gap is accessed. Using u16
+** can cause a valgrind error if the uninitialized gap is accessed. Using u16
** ensures there is no such gap, and therefore no bytes of uninitialized
** memory in the structure.
**
#define PAGE_IS_PINNED(p) ((p)->pLruNext==0)
#define PAGE_IS_UNPINNED(p) ((p)->pLruNext!=0)
-/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup. A PGroup is a set
+/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup. A PGroup is a set
** of one or more PCaches that are able to recycle each other's unpinned
** pages when they are under memory pressure. A PGroup is an instance of
** the following object.
** temporary or transient database) has a single page cache which
** is an instance of this object.
**
-** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as
+** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as
** opaque sqlite3_pcache* handles.
*/
struct PCache1 {
/* Cache configuration parameters. Page size (szPage) and the purgeable
** flag (bPurgeable) and the pnPurgeable pointer are all set when the
- ** cache is created and are never changed thereafter. nMax may be
+ ** cache is created and are never changed thereafter. nMax may be
** modified at any time by a call to the pcache1Cachesize() method.
** The PGroup mutex must be held when accessing nMax.
*/
*/
int isInit; /* True if initialized */
int separateCache; /* Use a new PGroup for each PCache */
- int nInitPage; /* Initial bulk allocation size */
+ int nInitPage; /* Initial bulk allocation size */
int szSlot; /* Size of each free slot */
int nSlot; /* The number of pcache slots */
int nReserve; /* Try to keep nFreeSlot above this */
/*
-** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is
+** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is
** supplied to use for the page-cache by passing the SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE
** verb to sqlite3_config(). Parameter pBuf points to an allocation large
** enough to contain 'n' buffers of 'sz' bytes each.
/*
** Malloc function used within this file to allocate space from the buffer
-** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no
-** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls
+** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no
+** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls
** back to sqlite3Malloc().
**
** Multiple threads can run this routine at the same time. Global variables
}else{
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT
/* The group mutex must be released before pcache1Alloc() is called. This
- ** is because it might call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that
+ ** is because it might call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that
** this mutex is not held. */
assert( pcache1.separateCache==0 );
assert( pCache->pGroup==&pcache1.grp );
}
/*
-** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the
+** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the
** PGroup LRU list, if is part of it. If pPage is not part of the PGroup
** LRU list, then this function is a no-op.
**
/*
-** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table
+** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table
** (PCache1.apHash structure) that it is currently stored in.
** Also free the page if freePage is true.
**
}
/*
-** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value)
-** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this
+** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value)
+** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this
** criteria are unpinned before they are discarded.
**
** The PCache mutex must be held when this function is called.
PgHdr1 **pp;
PgHdr1 *pPage;
assert( h<pCache->nHash );
- pp = &pCache->apHash[h];
+ pp = &pCache->apHash[h];
while( (pPage = *pp)!=0 ){
if( pPage->iKey>=iLimit ){
pCache->nPage--;
**
** * Use a unified cache in single-threaded applications that have
** configured a start-time buffer for use as page-cache memory using
- ** sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, pBuf, sz, N) with non-NULL
+ ** sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, pBuf, sz, N) with non-NULL
** pBuf argument.
**
** * Otherwise use separate caches (mode-1)
/*
** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShutdown method.
-** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does
+** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does
** not need to be freed.
*/
static void pcache1Shutdown(void *NotUsed){
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method.
**
** Configure the cache_size limit for a cache.
*/
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method.
**
** Free up as much memory as possible.
*/
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method.
*/
static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){
int n;
** for these steps, the main pcache1Fetch() procedure can run faster.
*/
static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
- PCache1 *pCache,
- unsigned int iKey,
+ PCache1 *pCache,
+ unsigned int iKey,
int createFlag
){
unsigned int nPinned;
}
}
- /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found,
- ** attempt to allocate a new one.
+ /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found,
+ ** attempt to allocate a new one.
*/
if( !pPage ){
pPage = pcache1AllocPage(pCache, createFlag==1);
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method.
**
** Fetch a page by key value.
**
** Whether or not a new page may be allocated by this function depends on
** the value of the createFlag argument. 0 means do not allocate a new
-** page. 1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available. 2
+** page. 1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available. 2
** means to try really hard to allocate a new page.
**
** For a non-purgeable cache (a cache used as the storage for an in-memory
** There are three different approaches to obtaining space for a page,
** depending on the value of parameter createFlag (which may be 0, 1 or 2).
**
-** 1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a
+** 1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a
** copy of the requested page. If one is found, it is returned.
**
** 2. If createFlag==0 and the page is not already in the cache, NULL is
** PCache1.nMax, or
**
** (b) the number of pages pinned by the cache is greater than
-** the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of
+** the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of
** nMin for all other purgeable caches, or
**
** 4. If none of the first three conditions apply and the cache is marked
** as purgeable, and if one of the following is true:
**
-** (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already
+** (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already
** PCache1.nMax, or
**
** (b) The number of pages allocated for all purgeable caches is
**
** then attempt to recycle a page from the LRU list. If it is the right
** size, return the recycled buffer. Otherwise, free the buffer and
-** proceed to step 5.
+** proceed to step 5.
**
** 5. Otherwise, allocate and return a new page buffer.
**
** invokes the appropriate routine.
*/
static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchNoMutex(
- sqlite3_pcache *p,
- unsigned int iKey,
+ sqlite3_pcache *p,
+ unsigned int iKey,
int createFlag
){
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
}
#if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX
static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchWithMutex(
- sqlite3_pcache *p,
- unsigned int iKey,
+ sqlite3_pcache *p,
+ unsigned int iKey,
int createFlag
){
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
}
#endif
static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch(
- sqlite3_pcache *p,
- unsigned int iKey,
+ sqlite3_pcache *p,
+ unsigned int iKey,
int createFlag
){
#if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
** Mark a page as unpinned (eligible for asynchronous recycling).
*/
static void pcache1Unpin(
- sqlite3_pcache *p,
- sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg,
+ sqlite3_pcache *p,
+ sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg,
int reuseUnlikely
){
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg;
PGroup *pGroup = pCache->pGroup;
-
+
assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
pcache1EnterMutex(pGroup);
- /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already
+ /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already
** part of the PGroup LRU list.
*/
assert( pPage->pLruNext==0 );
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method.
*/
static void pcache1Rekey(
sqlite3_pcache *p,
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg;
PgHdr1 **pp;
- unsigned int hOld, hNew;
+ unsigned int hOld, hNew;
assert( pPage->iKey==iOld );
assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
assert( iOld!=iNew ); /* The page number really is changing */
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method.
**
** Discard all unpinned pages in the cache with a page number equal to
** or greater than parameter iLimit. Any pinned pages with a page number
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method.
**
** Destroy a cache allocated using pcache1Create().
*/
** by the current thread may be sqlite3_free()ed.
**
** nReq is the number of bytes of memory required. Once this much has
-** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number
+** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number
** of bytes of memory released.
*/
int sqlite3PcacheReleaseMemory(int nReq){
** that includes the PragType_XXXX macro definitions and the aPragmaName[]
** object. This ensures that the aPragmaName[] table is arranged in
** lexicographical order to facility a binary search of the pragma name.
-** Do not edit pragma.h directly. Edit and rerun the script in at
+** Do not edit pragma.h directly. Edit and rerun the script in at
** ../tool/mkpragmatab.tcl. */
#include "pragma.h"
/*
** Interpret the given string as a safety level. Return 0 for OFF,
-** 1 for ON or NORMAL, 2 for FULL, and 3 for EXTRA. Return 1 for an empty or
+** 1 for ON or NORMAL, 2 for FULL, and 3 for EXTRA. Return 1 for an empty or
** unrecognized string argument. The FULL and EXTRA option is disallowed
** if the omitFull parameter it 1.
**
/*
** Interpret the given string as an auto-vacuum mode value.
**
-** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are
+** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are
** acceptable, as are their numeric equivalents: 0, 1 and 2 respectively.
*/
static int getAutoVacuum(const char *z){
case OE_SetDflt: zName = "SET DEFAULT"; break;
case OE_Cascade: zName = "CASCADE"; break;
case OE_Restrict: zName = "RESTRICT"; break;
- default: zName = "NO ACTION";
+ default: zName = "NO ACTION";
assert( action==OE_None ); break;
}
return zName;
int isBuiltin, /* True if this is a built-in function */
int showInternFuncs /* True if showing internal functions */
){
- u32 mask =
+ u32 mask =
SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC |
SQLITE_DIRECTONLY |
SQLITE_SUBTYPE |
&& showInternFuncs==0
){
continue;
- }
+ }
if( p->xValue!=0 ){
zType = "w";
}else if( p->xFinalize!=0 ){
}
/*
-** Process a pragma statement.
+** Process a pragma statement.
**
** Pragmas are of this form:
**
** id and pId2 is any empty string.
*/
void sqlite3Pragma(
- Parse *pParse,
+ Parse *pParse,
Token *pId1, /* First part of [schema.]id field */
Token *pId2, /* Second part of [schema.]id field, or NULL */
Token *pValue, /* Token for <value>, or NULL */
if( iDb<0 ) return;
pDb = &db->aDb[iDb];
- /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the
- ** pragma, make sure it is open.
+ /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the
+ ** pragma, make sure it is open.
*/
if( iDb==1 && sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(pParse) ){
return;
}
/* Register the result column names for pragmas that return results */
- if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns)==0
+ if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns)==0
&& ((pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1)==0 || zRight==0)
){
setPragmaResultColumnNames(v, pPragma);
/* Jump to the appropriate pragma handler */
switch( pPragma->ePragTyp ){
-
+
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED)
/*
** PRAGMA [schema.]default_cache_size
** PRAGMA [schema.]max_page_count=N
**
** The first form reports the current setting for the
- ** maximum number of pages in the database file. The
+ ** maximum number of pages in the database file. The
** second form attempts to change this setting. Both
** forms return the current setting.
**
*/
rc = sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(pBt, eAuto);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eAuto==1 || eAuto==2) ){
- /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or
+ /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or
** "incremental", write the value of meta[6] in the database
** file. Before writing to meta[6], check that meta[3] indicates
** that this really is an auto-vacuum capable database.
**
** The first form reports the current local setting for the
** page cache spill size. The second form turns cache spill on
- ** or off. When turnning cache spill on, the size is set to the
+ ** or off. When turning cache spill on, the size is set to the
** current cache_size. The third form sets a spill size that
** may be different form the cache size.
** If N is positive then that is the
assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) );
if( !zRight ){
returnSingleInt(v,
- (db->flags & SQLITE_CacheSpill)==0 ? 0 :
+ (db->flags & SQLITE_CacheSpill)==0 ? 0 :
sqlite3BtreeSetSpillSize(pDb->pBt,0));
}else{
int size = 1;
Pager *pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pDb->pBt);
char *proxy_file_path = NULL;
sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
- sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
+ sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
&proxy_file_path);
returnSingleText(v, proxy_file_path);
}else{
sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
int res;
if( zRight[0] ){
- res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
+ res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
zRight);
} else {
- res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
+ res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
NULL);
}
if( res!=SQLITE_OK ){
}
break;
}
-#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
-
+#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
+
/*
** PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous
** PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous=OFF|ON|NORMAL|FULL|EXTRA
returnSingleInt(v, pDb->safety_level-1);
}else{
if( !db->autoCommit ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Safety level may not be changed inside a transaction");
}else if( iDb!=1 ){
int iLevel = (getSafetyLevel(zRight,0,1)+1) & PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_MASK;
}
}
- /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL
+ /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL
** compiler (eg. count_changes). So add an opcode to expire all
** compiled SQL statements after modifying a pragma value.
*/
pFK = pTab->u.tab.pFKey;
if( pFK ){
int iTabDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
- int i = 0;
+ int i = 0;
pParse->nMem = 8;
sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(pParse, iTabDb);
while(pFK){
addrOk = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
/* Generate code to read the child key values into registers
- ** regRow..regRow+n. If any of the child key values are NULL, this
- ** row cannot cause an FK violation. Jump directly to addrOk in
+ ** regRow..regRow+n. If any of the child key values are NULL, this
+ ** row cannot cause an FK violation. Jump directly to addrOk in
** this case. */
sqlite3TouchRegister(pParse, regRow + pFK->nCol);
for(j=0; j<pFK->nCol; j++){
**
** Verify the integrity of the database.
**
- ** The "quick_check" is reduced version of
+ ** The "quick_check" is reduced version of
** integrity_check designed to detect most database corruption
** without the overhead of cross-checking indexes. Quick_check
** is linear time wherease integrity_check is O(NlogN).
**
- ** The maximum nubmer of errors is 100 by default. A different default
+ ** The maximum number of errors is 100 by default. A different default
** can be specified using a numeric parameter N.
**
** Or, the parameter N can be the name of a table. In that case, only
sqlite3OpenTableAndIndices(pParse, pTab, OP_OpenRead, 0,
1, 0, &iDataCur, &iIdxCur);
/* reg[7] counts the number of entries in the table.
- ** reg[8+i] counts the number of entries in the i-th index
+ ** reg[8+i] counts the number of entries in the i-th index
*/
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 0, 7);
for(j=0, pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext, j++){
if( mxCol==pTab->iPKey ) mxCol--;
}else{
/* COLFLAG_VIRTUAL columns are not included in the WITHOUT ROWID
- ** PK index column-count, so there is no need to account for them
+ ** PK index column-count, so there is no need to account for them
** in this case. */
mxCol = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab)->nColumn-1;
}
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, p1, p3, 3);
jmp3 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, 3, labelOk);
VdbeCoverage(v);
- }
+ }
zErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "NULL value in %s.%s", pTab->zName,
pCol->zCnName);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 3, 0, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC);
for(k=pCheck->nExpr-1; k>0; k--){
sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pCheck->a[k].pExpr, addrCkFault, 0);
}
- sqlite3ExprIfTrue(pParse, pCheck->a[0].pExpr, addrCkOk,
+ sqlite3ExprIfTrue(pParse, pCheck->a[0].pExpr, addrCkOk,
SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrCkFault);
pParse->iSelfTab = 0;
sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, jmp5-1);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, jmp6);
}
-
+
/* For UNIQUE indexes, verify that only one entry exists with the
** current key. The entry is unique if (1) any column is NULL
** or (2) the next entry has a different key */
sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, r2, pPk->nKeyCol);
}
}
- }
+ }
}
{
static const int iLn = VDBE_OFFSET_LINENO(2);
** encoding that will be used for the main database file if a new file
** is created. If an existing main database file is opened, then the
** default text encoding for the existing database is used.
- **
+ **
** In all cases new databases created using the ATTACH command are
** created to use the same default text encoding as the main database. If
** the main database has not been initialized and/or created when ATTACH
if( zRight ){
sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(db, sqlite3Atoi(zRight));
}
- returnSingleInt(v,
- db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ?
+ returnSingleInt(v,
+ db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ?
SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(db->pWalArg) : 0);
}
break;
** 0x0002 Run ANALYZE on tables that might benefit. On by default.
** See below for additional information.
**
- ** 0x0004 (Not yet implemented) Record usage and performance
+ ** 0x0004 (Not yet implemented) Record usage and performance
** information from the current session in the
** database file so that it will be available to "optimize"
** pragmas run by future database connections.
** The default MASK is and always shall be 0xfffe. 0xfffe means perform all
** of the optimizations listed above except Debug Mode, including new
** optimizations that have not yet been invented. If new optimizations are
- ** ever added that should be off by default, those off-by-default
+ ** ever added that should be off by default, those off-by-default
** optimizations will have bitmasks of 0x10000 or larger.
**
** DETERMINATION OF WHEN TO RUN ANALYZE
Schema *pSchema; /* The current schema */
Table *pTab; /* A table in the schema */
Index *pIdx; /* An index of the table */
- LogEst szThreshold; /* Size threshold above which reanalysis is needd */
+ LogEst szThreshold; /* Size threshold above which reanalysis needed */
char *zSubSql; /* SQL statement for the OP_SqlExec opcode */
u32 opMask; /* Mask of operations to perform */
}
if( szThreshold ){
sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iTabCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfSmaller, iTabCur,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_IfSmaller, iTabCur,
sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2+(opMask&1), szThreshold);
VdbeCoverage(v);
}
pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt==0 || sqlite3BtreePager(pBt)==0 ){
zState = "closed";
- }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zDbSName : 0,
+ }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zDbSName : 0,
SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCKSTATE, &j)==SQLITE_OK ){
zState = azLockName[j];
}
/* The following block is a no-op unless SQLITE_DEBUG is defined. Its only
** purpose is to execute assert() statements to verify that if the
** PragFlg_NoColumns1 flag is set and the caller specified an argument
- ** to the PRAGMA, the implementation has not added any OP_ResultRow
+ ** to the PRAGMA, the implementation has not added any OP_ResultRow
** instructions to the VM. */
if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1) && zRight ){
sqlite3VdbeVerifyNoResultRow(v);
char *azArg[2]; /* Value of the argument and schema */
};
-/*
+/*
** Pragma virtual table module xConnect method.
*/
static int pragmaVtabConnect(
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Pragma virtual table module xDisconnect method.
*/
static int pragmaVtabDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Pragma virtual table module xFilter method.
*/
static int pragmaVtabFilter(
- sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
+ sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
){
}
/* The xColumn method simply returns the corresponding column from
-** the PRAGMA.
+** the PRAGMA.
*/
static int pragmaVtabColumn(
- sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
- sqlite3_context *ctx,
+ sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
+ sqlite3_context *ctx,
int i
){
PragmaVtabCursor *pCsr = (PragmaVtabCursor*)pVtabCursor;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** Pragma virtual table module xRowid method.
*/
static int pragmaVtabRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *p){
** immediately.
**
** Use this mechanism for uncommon cleanups. There is a higher setup
-** cost for this mechansim (an extra malloc), so it should not be used
+** cost for this mechanism (an extra malloc), so it should not be used
** for common cleanups that happen on most calls. But for less
** common cleanups, we save a single NULL-pointer comparison in
** sqlite3ParseObjectReset(), which reduces the total CPU cycle count.
pExTab = pExpr->y.pTab;
assert( pExTab!=0 );
if( (pExTab->tabFlags & TF_HasGenerated)!=0
- && (pExTab->aCol[n].colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)!=0
+ && (pExTab->aCol[n].colFlags & COLFLAG_GENERATED)!=0
){
testcase( pExTab->nCol==BMS-1 );
testcase( pExTab->nCol==BMS );
/*
** Given the name of a column of the form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z, look up
-** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr
+** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr
** expression node refer back to that source column. The following changes
** are made to pExpr:
**
} /* if( pSrcList ) */
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_UPSERT)
- /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe
+ /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe
** it is a new.* or old.* trigger argument reference. Or
** maybe it is an excluded.* from an upsert. Or maybe it is
** a reference in the RETURNING clause to a table being modified.
}
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_UPSERT */
- if( pTab ){
+ if( pTab ){
int iCol;
u8 hCol = sqlite3StrIHash(zCol);
pSchema = pTab->pSchema;
}
goto lookupname_end;
}
- }
+ }
}
/* Advance to the next name context. The loop will exit when either
**
** static void notValid(
** Parse *pParse, // Leave error message here
-** NameContext *pNC, // The name context
+** NameContext *pNC, // The name context
** const char *zMsg, // Type of error
** int validMask, // Set of contexts for which prohibited
** Expr *pExpr // Invalidate this expression on error
/* The special operator TK_ROW means use the rowid for the first
** column in the FROM clause. This is used by the LIMIT and ORDER BY
- ** clause processing on UPDATE and DELETE statements, and by
+ ** clause processing on UPDATE and DELETE statements, and by
** UPDATE ... FROM statement processing.
*/
case TK_ROW: {
int anRef[8];
NameContext *p;
int i;
- for(i=0, p=pNC; p && i<ArraySize(anRef); p=p->pNext, i++){
+ for(i=0, p=pNC; p && i<ArraySize(anRef); p=p->pNext, i++){
anRef[i] = p->nRef;
}
sqlite3WalkExpr(pWalker, pExpr->pLeft);
** Or a database, table and column: ID.ID.ID
**
** The TK_ID and TK_OUT cases are combined so that there will only
- ** be one call to lookupName(). Then the compiler will in-line
+ ** be one call to lookupName(). Then the compiler will in-line
** lookupName() for a size reduction and performance increase.
*/
case TK_ID:
** to likelihood(X,0.9375). */
/* TUNING: unlikely() probability is 0.0625. likely() is 0.9375 */
pExpr->iTable = pDef->zName[0]=='u' ? 8388608 : 125829120;
- }
+ }
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
{
|| (pDef->xValue && pDef->xInverse && pDef->xSFunc && pDef->xFinalize)
);
if( pDef && pDef->xValue==0 && pWin ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"%#T() may not be used as a window function", pExpr
);
pNC->nNcErr++;
- }else if(
+ }else if(
(is_agg && (pNC->ncFlags & NC_AllowAgg)==0)
|| (is_agg && (pDef->funcFlags&SQLITE_FUNC_WINDOW) && !pWin)
|| (is_agg && pWin && (pNC->ncFlags & NC_AllowWin)==0)
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC
else if( is_agg==0 && ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"FILTER may not be used with non-aggregate %#T()",
pExpr
);
}
#endif
pNC2 = pNC;
- while( pNC2
+ while( pNC2
&& sqlite3ReferencesSrcList(pParse, pExpr, pNC2->pSrcList)==0
){
pExpr->op2++;
assert( SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER==NC_OrderAgg );
testcase( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX)!=0 );
testcase( (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER)!=0 );
- pNC2->ncFlags |= NC_HasAgg
+ pNC2->ncFlags |= NC_HasAgg
| ((pDef->funcFlags^SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER)
& (SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX|SQLITE_FUNC_ANYORDER));
}
pNC->ncFlags |= savedAllowFlags;
}
/* FIX ME: Compute pExpr->affinity based on the expected return
- ** type of the function
+ ** type of the function
*/
return WRC_Prune;
}
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused");
sqlite3RecordErrorOffsetOfExpr(pParse->db, pExpr);
}
- break;
+ break;
}
}
assert( pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 || pParse->nErr!=0 );
int mx, /* Largest permissible value of i */
Expr *pError /* Associate the error with the expression */
){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"%r %s BY term out of range - should be "
"between 1 and %d", i, zType, mx);
sqlite3RecordErrorOffsetOfExpr(pParse->db, pError);
iCol = resolveAsName(pParse, pEList, pE);
if( iCol==0 ){
/* Now test if expression pE matches one of the values returned
- ** by pSelect. In the usual case this is done by duplicating the
+ ** by pSelect. In the usual case this is done by duplicating the
** expression, resolving any symbols in it, and then comparing
** it against each expression returned by the SELECT statement.
** Once the comparisons are finished, the duplicate expression
}
for(j=0; j<pSelect->pEList->nExpr; j++){
if( sqlite3ExprCompare(0, pE, pSelect->pEList->a[j].pExpr, -1)==0 ){
- /* Since this expresion is being changed into a reference
+ /* Since this expression is being changed into a reference
** to an identical expression in the result set, remove all Window
** objects belonging to the expression from the Select.pWin list. */
windowRemoveExprFromSelect(pSelect, pE);
ExprList *pGroupBy; /* The GROUP BY clause */
Select *pLeftmost; /* Left-most of SELECT of a compound */
sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */
-
+
assert( p!=0 );
if( p->selFlags & SF_Resolved ){
pSub->pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy;
p->pOrderBy = 0;
}
-
+
/* Recursively resolve names in all subqueries in the FROM clause
*/
for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){
}
}
}
-
+
/* Set up the local name-context to pass to sqlite3ResolveExprNames() to
** resolve the result-set expression list.
*/
sNC.ncFlags = NC_AllowAgg|NC_AllowWin;
sNC.pSrcList = p->pSrc;
sNC.pNext = pOuterNC;
-
+
/* Resolve names in the result set. */
if( sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, p->pEList) ) return WRC_Abort;
sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowWin;
-
- /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY
+
+ /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY
** expression, do not allow aggregates in any of the other expressions.
*/
assert( (p->selFlags & SF_Aggregate)==0 );
}else{
sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowAgg;
}
-
+
/* Add the output column list to the name-context before parsing the
** other expressions in the SELECT statement. This is so that
** expressions in the WHERE clause (etc.) can refer to expressions by
for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){
SrcItem *pItem = &p->pSrc->a[i];
if( pItem->fg.isTabFunc
- && sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pItem->u1.pFuncArg)
+ && sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pItem->u1.pFuncArg)
){
return WRC_Abort;
}
#endif
/* The ORDER BY and GROUP BY clauses may not refer to terms in
- ** outer queries
+ ** outer queries
*/
sNC.pNext = 0;
sNC.ncFlags |= NC_AllowAgg|NC_AllowWin;
- /* If this is a converted compound query, move the ORDER BY clause from
+ /* If this is a converted compound query, move the ORDER BY clause from
** the sub-query back to the parent query. At this point each term
** within the ORDER BY clause has been transformed to an integer value.
** These integers will be replaced by copies of the corresponding result
return WRC_Abort;
}
sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowWin;
-
- /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause. At the same time, make sure
+
+ /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause. At the same time, make sure
** the GROUP BY clause does not contain aggregate functions.
*/
if( pGroupBy ){
struct ExprList_item *pItem;
-
+
if( resolveOrderGroupBy(&sNC, p, pGroupBy, "GROUP") || db->mallocFailed ){
return WRC_Abort;
}
** checking on function usage and set a flag if any aggregate functions
** are seen.
**
-** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the
+** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the
** form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z where
**
** X: The name of a database. Ex: "main" or "temp" or
**
** SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY a+b;
**
-** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is
+** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is
** defined and that the correct number of arguments are specified.
** If the function is an aggregate function, then the NC_HasAgg flag is
** set and the opcode is changed from TK_FUNCTION to TK_AGG_FUNCTION.
** An error message is left in pParse if anything is amiss. The number
** if errors is returned.
*/
-int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
+int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
NameContext *pNC, /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */
Expr *pExpr /* The expression to be analyzed. */
){
** just like sqlite3ResolveExprNames() except that it works for an expression
** list rather than a single expression.
*/
-int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(
+int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(
NameContext *pNC, /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */
ExprList *pList /* The expression list to be analyzed. */
){
/*
** Resolve all names in all expressions of a SELECT and in all
-** decendents of the SELECT, including compounds off of p->pPrior,
+** descendants of the SELECT, including compounds off of p->pPrior,
** subqueries in expressions, and subqueries used as FROM clause
** terms.
**
** extracts the least value from the RowSet.
**
** The INSERT primitive might allocate additional memory. Memory is
-** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation. There is an
+** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation. There is an
** upper bound on the size of allocated memory. No memory is freed
** until DESTROY.
**
** The TEST primitive includes a "batch" number. The TEST primitive
** will only see elements that were inserted before the last change
** in the batch number. In other words, if an INSERT occurs between
-** two TESTs where the TESTs have the same batch nubmer, then the
+** two TESTs where the TESTs have the same batch number, then the
** value added by the INSERT will not be visible to the second TEST.
** The initial batch number is zero, so if the very first TEST contains
** a non-zero batch number, it will see all prior INSERTs.
** in the list, pLeft points to the tree, and v is unused. The
** RowSet.pForest value points to the head of this forest list.
*/
-struct RowSetEntry {
+struct RowSetEntry {
i64 v; /* ROWID value for this entry */
struct RowSetEntry *pRight; /* Right subtree (larger entries) or list */
struct RowSetEntry *pLeft; /* Left subtree (smaller entries) */
/*
** Merge two lists of RowSetEntry objects. Remove duplicates.
**
-** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are
+** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are
** assumed to each already be in sorted order.
*/
static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge(
/*
** Sort all elements on the list of RowSetEntry objects into order of
** increasing v.
-*/
+*/
static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntrySort(struct RowSetEntry *pIn){
unsigned int i;
struct RowSetEntry *pNext, *aBucket[40];
struct RowSetEntry *pLeft; /* Left subtree */
if( *ppList==0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/
/* Prevent unnecessary deep recursion when we run out of entries */
- return 0;
+ return 0;
}
if( iDepth>1 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/
/* This branch causes a *balanced* tree to be generated. A valid tree
** NATURAL FULL - JT_NATURAL|JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT
** NATURAL FULL OUTER JT_NATRUAL|JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT
**
-** To preserve historical compatibly, SQLite also accepts a variety
-** of other non-standard and in many cases non-sensical join types.
+** To preserve historical compatibly, SQLite also accepts a variety
+** of other non-standard and in many cases nonsensical join types.
** This routine makes as much sense at it can from the nonsense join
** type and returns a result. Examples of accepted nonsense join types
** include but are not limited to:
for(i=0; i<3 && apAll[i]; i++){
p = apAll[i];
for(j=0; j<ArraySize(aKeyword); j++){
- if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar
+ if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar
&& sqlite3StrNICmp((char*)p->z, &zKeyText[aKeyword[j].i], p->n)==0 ){
jointype |= aKeyword[j].code;
break;
for(i=iStart; i<=iEnd; i++){
iCol = sqlite3ColumnIndex(pSrc->a[i].pTab, zCol);
- if( iCol>=0
+ if( iCol>=0
&& (bIgnoreHidden==0 || IsHiddenColumn(&pSrc->a[i].pTab->aCol[iCol])==0)
){
if( piTab ){
}
sqlite3SetJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable, joinFlag);
p = p->pRight;
- }
+ }
}
/* Undo the work of sqlite3SetJoinExpr(). This is used when a LEFT JOIN
}
unsetJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable, nullable);
p = p->pRight;
- }
+ }
}
/*
if( NEVER(pLeft->pTab==0 || pRightTab==0) ) continue;
joinType = (pRight->fg.jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0 ? EP_OuterON : EP_InnerON;
- /* If this is a NATURAL join, synthesize an approprate USING clause
+ /* If this is a NATURAL join, synthesize an appropriate USING clause
** to specify which columns should be joined.
*/
if( pRight->fg.jointype & JT_NATURAL ){
}
/* Create extra terms on the WHERE clause for each column named
- ** in the USING clause. Example: If the two tables to be joined are
+ ** in the USING clause. Example: If the two tables to be joined are
** A and B and the USING clause names X, Y, and Z, then add this
** to the WHERE clause: A.X=B.X AND A.Y=B.Y AND A.Z=B.Z
** Report an error if any column mentioned in the USING clause is
** case regData==regOrigData.
** (3) Some output columns are omitted from the sort record due to
** the SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES optimization, or due to the
- ** SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF optimization, or due to the
- ** SortCtx.pDeferredRowLoad optimiation. In any of these cases
+ ** SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF optimization, or due to the
+ ** SortCtx.pDeferredRowLoad optimization. In any of these cases
** regOrigData is 0 to prevent this routine from trying to copy
** values that might not yet exist.
*/
pParse->nMem += pSort->nOBSat;
nKey = nExpr - pSort->nOBSat + bSeq;
if( bSeq ){
- addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr);
+ addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr);
}else{
addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SequenceTest, pSort->iECursor);
}
testcase( pKI->nAllField > pKI->nKeyField+2 );
pOp->p4.pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse,pSort->pOrderBy,nOBSat,
pKI->nAllField-pKI->nKeyField-1);
- pOp = 0; /* Ensure pOp not used after sqltie3VdbeAddOp3() */
+ pOp = 0; /* Ensure pOp not used after sqlite3VdbeAddOp3() */
addrJmp = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Jump, addrJmp+1, 0, addrJmp+1); VdbeCoverage(v);
pSort->labelBkOut = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
/* At this point the values for the new sorter entry are stored
** in an array of registers. They need to be composed into a record
** and inserted into the sorter if either (a) there are currently
- ** less than LIMIT+OFFSET items or (b) the new record is smaller than
+ ** less than LIMIT+OFFSET items or (b) the new record is smaller than
** the largest record currently in the sorter. If (b) is true and there
** are already LIMIT+OFFSET items in the sorter, delete the largest
- ** entry before inserting the new one. This way there are never more
+ ** entry before inserting the new one. This way there are never more
** than LIMIT+OFFSET items in the sorter.
**
** If the new record does not need to be inserted into the sorter,
** In this case it has already been determined that the rows are distinct.
** No special action is required. The return value is zero.
**
-** Parameter pEList is the list of expressions used to generated the
-** contents of each row. It is used by this routine to determine (a)
-** how many elements there are in the array of registers and (b) the
-** collation sequences that should be used for the comparisons if
+** Parameter pEList is the list of expressions used to generated the
+** contents of each row. It is used by this routine to determine (a)
+** how many elements there are in the array of registers and (b) the
+** collation sequences that should be used for the comparisons if
** eTnctType is WHERE_DISTINCT_ORDERED.
*/
static int codeDistinct(
sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, iOpenEphAddr+1);
}
if( eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_ORDERED ){
- /* Change the OP_OpenEphemeral to an OP_Null that sets the MEM_Cleared
+ /* Change the OP_OpenEphemeral to an OP_Null that sets the MEM_Cleared
** bit on the first register of the previous value. This will cause the
** OP_Ne added in codeDistinct() to always fail on the first iteration of
** the loop even if the first row is all NULLs. */
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SORTER_REFERENCES
/*
** This function is called as part of inner-loop generation for a SELECT
-** statement with an ORDER BY that is not optimized by an index. It
-** determines the expressions, if any, that the sorter-reference
+** statement with an ORDER BY that is not optimized by an index. It
+** determines the expressions, if any, that the sorter-reference
** optimization should be used for. The sorter-reference optimization
** is used for SELECT queries like:
**
** storing values read from that column in the sorter records, the PK of
** the row from table t1 is stored instead. Then, as records are extracted from
** the sorter to return to the user, the required value of bigblob is
-** retrieved directly from table t1. If the values are very large, this
+** retrieved directly from table t1. If the values are very large, this
** can be more efficient than storing them directly in the sorter records.
**
-** The ExprList_item.fg.bSorterRef flag is set for each expression in pEList
-** for which the sorter-reference optimization should be enabled.
+** The ExprList_item.fg.bSorterRef flag is set for each expression in pEList
+** for which the sorter-reference optimization should be enabled.
** Additionally, the pSort->aDefer[] array is populated with entries
** for all cursors required to evaluate all selected expressions. Finally.
** output variable (*ppExtra) is set to an expression list containing
**
** If srcTab is negative, then the p->pEList expressions
** are evaluated in order to get the data for this row. If srcTab is
-** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and p->pEList is used only
+** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and p->pEList is used only
** to get the number of columns and the collation sequence for each column.
*/
static void selectInnerLoop(
}
if( pSort && hasDistinct==0 && eDest!=SRT_EphemTab && eDest!=SRT_Table ){
/* For each expression in p->pEList that is a copy of an expression in
- ** the ORDER BY clause (pSort->pOrderBy), set the associated
- ** iOrderByCol value to one more than the index of the ORDER BY
+ ** the ORDER BY clause (pSort->pOrderBy), set the associated
+ ** iOrderByCol value to one more than the index of the ORDER BY
** expression within the sort-key that pushOntoSorter() will generate.
** This allows the p->pEList field to be omitted from the sorted record,
** saving space and CPU cycles. */
selectExprDefer(pParse, pSort, p->pEList, &pExtra);
if( pExtra && pParse->db->mallocFailed==0 ){
/* If there are any extra PK columns to add to the sorter records,
- ** allocate extra memory cells and adjust the OpenEphemeral
+ ** allocate extra memory cells and adjust the OpenEphemeral
** instruction to account for the larger records. This is only
** required if there are one or more WITHOUT ROWID tables with
** composite primary keys in the SortCtx.aDefer[] array. */
testcase( eDest==SRT_Mem );
testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
testcase( eDest==SRT_Output );
- assert( eDest==SRT_Set || eDest==SRT_Mem
+ assert( eDest==SRT_Set || eDest==SRT_Mem
|| eDest==SRT_Coroutine || eDest==SRT_Output
|| eDest==SRT_Upfrom );
}
if( pExtra ) nResultCol += pExtra->nExpr;
#endif
if( p->iLimit
- && (ecelFlags & SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF)!=0
+ && (ecelFlags & SQLITE_ECEL_OMITREF)!=0
&& nPrefixReg>0
){
assert( pSort!=0 );
}else{
int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
assert( sqlite3Strlen30(pDest->zAffSdst)==nResultCol );
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol,
r1, pDest->zAffSdst, nResultCol);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, iParm, r1, regResult, nResultCol);
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, r1);
}
/* If this is a scalar select that is part of an expression, then
- ** store the results in the appropriate memory cell or array of
+ ** store the results in the appropriate memory cell or array of
** memory cells and break out of the scan loop.
*/
case SRT_Mem: {
/* If the destination is DistQueue, then cursor (iParm+1) is open
** on a second ephemeral index that holds all values every previously
** added to the queue. */
- addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0,
+ addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0,
regResult, nResultCol);
VdbeCoverage(v);
}
int addrExplain; /* Address of OP_Explain instruction */
#endif
- ExplainQueryPlan2(addrExplain, (pParse, 0,
+ ExplainQueryPlan2(addrExplain, (pParse, 0,
"USE TEMP B-TREE FOR %sORDER BY", pSort->nOBSat>0?"RIGHT PART OF ":"")
);
sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange(v, addrExplain,pSort->addrPush,pSort->addrPushEnd);
if( pSort->labelBkOut ){
addrOnce = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Once); VdbeCoverage(v);
}
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenPseudo, iSortTab, regSortOut,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenPseudo, iSortTab, regSortOut,
nKey+1+nColumn+nRefKey);
if( addrOnce ) sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrOnce);
addr = 1 + sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SorterSort, iTab, addrBreak);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, iCsr);
if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iSortTab, iKey++, regKey);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekRowid, iCsr,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekRowid, iCsr,
sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1, regKey);
}else{
int k;
break;
}
default: {
- assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
+ assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
testcase( eDest==SRT_Output );
testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
if( eDest==SRT_Output ){
** original CREATE TABLE statement if the expression is a column. The
** declaration type for a ROWID field is INTEGER. Exactly when an expression
** is considered a column can be complex in the presence of subqueries. The
-** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is
+** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is
** considered a column by this function.
**
** SELECT col FROM tbl;
** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl;
** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl);
** SELECT abc FROM (SELECT col AS abc FROM tbl);
-**
+**
** The declaration type for any expression other than a column is NULL.
**
** This routine has either 3 or 6 parameters depending on whether or not
# define columnType(A,B,C,D,E) columnTypeImpl(A,B)
#endif
static const char *columnTypeImpl(
- NameContext *pNC,
+ NameContext *pNC,
#ifndef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA
Expr *pExpr
#else
if( pTab==0 ){
/* At one time, code such as "SELECT new.x" within a trigger would
** cause this condition to run. Since then, we have restructured how
- ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer
+ ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer
** possible. However, it can still be true for statements like
** the following:
**
** CREATE TABLE t1(col INTEGER);
** SELECT (SELECT t1.col) FROM FROM t1;
**
- ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the
+ ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the
** sub-select. In this case, set the column type to NULL, even
** though it should really be "INTEGER".
**
** This is not a problem, as the column type of "t1.col" is never
- ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression
+ ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression
** "(SELECT t1.col)", the correct type is returned (see the TK_SELECT
** branch below. */
break;
#else
&& ALWAYS(iCol>=0)
#endif
- ){
+ ){
/* If iCol is less than zero, then the expression requests the
- ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see
+ ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see
** test case misc2.2.2) - it always evaluates to NULL.
*/
NameContext sNC;
sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
sNC.pNext = pNC;
sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
- zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol);
+ zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol);
}
}else{
/* A real table or a CTE table */
sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
sNC.pNext = pNC;
sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
- zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol);
+ zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol);
break;
}
#endif
}
-#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA
+#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA
if( pzOrigDb ){
assert( pzOrigTab && pzOrigCol );
*pzOrigDb = zOrigDb;
const char *zOrigCol = 0;
zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol);
- /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other
+ /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other
** column specific strings, in case the schema is reset before this
** virtual machine is deleted.
*/
** kind (maybe a parenthesized subquery in the FROM clause of a larger
** query, or a VIEW, or a CTE). This routine computes type information
** for that Table object based on the Select object that implements the
-** subquery. For the purposes of this routine, "type infomation" means:
+** subquery. For the purposes of this routine, "type information" means:
**
** * The datatype name, as it might appear in a CREATE TABLE statement
** * Which collating sequence to use for the column
** Compute the iLimit and iOffset fields of the SELECT based on the
** pLimit expressions. pLimit->pLeft and pLimit->pRight hold the expressions
** that appear in the original SQL statement after the LIMIT and OFFSET
-** keywords. Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset
-** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute
-** the limit and offset. If there is no limit and/or offset, then
+** keywords. Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset
+** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute
+** the limit and offset. If there is no limit and/or offset, then
** iLimit and iOffset are negative.
**
** This routine changes the values of iLimit and iOffset only if
if( p->iLimit ) return;
- /*
+ /*
** "LIMIT -1" always shows all rows. There is some
** controversy about what the correct behavior should be.
** The current implementation interprets "LIMIT 0" to mean
** inserted into the Queue table. The iDistinct table keeps a copy of all rows
** that have ever been inserted into Queue and causes duplicates to be
** discarded. If the operator is UNION ALL, then duplicates are allowed.
-**
+**
** If the query has an ORDER BY, then entries in the Queue table are kept in
** ORDER BY order and the first entry is extracted for each cycle. Without
** an ORDER BY, the Queue table is just a FIFO.
int iQueue; /* The Queue table */
int iDistinct = 0; /* To ensure unique results if UNION */
int eDest = SRT_Fifo; /* How to write to Queue */
- SelectDest destQueue; /* SelectDest targetting the Queue table */
+ SelectDest destQueue; /* SelectDest targeting the Queue table */
int i; /* Loop counter */
int rc; /* Result code */
ExprList *pOrderBy; /* The ORDER BY clause */
**
** "p" points to the right-most of the two queries. the query on the
** left is p->pPrior. The left query could also be a compound query
-** in which case this routine will be called recursively.
+** in which case this routine will be called recursively.
**
** The results of the total query are to be written into a destination
** of type eDest with parameter iParm.
p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEstAdd(p->nSelectRow, pPrior->nSelectRow);
if( p->pLimit
&& sqlite3ExprIsInteger(p->pLimit->pLeft, &nLimit)
- && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit)
+ && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit)
){
p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit);
}
Expr *pLimit; /* Saved values of p->nLimit */
int addr;
SelectDest uniondest;
-
+
testcase( p->op==TK_EXCEPT );
testcase( p->op==TK_UNION );
priorOp = SRT_Union;
findRightmost(p)->selFlags |= SF_UsesEphemeral;
assert( p->pEList );
}
-
-
+
+
/* Code the SELECT statements to our left
*/
assert( !pPrior->pOrderBy );
if( rc ){
goto multi_select_end;
}
-
+
/* Code the current SELECT statement
*/
if( p->op==TK_EXCEPT ){
p->pLimit = pLimit;
p->iLimit = 0;
p->iOffset = 0;
-
+
/* Convert the data in the temporary table into whatever form
** it is that we currently need.
*/
int addr;
SelectDest intersectdest;
int r1;
-
+
/* INTERSECT is different from the others since it requires
** two temporary tables. Hence it has its own case. Begin
** by allocating the tables we will need.
tab1 = pParse->nTab++;
tab2 = pParse->nTab++;
assert( p->pOrderBy==0 );
-
+
addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, tab1, 0);
assert( p->addrOpenEphm[0] == -1 );
p->addrOpenEphm[0] = addr;
findRightmost(p)->selFlags |= SF_UsesEphemeral;
assert( p->pEList );
-
+
/* Code the SELECTs to our left into temporary table "tab1".
*/
sqlite3SelectDestInit(&intersectdest, SRT_Union, tab1);
if( rc ){
goto multi_select_end;
}
-
+
/* Code the current SELECT into temporary table "tab2"
*/
addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, tab2, 0);
}
sqlite3ExprDelete(db, p->pLimit);
p->pLimit = pLimit;
-
+
/* Generate code to take the intersection of the two temporary
** tables.
*/
break;
}
}
-
+
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_EXPLAIN
if( p->pNext==0 ){
ExplainQueryPlanPop(pParse);
#endif
}
if( pParse->nErr ) goto multi_select_end;
-
- /* Compute collating sequences used by
+
+ /* Compute collating sequences used by
** temporary tables needed to implement the compound select.
** Attach the KeyInfo structure to all temporary tables.
**
/*
** Code an output subroutine for a coroutine implementation of a
-** SELECT statment.
+** SELECT statement.
**
** The data to be output is contained in pIn->iSdst. There are
** pIn->nSdst columns to be output. pDest is where the output should
addr = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
- /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT
+ /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT
*/
if( regPrev ){
int addr1, addr2;
int r1;
testcase( pIn->nSdst>1 );
r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst,
r1, pDest->zAffSdst, pIn->nSdst);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, pDest->iSDParm, r1,
pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst);
** SRT_Output. This routine is never called with any other
** destination other than the ones handled above or SRT_Output.
**
- ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers.
+ ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers.
** Then the OP_ResultRow opcode is used to cause sqlite3_step() to
** return the next row of result.
*/
**
** EofB: Called when data is exhausted from selectB.
**
-** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which
+** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which
** <operator> is used:
**
**
**
** We call AltB, AeqB, AgtB, EofA, and EofB "subroutines" but they are not
** actually called using Gosub and they do not Return. EofA and EofB loop
-** until all data is exhausted then jump to the "end" labe. AltB, AeqB,
+** until all data is exhausted then jump to the "end" label. AltB, AeqB,
** and AgtB jump to either L2 or to one of EofA or EofB.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPOUND_SELECT
int savedOffset; /* Saved value of p->iOffset */
int labelCmpr; /* Label for the start of the merge algorithm */
int labelEnd; /* Label for the end of the overall SELECT stmt */
- int addr1; /* Jump instructions that get retargetted */
+ int addr1; /* Jump instructions that get retargeted */
int op; /* One of TK_ALL, TK_UNION, TK_EXCEPT, TK_INTERSECT */
KeyInfo *pKeyDup = 0; /* Comparison information for duplicate removal */
KeyInfo *pKeyMerge; /* Comparison information for merging rows */
/* Patch up the ORDER BY clause
*/
- op = p->op;
+ op = p->op;
assert( p->pPrior->pOrderBy==0 );
pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy;
assert( pOrderBy );
}
}
}
-
+
/* Separate the left and the right query from one another
*/
nSelect = 1;
sqlite3VdbeEndCoroutine(v, regAddrA);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1);
- /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on
+ /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on
** the right - the "B" select
*/
addrSelectB = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) + 1;
savedLimit = p->iLimit;
savedOffset = p->iOffset;
p->iLimit = regLimitB;
- p->iOffset = 0;
+ p->iOffset = 0;
ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 1, "RIGHT"));
sqlite3Select(pParse, p, &destB);
p->iLimit = savedLimit;
addrOutA = generateOutputSubroutine(pParse,
p, &destA, pDest, regOutA,
regPrev, pKeyDup, labelEnd);
-
+
/* Generate a subroutine that outputs the current row of the B
** select as the next output row of the compound select.
*/
*/
if( op==TK_EXCEPT || op==TK_INTERSECT ){
addrEofA_noB = addrEofA = labelEnd;
- }else{
+ }else{
VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-A subroutine"));
addrEofA = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutB, addrOutB);
addrEofA_noB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrB, labelEnd);
if( op==TK_INTERSECT ){
addrEofB = addrEofA;
if( p->nSelectRow > pPrior->nSelectRow ) p->nSelectRow = pPrior->nSelectRow;
- }else{
+ }else{
VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-B subroutine"));
addrEofB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutA, addrOutA);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrA, labelEnd); VdbeCoverage(v);
/* Make arrangements to free the 2nd and subsequent arms of the compound
** after the parse has finished */
if( pSplit->pPrior ){
- sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
+ sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
(void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3SelectDelete, pSplit->pPrior);
}
pSplit->pPrior = pPrior;
/*
** Scan through the expression pExpr. Replace every reference to
** a column in table number iTable with a copy of the iColumn-th
-** entry in pEList. (But leave references to the ROWID column
+** entry in pEList. (But leave references to the ROWID column
** unchanged.)
**
** This routine is part of the flattening procedure. A subquery
** whose result set is defined by pEList appears as entry in the
** FROM clause of a SELECT such that the VDBE cursor assigned to that
-** FORM clause entry is iTable. This routine makes the necessary
+** FORM clause entry is iTable. This routine makes the necessary
** changes to pExpr so that it refers directly to the source table
** of the subquery rather the result set of the subquery.
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW)
/*
** Assign new cursor numbers to each of the items in pSrc. For each
-** new cursor number assigned, set an entry in the aCsrMap[] array
+** new cursor number assigned, set an entry in the aCsrMap[] array
** to map the old cursor number to the new:
**
** aCsrMap[iOld+1] = iNew;
/*
** Assign a new cursor number to each cursor in the FROM clause (Select.pSrc)
-** of the SELECT statement passed as the second argument, and to each
+** of the SELECT statement passed as the second argument, and to each
** cursor in the FROM clause of any FROM clause sub-selects, recursively.
** Except, do not assign a new cursor number to the iExcept'th element in
-** the FROM clause of (*p). Update all expressions and other references
+** the FROM clause of (*p). Update all expressions and other references
** to refer to the new cursor numbers.
**
** Argument aCsrMap is an array that may be used for temporary working
** * the array is larger than the largest cursor number used within the
** select statement passed as an argument, and
**
-** * the array entries for all cursor numbers that do *not* appear in
-** FROM clauses of the select statement as described above are
+** * the array entries for all cursor numbers that do *not* appear in
+** FROM clauses of the select statement as described above are
** initialized to zero.
*/
static void renumberCursors(
** SELECT x+y AS a FROM t1 WHERE z<100 AND a>5
**
** The code generated for this simplification gives the same result
-** but only has to scan the data once. And because indices might
+** but only has to scan the data once. And because indices might
** exist on the table t1, a complete scan of the data might be
** avoided.
**
** (4) The subquery can not be DISTINCT.
**
** (**) At one point restrictions (4) and (5) defined a subset of DISTINCT
-** sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction
+** sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction
** (4) has since been expanded to exclude all DISTINCT subqueries.
**
** (**) We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries. Was:
** (9) If the subquery uses LIMIT then the outer query may not be aggregate.
**
** (**) Restriction (10) was removed from the code on 2005-02-05 but we
-** accidently carried the comment forward until 2014-09-15. Original
-** constraint: "If the subquery is aggregate then the outer query
+** accidentally carried the comment forward until 2014-09-15. Original
+** constraint: "If the subquery is aggregate then the outer query
** may not use LIMIT."
**
** (11) The subquery and the outer query may not both have ORDER BY clauses.
**
** (16) If the outer query is aggregate, then the subquery may not
** use ORDER BY. (Ticket #2942) This used to not matter
-** until we introduced the group_concat() function.
+** until we introduced the group_concat() function.
**
** (17) If the subquery is a compound select, then
** (17a) all compound operators must be a UNION ALL, and
** recursive queries in multiSelect().
**
** (**) We no longer attempt to flatten aggregate subqueries. Was:
-** The subquery may not be an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or
+** The subquery may not be an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or
** or max() functions. (Without this restriction, a query like:
** "SELECT x FROM (SELECT max(y), x FROM t1)" would not necessarily
** return the value X for which Y was maximal.)
SrcList *pSubSrc; /* The FROM clause of the subquery */
int iParent; /* VDBE cursor number of the pSub result set temp table */
int iNewParent = -1;/* Replacement table for iParent */
- int isOuterJoin = 0; /* True if pSub is the right side of a LEFT JOIN */
+ int isOuterJoin = 0; /* True if pSub is the right side of a LEFT JOIN */
int i; /* Loop counter */
Expr *pWhere; /* The WHERE clause */
SrcItem *pSubitem; /* The subquery */
testcase( i==SQLITE_DENY );
pParse->zAuthContext = zSavedAuthContext;
- /* Delete the transient structures associated with thesubquery */
+ /* Delete the transient structures associated with the subquery */
pSub1 = pSubitem->pSelect;
sqlite3DbFree(db, pSubitem->zDatabase);
sqlite3DbFree(db, pSubitem->zName);
assert( pSubitem->fg.isUsing!=0 || pSubitem->u3.pOn==0 );
/* If the sub-query is a compound SELECT statement, then (by restrictions
- ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must
+ ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must
** be of the form:
**
- ** SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause>
+ ** SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause>
**
** followed by any ORDER BY, LIMIT and/or OFFSET clauses. This block
- ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or
+ ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or
** OFFSET clauses and joins them to the left-hand-side of the original
** using UNION ALL operators. In this case N is the number of simple
** select statements in the compound sub-query.
Table *pTabToDel = pSubitem->pTab;
if( pTabToDel->nTabRef==1 ){
Parse *pToplevel = sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse);
- sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pToplevel,
+ sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pToplevel,
(void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3DeleteTable,
pTabToDel);
testcase( pToplevel->earlyCleanup );
if( pParent==p ){
jointype = pSubitem->fg.jointype; /* First time through the loop */
}
-
+
/* The subquery uses a single slot of the FROM clause of the outer
** query. If the subquery has more than one element in its FROM clause,
** then expand the outer query to make space for it to hold all elements
}
pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype &= JT_LTORJ;
pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype |= jointype | ltorj;
-
- /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for
+
+ /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for
** references to the iParent in the outer query.
- **
+ **
** Example:
**
** SELECT a+5, b*10 FROM (SELECT x*3 AS a, y+10 AS b FROM t1) WHERE a>b;
** ORDER BY column expression is identical to the iOrderByCol'th
** expression returned by SELECT statement pSub. Since these values
** do not necessarily correspond to columns in SELECT statement pParent,
- ** zero them before transfering the ORDER BY clause.
+ ** zero them before transferring the ORDER BY clause.
**
** Not doing this may cause an error if a subsequent call to this
** function attempts to flatten a compound sub-query into pParent
x.pCList = findLeftmostExprlist(pSub);
substSelect(&x, pParent, 0);
}
-
+
/* The flattened query is a compound if either the inner or the
** outer query is a compound. */
pParent->selFlags |= pSub->selFlags & SF_Compound;
assert( (pSub->selFlags & SF_Distinct)==0 ); /* restriction (17b) */
-
+
/*
** SELECT ... FROM (SELECT ... LIMIT a OFFSET b) LIMIT x OFFSET y;
**
/*
** Add a new entry to the pConst object. Except, do not add duplicate
-** pColumn entires. Also, do not add if doing so would not be appropriate.
+** pColumn entries. Also, do not add if doing so would not be appropriate.
**
** The caller guarantees the pColumn is a column and pValue is a constant.
** This routine has to do some additional checks before completing the
/*
** This is a helper function for Walker callback propagateConstantExprRewrite().
**
-** Argument pExpr is a candidate expression to be replaced by a value. If
-** pExpr is equivalent to one of the columns named in pWalker->u.pConst,
+** Argument pExpr is a candidate expression to be replaced by a value. If
+** pExpr is equivalent to one of the columns named in pWalker->u.pConst,
** then overwrite it with the corresponding value. Except, do not do so
** if argument bIgnoreAffBlob is non-zero and the affinity of pExpr
** is SQLITE_AFF_BLOB.
*/
static int propagateConstantExprRewriteOne(
WhereConst *pConst,
- Expr *pExpr,
+ Expr *pExpr,
int bIgnoreAffBlob
){
int i;
**
** + pExpr is a binary comparison operator (=, <=, >=, <, >) that
** uses an affinity other than TEXT and one of its immediate
-** children is a column that matches one of the columns in
+** children is a column that matches one of the columns in
** pWalker->u.pConst.
*/
static int propagateConstantExprRewrite(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=123 AND b=123;
**
** The two SELECT statements above should return different answers. b=a
-** is alway true because the comparison uses numeric affinity, but b=123
+** is always true because the comparison uses numeric affinity, but b=123
** is false because it uses text affinity and '0123' is not the same as '123'.
** To work around this, the expression tree is not actually changed from
** "b=a" to "b=123" but rather the "a" in "b=a" is tagged with EP_FixedCol
sqlite3DbFree(x.pParse->db, x.apExpr);
nChng += x.nChng;
}
- }while( x.nChng );
+ }while( x.nChng );
return nChng;
}
** This function is called to determine whether or not it is safe to
** push WHERE clause expression pExpr down to FROM clause sub-query
** pSubq, which contains at least one window function. Return 1
-** if it is safe and the expression should be pushed down, or 0
+** if it is safe and the expression should be pushed down, or 0
** otherwise.
**
-** It is only safe to push the expression down if it consists only
+** It is only safe to push the expression down if it consists only
** of constants and copies of expressions that appear in the PARTITION
** BY clause of all window function used by the sub-query. It is safe
** to filter out entire partitions, but not rows within partitions, as
** this may change the results of the window functions.
**
-** At the time this function is called it is guaranteed that
+** At the time this function is called it is guaranteed that
**
-** * the sub-query uses only one distinct window frame, and
-** * that the window frame has a PARTITION BY clase.
+** * the sub-query uses only one distinct window frame, and
+** * that the window frame has a PARTITION BY clause.
*/
static int pushDownWindowCheck(Parse *pParse, Select *pSubq, Expr *pExpr){
assert( pSubq->pWin->pPartition );
** But if the (b2=2) term were to be pushed down into the bb subquery,
** then the (1,1,NULL) row would be suppressed.
**
-** (6) Window functions make things tricky as changes to the WHERE clause
-** of the inner query could change the window over which window
+** (6) Window functions make things tricky as changes to the WHERE clause
+** of the inner query could change the window over which window
** functions are calculated. Therefore, do not attempt the optimization
** if:
**
** (6a) The inner query uses multiple incompatible window partitions.
**
-** (6b) The inner query is a compound and uses window-functions.
+** (6b) The inner query is a compound and uses window-functions.
**
** (6c) The WHERE clause does not consist entirely of constants and
** copies of expressions found in the PARTITION BY clause of
** all window-functions used by the sub-query. It is safe to
-** filter out entire partitions, as this does not change the
+** filter out entire partitions, as this does not change the
** window over which any window-function is calculated.
**
** (7) The inner query is a Common Table Expression (CTE) that should
int notUnionAll = 0;
for(pSel=pSubq; pSel; pSel=pSel->pPrior){
u8 op = pSel->op;
- assert( op==TK_ALL || op==TK_SELECT
+ assert( op==TK_ALL || op==TK_SELECT
|| op==TK_UNION || op==TK_INTERSECT || op==TK_EXCEPT );
if( op!=TK_ALL && op!=TK_SELECT ){
notUnionAll = 1;
** in the future.
*/
{
- Select *pX;
+ Select *pX;
for(pX=pSubq; pX; pX=pX->pPrior){
assert( (pX->selFlags & (SF_Recursive))==0 );
}
return 0; /* restriction (4) */
}
if( ExprHasProperty(pWhere,EP_OuterON)
- && pWhere->w.iJoin!=iCursor
+ && pWhere->w.iJoin!=iCursor
){
return 0; /* restriction (5) */
}
/*
** The pFunc is the only aggregate function in the query. Check to see
-** if the query is a candidate for the min/max optimization.
+** if the query is a candidate for the min/max optimization.
**
** If the query is a candidate for the min/max optimization, then set
** *ppMinMax to be an ORDER BY clause to be used for the optimization
assert( !IsWindowFunc(pFunc) );
assert( ExprUseXList(pFunc) );
pEList = pFunc->x.pList;
- if( pEList==0
+ if( pEList==0
|| pEList->nExpr!=1
|| ExprHasProperty(pFunc, EP_WinFunc)
|| OptimizationDisabled(db, SQLITE_MinMaxOpt)
/*
** The select statement passed as the first argument is an aggregate query.
-** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This
+** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This
** function tests if the SELECT is of the form:
**
** SELECT count(*) FROM <tbl>
assert( !p->pGroupBy );
- if( p->pWhere
- || p->pEList->nExpr!=1
+ if( p->pWhere
+ || p->pEList->nExpr!=1
|| p->pSrc->nSrc!=1
|| p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect
|| pAggInfo->nFunc!=1
/*
** If the source-list item passed as an argument was augmented with an
** INDEXED BY clause, then try to locate the specified index. If there
-** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return
-** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate
+** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return
+** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate
** pFrom->pIndex and return SQLITE_OK.
*/
int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, SrcItem *pFrom){
assert( pTab!=0 );
assert( pFrom->fg.isIndexedBy!=0 );
- for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex;
- pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndexedBy);
+ for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex;
+ pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndexedBy);
pIdx=pIdx->pNext
);
if( !pIdx ){
}
/*
-** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with
+** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with
** an alternative collating sequence.
**
** SELECT ... FROM t1 EXCEPT SELECT ... FROM t2 ORDER BY .. COLLATE ...
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
/*
-** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested
-** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by
-** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE)
+** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested
+** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by
+** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE)
** then return a pointer to the CTE definition for that table. Otherwise
** return NULL.
**
** onto the top of the stack. If argument bFree is true, then this
** WITH clause will never be popped from the stack but should instead
** be freed along with the Parse object. In other cases, when
-** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT
+** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT
** statement with which it is associated.
**
** This routine returns a copy of pWith. Or, if bFree is true and
With *sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
if( pWith ){
if( bFree ){
- pWith = (With*)sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
+ pWith = (With*)sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
(void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3WithDelete,
pWith);
if( pWith==0 ) return 0;
}
/*
-** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by
+** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by
** a WITH clause on the stack currently maintained by the parser (on the
** pParse->pWith linked list). And if currently processing a CTE
** CTE expression, through routine checks to see if the reference is
** If pFrom matches a CTE according to either of these two above, pFrom->pTab
** and other fields are populated accordingly.
**
-** Return 0 if no match is found.
+** Return 0 if no match is found.
** Return 1 if a match is found.
** Return 2 if an error condition is detected.
*/
assert( pRecTerm->pPrior!=0 );
for(i=0; i<pSrc->nSrc; i++){
SrcItem *pItem = &pSrc->a[i];
- if( pItem->zDatabase==0
- && pItem->zName!=0
+ if( pItem->zDatabase==0
+ && pItem->zName!=0
&& 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pItem->zName, pCte->zName)
){
pItem->pTab = pTab;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
/*
-** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH
+** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH
** clause, pop it from the stack stored as part of the Parse object.
**
** This function is used as the xSelectCallback2() callback by
** sqlite3SelectExpand() when walking a SELECT tree to resolve table
-** names and other FROM clause elements.
+** names and other FROM clause elements.
*/
void sqlite3SelectPopWith(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse;
** (1) Make sure VDBE cursor numbers have been assigned to every
** element of the FROM clause.
**
-** (2) Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that
+** (2) Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that
** defines FROM clause. When views appear in the FROM clause,
** fill pTabList->a[].pSelect with a copy of the SELECT statement
** that implements the view. A copy is made of the view's SELECT
** bit set.
*/
if( (p->selFlags & SF_IncludeHidden)==0
- && IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[j])
+ && IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[j])
){
continue;
}
sqlite3DebugPrintf(
"agg-column[%d] pTab=%s iTable=%d iColumn=%d iMem=%d"
" iSorterColumn=%d %s\n",
- ii, pCol->pTab ? pCol->pTab->zName : "NULL",
+ ii, pCol->pTab ? pCol->pTab->zName : "NULL",
pCol->iTable, pCol->iColumn, pAggInfo->iFirstReg+ii,
- pCol->iSorterColumn,
+ pCol->iSorterColumn,
ii>=pAggInfo->nAccumulator ? "" : " Accumulator");
sqlite3TreeViewExpr(0, pAggInfo->aCol[ii].pCExpr, 0);
}
** * The aCol[] and aFunc[] arrays may be modified
** * The AggInfoColumnReg() and AggInfoFuncReg() macros may not be used
**
-** After clling this routine:
+** After calling this routine:
**
** * The aCol[] and aFunc[] arrays are fixed
** * The AggInfoColumnReg() and AggInfoFuncReg() macros may be used
pFunc->iDistinct = -1;
}else{
KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pE->x.pList,0,0);
- pFunc->iDistAddr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenEphemeral,
+ pFunc->iDistAddr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenEphemeral,
pFunc->iDistinct, 0, 0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO);
ExplainQueryPlan((pParse, 0, "USE TEMP B-TREE FOR %s(DISTINCT)",
pFunc->pFunc->zName));
** of setting and clearing regAcc.
*/
static void updateAccumulator(
- Parse *pParse,
- int regAcc,
+ Parse *pParse,
+ int regAcc,
AggInfo *pAggInfo,
int eDistinctType
){
pList = pF->pFExpr->x.pList;
if( ExprHasProperty(pF->pFExpr, EP_WinFunc) ){
Expr *pFilter = pF->pFExpr->y.pWin->pFilter;
- if( pAggInfo->nAccumulator
- && (pF->pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL)
+ if( pAggInfo->nAccumulator
+ && (pF->pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL)
&& regAcc
){
/* If regAcc==0, there there exists some min() or max() function
if( regHit==0 ) regHit = ++pParse->nMem;
/* If this is the first row of the group (regAcc contains 0), clear the
** "magnet" register regHit so that the accumulator registers
- ** are populated if the FILTER clause jumps over the the
+ ** are populated if the FILTER clause jumps over the the
** invocation of min() or max() altogether. Or, if this is not
** the first row (regAcc contains 1), set the magnet register so that
** the accumulators are not populated unless the min()/max() is invoked
regAgg = 0;
}
if( pF->iDistinct>=0 && pList ){
- if( addrNext==0 ){
+ if( addrNext==0 ){
addrNext = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
}
- pF->iDistinct = codeDistinct(pParse, eDistinctType,
+ pF->iDistinct = codeDistinct(pParse, eDistinctType,
pF->iDistinct, addrNext, pList, regAgg);
}
if( pF->pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){
/*
** sqlite3WalkExpr() callback used by havingToWhere().
**
-** If the node passed to the callback is a TK_AND node, return
+** If the node passed to the callback is a TK_AND node, return
** WRC_Continue to tell sqlite3WalkExpr() to iterate through child nodes.
**
-** Otherwise, return WRC_Prune. In this case, also check if the
+** Otherwise, return WRC_Prune. In this case, also check if the
** sub-expression matches the criteria for being moved to the WHERE
** clause. If so, add it to the WHERE clause and replace the sub-expression
** within the HAVING expression with a constant "1".
** belongs to an outer query. Do not move the expression to the WHERE
** clause in this obscure case, as doing so may corrupt the outer Select
** statements AggInfo structure. */
- if( sqlite3ExprIsConstantOrGroupBy(pWalker->pParse, pExpr, pS->pGroupBy)
+ if( sqlite3ExprIsConstantOrGroupBy(pWalker->pParse, pExpr, pS->pGroupBy)
&& ExprAlwaysFalse(pExpr)==0
&& pExpr->pAggInfo==0
){
}
/*
-** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument.
+** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument.
**
** The results are returned according to the SelectDest structure.
** See comments in sqliteInt.h for further information.
assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_DistQueue );
assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_Queue );
if( IgnorableDistinct(pDest) ){
- assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union ||
+ assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union ||
pDest->eDest==SRT_Except || pDest->eDest==SRT_Discard ||
pDest->eDest==SRT_DistQueue || pDest->eDest==SRT_DistFifo );
/* All of these destinations are also able to ignore the ORDER BY clause */
if( sqlite3TreeTrace & 0x800 ){
sqlite3TreeViewExprList(0, p->pOrderBy, 0, "ORDERBY");
}
-#endif
+#endif
sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
(void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3ExprListDelete,
p->pOrderBy);
/* If the SF_UFSrcCheck flag is set, then this function is being called
** as part of populating the temp table for an UPDATE...FROM statement.
- ** In this case, it is an error if the target object (pSrc->a[0]) name
- ** or alias is duplicated within FROM clause (pSrc->a[1..n]).
+ ** In this case, it is an error if the target object (pSrc->a[0]) name
+ ** or alias is duplicated within FROM clause (pSrc->a[1..n]).
**
- ** Postgres disallows this case too. The reason is that some other
- ** systems handle this case differently, and not all the same way,
+ ** Postgres disallows this case too. The reason is that some other
+ ** systems handle this case differently, and not all the same way,
** which is just confusing. To avoid this, we follow PG's lead and
** disallow it altogether. */
if( p->selFlags & SF_UFSrcCheck ){
SrcItem *p0 = &p->pSrc->a[0];
if( sameSrcAlias(p0, p->pSrc) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
- "target object/alias may not appear in FROM clause: %s",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ "target object/alias may not appear in FROM clause: %s",
p0->zAlias ? p0->zAlias : p0->pTab->zName
);
goto select_end;
pTabList->a[0].fg.jointype & JT_LTORJ);
}
- /* No futher action if this term of the FROM clause is not a subquery */
+ /* No further action if this term of the FROM clause is not a subquery */
if( pSub==0 ) continue;
/* Catch mismatch in the declared columns of a view and the number of
){
TREETRACE(0x800,pParse,p,
("omit superfluous ORDER BY on %r FROM-clause subquery\n",i+1));
- sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
+ sqlite3ParserAddCleanup(pParse,
(void(*)(sqlite3*,void*))sqlite3ExprListDelete,
pSub->pOrderBy);
pSub->pOrderBy = 0;
** inside the subquery. This can help the subquery to run more efficiently.
*/
if( OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_PushDown)
- && (pItem->fg.isCte==0
+ && (pItem->fg.isCte==0
|| (pItem->u2.pCteUse->eM10d!=M10d_Yes && pItem->u2.pCteUse->nUse<2))
&& pushDownWhereTerms(pParse, pSub, p->pWhere, pTabList, i)
){
** set on each invocation.
*/
int addrTop = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1;
-
+
pItem->regReturn = ++pParse->nMem;
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_InitCoroutine, pItem->regReturn, 0, addrTop);
VdbeComment((v, "%!S", pItem));
}else if( pItem->fg.isCte && pItem->u2.pCteUse->addrM9e>0 ){
/* This is a CTE for which materialization code has already been
** generated. Invoke the subroutine to compute the materialization,
- ** the make the pItem->iCursor be a copy of the ephemerial table that
+ ** the make the pItem->iCursor be a copy of the ephemeral table that
** holds the result of the materialization. */
CteUse *pCteUse = pItem->u2.pCteUse;
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, pCteUse->regRtn, pCteUse->addrM9e);
}
#endif
- /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and
+ /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and
** if the select-list is the same as the ORDER BY list, then this query
** can be rewritten as a GROUP BY. In other words, this:
**
**
** SELECT xyz FROM ... GROUP BY xyz ORDER BY xyz
**
- ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be
- ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally
- ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER
+ ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be
+ ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally
+ ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER
** BY and DISTINCT, and an index or separate temp-table for the other.
*/
- if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct
+ if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct
&& sqlite3ExprListCompare(sSort.pOrderBy, pEList, -1)==0
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WINDOWFUNC
&& p->pWin==0
}
TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereBegin returns\n"));
- /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral
+ /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral
** instruction ended up not being needed, then change the OP_OpenEphemeral
** into an OP_Noop.
*/
if( p->nSelectRow>66 ) p->nSelectRow = 66;
/* If there is both a GROUP BY and an ORDER BY clause and they are
- ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause
- ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out
+ ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause
+ ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out
** in the correct order. It also may not - the GROUP BY might use a
** database index that causes rows to be grouped together as required
** but not actually sorted. Either way, record the fact that the
int ii;
/* The GROUP BY processing doesn't care whether rows are delivered in
** ASC or DESC order - only that each group is returned contiguously.
- ** So set the ASC/DESC flags in the GROUP BY to match those in the
- ** ORDER BY to maximize the chances of rows being delivered in an
+ ** So set the ASC/DESC flags in the GROUP BY to match those in the
+ ** ORDER BY to maximize the chances of rows being delivered in an
** order that makes the ORDER BY redundant. */
for(ii=0; ii<pGroupBy->nExpr; ii++){
u8 sortFlags;
*/
if( pGroupBy ){
KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; /* Keying information for the group by clause */
- int addr1; /* A-vs-B comparision jump */
+ int addr1; /* A-vs-B comparison jump */
int addrOutputRow; /* Start of subroutine that outputs a result row */
int regOutputRow; /* Return address register for output subroutine */
int addrSetAbort; /* Set the abort flag and return */
u16 distFlag = 0;
int eDist = WHERE_DISTINCT_NOOP;
- if( pAggInfo->nFunc==1
+ if( pAggInfo->nFunc==1
&& pAggInfo->aFunc[0].iDistinct>=0
&& ALWAYS(pAggInfo->aFunc[0].pFExpr!=0)
&& ALWAYS(ExprUseXList(pAggInfo->aFunc[0].pFExpr))
/* If there is a GROUP BY clause we might need a sorting index to
** implement it. Allocate that sorting index now. If it turns out
** that we do not need it after all, the OP_SorterOpen instruction
- ** will be converted into a Noop.
+ ** will be converted into a Noop.
*/
pAggInfo->sortingIdx = pParse->nTab++;
pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pGroupBy,
0, pAggInfo->nColumn);
- addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen,
- pAggInfo->sortingIdx, pAggInfo->nSortingColumn,
+ addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen,
+ pAggInfo->sortingIdx, pAggInfo->nSortingColumn,
0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO);
/* Initialize memory locations used by GROUP BY aggregate processing
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regReset, addrReset);
TREETRACE(0x2,pParse,p,("WhereBegin\n"));
pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, pGroupBy, pDistinct,
- p, (sDistinct.isTnct==2 ? WHERE_DISTINCTBY : WHERE_GROUPBY)
+ p, (sDistinct.isTnct==2 ? WHERE_DISTINCTBY : WHERE_GROUPBY)
| (orderByGrp ? WHERE_SORTBYGROUP : 0) | distFlag, 0
);
if( pWInfo==0 ){
int nCol;
int nGroupBy;
- explainTempTable(pParse,
+ explainTempTable(pParse,
(sDistinct.isTnct && (p->selFlags&SF_Distinct)==0) ?
"DISTINCT" : "GROUP BY");
** clause, cancel the ephemeral table open coded earlier.
**
** This is an optimization - the correct answer should result regardless.
- ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to
+ ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to
** disable this optimization for testing purposes. */
- if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder)
+ if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder)
&& (groupBySort || sqlite3WhereIsSorted(pWInfo))
){
sSort.pOrderBy = 0;
**
** (2013-10-03) Do not count the entries in a partial index.
**
- ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only
+ ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only
** passed to keep OP_OpenRead happy.
*/
if( !HasRowid(pTab) ) pBest = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab);
** that the accumulator registers are (a) updated only once if
** there are no min() or max functions or (b) always updated for the
** first row visited by the aggregate, so that they are updated at
- ** least once even if the FILTER clause means the min() or max()
+ ** least once even if the FILTER clause means the min() or max()
** function visits zero rows. */
if( pAggInfo->nAccumulator ){
for(i=0; i<pAggInfo->nFunc; i++){
sSort.pOrderBy = 0;
sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pHaving, addrEnd, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
- selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, -1, 0, 0,
+ selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, -1, 0, 0,
pDest, addrEnd, addrEnd);
}
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrEnd);
-
+
} /* endif aggregate query */
if( sDistinct.eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_UNORDERED ){
struct ShellState {
sqlite3 *db; /* The database */
u8 autoExplain; /* Automatically turn on .explain mode */
- u8 autoEQP; /* Run EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN prior to seach SQL stmt */
+ u8 autoEQP; /* Run EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN prior to each SQL stmt */
u8 autoEQPtest; /* autoEQP is in test mode */
u8 autoEQPtrace; /* autoEQP is in trace mode */
u8 scanstatsOn; /* True to display scan stats before each finalize */
int *aiIndent; /* Array of indents used in MODE_Explain */
int nIndent; /* Size of array aiIndent[] */
int iIndent; /* Index of current op in aiIndent[] */
- char *zNonce; /* Nonce for temporary safe-mode excapes */
+ char *zNonce; /* Nonce for temporary safe-mode escapes */
EQPGraph sGraph; /* Information for the graphical EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN */
ExpertInfo expert; /* Valid if previous command was ".expert OPT..." */
#ifdef SQLITE_SHELL_FIDDLE
/* Bits in the ShellState.flgProgress variable */
#define SHELL_PROGRESS_QUIET 0x01 /* Omit announcing every progress callback */
-#define SHELL_PROGRESS_RESET 0x02 /* Reset the count when the progres
+#define SHELL_PROGRESS_RESET 0x02 /* Reset the count when the progress
** callback limit is reached, and for each
** top-level SQL statement */
#define SHELL_PROGRESS_ONCE 0x04 /* Cancel the --limit after firing once */
*/
static char *save_err_msg(
sqlite3 *db, /* Database to query */
- const char *zPhase, /* When the error occcurs */
+ const char *zPhase, /* When the error occurs */
int rc, /* Error code returned from API */
const char *zSql /* SQL string, or NULL */
){
*/
static void exec_prepared_stmt_columnar(
ShellState *p, /* Pointer to ShellState */
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt /* Statment to run */
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt /* Statement to run */
){
sqlite3_int64 nRow = 0;
int nColumn = 0;
}
if( pArg->autoEQP>=AUTOEQP_trigger && triggerEQP==0 ){
sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP, 0, 0);
- /* Reprepare pStmt before reactiving trace modes */
+ /* Reprepare pStmt before reactivating trace modes */
sqlite3_finalize(pStmt);
sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, &pStmt, 0);
if( pArg ) pArg->pStmt = pStmt;
*/
if( preserveRowid && isIPK ){
/* If a single PRIMARY KEY column with type INTEGER was seen, then it
- ** might be an alise for the ROWID. But it might also be a WITHOUT ROWID
+ ** might be an alias for the ROWID. But it might also be a WITHOUT ROWID
** table or a INTEGER PRIMARY KEY DESC column, neither of which are
** ROWID aliases. To distinguish these cases, check to see if
** there is a "pk" entry in "PRAGMA index_list". There will be
/* Let custom-included extensions get their ..._init() called.
* The WHATEVER_INIT( db, pzErrorMsg, pApi ) macro should cause
* the extension's sqlite3_*_init( db, pzErrorMsg, pApi )
- * inititialization routine to be called.
+ * initialization routine to be called.
*/
{
int irc = SHELL_SUBMACRO(SQLITE_SHELL_EXTFUNCS, INIT)(p->db);
}
/*
-** Attempt to close the databaes connection. Report errors.
+** Attempt to close the database connection. Report errors.
*/
void close_db(sqlite3 *db){
int rc = sqlite3_close(db);
if( data.aAuxDb->zDbFilename==0 ){
data.aAuxDb->zDbFilename = z;
}else{
- /* Excesss arguments are interpreted as SQL (or dot-commands) and
+ /* Excess arguments are interpreted as SQL (or dot-commands) and
** mean that nothing is read from stdin */
readStdin = 0;
nCmd++;
** be held constant and Z will be incremented or else Y will be incremented
** and Z will be reset to zero.
**
-** Since [version 3.6.18] ([dateof:3.6.18]),
+** Since [version 3.6.18] ([dateof:3.6.18]),
** SQLite source code has been stored in the
** <a href="http://www.fossil-scm.org/">Fossil configuration management
** system</a>. ^The SQLITE_SOURCE_ID macro evaluates to
/*
** CAPI3REF: OS Interface Open File Handle
**
-** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the
+** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the
** [sqlite3_vfs | OS interface layer]. Individual OS interface
** implementations will
** want to subclass this object by appending additional fields
** This object defines the methods used to perform various operations
** against the open file represented by the [sqlite3_file] object.
**
-** If the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element
+** If the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element
** to a non-NULL pointer, then the sqlite3_io_methods.xClose method
** may be invoked even if the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] reported that it failed. The
** only way to prevent a call to xClose following a failed [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen]
** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE]]
** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE] opcode is invoked by SQLite after opening
** a write transaction to indicate that, unless it is rolled back for some
-** reason, the entire database file will be overwritten by the current
+** reason, the entire database file will be overwritten by the current
** transaction. This is used by VACUUM operations.
**
** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME]]
** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME] opcode can be used to obtain the names of
** all [VFSes] in the VFS stack. The names are of all VFS shims and the
-** final bottom-level VFS are written into memory obtained from
+** final bottom-level VFS are written into memory obtained from
** [sqlite3_malloc()] and the result is stored in the char* variable
** that the fourth parameter of [sqlite3_file_control()] points to.
** The caller is responsible for freeing the memory when done. As with
**
** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_EXTERNAL_READER]]
** The EXPERIMENTAL [SQLITE_FCNTL_EXTERNAL_READER] opcode is used to detect
-** whether or not there is a database client in another process with a wal-mode
+** whether or not there is a database client in another process with a wal-mode
** transaction open on the database or not. It is only available on unix.The
** (void*) argument passed with this file-control should be a pointer to a
** value of type (int). The integer value is set to 1 if the database is a wal
** mode database and there exists at least one client in another process that
-** currently has an SQL transaction open on the database. It is set to 0 if
+** currently has an SQL transaction open on the database. It is set to 0 if
** the database is not a wal-mode db, or if there is no such connection in any
** other process. This opcode cannot be used to detect transactions opened
** by clients within the current process, only within other processes.
**
** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_CKSM_FILE]]
-** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_CKSM_FILE] opcode is for use interally by the
+** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_CKSM_FILE] opcode is for use internally by the
** [checksum VFS shim] only.
**
** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_RESET_CACHE]]
-** If there is currently no transaction open on the database, and the
+** If there is currently no transaction open on the database, and the
** database is not a temp db, then the [SQLITE_FCNTL_RESET_CACHE] file-control
** purges the contents of the in-memory page cache. If there is an open
** transaction, or if the db is a temp-db, this opcode is a no-op, not an error.
/*
** The methods above are in versions 1 through 3 of the sqlite_vfs object.
** New fields may be appended in future versions. The iVersion
- ** value will increment whenever this happens.
+ ** value will increment whenever this happens.
*/
};
** [database connection] (specified in the first argument).
**
** The second argument to sqlite3_db_config(D,V,...) is the
-** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE | configuration verb] - an integer code
+** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE | configuration verb] - an integer code
** that indicates what aspect of the [database connection] is being configured.
** Subsequent arguments vary depending on the configuration verb.
**
** allocators round up memory allocations at least to the next multiple
** of 8. Some allocators round up to a larger multiple or to a power of 2.
** Every memory allocation request coming in through [sqlite3_malloc()]
-** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup. If xRoundup returns 0,
+** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup. If xRoundup returns 0,
** that causes the corresponding memory allocation to fail.
**
** The xInit method initializes the memory allocator. For example,
** by a single thread. ^If SQLite is compiled with
** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE | SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] compile-time option then
** it is not possible to change the [threading mode] from its default
-** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return
+** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return
** [SQLITE_ERROR] if called with the SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD
** configuration option.</dd>
**
** until after the database connection closes.
** </dd>
**
-** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_NO_CKPT_ON_CLOSE]]
+** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_NO_CKPT_ON_CLOSE]]
** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_NO_CKPT_ON_CLOSE</dt>
-** <dd> Usually, when a database in wal mode is closed or detached from a
-** database handle, SQLite checks if this will mean that there are now no
-** connections at all to the database. If so, it performs a checkpoint
+** <dd> Usually, when a database in wal mode is closed or detached from a
+** database handle, SQLite checks if this will mean that there are now no
+** connections at all to the database. If so, it performs a checkpoint
** operation before closing the connection. This option may be used to
** override this behaviour. The first parameter passed to this operation
** is an integer - positive to disable checkpoints-on-close, or zero (the
** slower. But the QPSG has the advantage of more predictable behavior. With
** the QPSG active, SQLite will always use the same query plan in the field as
** was used during testing in the lab.
-** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable
+** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable
** the QPSG, positive to enable QPSG, or negative to leave the setting
** unchanged. The second parameter is a pointer to an integer into which
** is written 0 or 1 to indicate whether the QPSG is disabled or enabled
** </dd>
**
** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_TRIGGER_EQP</dt>
-** <dd> By default, the output of EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN commands does not
+** <dd> By default, the output of EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN commands does not
** include output for any operations performed by trigger programs. This
** option is used to set or clear (the default) a flag that governs this
** behavior. The first parameter passed to this operation is an integer -
** positive to enable output for trigger programs, or zero to disable it,
** or negative to leave the setting unchanged.
-** The second parameter is a pointer to an integer into which is written
-** 0 or 1 to indicate whether output-for-triggers has been disabled - 0 if
-** it is not disabled, 1 if it is.
+** The second parameter is a pointer to an integer into which is written
+** 0 or 1 to indicate whether output-for-triggers has been disabled - 0 if
+** it is not disabled, 1 if it is.
** </dd>
**
** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE</dt>
** database, or calling sqlite3_table_column_metadata(), ignoring any
** errors. This step is only necessary if the application desires to keep
** the database in WAL mode after the reset if it was in WAL mode before
-** the reset.
+** the reset.
** <li> sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE, 1, 0);
** <li> [sqlite3_exec](db, "[VACUUM]", 0, 0, 0);
** <li> sqlite3_db_config(db, SQLITE_DBCONFIG_RESET_DATABASE, 0, 0);
** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DEFENSIVE]] <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DEFENSIVE</dt>
** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_DEFENSIVE option activates or deactivates the
** "defensive" flag for a database connection. When the defensive
-** flag is enabled, language features that allow ordinary SQL to
+** flag is enabled, language features that allow ordinary SQL to
** deliberately corrupt the database file are disabled. The disabled
** features include but are not limited to the following:
** <ul>
** <dd>The SQLITE_DBCONFIG_WRITABLE_SCHEMA option activates or deactivates the
** "writable_schema" flag. This has the same effect and is logically equivalent
** to setting [PRAGMA writable_schema=ON] or [PRAGMA writable_schema=OFF].
-** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable
+** The first argument to this setting is an integer which is 0 to disable
** the writable_schema, positive to enable writable_schema, or negative to
** leave the setting unchanged. The second parameter is a pointer to an
** integer into which is written 0 or 1 to indicate whether the writable_schema
** including:
** <ul>
** <li> Prohibit the use of SQL functions inside triggers, views,
-** CHECK constraints, DEFAULT clauses, expression indexes,
+** CHECK constraints, DEFAULT clauses, expression indexes,
** partial indexes, or generated columns
** unless those functions are tagged with [SQLITE_INNOCUOUS].
** <li> Prohibit the use of virtual tables inside of triggers or views
** any SQLite version back to 3.0.0 ([dateof:3.0.0]). Without this setting,
** newly created databases are generally not understandable by SQLite versions
** prior to 3.3.0 ([dateof:3.3.0]). As these words are written, there
-** is now scarcely any need to generate database files that are compatible
+** is now scarcely any need to generate database files that are compatible
** all the way back to version 3.0.0, and so this setting is of little
** practical use, but is provided so that SQLite can continue to claim the
** ability to generate new database files that are compatible with version
** the [VACUUM] command will fail with an obscure error when attempting to
** process a table with generated columns and a descending index. This is
** not considered a bug since SQLite versions 3.3.0 and earlier do not support
-** either generated columns or decending indexes.
+** either generated columns or descending indexes.
** </dd>
**
** [[SQLITE_DBCONFIG_STMT_SCANSTATUS]]
** SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS builds. In this case, it sets or clears
** a flag that enables collection of the sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2()
** statistics. For statistics to be collected, the flag must be set on
-** the database handle both when the SQL statement is prepared and when it
+** the database handle both when the SQL statement is prepared and when it
** is stepped. The flag is set (collection of statistics is enabled)
** by default. This option takes two arguments: an integer and a pointer to
** an integer.. The first argument is 1, 0, or -1 to enable, disable, or
** ^The sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) interface usually returns the [rowid] of
** the most recent successful [INSERT] into a rowid table or [virtual table]
** on database connection D. ^Inserts into [WITHOUT ROWID] tables are not
-** recorded. ^If no successful [INSERT]s into rowid tables have ever occurred
-** on the database connection D, then sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) returns
+** recorded. ^If no successful [INSERT]s into rowid tables have ever occurred
+** on the database connection D, then sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) returns
** zero.
**
** As well as being set automatically as rows are inserted into database
** Some virtual table implementations may INSERT rows into rowid tables as
** part of committing a transaction (e.g. to flush data accumulated in memory
** to disk). In this case subsequent calls to this function return the rowid
-** associated with these internal INSERT operations, which leads to
+** associated with these internal INSERT operations, which leads to
** unintuitive results. Virtual table implementations that do write to rowid
-** tables in this way can avoid this problem by restoring the original
-** rowid value using [sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid()] before returning
+** tables in this way can avoid this problem by restoring the original
+** rowid value using [sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid()] before returning
** control to the user.
**
-** ^(If an [INSERT] occurs within a trigger then this routine will
-** return the [rowid] of the inserted row as long as the trigger is
-** running. Once the trigger program ends, the value returned
+** ^(If an [INSERT] occurs within a trigger then this routine will
+** return the [rowid] of the inserted row as long as the trigger is
+** running. Once the trigger program ends, the value returned
** by this routine reverts to what it was before the trigger was fired.)^
**
** ^An [INSERT] that fails due to a constraint violation is not a
** METHOD: sqlite3
**
** The sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(D, R) method allows the application to
-** set the value returned by calling sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) to R
+** set the value returned by calling sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) to R
** without inserting a row into the database.
*/
void sqlite3_set_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*,sqlite3_int64);
** deleted by the most recently completed INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE
** statement on the database connection specified by the only parameter.
** The two functions are identical except for the type of the return value
-** and that if the number of rows modified by the most recent INSERT, UPDATE
+** and that if the number of rows modified by the most recent INSERT, UPDATE
** or DELETE is greater than the maximum value supported by type "int", then
** the return value of sqlite3_changes() is undefined. ^Executing any other
** type of SQL statement does not modify the value returned by these functions.
**
** ^Only changes made directly by the INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement are
-** considered - auxiliary changes caused by [CREATE TRIGGER | triggers],
+** considered - auxiliary changes caused by [CREATE TRIGGER | triggers],
** [foreign key actions] or [REPLACE] constraint resolution are not counted.
-**
-** Changes to a view that are intercepted by
-** [INSTEAD OF trigger | INSTEAD OF triggers] are not counted. ^The value
-** returned by sqlite3_changes() immediately after an INSERT, UPDATE or
-** DELETE statement run on a view is always zero. Only changes made to real
+**
+** Changes to a view that are intercepted by
+** [INSTEAD OF trigger | INSTEAD OF triggers] are not counted. ^The value
+** returned by sqlite3_changes() immediately after an INSERT, UPDATE or
+** DELETE statement run on a view is always zero. Only changes made to real
** tables are counted.
**
** Things are more complicated if the sqlite3_changes() function is
** executed while a trigger program is running. This may happen if the
** program uses the [changes() SQL function], or if some other callback
** function invokes sqlite3_changes() directly. Essentially:
-**
+**
** <ul>
** <li> ^(Before entering a trigger program the value returned by
-** sqlite3_changes() function is saved. After the trigger program
+** sqlite3_changes() function is saved. After the trigger program
** has finished, the original value is restored.)^
-**
-** <li> ^(Within a trigger program each INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE
-** statement sets the value returned by sqlite3_changes()
-** upon completion as normal. Of course, this value will not include
-** any changes performed by sub-triggers, as the sqlite3_changes()
+**
+** <li> ^(Within a trigger program each INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE
+** statement sets the value returned by sqlite3_changes()
+** upon completion as normal. Of course, this value will not include
+** any changes performed by sub-triggers, as the sqlite3_changes()
** value will be saved and restored after each sub-trigger has run.)^
** </ul>
-**
+**
** ^This means that if the changes() SQL function (or similar) is used
-** by the first INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within a trigger, it
+** by the first INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within a trigger, it
** returns the value as set when the calling statement began executing.
-** ^If it is used by the second or subsequent such statement within a trigger
-** program, the value returned reflects the number of rows modified by the
+** ^If it is used by the second or subsequent such statement within a trigger
+** program, the value returned reflects the number of rows modified by the
** previous INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE statement within the same trigger.
**
** If a separate thread makes changes on the same database connection
** ^These functions return the total number of rows inserted, modified or
** deleted by all [INSERT], [UPDATE] or [DELETE] statements completed
** since the database connection was opened, including those executed as
-** part of trigger programs. The two functions are identical except for the
-** type of the return value and that if the number of rows modified by the
+** part of trigger programs. The two functions are identical except for the
+** type of the return value and that if the number of rows modified by the
** connection exceeds the maximum value supported by type "int", then
-** the return value of sqlite3_total_changes() is undefined. ^Executing
-** any other type of SQL statement does not affect the value returned by
+** the return value of sqlite3_total_changes() is undefined. ^Executing
+** any other type of SQL statement does not affect the value returned by
** sqlite3_total_changes().
-**
+**
** ^Changes made as part of [foreign key actions] are included in the
** count, but those made as part of REPLACE constraint resolution are
-** not. ^Changes to a view that are intercepted by INSTEAD OF triggers
+** not. ^Changes to a view that are intercepted by INSTEAD OF triggers
** are not counted.
**
** The [sqlite3_total_changes(D)] interface only reports the number
** To detect changes against a database file from other database
** connections use the [PRAGMA data_version] command or the
** [SQLITE_FCNTL_DATA_VERSION] [file control].
-**
+**
** If a separate thread makes changes on the same database connection
** while [sqlite3_total_changes()] is running then the value
** returned is unpredictable and not meaningful.
**
** ^The sqlite3_interrupt(D) call is in effect until all currently running
** SQL statements on [database connection] D complete. ^Any new SQL statements
-** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the
+** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the
** running statement count reaches zero are interrupted as if they had been
** running prior to the sqlite3_interrupt() call. ^New SQL statements
** that are started after the running statement count reaches zero are
** ^These routines do not parse the SQL statements thus
** will not detect syntactically incorrect SQL.
**
-** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior
+** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior
** to invoking sqlite3_complete16() then sqlite3_initialize() is invoked
** automatically by sqlite3_complete16(). If that initialization fails,
** then the return value from sqlite3_complete16() will be non-zero
** The presence of a busy handler does not guarantee that it will be invoked
** when there is lock contention. ^If SQLite determines that invoking the busy
** handler could result in a deadlock, it will go ahead and return [SQLITE_BUSY]
-** to the application instead of invoking the
+** to the application instead of invoking the
** busy handler.
** Consider a scenario where one process is holding a read lock that
** it is trying to promote to a reserved lock and
** database connection that invoked the busy handler. In other words,
** the busy handler is not reentrant. Any such actions
** result in undefined behavior.
-**
+**
** A busy handler must not close the database connection
** or [prepared statement] that invoked the busy handler.
*/
** These routines are work-alikes of the "printf()" family of functions
** from the standard C library.
** These routines understand most of the common formatting options from
-** the standard library printf()
+** the standard library printf()
** plus some additional non-standard formats ([%q], [%Q], [%w], and [%z]).
** See the [built-in printf()] documentation for details.
**
** requested is ok. ^When the callback returns [SQLITE_DENY], the
** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] or equivalent call that triggered the
** authorizer will fail with an error message explaining that
-** access is denied.
+** access is denied.
**
** ^The first parameter to the authorizer callback is a copy of the third
** parameter to the sqlite3_set_authorizer() interface. ^The second parameter
** database connections for the meaning of "modify" in this paragraph.
**
** ^When [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] is used to prepare a statement, the
-** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a
+** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a
** schema change. Hence, the application should ensure that the
** correct authorizer callback remains in place during the [sqlite3_step()].
**
** sqlite3_trace_v2(D,M,X,P) for the [database connection] D. Each
** database connection may have at most one trace callback.
**
-** ^The X callback is invoked whenever any of the events identified by
+** ^The X callback is invoked whenever any of the events identified by
** mask M occur. ^The integer return value from the callback is currently
** ignored, though this may change in future releases. Callback
** implementations should return zero to ensure future compatibility.
** database connection D. An example use for this
** interface is to keep a GUI updated during a large query.
**
-** ^The parameter P is passed through as the only parameter to the
-** callback function X. ^The parameter N is the approximate number of
+** ^The parameter P is passed through as the only parameter to the
+** callback function X. ^The parameter N is the approximate number of
** [virtual machine instructions] that are evaluated between successive
** invocations of the callback X. ^If N is less than one then the progress
** handler is disabled.
** information.
**
** URI filenames are parsed according to RFC 3986. ^If the URI contains an
-** authority, then it must be either an empty string or the string
-** "localhost". ^If the authority is not an empty string or "localhost", an
-** error is returned to the caller. ^The fragment component of a URI, if
+** authority, then it must be either an empty string or the string
+** "localhost". ^If the authority is not an empty string or "localhost", an
+** error is returned to the caller. ^The fragment component of a URI, if
** present, is ignored.
**
** ^SQLite uses the path component of the URI as the name of the disk file
-** which contains the database. ^If the path begins with a '/' character,
-** then it is interpreted as an absolute path. ^If the path does not begin
+** which contains the database. ^If the path begins with a '/' character,
+** then it is interpreted as an absolute path. ^If the path does not begin
** with a '/' (meaning that the authority section is omitted from the URI)
-** then the path is interpreted as a relative path.
-** ^(On windows, the first component of an absolute path
+** then the path is interpreted as a relative path.
+** ^(On windows, the first component of an absolute path
** is a drive specification (e.g. "C:").)^
**
** [[core URI query parameters]]
**
** <li> <b>mode</b>: ^(The mode parameter may be set to either "ro", "rw",
** "rwc", or "memory". Attempting to set it to any other value is
-** an error)^.
-** ^If "ro" is specified, then the database is opened for read-only
-** access, just as if the [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY] flag had been set in the
-** third argument to sqlite3_open_v2(). ^If the mode option is set to
-** "rw", then the database is opened for read-write (but not create)
-** access, as if SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE (but not SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE) had
-** been set. ^Value "rwc" is equivalent to setting both
+** an error)^.
+** ^If "ro" is specified, then the database is opened for read-only
+** access, just as if the [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY] flag had been set in the
+** third argument to sqlite3_open_v2(). ^If the mode option is set to
+** "rw", then the database is opened for read-write (but not create)
+** access, as if SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE (but not SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE) had
+** been set. ^Value "rwc" is equivalent to setting both
** SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE and SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE. ^If the mode option is
** set to "memory" then a pure [in-memory database] that never reads
** or writes from disk is used. ^It is an error to specify a value for
** <li> <b>cache</b>: ^The cache parameter may be set to either "shared" or
** "private". ^Setting it to "shared" is equivalent to setting the
** SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE bit in the flags argument passed to
-** sqlite3_open_v2(). ^Setting the cache parameter to "private" is
+** sqlite3_open_v2(). ^Setting the cache parameter to "private" is
** equivalent to setting the SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE bit.
** ^If sqlite3_open_v2() is used and the "cache" parameter is present in
** a URI filename, its value overrides any behavior requested by setting
** property on a database file that does in fact change can result
** in incorrect query results and/or [SQLITE_CORRUPT] errors.
** See also: [SQLITE_IOCAP_IMMUTABLE].
-**
+**
** </ul>
**
** ^Specifying an unknown parameter in the query component of a URI is not an
**
** <table border="1" align=center cellpadding=5>
** <tr><th> URI filenames <th> Results
-** <tr><td> file:data.db <td>
+** <tr><td> file:data.db <td>
** Open the file "data.db" in the current directory.
** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db<br>
-** file:///home/fred/data.db <br>
-** file://localhost/home/fred/data.db <br> <td>
+** file:///home/fred/data.db <br>
+** file://localhost/home/fred/data.db <br> <td>
** Open the database file "/home/fred/data.db".
-** <tr><td> file://darkstar/home/fred/data.db <td>
+** <tr><td> file://darkstar/home/fred/data.db <td>
** An error. "darkstar" is not a recognized authority.
-** <tr><td style="white-space:nowrap">
+** <tr><td style="white-space:nowrap">
** file:///C:/Documents%20and%20Settings/fred/Desktop/data.db
** <td> Windows only: Open the file "data.db" on fred's desktop on drive
-** C:. Note that the %20 escaping in this example is not strictly
+** C:. Note that the %20 escaping in this example is not strictly
** necessary - space characters can be used literally
** in URI filenames.
-** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=ro&cache=private <td>
+** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=ro&cache=private <td>
** Open file "data.db" in the current directory for read-only access.
** Regardless of whether or not shared-cache mode is enabled by
** default, use a private cache.
** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db?vfs=unix-dotfile <td>
** Open file "/home/fred/data.db". Use the special VFS "unix-dotfile"
** that uses dot-files in place of posix advisory locking.
-** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=readonly <td>
+** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=readonly <td>
** An error. "readonly" is not a valid option for the "mode" parameter.
** Use "ro" instead: "file:data.db?mode=ro".
** </table>
**
** ^URI hexadecimal escape sequences (%HH) are supported within the path and
** query components of a URI. A hexadecimal escape sequence consists of a
-** percent sign - "%" - followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits
+** percent sign - "%" - followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits
** specifying an octet value. ^Before the path or query components of a
-** URI filename are interpreted, they are encoded using UTF-8 and all
+** URI filename are interpreted, they are encoded using UTF-8 and all
** hexadecimal escape sequences replaced by a single byte containing the
** corresponding octet. If this process generates an invalid UTF-8 encoding,
** the results are undefined.
** CAPI3REF: Obtain Values For URI Parameters
**
** These are utility routines, useful to [VFS|custom VFS implementations],
-** that check if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
+** that check if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
** parameter, and if so obtains the value of that query parameter.
**
** The first parameter to these interfaces (hereafter referred to
** as F) must be one of:
** <ul>
** <li> A database filename pointer created by the SQLite core and
-** passed into the xOpen() method of a VFS implemention, or
+** passed into the xOpen() method of a VFS implementation, or
** <li> A filename obtained from [sqlite3_db_filename()], or
** <li> A new filename constructed using [sqlite3_create_filename()].
** </ul>
** If F is a suitable filename (as described in the previous paragraph)
** and if P is the name of the query parameter, then
** sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns the value of the P
-** parameter if it exists or a NULL pointer if P does not appear as a
+** parameter if it exists or a NULL pointer if P does not appear as a
** query parameter on F. If P is a query parameter of F and it
** has no explicit value, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns
** a pointer to an empty string.
** parameter and returns true (1) or false (0) according to the value
** of P. The sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routine returns true (1) if the
** value of query parameter P is one of "yes", "true", or "on" in any
-** case or if the value begins with a non-zero number. The
+** case or if the value begins with a non-zero number. The
** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routines returns false (0) if the value of
** query parameter P is one of "no", "false", or "off" in any case or
** if the value begins with a numeric zero. If P is not a query
** parameters minus 1. The N value is zero-based so N should be 0 to obtain
** the name of the first query parameter, 1 for the second parameter, and
** so forth.
-**
+**
** If F is a NULL pointer, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns NULL and
** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) returns B. If F is not a NULL pointer and
** is not a database file pathname pointer that the SQLite core passed
** CAPI3REF: Database File Corresponding To A Journal
**
** ^If X is the name of a rollback or WAL-mode journal file that is
-** passed into the xOpen method of [sqlite3_vfs], then
+** passed into the xOpen method of [sqlite3_vfs], then
** sqlite3_database_file_object(X) returns a pointer to the [sqlite3_file]
** object that represents the main database file.
**
** This routine is intended for use in custom [VFS] implementations
** only. It is not a general-purpose interface.
** The argument sqlite3_file_object(X) must be a filename pointer that
-** has been passed into [sqlite3_vfs].xOpen method where the
+** has been passed into [sqlite3_vfs].xOpen method where the
** flags parameter to xOpen contains one of the bits
** [SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL] or [SQLITE_OPEN_WAL]. Any other use
** of this routine results in undefined and probably undesirable
/*
** CAPI3REF: Create and Destroy VFS Filenames
**
-** These interfces are provided for use by [VFS shim] implementations and
+** These interfaces are provided for use by [VFS shim] implementations and
** are not useful outside of that context.
**
** The sqlite3_create_filename(D,J,W,N,P) allocates memory to hold a version of
** <li> [sqlite3_uri_parameter()],
** <li> [sqlite3_uri_boolean()],
** <li> [sqlite3_uri_int64()],
-** <li> [sqlite3_uri_key()],
+** <li> [sqlite3_uri_key()],
** <li> [sqlite3_filename_database()],
** <li> [sqlite3_filename_journal()], or
** <li> [sqlite3_filename_wal()].
** If the Y parameter to sqlite3_free_filename(Y) is anything other
** than a NULL pointer or a pointer previously acquired from
** sqlite3_create_filename(), then bad things such as heap
-** corruption or segfaults may occur. The value Y should not be
+** corruption or segfaults may occur. The value Y should not be
** used again after sqlite3_free_filename(Y) has been called. This means
** that if the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen()] method of a VFS has been called using Y,
** then the corresponding [sqlite3_module.xClose() method should also be
** CAPI3REF: Error Codes And Messages
** METHOD: sqlite3
**
-** ^If the most recent sqlite3_* API call associated with
+** ^If the most recent sqlite3_* API call associated with
** [database connection] D failed, then the sqlite3_errcode(D) interface
** returns the numeric [result code] or [extended result code] for that
** API call.
** ^The sqlite3_extended_errcode()
-** interface is the same except that it always returns the
+** interface is the same except that it always returns the
** [extended result code] even when extended result codes are
** disabled.
**
** has been compiled into binary form and is ready to be evaluated.
**
** Think of each SQL statement as a separate computer program. The
-** original SQL text is source code. A prepared statement object
+** original SQL text is source code. A prepared statement object
** is the compiled object code. All SQL must be converted into a
** prepared statement before it can be run.
**
** new limit for that construct.)^
**
** ^If the new limit is a negative number, the limit is unchanged.
-** ^(For each limit category SQLITE_LIMIT_<i>NAME</i> there is a
+** ^(For each limit category SQLITE_LIMIT_<i>NAME</i> there is a
** [limits | hard upper bound]
** set at compile-time by a C preprocessor macro called
** [limits | SQLITE_MAX_<i>NAME</i>].
** ^Attempts to increase a limit above its hard upper bound are
** silently truncated to the hard upper bound.
**
-** ^Regardless of whether or not the limit was changed, the
+** ^Regardless of whether or not the limit was changed, the
** [sqlite3_limit()] interface returns the prior value of the limit.
** ^Hence, to find the current value of a limit without changing it,
** simply invoke this interface with the third parameter set to -1.
** <dd>The SQLITE_PREPARE_PERSISTENT flag is a hint to the query planner
** that the prepared statement will be retained for a long time and
** probably reused many times.)^ ^Without this flag, [sqlite3_prepare_v3()]
-** and [sqlite3_prepare16_v3()] assume that the prepared statement will
+** and [sqlite3_prepare16_v3()] assume that the prepared statement will
** be used just once or at most a few times and then destroyed using
** [sqlite3_finalize()] relatively soon. The current implementation acts
** on this hint by avoiding the use of [lookaside memory] so as not to
** </li>
**
** <li>
-** ^If the specific value bound to a [parameter | host parameter] in the
+** ^If the specific value bound to a [parameter | host parameter] in the
** WHERE clause might influence the choice of query plan for a statement,
-** then the statement will be automatically recompiled, as if there had been
+** then the statement will be automatically recompiled, as if there had been
** a schema change, on the first [sqlite3_step()] call following any change
-** to the [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of that [parameter].
-** ^The specific value of a WHERE-clause [parameter] might influence the
+** to the [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of that [parameter].
+** ^The specific value of a WHERE-clause [parameter] might influence the
** choice of query plan if the parameter is the left-hand side of a [LIKE]
** or [GLOB] operator or if the parameter is compared to an indexed column
** and the [SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4] compile-time option is enabled.
** the content of the database file.
**
** Note that [application-defined SQL functions] or
-** [virtual tables] might change the database indirectly as a side effect.
-** ^(For example, if an application defines a function "eval()" that
+** [virtual tables] might change the database indirectly as a side effect.
+** ^(For example, if an application defines a function "eval()" that
** calls [sqlite3_exec()], then the following SQL statement would
** change the database file through side-effects:
**
** ^Transaction control statements such as [BEGIN], [COMMIT], [ROLLBACK],
** [SAVEPOINT], and [RELEASE] cause sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true,
** since the statements themselves do not actually modify the database but
-** rather they control the timing of when other statements modify the
+** rather they control the timing of when other statements modify the
** database. ^The [ATTACH] and [DETACH] statements also cause
** sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true since, while those statements
-** change the configuration of a database connection, they do not make
+** change the configuration of a database connection, they do not make
** changes to the content of the database files on disk.
** ^The sqlite3_stmt_readonly() interface returns true for [BEGIN] since
** [BEGIN] merely sets internal flags, but the [BEGIN|BEGIN IMMEDIATE] and
** ^For example, an UPDATE statement might have a WHERE clause that
** makes it a no-op, but the sqlite3_stmt_readonly() result would still
** be false. ^Similarly, a CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS statement is a
-** read-only no-op if the table already exists, but
+** read-only no-op if the table already exists, but
** sqlite3_stmt_readonly() still returns false for such a statement.
**
** ^If prepared statement X is an [EXPLAIN] or [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN]
** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt
**
** ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S) interface returns true (non-zero) if the
-** [prepared statement] S has been stepped at least once using
+** [prepared statement] S has been stepped at least once using
** [sqlite3_step(S)] but has neither run to completion (returned
** [SQLITE_DONE] from [sqlite3_step(S)]) nor
** been reset using [sqlite3_reset(S)]. ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S)
-** interface returns false if S is a NULL pointer. If S is not a
+** interface returns false if S is a NULL pointer. If S is not a
** NULL pointer and is not a pointer to a valid [prepared statement]
** object, then the behavior is undefined and probably undesirable.
**
** This interface can be used in combination [sqlite3_next_stmt()]
-** to locate all prepared statements associated with a database
+** to locate all prepared statements associated with a database
** connection that are in need of being reset. This can be used,
-** for example, in diagnostic routines to search for prepared
+** for example, in diagnostic routines to search for prepared
** statements that are holding a transaction open.
*/
int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*);
** will accept either a protected or an unprotected sqlite3_value.
** Every interface that accepts sqlite3_value arguments specifies
** whether or not it requires a protected sqlite3_value. The
-** [sqlite3_value_dup()] interface can be used to construct a new
+** [sqlite3_value_dup()] interface can be used to construct a new
** protected sqlite3_value from an unprotected sqlite3_value.
**
** The terms "protected" and "unprotected" refer to whether or not
** sqlite3_value object but no mutex is held for an unprotected
** sqlite3_value object. If SQLite is compiled to be single-threaded
** (with [SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] and with [sqlite3_threadsafe()] returning 0)
-** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes
+** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes
** [SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_MULTITHREAD]
** then there is no distinction between protected and unprotected
** sqlite3_value objects and they can be used interchangeably. However,
** found in first character, which is removed, or in the absence of a BOM
** the byte order is the native byte order of the host
** machine for sqlite3_bind_text16() or the byte order specified in
-** the 6th parameter for sqlite3_bind_text64().)^
+** the 6th parameter for sqlite3_bind_text64().)^
** ^If UTF16 input text contains invalid unicode
** characters, then SQLite might change those invalid characters
** into the unicode replacement character: U+FFFD.
** or sqlite3_bind_text16() or sqlite3_bind_text64() then
** that parameter must be the byte offset
** where the NUL terminator would occur assuming the string were NUL
-** terminated. If any NUL characters occurs at byte offsets less than
+** terminated. If any NUL characters occurs at byte offsets less than
** the value of the fourth parameter then the resulting string value will
** contain embedded NULs. The result of expressions involving strings
** with embedded NULs is undefined.
** with it may be passed. ^It is called to dispose of the BLOB or string even
** if the call to the bind API fails, except the destructor is not called if
** the third parameter is a NULL pointer or the fourth parameter is negative.
-** ^ (2) The special constant, [SQLITE_STATIC], may be passsed to indicate that
+** ^ (2) The special constant, [SQLITE_STATIC], may be passed to indicate that
** the application remains responsible for disposing of the object. ^In this
** case, the object and the provided pointer to it must remain valid until
** either the prepared statement is finalized or the same SQL parameter is
** METHOD: sqlite3_stmt
**
** ^Return the number of columns in the result set returned by the
-** [prepared statement]. ^If this routine returns 0, that means the
+** [prepared statement]. ^If this routine returns 0, that means the
** [prepared statement] returns no data (for example an [UPDATE]).
** ^However, just because this routine returns a positive number does not
** mean that one or more rows of data will be returned. ^A SELECT statement
** For all versions of SQLite up to and including 3.6.23.1, a call to
** [sqlite3_reset()] was required after sqlite3_step() returned anything
** other than [SQLITE_ROW] before any subsequent invocation of
-** sqlite3_step(). Failure to reset the prepared statement using
+** sqlite3_step(). Failure to reset the prepared statement using
** [sqlite3_reset()] would result in an [SQLITE_MISUSE] return from
** sqlite3_step(). But after [version 3.6.23.1] ([dateof:3.6.23.1],
** sqlite3_step() began
** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_int64</b><td>→<td>64-bit INTEGER result
** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text</b><td>→<td>UTF-8 TEXT result
** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_text16</b><td>→<td>UTF-16 TEXT result
-** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_value</b><td>→<td>The result as an
+** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_value</b><td>→<td>The result as an
** [sqlite3_value|unprotected sqlite3_value] object.
** <tr><td> <td> <td>
** <tr><td><b>sqlite3_column_bytes</b><td>→<td>Size of a BLOB
** The return value of sqlite3_column_type() can be used to decide which
** of the first six interface should be used to extract the column value.
** The value returned by sqlite3_column_type() is only meaningful if no
-** automatic type conversions have occurred for the value in question.
+** automatic type conversions have occurred for the value in question.
** After a type conversion, the result of calling sqlite3_column_type()
** is undefined, though harmless. Future
** versions of SQLite may change the behavior of sqlite3_column_type()
** the number of bytes in that string.
** ^If the result is NULL, then sqlite3_column_bytes16() returns zero.
**
-** ^The values returned by [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and
+** ^The values returned by [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and
** [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] do not include the zero terminators at the end
** of the string. ^For clarity: the values returned by
** [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] are the number of
** to routines like [sqlite3_value_int()], [sqlite3_value_text()],
** or [sqlite3_value_bytes()], the behavior is not threadsafe.
** Hence, the sqlite3_column_value() interface
-** is normally only useful within the implementation of
+** is normally only useful within the implementation of
** [application-defined SQL functions] or [virtual tables], not within
** top-level application code.
**
** ^These functions (collectively known as "function creation routines")
** are used to add SQL functions or aggregates or to redefine the behavior
** of existing SQL functions or aggregates. The only differences between
-** the three "sqlite3_create_function*" routines are the text encoding
-** expected for the second parameter (the name of the function being
+** the three "sqlite3_create_function*" routines are the text encoding
+** expected for the second parameter (the name of the function being
** created) and the presence or absence of a destructor callback for
** the application data pointer. Function sqlite3_create_window_function()
** is similar, but allows the user to supply the extra callback functions
** ^The second parameter is the name of the SQL function to be created or
** redefined. ^The length of the name is limited to 255 bytes in a UTF-8
** representation, exclusive of the zero-terminator. ^Note that the name
-** length limit is in UTF-8 bytes, not characters nor UTF-16 bytes.
+** length limit is in UTF-8 bytes, not characters nor UTF-16 bytes.
** ^Any attempt to create a function with a longer name
** will result in [SQLITE_MISUSE] being returned.
**
** ^The fourth parameter, eTextRep, specifies what
** [SQLITE_UTF8 | text encoding] this SQL function prefers for
** its parameters. The application should set this parameter to
-** [SQLITE_UTF16LE] if the function implementation invokes
+** [SQLITE_UTF16LE] if the function implementation invokes
** [sqlite3_value_text16le()] on an input, or [SQLITE_UTF16BE] if the
** implementation invokes [sqlite3_value_text16be()] on an input, or
** [SQLITE_UTF16] if [sqlite3_value_text16()] is used, or [SQLITE_UTF8]
** For best security, the [SQLITE_DIRECTONLY] flag is recommended for
** all application-defined SQL functions that do not need to be
** used inside of triggers, view, CHECK constraints, or other elements of
-** the database schema. This flags is especially recommended for SQL
+** the database schema. This flags is especially recommended for SQL
** functions that have side effects or reveal internal application state.
** Without this flag, an attacker might be able to modify the schema of
** a database file to include invocations of the function with parameters
** SQL function or aggregate, pass NULL pointers for all three function
** callbacks.
**
-** ^The sixth, seventh, eighth and ninth parameters (xStep, xFinal, xValue
+** ^The sixth, seventh, eighth and ninth parameters (xStep, xFinal, xValue
** and xInverse) passed to sqlite3_create_window_function are pointers to
** C-language callbacks that implement the new function. xStep and xFinal
** must both be non-NULL. xValue and xInverse may either both be NULL, in
-** which case a regular aggregate function is created, or must both be
+** which case a regular aggregate function is created, or must both be
** non-NULL, in which case the new function may be used as either an aggregate
** or aggregate window function. More details regarding the implementation
-** of aggregate window functions are
+** of aggregate window functions are
** [user-defined window functions|available here].
**
** ^(If the final parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2() or
** sqlite3_create_window_function() is not NULL, then it is destructor for
-** the application data pointer. The destructor is invoked when the function
-** is deleted, either by being overloaded or when the database connection
-** closes.)^ ^The destructor is also invoked if the call to
+** the application data pointer. The destructor is invoked when the function
+** is deleted, either by being overloaded or when the database connection
+** closes.)^ ^The destructor is also invoked if the call to
** sqlite3_create_function_v2() fails. ^When the destructor callback is
** invoked, it is passed a single argument which is a copy of the application
** data pointer which was the fifth parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2().
** nArg parameter is a better match than a function implementation with
** a negative nArg. ^A function where the preferred text encoding
** matches the database encoding is a better
-** match than a function where the encoding is different.
+** match than a function where the encoding is different.
** ^A function where the encoding difference is between UTF16le and UTF16be
** is a closer match than a function where the encoding difference is
** between UTF8 and UTF16.
/*
** CAPI3REF: Function Flags
**
-** These constants may be ORed together with the
+** These constants may be ORed together with the
** [SQLITE_UTF8 | preferred text encoding] as the fourth argument
** to [sqlite3_create_function()], [sqlite3_create_function16()], or
** [sqlite3_create_function_v2()].
** SQLite might also optimize deterministic functions by factoring them
** out of inner loops.
** </dd>
-**
+**
** [[SQLITE_DIRECTONLY]] <dt>SQLITE_DIRECTONLY</dt><dd>
** The SQLITE_DIRECTONLY flag means that the function may only be invoked
-** from top-level SQL, and cannot be used in VIEWs or TRIGGERs nor in
+** from top-level SQL, and cannot be used in VIEWs or TRIGGERs nor in
** schema structures such as [CHECK constraints], [DEFAULT clauses],
** [expression indexes], [partial indexes], or [generated columns].
** <p>
-** The SQLITE_DIRECTONLY flag is recommended for any
+** The SQLITE_DIRECTONLY flag is recommended for any
** [application-defined SQL function]
** that has side-effects or that could potentially leak sensitive information.
** This will prevent attacks in which an application is tricked
-** into using a database file that has had its schema surreptiously
+** into using a database file that has had its schema surreptitiously
** modified to invoke the application-defined function in ways that are
** harmful.
** <p>
** DEPRECATED
**
** These functions are [deprecated]. In order to maintain
-** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue
+** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue
** to be supported. However, new applications should avoid
** the use of these functions. To encourage programmers to avoid
** these functions, we will not explain what they do.
** sqlite3_value_text16be() and sqlite3_value_text16le() interfaces
** extract UTF-16 strings as big-endian and little-endian respectively.
**
-** ^If [sqlite3_value] object V was initialized
+** ^If [sqlite3_value] object V was initialized
** using [sqlite3_bind_pointer(S,I,P,X,D)] or [sqlite3_result_pointer(C,P,X,D)]
** and if X and Y are strings that compare equal according to strcmp(X,Y),
** then sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) will return the pointer P. ^Otherwise,
-** sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) returns a NULL. The sqlite3_bind_pointer()
+** sqlite3_value_pointer(V,Y) returns a NULL. The sqlite3_bind_pointer()
** routine is part of the [pointer passing interface] added for SQLite 3.20.0.
**
** ^(The sqlite3_value_type(V) interface returns the
** Implementations of aggregate SQL functions use this
** routine to allocate memory for storing their state.
**
-** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called
+** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called
** for a particular aggregate function, SQLite allocates
** N bytes of memory, zeroes out that memory, and returns a pointer
** to the new memory. ^On second and subsequent calls to
** In those cases, sqlite3_aggregate_context() might be called for the
** first time from within xFinal().)^
**
-** ^The sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine returns a NULL pointer
+** ^The sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine returns a NULL pointer
** when first called if N is less than or equal to zero or if a memory
** allocation error occurs.
**
** value of N in any subsequent call to sqlite3_aggregate_context() within
** the same aggregate function instance will not resize the memory
** allocation.)^ Within the xFinal callback, it is customary to set
-** N=0 in calls to sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) so that no
+** N=0 in calls to sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) so that no
** pointless memory allocations occur.
**
-** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by
+** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by
** sqlite3_aggregate_context() when the aggregate query concludes.
**
** The first parameter must be a copy of the
** some circumstances the associated metadata may be preserved. An example
** of where this might be useful is in a regular-expression matching
** function. The compiled version of the regular expression can be stored as
-** metadata associated with the pattern string.
+** metadata associated with the pattern string.
** Then as long as the pattern string remains the same,
** the compiled regular expression can be reused on multiple
** invocations of the same function.
** SQL statement)^, or
** <li> ^(when sqlite3_set_auxdata() is invoked again on the same
** parameter)^, or
-** <li> ^(during the original sqlite3_set_auxdata() call when a memory
+** <li> ^(during the original sqlite3_set_auxdata() call when a memory
** allocation error occurs.)^ </ul>
**
-** Note the last bullet in particular. The destructor X in
+** Note the last bullet in particular. The destructor X in
** sqlite3_set_auxdata(C,N,P,X) might be called immediately, before the
** sqlite3_set_auxdata() interface even returns. Hence sqlite3_set_auxdata()
** should be called near the end of the function implementation and the
**
** ^The sqlite3_result_pointer(C,P,T,D) interface sets the result to an
** SQL NULL value, just like [sqlite3_result_null(C)], except that it
-** also associates the host-language pointer P or type T with that
+** also associates the host-language pointer P or type T with that
** NULL value such that the pointer can be retrieved within an
** [application-defined SQL function] using [sqlite3_value_pointer()].
** ^If the D parameter is not NULL, then it is a pointer to a destructor
** METHOD: sqlite3_context
**
** The sqlite3_result_subtype(C,T) function causes the subtype of
-** the result from the [application-defined SQL function] with
-** [sqlite3_context] C to be the value T. Only the lower 8 bits
+** the result from the [application-defined SQL function] with
+** [sqlite3_context] C to be the value T. Only the lower 8 bits
** of the subtype T are preserved in current versions of SQLite;
** higher order bits are discarded.
** The number of subtype bytes preserved by SQLite might increase
** deleted. ^When all collating functions having the same name are deleted,
** that collation is no longer usable.
**
-** ^The collating function callback is invoked with a copy of the pArg
+** ^The collating function callback is invoked with a copy of the pArg
** application data pointer and with two strings in the encoding specified
** by the eTextRep argument. The two integer parameters to the collating
** function callback are the length of the two strings, in bytes. The collating
** calls to the collation creation functions or when the
** [database connection] is closed using [sqlite3_close()].
**
-** ^The xDestroy callback is <u>not</u> called if the
+** ^The xDestroy callback is <u>not</u> called if the
** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() function fails. Applications that invoke
-** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() with a non-NULL xDestroy argument should
+** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() with a non-NULL xDestroy argument should
** check the return code and dispose of the application data pointer
** themselves rather than expecting SQLite to deal with it for them.
-** This is different from every other SQLite interface. The inconsistency
-** is unfortunate but cannot be changed without breaking backwards
+** This is different from every other SQLite interface. The inconsistency
+** is unfortunate but cannot be changed without breaking backwards
** compatibility.
**
** See also: [sqlite3_collation_needed()] and [sqlite3_collation_needed16()].
*/
int sqlite3_create_collation(
- sqlite3*,
- const char *zName,
- int eTextRep,
+ sqlite3*,
+ const char *zName,
+ int eTextRep,
void *pArg,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
);
int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
- sqlite3*,
- const char *zName,
- int eTextRep,
+ sqlite3*,
+ const char *zName,
+ int eTextRep,
void *pArg,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
void(*xDestroy)(void*)
);
int sqlite3_create_collation16(
- sqlite3*,
+ sqlite3*,
const void *zName,
- int eTextRep,
+ int eTextRep,
void *pArg,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
);
** [sqlite3_create_collation_v2()].
*/
int sqlite3_collation_needed(
- sqlite3*,
- void*,
+ sqlite3*,
+ void*,
void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*)
);
int sqlite3_collation_needed16(
- sqlite3*,
+ sqlite3*,
void*,
void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*)
);
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CEROD
/*
-** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database. Unless
+** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database. Unless
** activated, none of the CEROD routines will work.
*/
void sqlite3_activate_cerod(
** ^The [temp_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause
** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc]. ^Furthermore,
** the [temp_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string
-** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
+** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory
** using [sqlite3_free].
** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be
** ^The [data_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause
** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc]. ^Furthermore,
** the [data_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string
-** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
+** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory
** using [sqlite3_free].
** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be
** CAPI3REF: Autovacuum Compaction Amount Callback
** METHOD: sqlite3
**
-** ^The sqlite3_autovacuum_pages(D,C,P,X) interface registers a callback
+** ^The sqlite3_autovacuum_pages(D,C,P,X) interface registers a callback
** function C that is invoked prior to each autovacuum of the database
** file. ^The callback is passed a copy of the generic data pointer (P),
** the schema-name of the attached database that is being autovacuumed,
** and [sqlite3_preupdate_hook()] interfaces.
*/
void *sqlite3_update_hook(
- sqlite3*,
+ sqlite3*,
void(*)(void *,int ,char const *,char const *,sqlite3_int64),
void*
);
** [use of shared cache mode is discouraged].
**
** ^Cache sharing is enabled and disabled for an entire process.
-** This is a change as of SQLite [version 3.5.0] ([dateof:3.5.0]).
+** This is a change as of SQLite [version 3.5.0] ([dateof:3.5.0]).
** In prior versions of SQLite,
** sharing was enabled or disabled for each thread separately.
**
** with the [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE] flag.
**
** Note: This method is disabled on MacOS X 10.7 and iOS version 5.0
-** and will always return SQLITE_MISUSE. On those systems,
-** shared cache mode should be enabled per-database connection via
+** and will always return SQLITE_MISUSE. On those systems,
+** shared cache mode should be enabled per-database connection via
** [sqlite3_open_v2()] with [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE].
**
** This interface is threadsafe on processors where writing a
** as heap memory usages approaches the limit.
** ^The soft heap limit is "soft" because even though SQLite strives to stay
** below the limit, it will exceed the limit rather than generate
-** an [SQLITE_NOMEM] error. In other words, the soft heap limit
+** an [SQLITE_NOMEM] error. In other words, the soft heap limit
** is advisory only.
**
** ^The sqlite3_hard_heap_limit64(N) interface sets a hard upper bound of
**
** ^If the specified table is actually a view, an [error code] is returned.
**
-** ^If the specified column is "rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" and the table
+** ^If the specified column is "rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" and the table
** is not a [WITHOUT ROWID] table and an
** [INTEGER PRIMARY KEY] column has been explicitly declared, then the output
** parameters are set for the explicitly declared column. ^(If there is no
** prior to calling this API,
** otherwise an error will be returned.
**
-** <b>Security warning:</b> It is recommended that the
+** <b>Security warning:</b> It is recommended that the
** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_LOAD_EXTENSION] method be used to enable only this
** interface. The use of the [sqlite3_enable_load_extension()] interface
** should be avoided. This will keep the SQL function [load_extension()]
** ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)] interface unregisters the
** initialization routine X that was registered using a prior call to
** [sqlite3_auto_extension(X)]. ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)]
-** routine returns 1 if initialization routine X was successfully
+** routine returns 1 if initialization routine X was successfully
** unregistered and it returns 0 if X was not on the list of initialization
** routines.
*/
** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Object
** KEYWORDS: sqlite3_module {virtual table module}
**
-** This structure, sometimes called a "virtual table module",
-** defines the implementation of a [virtual table].
+** This structure, sometimes called a "virtual table module",
+** defines the implementation of a [virtual table].
** This structure consists mostly of methods for the module.
**
** ^A virtual table module is created by filling in a persistent
void (**pxFunc)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value**),
void **ppArg);
int (*xRename)(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNew);
- /* The methods above are in version 1 of the sqlite_module object. Those
+ /* The methods above are in version 1 of the sqlite_module object. Those
** below are for version 2 and greater. */
int (*xSavepoint)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int);
int (*xRelease)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int);
** required by SQLite. If the table has at least 64 columns and any column
** to the right of the first 63 is required, then bit 63 of colUsed is also
** set. In other words, column iCol may be required if the expression
-** (colUsed & ((sqlite3_uint64)1 << (iCol>=63 ? 63 : iCol))) evaluates to
+** (colUsed & ((sqlite3_uint64)1 << (iCol>=63 ? 63 : iCol))) evaluates to
** non-zero.
**
** The [xBestIndex] method must fill aConstraintUsage[] with information
**
** ^The estimatedCost value is an estimate of the cost of a particular
** strategy. A cost of N indicates that the cost of the strategy is similar
-** to a linear scan of an SQLite table with N rows. A cost of log(N)
+** to a linear scan of an SQLite table with N rows. A cost of log(N)
** indicates that the expense of the operation is similar to that of a
** binary search on a unique indexed field of an SQLite table with N rows.
**
** ^The estimatedRows value is an estimate of the number of rows that
** will be returned by the strategy.
**
-** The xBestIndex method may optionally populate the idxFlags field with a
+** The xBestIndex method may optionally populate the idxFlags field with a
** mask of SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_* flags. Currently there is only one such flag -
** SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE. If the xBestIndex method sets this flag, SQLite
-** assumes that the strategy may visit at most one row.
+** assumes that the strategy may visit at most one row.
**
** Additionally, if xBestIndex sets the SQLITE_INDEX_SCAN_UNIQUE flag, then
** SQLite also assumes that if a call to the xUpdate() method is made as
** the xUpdate method are automatically rolled back by SQLite.
**
** IMPORTANT: The estimatedRows field was added to the sqlite3_index_info
-** structure for SQLite [version 3.8.2] ([dateof:3.8.2]).
+** structure for SQLite [version 3.8.2] ([dateof:3.8.2]).
** If a virtual table extension is
-** used with an SQLite version earlier than 3.8.2, the results of attempting
-** to read or write the estimatedRows field are undefined (but are likely
+** used with an SQLite version earlier than 3.8.2, the results of attempting
+** to read or write the estimatedRows field are undefined (but are likely
** to include crashing the application). The estimatedRows field should
** therefore only be used if [sqlite3_libversion_number()] returns a
** value greater than or equal to 3008002. Similarly, the idxFlags field
-** was added for [version 3.9.0] ([dateof:3.9.0]).
+** was added for [version 3.9.0] ([dateof:3.9.0]).
** It may therefore only be used if
** sqlite3_libversion_number() returns a value greater than or equal to
** 3009000.
/*
** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Scan Flags
**
-** Virtual table implementations are allowed to set the
+** Virtual table implementations are allowed to set the
** [sqlite3_index_info].idxFlags field to some combination of
** these bits.
*/
** preexisting [virtual table] for the module.
**
** ^The module name is registered on the [database connection] specified
-** by the first parameter. ^The name of the module is given by the
+** by the first parameter. ^The name of the module is given by the
** second parameter. ^The third parameter is a pointer to
** the implementation of the [virtual table module]. ^The fourth
** parameter is an arbitrary client data pointer that is passed through
** METHOD: sqlite3
**
** ^(Virtual tables can provide alternative implementations of functions
-** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module].
+** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module].
** But global versions of those functions
** must exist in order to be overloaded.)^
**
** SELECT zColumn FROM zDb.zTable WHERE [rowid] = iRow;
** </pre>)^
**
-** ^(Parameter zDb is not the filename that contains the database, but
+** ^(Parameter zDb is not the filename that contains the database, but
** rather the symbolic name of the database. For attached databases, this is
** the name that appears after the AS keyword in the [ATTACH] statement.
** For the main database file, the database name is "main". For TEMP
** ^(On success, [SQLITE_OK] is returned and the new [BLOB handle] is stored
** in *ppBlob. Otherwise an [error code] is returned and, unless the error
** code is SQLITE_MISUSE, *ppBlob is set to NULL.)^ ^This means that, provided
-** the API is not misused, it is always safe to call [sqlite3_blob_close()]
+** the API is not misused, it is always safe to call [sqlite3_blob_close()]
** on *ppBlob after this function it returns.
**
** This function fails with SQLITE_ERROR if any of the following are true:
** <ul>
-** <li> ^(Database zDb does not exist)^,
-** <li> ^(Table zTable does not exist within database zDb)^,
-** <li> ^(Table zTable is a WITHOUT ROWID table)^,
+** <li> ^(Database zDb does not exist)^,
+** <li> ^(Table zTable does not exist within database zDb)^,
+** <li> ^(Table zTable is a WITHOUT ROWID table)^,
** <li> ^(Column zColumn does not exist)^,
** <li> ^(Row iRow is not present in the table)^,
** <li> ^(The specified column of row iRow contains a value that is not
** a TEXT or BLOB value)^,
-** <li> ^(Column zColumn is part of an index, PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE
+** <li> ^(Column zColumn is part of an index, PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE
** constraint and the blob is being opened for read/write access)^,
-** <li> ^([foreign key constraints | Foreign key constraints] are enabled,
+** <li> ^([foreign key constraints | Foreign key constraints] are enabled,
** column zColumn is part of a [child key] definition and the blob is
** being opened for read/write access)^.
** </ul>
**
-** ^Unless it returns SQLITE_MISUSE, this function sets the
-** [database connection] error code and message accessible via
-** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions.
+** ^Unless it returns SQLITE_MISUSE, this function sets the
+** [database connection] error code and message accessible via
+** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions.
**
** A BLOB referenced by sqlite3_blob_open() may be read using the
** [sqlite3_blob_read()] interface and modified by using
** blob.
**
** ^The [sqlite3_bind_zeroblob()] and [sqlite3_result_zeroblob()] interfaces
-** and the built-in [zeroblob] SQL function may be used to create a
+** and the built-in [zeroblob] SQL function may be used to create a
** zero-filled blob to read or write using the incremental-blob interface.
**
** To avoid a resource leak, every open [BLOB handle] should eventually
** DESTRUCTOR: sqlite3_blob
**
** ^This function closes an open [BLOB handle]. ^(The BLOB handle is closed
-** unconditionally. Even if this routine returns an error code, the
+** unconditionally. Even if this routine returns an error code, the
** handle is still closed.)^
**
** ^If the blob handle being closed was opened for read-write access, and if
** code is returned and the transaction rolled back.
**
** Calling this function with an argument that is not a NULL pointer or an
-** open blob handle results in undefined behaviour. ^Calling this routine
-** with a null pointer (such as would be returned by a failed call to
+** open blob handle results in undefined behaviour. ^Calling this routine
+** with a null pointer (such as would be returned by a failed call to
** [sqlite3_blob_open()]) is a harmless no-op. ^Otherwise, if this function
-** is passed a valid open blob handle, the values returned by the
+** is passed a valid open blob handle, the values returned by the
** sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg() functions are set before returning.
*/
int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *);
** CAPI3REF: Return The Size Of An Open BLOB
** METHOD: sqlite3_blob
**
-** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the
+** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the
** successfully opened [BLOB handle] in its only argument. ^The
** incremental blob I/O routines can only read or overwriting existing
** blob content; they cannot change the size of a blob.
**
** ^(On success, sqlite3_blob_write() returns SQLITE_OK.
** Otherwise, an [error code] or an [extended error code] is returned.)^
-** ^Unless SQLITE_MISUSE is returned, this function sets the
-** [database connection] error code and message accessible via
-** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions.
+** ^Unless SQLITE_MISUSE is returned, this function sets the
+** [database connection] error code and message accessible via
+** [sqlite3_errcode()] and [sqlite3_errmsg()] and related functions.
**
** ^If the [BLOB handle] passed as the first argument was not opened for
** writing (the flags parameter to [sqlite3_blob_open()] was zero),
** This function may only modify the contents of the BLOB; it is
** not possible to increase the size of a BLOB using this API.
** ^If offset iOffset is less than N bytes from the end of the BLOB,
-** [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written. The size of the
-** BLOB (and hence the maximum value of N+iOffset) can be determined
-** using the [sqlite3_blob_bytes()] interface. ^If N or iOffset are less
+** [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written. The size of the
+** BLOB (and hence the maximum value of N+iOffset) can be determined
+** using the [sqlite3_blob_bytes()] interface. ^If N or iOffset are less
** than zero [SQLITE_ERROR] is returned and no data is written.
**
** ^An attempt to write to an expired [BLOB handle] fails with an
** CAPI3REF: Retrieve the mutex for a database connection
** METHOD: sqlite3
**
-** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that
+** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that
** serializes access to the [database connection] given in the argument
** when the [threading mode] is Serialized.
** ^If the [threading mode] is Single-thread or Multi-thread then this
** method becomes the return value of this routine.
**
** A few opcodes for [sqlite3_file_control()] are handled directly
-** by the SQLite core and never invoke the
+** by the SQLite core and never invoke the
** sqlite3_io_methods.xFileControl method.
** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_FILE_POINTER] value for the op parameter causes
** a pointer to the underlying [sqlite3_file] object to be written into
/*
** CAPI3REF: SQL Keyword Checking
**
-** These routines provide access to the set of SQL language keywords
+** These routines provide access to the set of SQL language keywords
** recognized by SQLite. Applications can uses these routines to determine
** whether or not a specific identifier needs to be escaped (for example,
** by enclosing in double-quotes) so as not to confuse the parser.
**
** ^The [sqlite3_str_new(D)] interface allocates and initializes
** a new [sqlite3_str] object. To avoid memory leaks, the object returned by
-** [sqlite3_str_new()] must be freed by a subsequent call to
+** [sqlite3_str_new()] must be freed by a subsequent call to
** [sqlite3_str_finish(X)].
**
** ^The [sqlite3_str_new(D)] interface always returns a pointer to a
** valid [sqlite3_str] object, though in the event of an out-of-memory
** error the returned object might be a special singleton that will
-** silently reject new text, always return SQLITE_NOMEM from
-** [sqlite3_str_errcode()], always return 0 for
+** silently reject new text, always return SQLITE_NOMEM from
+** [sqlite3_str_errcode()], always return 0 for
** [sqlite3_str_length()], and always return NULL from
** [sqlite3_str_finish(X)]. It is always safe to use the value
** returned by [sqlite3_str_new(D)] as the sqlite3_str parameter
** These interfaces add content to an sqlite3_str object previously obtained
** from [sqlite3_str_new()].
**
-** ^The [sqlite3_str_appendf(X,F,...)] and
+** ^The [sqlite3_str_appendf(X,F,...)] and
** [sqlite3_str_vappendf(X,F,V)] interfaces uses the [built-in printf]
-** functionality of SQLite to append formatted text onto the end of
+** functionality of SQLite to append formatted text onto the end of
** [sqlite3_str] object X.
**
** ^The [sqlite3_str_append(X,S,N)] method appends exactly N bytes from string S
** ^This method can be used, for example, to add whitespace indentation.
**
** ^The [sqlite3_str_reset(X)] method resets the string under construction
-** inside [sqlite3_str] object X back to zero bytes in length.
+** inside [sqlite3_str] object X back to zero bytes in length.
**
** These methods do not return a result code. ^If an error occurs, that fact
** is recorded in the [sqlite3_str] object and can be recovered by a
** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request
** handed to [sqlite3_malloc()] or [sqlite3_realloc()] (or their
** internal equivalents). Only the value returned in the
-** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
+** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^
**
** [[SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT</dt>
**
** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED</dt>
** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pages used out of the
-** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using
+** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using
** [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]. The
** value returned is in pages, not in bytes.</dd>)^
**
-** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW]]
+** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW]]
** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW</dt>
** <dd>This parameter returns the number of bytes of page cache
** allocation which could not be satisfied by the [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]
** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE</dt>
** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request
** handed to the [pagecache memory allocator]. Only the value returned in the
-** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
+** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^
**
** [[SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED]] <dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED</dt>
** <dd>No longer used.</dd>
**
** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK</dt>
-** <dd>The *pHighwater parameter records the deepest parser stack.
+** <dd>The *pHighwater parameter records the deepest parser stack.
** The *pCurrent value is undefined. The *pHighwater value is only
** meaningful if SQLite is compiled with [YYTRACKMAXSTACKDEPTH].</dd>)^
** </dl>
** CAPI3REF: Database Connection Status
** METHOD: sqlite3
**
-** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information
+** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information
** about a single [database connection]. ^The first argument is the
** database connection object to be interrogated. ^The second argument
** is an integer constant, taken from the set of
** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options], that
-** determines the parameter to interrogate. The set of
+** determines the parameter to interrogate. The set of
** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options] is likely
** to grow in future releases of SQLite.
**
** checked out.</dd>)^
**
** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT</dt>
-** <dd>This parameter returns the number of malloc attempts that were
+** <dd>This parameter returns the number of malloc attempts that were
** satisfied using lookaside memory. Only the high-water value is meaningful;
** the current value is always zero.)^
**
** memory used by all pager caches associated with the database connection.)^
** ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED is always 0.
**
-** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED]]
+** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED]]
** ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED_SHARED</dt>
** <dd>This parameter is similar to DBSTATUS_CACHE_USED, except that if a
** pager cache is shared between two or more connections the bytes of heap
** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED</dt>
** <dd>This parameter returns the approximate number of bytes of heap
** memory used to store the schema for all databases associated
-** with the connection - main, temp, and any [ATTACH]-ed databases.)^
+** with the connection - main, temp, and any [ATTACH]-ed databases.)^
** ^The full amount of memory used by the schemas is reported, even if the
** schema memory is shared with other database connections due to
** [shared cache mode] being enabled.
**
** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT</dt>
** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache hits that have
-** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT
+** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT
** is always 0.
** </dd>
**
** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS</dt>
** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache misses that have
-** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS
+** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS
** is always 0.
** </dd>
**
** statements. For example, if the number of table steps greatly exceeds
** the number of table searches or result rows, that would tend to indicate
** that the prepared statement is using a full table scan rather than
-** an index.
+** an index.
**
** ^(This interface is used to retrieve and reset counter values from
** a [prepared statement]. The first argument is the prepared statement
** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP</dt>
** <dd>^This is the number of times that SQLite has stepped forward in
** a table as part of a full table scan. Large numbers for this counter
-** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through
+** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through
** careful use of indices.</dd>
**
** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT</dt>
** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP</dt>
** <dd>^This is the number of virtual machine operations executed
** by the prepared statement if that number is less than or equal
-** to 2147483647. The number of virtual machine operations can be
+** to 2147483647. The number of virtual machine operations can be
** used as a proxy for the total work done by the prepared statement.
** If the number of virtual machine operations exceeds 2147483647
** then the value returned by this statement status code is undefined.
**
** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_REPREPARE</dt>
** <dd>^This is the number of times that the prepare statement has been
-** automatically regenerated due to schema changes or changes to
+** automatically regenerated due to schema changes or changes to
** [bound parameters] that might affect the query plan.
**
** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_RUN]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_RUN</dt>
** cycle.
**
** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_MISS]]
-** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER HIT]]
+** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER HIT]]
** <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_HIT<br>
** SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_MISS</dt>
** <dd>^SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FILTER_HIT is the number of times that a join
** KEYWORDS: {page cache}
**
** ^(The [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2], ...) interface can
-** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an
+** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an
** instance of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2 structure.)^
-** In many applications, most of the heap memory allocated by
+** In many applications, most of the heap memory allocated by
** SQLite is used for the page cache.
-** By implementing a
+** By implementing a
** custom page cache using this API, an application can better control
-** the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which
-** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to
-** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for
+** the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which
+** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to
+** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for
** how long.
**
** The alternative page cache mechanism is an
** [sqlite3_config()] returns.)^
**
** [[the xInit() page cache method]]
-** ^(The xInit() method is called once for each effective
+** ^(The xInit() method is called once for each effective
** call to [sqlite3_initialize()])^
** (usually only once during the lifetime of the process). ^(The xInit()
** method is passed a copy of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2.pArg value.)^
-** The intent of the xInit() method is to set up global data structures
-** required by the custom page cache implementation.
-** ^(If the xInit() method is NULL, then the
+** The intent of the xInit() method is to set up global data structures
+** required by the custom page cache implementation.
+** ^(If the xInit() method is NULL, then the
** built-in default page cache is used instead of the application defined
** page cache.)^
**
** [[the xShutdown() page cache method]]
** ^The xShutdown() method is called by [sqlite3_shutdown()].
-** It can be used to clean up
+** It can be used to clean up
** any outstanding resources before process shutdown, if required.
** ^The xShutdown() method may be NULL.
**
** though this is not guaranteed. ^The
** first parameter, szPage, is the size in bytes of the pages that must
** be allocated by the cache. ^szPage will always a power of two. ^The
-** second parameter szExtra is a number of bytes of extra storage
+** second parameter szExtra is a number of bytes of extra storage
** associated with each page cache entry. ^The szExtra parameter will
** a number less than 250. SQLite will use the
** extra szExtra bytes on each page to store metadata about the underlying
** it is purely advisory. ^On a cache where bPurgeable is false, SQLite will
** never invoke xUnpin() except to deliberately delete a page.
** ^In other words, calls to xUnpin() on a cache with bPurgeable set to
-** false will always have the "discard" flag set to true.
+** false will always have the "discard" flag set to true.
** ^Hence, a cache created with bPurgeable false will
** never contain any unpinned pages.
**
** [[the xPagecount() page cache methods]]
** The xPagecount() method must return the number of pages currently
** stored in the cache, both pinned and unpinned.
-**
+**
** [[the xFetch() page cache methods]]
-** The xFetch() method locates a page in the cache and returns a pointer to
+** The xFetch() method locates a page in the cache and returns a pointer to
** an sqlite3_pcache_page object associated with that page, or a NULL pointer.
** The pBuf element of the returned sqlite3_pcache_page object will be a
-** pointer to a buffer of szPage bytes used to store the content of a
+** pointer to a buffer of szPage bytes used to store the content of a
** single database page. The pExtra element of sqlite3_pcache_page will be
** a pointer to the szExtra bytes of extra storage that SQLite has requested
** for each entry in the page cache.
** page cache implementation. ^The page cache implementation
** may choose to evict unpinned pages at any time.
**
-** The cache must not perform any reference counting. A single
-** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls
+** The cache must not perform any reference counting. A single
+** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls
** to xFetch().
**
** [[the xRekey() page cache methods]]
int (*xPagecount)(sqlite3_pcache*);
sqlite3_pcache_page *(*xFetch)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned key, int createFlag);
void (*xUnpin)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, int discard);
- void (*xRekey)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*,
+ void (*xRekey)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*,
unsigned oldKey, unsigned newKey);
void (*xTruncate)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned iLimit);
void (*xDestroy)(sqlite3_pcache*);
**
** The backup API copies the content of one database into another.
** It is useful either for creating backups of databases or
-** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files.
+** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files.
**
** See Also: [Using the SQLite Online Backup API]
**
** ^Thus, the backup may be performed on a live source database without
** preventing other database connections from
** reading or writing to the source database while the backup is underway.
-**
-** ^(To perform a backup operation:
+**
+** ^(To perform a backup operation:
** <ol>
** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b> is called once to initialize the
-** backup,
-** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer
+** backup,
+** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer
** the data between the two databases, and finally
-** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources
-** associated with the backup operation.
+** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources
+** associated with the backup operation.
** </ol>)^
** There should be exactly one call to sqlite3_backup_finish() for each
** successful call to sqlite3_backup_init().
**
** [[sqlite3_backup_init()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b>
**
-** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the
-** [database connection] associated with the destination database
+** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the
+** [database connection] associated with the destination database
** and the database name, respectively.
** ^The database name is "main" for the main database, "temp" for the
** temporary database, or the name specified after the AS keyword in
** an [ATTACH] statement for an attached database.
-** ^The S and M arguments passed to
+** ^The S and M arguments passed to
** sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) identify the [database connection]
** and database name of the source database, respectively.
** ^The source and destination [database connections] (parameters S and D)
** must be different or else sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) will fail with
** an error.
**
-** ^A call to sqlite3_backup_init() will fail, returning NULL, if
-** there is already a read or read-write transaction open on the
+** ^A call to sqlite3_backup_init() will fail, returning NULL, if
+** there is already a read or read-write transaction open on the
** destination database.
**
** ^If an error occurs within sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M), then NULL is
** ^A successful call to sqlite3_backup_init() returns a pointer to an
** [sqlite3_backup] object.
** ^The [sqlite3_backup] object may be used with the sqlite3_backup_step() and
-** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup
+** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup
** operation.
**
** [[sqlite3_backup_step()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b>
**
-** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between
+** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between
** the source and destination databases specified by [sqlite3_backup] object B.
-** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied.
+** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied.
** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully copies N pages and there
** are still more pages to be copied, then the function returns [SQLITE_OK].
** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully finishes copying all pages
**
** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() cannot obtain a required file-system lock, then
** the [sqlite3_busy_handler | busy-handler function]
-** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the
-** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then
+** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the
+** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then
** [SQLITE_BUSY] is returned to the caller. ^In this case the call to
** sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later. ^If the source
** [database connection]
** is called, then [SQLITE_LOCKED] is returned immediately. ^Again, in this
** case the call to sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later on. ^(If
** [SQLITE_IOERR_ACCESS | SQLITE_IOERR_XXX], [SQLITE_NOMEM], or
-** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then
-** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These
-** errors are considered fatal.)^ The application must accept
-** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle
+** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then
+** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These
+** errors are considered fatal.)^ The application must accept
+** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle
** to the sqlite3_backup_finish() to release associated resources.
**
** ^The first call to sqlite3_backup_step() obtains an exclusive lock
-** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either
-** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete
+** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either
+** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete
** and sqlite3_backup_step() returns [SQLITE_DONE]. ^Every call to
** sqlite3_backup_step() obtains a [shared lock] on the source database that
** lasts for the duration of the sqlite3_backup_step() call.
** through the backup process. ^If the source database is modified by an
** external process or via a database connection other than the one being
** used by the backup operation, then the backup will be automatically
-** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source
+** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source
** database is modified by the using the same database connection as is used
** by the backup operation, then the backup database is automatically
** updated at the same time.
**
** [[sqlite3_backup_finish()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b>
**
-** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the
+** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the
** application wishes to abandon the backup operation, the application
** should destroy the [sqlite3_backup] by passing it to sqlite3_backup_finish().
** ^The sqlite3_backup_finish() interfaces releases all
-** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object.
+** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object.
** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() has not yet returned [SQLITE_DONE], then any
** active write-transaction on the destination database is rolled back.
** The [sqlite3_backup] object is invalid
** connections, then the source database connection may be used concurrently
** from within other threads.
**
-** However, the application must guarantee that the destination
-** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after
+** However, the application must guarantee that the destination
+** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after
** sqlite3_backup_init() is called and before the corresponding call to
** sqlite3_backup_finish(). SQLite does not currently check to see
** if the application incorrectly accesses the destination [database connection]
** If running in [shared cache mode], the application must
** guarantee that the shared cache used by the destination database
** is not accessed while the backup is running. In practice this means
-** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being
+** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being
** backed up to is not accessed by any connection within the process,
** not just the specific connection that was passed to sqlite3_backup_init().
**
-** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple
+** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple
** threads may safely make multiple concurrent calls to sqlite3_backup_step().
** However, the sqlite3_backup_remaining() and sqlite3_backup_pagecount()
** APIs are not strictly speaking threadsafe. If they are invoked at the
** ^When running in shared-cache mode, a database operation may fail with
** an [SQLITE_LOCKED] error if the required locks on the shared-cache or
** individual tables within the shared-cache cannot be obtained. See
-** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking.
-** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke
+** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking.
+** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke
** when the connection currently holding the required lock relinquishes it.
** ^This API is only available if the library was compiled with the
** [SQLITE_ENABLE_UNLOCK_NOTIFY] C-preprocessor symbol defined.
** See Also: [Using the SQLite Unlock Notification Feature].
**
** ^Shared-cache locks are released when a database connection concludes
-** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back.
+** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back.
**
** ^When a connection (known as the blocked connection) fails to obtain a
** shared-cache lock and SQLITE_LOCKED is returned to the caller, the
** identity of the database connection (the blocking connection) that
-** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an
+** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an
** application receives an SQLITE_LOCKED error, it may call the
-** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as
+** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as
** the first argument to register for a callback that will be invoked
** when the blocking connections current transaction is concluded. ^The
** callback is invoked from within the [sqlite3_step] or [sqlite3_close]
**
** ^If the blocked connection is attempting to obtain a write-lock on a
** shared-cache table, and more than one other connection currently holds
-** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of
+** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of
** the other connections to use as the blocking connection.
**
-** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a
+** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a
** blocked connection. If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is called when the
** blocked connection already has a registered unlock-notify callback,
** then the new callback replaces the old.)^ ^If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is
** called with a NULL pointer as its second argument, then any existing
-** unlock-notify callback is canceled. ^The blocked connections
-** unlock-notify callback may also be canceled by closing the blocked
+** unlock-notify callback is cancelled. ^The blocked connections
+** unlock-notify callback may also be cancelled by closing the blocked
** connection using [sqlite3_close()].
**
** The unlock-notify callback is not reentrant. If an application invokes
**
** <b>Callback Invocation Details</b>
**
-** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a
+** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a
** single void* pointer that is passed to the callback when it is invoked.
** However, the signature of the callback function allows SQLite to pass
** it an array of void* context pointers. The first argument passed to
** same callback function, then instead of invoking the callback function
** multiple times, it is invoked once with the set of void* context pointers
** specified by the blocked connections bundled together into an array.
-** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions
+** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions
** related to the set of unblocked database connections.
**
** <b>Deadlock Detection</b>
**
-** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a
+** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a
** database waits for the callback to be issued before taking any further
** action (a reasonable assumption), then using this API may cause the
** application to deadlock. For example, if connection X is waiting for
**
** <b>The "DROP TABLE" Exception</b>
**
-** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost
+** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost
** always appropriate to call sqlite3_unlock_notify(). There is however,
** one exception. When executing a "DROP TABLE" or "DROP INDEX" statement,
** SQLite checks if there are any currently executing SELECT statements
** One way around this problem is to check the extended error code returned
** by an sqlite3_step() call. ^(If there is a blocking connection, then the
** extended error code is set to SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE. Otherwise, in
-** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just
+** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just
** SQLITE_LOCKED.)^
*/
int sqlite3_unlock_notify(
** ^The [sqlite3_wal_hook()] function is used to register a callback that
** is invoked each time data is committed to a database in wal mode.
**
-** ^(The callback is invoked by SQLite after the commit has taken place and
-** the associated write-lock on the database released)^, so the implementation
+** ^(The callback is invoked by SQLite after the commit has taken place and
+** the associated write-lock on the database released)^, so the implementation
** may read, write or [checkpoint] the database as required.
**
** ^The first parameter passed to the callback function when it is invoked
** that does not correspond to any valid SQLite error code, the results
** are undefined.
**
-** A single database handle may have at most a single write-ahead log callback
+** A single database handle may have at most a single write-ahead log callback
** registered at one time. ^Calling [sqlite3_wal_hook()] replaces any
** previously registered write-ahead log callback. ^The return value is
** a copy of the third parameter from the previous call, if any, or 0.
** overwrite any prior [sqlite3_wal_hook()] settings.
*/
void *sqlite3_wal_hook(
- sqlite3*,
+ sqlite3*,
int(*)(void *,sqlite3*,const char*,int),
void*
);
** [sqlite3_wal_hook()] that causes any database on [database connection] D
** to automatically [checkpoint]
** after committing a transaction if there are N or
-** more frames in the [write-ahead log] file. ^Passing zero or
+** more frames in the [write-ahead log] file. ^Passing zero or
** a negative value as the nFrame parameter disables automatic
** checkpoints entirely.
**
** ^(The sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) is equivalent to
** [sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2](D,X,[SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE],0,0).)^
**
-** In brief, sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) causes the content in the
+** In brief, sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(D,X) causes the content in the
** [write-ahead log] for database X on [database connection] D to be
** transferred into the database file and for the write-ahead log to
** be reset. See the [checkpointing] documentation for addition
**
** <dl>
** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE<dd>
-** ^Checkpoint as many frames as possible without waiting for any database
-** readers or writers to finish, then sync the database file if all frames
+** ^Checkpoint as many frames as possible without waiting for any database
+** readers or writers to finish, then sync the database file if all frames
** in the log were checkpointed. ^The [busy-handler callback]
-** is never invoked in the SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE mode.
+** is never invoked in the SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE mode.
** ^On the other hand, passive mode might leave the checkpoint unfinished
** if there are concurrent readers or writers.
**
**
** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART<dd>
** ^This mode works the same way as SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL with the addition
-** that after checkpointing the log file it blocks (calls the
+** that after checkpointing the log file it blocks (calls the
** [busy-handler callback])
-** until all readers are reading from the database file only. ^This ensures
+** until all readers are reading from the database file only. ^This ensures
** that the next writer will restart the log file from the beginning.
** ^Like SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, this mode blocks new
** database writer attempts while it is pending, but does not impede readers.
** truncated to zero bytes and so both *pnLog and *pnCkpt will be set to zero.
**
** ^All calls obtain an exclusive "checkpoint" lock on the database file. ^If
-** any other process is running a checkpoint operation at the same time, the
-** lock cannot be obtained and SQLITE_BUSY is returned. ^Even if there is a
+** any other process is running a checkpoint operation at the same time, the
+** lock cannot be obtained and SQLITE_BUSY is returned. ^Even if there is a
** busy-handler configured, it will not be invoked in this case.
**
-** ^The SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, RESTART and TRUNCATE modes also obtain the
+** ^The SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, RESTART and TRUNCATE modes also obtain the
** exclusive "writer" lock on the database file. ^If the writer lock cannot be
** obtained immediately, and a busy-handler is configured, it is invoked and
** the writer lock retried until either the busy-handler returns 0 or the lock
** is successfully obtained. ^The busy-handler is also invoked while waiting for
** database readers as described above. ^If the busy-handler returns 0 before
** the writer lock is obtained or while waiting for database readers, the
-** checkpoint operation proceeds from that point in the same way as
-** SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE - checkpointing as many frames as possible
+** checkpoint operation proceeds from that point in the same way as
+** SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE - checkpointing as many frames as possible
** without blocking any further. ^SQLITE_BUSY is returned in this case.
**
** ^If parameter zDb is NULL or points to a zero length string, then the
-** specified operation is attempted on all WAL databases [attached] to
+** specified operation is attempted on all WAL databases [attached] to
** [database connection] db. In this case the
-** values written to output parameters *pnLog and *pnCkpt are undefined. ^If
-** an SQLITE_BUSY error is encountered when processing one or more of the
-** attached WAL databases, the operation is still attempted on any remaining
-** attached databases and SQLITE_BUSY is returned at the end. ^If any other
-** error occurs while processing an attached database, processing is abandoned
-** and the error code is returned to the caller immediately. ^If no error
-** (SQLITE_BUSY or otherwise) is encountered while processing the attached
+** values written to output parameters *pnLog and *pnCkpt are undefined. ^If
+** an SQLITE_BUSY error is encountered when processing one or more of the
+** attached WAL databases, the operation is still attempted on any remaining
+** attached databases and SQLITE_BUSY is returned at the end. ^If any other
+** error occurs while processing an attached database, processing is abandoned
+** and the error code is returned to the caller immediately. ^If no error
+** (SQLITE_BUSY or otherwise) is encountered while processing the attached
** databases, SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** ^If database zDb is the name of an attached database that is not in WAL
/*
** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Configuration Options
-** KEYWORDS: {virtual table configuration options}
+** KEYWORDS: {virtual table configuration options}
** KEYWORDS: {virtual table configuration option}
**
** These macros define the various options to the
** If X is non-zero, then the virtual table implementation guarantees
** that if [xUpdate] returns [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], it will do so before
** any modifications to internal or persistent data structures have been made.
-** If the [ON CONFLICT] mode is ABORT, FAIL, IGNORE or ROLLBACK, SQLite
+** If the [ON CONFLICT] mode is ABORT, FAIL, IGNORE or ROLLBACK, SQLite
** is able to roll back a statement or database transaction, and abandon
-** or continue processing the current SQL statement as appropriate.
+** or continue processing the current SQL statement as appropriate.
** If the ON CONFLICT mode is REPLACE and the [xUpdate] method returns
** [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], SQLite handles this as if the ON CONFLICT mode
** had been ABORT.
**
** Virtual table implementations that are required to handle OR REPLACE
-** must do so within the [xUpdate] method. If a call to the
-** [sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict()] function indicates that the current ON
-** CONFLICT policy is REPLACE, the virtual table implementation should
+** must do so within the [xUpdate] method. If a call to the
+** [sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict()] function indicates that the current ON
+** CONFLICT policy is REPLACE, the virtual table implementation should
** silently replace the appropriate rows within the xUpdate callback and
** return SQLITE_OK. Or, if this is not possible, it may return
-** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, in which case SQLite falls back to OR ABORT
+** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, in which case SQLite falls back to OR ABORT
** constraint handling.
** </dd>
**
/*
** CAPI3REF: Identify and handle IN constraints in xBestIndex
**
-** This interface may only be used from within an
+** This interface may only be used from within an
** [xBestIndex|xBestIndex() method] of a [virtual table] implementation.
** The result of invoking this interface from any other context is
** undefined and probably harmful.
** communicated to the xBestIndex method as a
** [SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ] constraint.)^ If xBestIndex wants to use
** this constraint, it must set the corresponding
-** aConstraintUsage[].argvIndex to a postive integer. ^(Then, under
+** aConstraintUsage[].argvIndex to a positive integer. ^(Then, under
** the usual mode of handling IN operators, SQLite generates [bytecode]
** that invokes the [xFilter|xFilter() method] once for each value
** on the right-hand side of the IN operator.)^ Thus the virtual table
** <li><p> The last call to sqlite3_vtab_in(P,N,F) for which F was
** non-negative had F>=1.
** </ol>)^
-**
+**
** ^If either or both of the conditions above are false, then SQLite uses
** the traditional one-at-a-time processing strategy for the IN constraint.
** ^If both conditions are true, then the argvIndex-th parameter to the
** that constraint if the right-hand operand is known. ^If the
** right-hand operand is not known, then *V is set to a NULL pointer.
** ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(P,J,V) interface returns SQLITE_OK if
-** and only if *V is set to a value. ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(P,J,V)
+** and only if *V is set to a value. ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(P,J,V)
** inteface returns SQLITE_NOTFOUND if the right-hand side of the J-th
** constraint is not available. ^The sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value() interface
** can return an result code other than SQLITE_OK or SQLITE_NOTFOUND if
** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_SELECTID]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_SELECTID</dt>
** <dd>^The "int" variable pointed to by the V parameter will be set to the
** id for the X-th query plan element. The id value is unique within the
-** statement. The select-id is the same value as is output in the first
+** statement. The select-id is the same value as is output in the first
** column of an [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] query.
**
** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_PARENTID]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_PARENTID</dt>
** <dd>The "int" variable pointed to by the V parameter will be set to the
** the id of the parent of the current query element, if applicable, or
** to zero if the query element has no parent. This is the same value as
-** returned in the second column of an [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] query.
+** returned in the second column of an [EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN] query.
**
** [[SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE]] <dt>SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE</dt>
** <dd>The sqlite3_int64 output value is set to the number of cycles,
**
** The "iScanStatusOp" parameter determines which status information to return.
** The "iScanStatusOp" must be one of the [scanstatus options] or the behavior
-** of this interface is undefined. ^The requested measurement is written into
+** of this interface is undefined. ^The requested measurement is written into
** a variable pointed to by the "pOut" parameter.
**
** The "flags" parameter must be passed a mask of flags. At present only
** one flag is defined - SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX. If SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX
-** is specified, then status information is available for all elements
+** is specified, then status information is available for all elements
** of a query plan that are reported by "EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN" output. If
** SQLITE_SCANSTAT_COMPLEX is not specified, then only query plan elements
** that correspond to query loops (the "SCAN..." and "SEARCH..." elements of
** the EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN output) are available. Invoking API
-** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() is equivalent to calling
+** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() is equivalent to calling
** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2() with a zeroed flags parameter.
-**
+**
** Parameter "idx" identifies the specific query element to retrieve statistics
** for. Query elements are numbered starting from zero. A value of -1 may be
** to query for statistics regarding the entire query. ^If idx is out of range
-** - less than -1 or greater than or equal to the total number of query
+** - less than -1 or greater than or equal to the total number of query
** elements used to implement the statement - a non-zero value is returned and
** the variable that pOut points to is unchanged.
**
int idx, /* Index of loop to report on */
int iScanStatusOp, /* Information desired. SQLITE_SCANSTAT_* */
void *pOut /* Result written here */
-);
+);
int sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus_v2(
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, /* Prepared statement for which info desired */
int idx, /* Index of loop to report on */
int iScanStatusOp, /* Information desired. SQLITE_SCANSTAT_* */
int flags, /* Mask of flags defined below */
void *pOut /* Result written here */
-);
+);
/*
** CAPI3REF: Prepared Statement Scan Status
**
** ^If a write-transaction is open on [database connection] D when the
** [sqlite3_db_cacheflush(D)] interface invoked, any dirty
-** pages in the pager-cache that are not currently in use are written out
+** pages in the pager-cache that are not currently in use are written out
** to disk. A dirty page may be in use if a database cursor created by an
** active SQL statement is reading from it, or if it is page 1 of a database
** file (page 1 is always "in use"). ^The [sqlite3_db_cacheflush(D)]
** interface flushes caches for all schemas - "main", "temp", and
** any [attached] databases.
**
-** ^If this function needs to obtain extra database locks before dirty pages
-** can be flushed to disk, it does so. ^If those locks cannot be obtained
+** ^If this function needs to obtain extra database locks before dirty pages
+** can be flushed to disk, it does so. ^If those locks cannot be obtained
** immediately and there is a busy-handler callback configured, it is invoked
** in the usual manner. ^If the required lock still cannot be obtained, then
** the database is skipped and an attempt made to flush any dirty pages
** kind of update operation that is about to occur.
** ^(The fourth parameter to the preupdate callback is the name of the
** database within the database connection that is being modified. This
-** will be "main" for the main database or "temp" for TEMP tables or
+** will be "main" for the main database or "temp" for TEMP tables or
** the name given after the AS keyword in the [ATTACH] statement for attached
** databases.)^
** ^The fifth parameter to the preupdate callback is the name of the
** table that is being modified.
**
** For an UPDATE or DELETE operation on a [rowid table], the sixth
-** parameter passed to the preupdate callback is the initial [rowid] of the
+** parameter passed to the preupdate callback is the initial [rowid] of the
** row being modified or deleted. For an INSERT operation on a rowid table,
-** or any operation on a WITHOUT ROWID table, the value of the sixth
+** or any operation on a WITHOUT ROWID table, the value of the sixth
** parameter is undefined. For an INSERT or UPDATE on a rowid table the
** seventh parameter is the final rowid value of the row being inserted
** or updated. The value of the seventh parameter passed to the callback
**
** ^The [sqlite3_preupdate_depth(D)] interface returns 0 if the preupdate
** callback was invoked as a result of a direct insert, update, or delete
-** operation; or 1 for inserts, updates, or deletes invoked by top-level
+** operation; or 1 for inserts, updates, or deletes invoked by top-level
** triggers; or 2 for changes resulting from triggers called by top-level
** triggers; and so forth.
**
** When the [sqlite3_blob_write()] API is used to update a blob column,
** the pre-update hook is invoked with SQLITE_DELETE. This is because the
** in this case the new values are not available. In this case, when a
-** callback made with op==SQLITE_DELETE is actuall a write using the
+** callback made with op==SQLITE_DELETE is actually a write using the
** sqlite3_blob_write() API, the [sqlite3_preupdate_blobwrite()] returns
** the index of the column being written. In other cases, where the
** pre-update hook is being invoked for some other reason, including a
** The return value is OS-dependent. For example, on unix systems, after
** [sqlite3_open_v2()] returns [SQLITE_CANTOPEN], this interface could be
** called to get back the underlying "errno" that caused the problem, such
-** as ENOSPC, EAUTH, EISDIR, and so forth.
+** as ENOSPC, EAUTH, EISDIR, and so forth.
*/
int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3*);
** [sqlite3_snapshot_get(D,S,P)] interface writes a pointer to the newly
** created [sqlite3_snapshot] object into *P and returns SQLITE_OK.
** If there is not already a read-transaction open on schema S when
-** this function is called, one is opened automatically.
+** this function is called, one is opened automatically.
**
** The following must be true for this function to succeed. If any of
** the following statements are false when sqlite3_snapshot_get() is
** called, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. The final value of *P is undefined
-** in this case.
+** in this case.
**
** <ul>
** <li> The database handle must not be in [autocommit mode].
**
** <li> One or more transactions must have been written to the current wal
** file since it was created on disk (by any connection). This means
-** that a snapshot cannot be taken on a wal mode database with no wal
+** that a snapshot cannot be taken on a wal mode database with no wal
** file immediately after it is first opened. At least one transaction
** must be written to it first.
** </ul>
**
** This function may also return SQLITE_NOMEM. If it is called with the
-** database handle in autocommit mode but fails for some other reason,
+** database handle in autocommit mode but fails for some other reason,
** whether or not a read transaction is opened on schema S is undefined.
**
** The [sqlite3_snapshot] object returned from a successful call to
** CAPI3REF: Start a read transaction on an historical snapshot
** METHOD: sqlite3_snapshot
**
-** ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] interface either starts a new read
-** transaction or upgrades an existing one for schema S of
-** [database connection] D such that the read transaction refers to
-** historical [snapshot] P, rather than the most recent change to the
-** database. ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open()] interface returns SQLITE_OK
+** ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] interface either starts a new read
+** transaction or upgrades an existing one for schema S of
+** [database connection] D such that the read transaction refers to
+** historical [snapshot] P, rather than the most recent change to the
+** database. ^The [sqlite3_snapshot_open()] interface returns SQLITE_OK
** on success or an appropriate [error code] if it fails.
**
-** ^In order to succeed, the database connection must not be in
+** ^In order to succeed, the database connection must not be in
** [autocommit mode] when [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] is called. If there
** is already a read transaction open on schema S, then the database handle
** must have no active statements (SELECT statements that have been passed
-** to sqlite3_step() but not sqlite3_reset() or sqlite3_finalize()).
+** to sqlite3_step() but not sqlite3_reset() or sqlite3_finalize()).
** SQLITE_ERROR is returned if either of these conditions is violated, or
** if schema S does not exist, or if the snapshot object is invalid.
**
** ^A call to sqlite3_snapshot_open() will fail to open if the specified
-** snapshot has been overwritten by a [checkpoint]. In this case
+** snapshot has been overwritten by a [checkpoint]. In this case
** SQLITE_ERROR_SNAPSHOT is returned.
**
-** If there is already a read transaction open when this function is
+** If there is already a read transaction open when this function is
** invoked, then the same read transaction remains open (on the same
** database snapshot) if SQLITE_ERROR, SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_ERROR_SNAPSHOT
** is returned. If another error code - for example SQLITE_PROTOCOL or an
** SQLITE_IOERR error code - is returned, then the final state of the
-** read transaction is undefined. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then the
+** read transaction is undefined. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then the
** read transaction is now open on database snapshot P.
**
** ^(A call to [sqlite3_snapshot_open(D,S,P)] will fail if the
** database connection D does not know that the database file for
** schema S is in [WAL mode]. A database connection might not know
** that the database file is in [WAL mode] if there has been no prior
-** I/O on that database connection, or if the database entered [WAL mode]
+** I/O on that database connection, or if the database entered [WAL mode]
** after the most recent I/O on the database connection.)^
** (Hint: Run "[PRAGMA application_id]" against a newly opened
** database connection in order to make it ready to use snapshots.)
** METHOD: sqlite3_snapshot
**
** The sqlite3_snapshot_cmp(P1, P2) interface is used to compare the ages
-** of two valid snapshot handles.
+** of two valid snapshot handles.
**
-** If the two snapshot handles are not associated with the same database
-** file, the result of the comparison is undefined.
+** If the two snapshot handles are not associated with the same database
+** file, the result of the comparison is undefined.
**
** Additionally, the result of the comparison is only valid if both of the
** snapshot handles were obtained by calling sqlite3_snapshot_get() since the
** last time the wal file was deleted. The wal file is deleted when the
** database is changed back to rollback mode or when the number of database
-** clients drops to zero. If either snapshot handle was obtained before the
-** wal file was last deleted, the value returned by this function
+** clients drops to zero. If either snapshot handle was obtained before the
+** wal file was last deleted, the value returned by this function
** is undefined.
**
** Otherwise, this API returns a negative value if P1 refers to an older
** representation of the database will usually only exist if there has
** been a prior call to [sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,...)] with the same
** values of D and S.
-** The size of the database is written into *P even if the
+** The size of the database is written into *P even if the
** SQLITE_SERIALIZE_NOCOPY bit is set but no contiguous copy
** of the database exists.
**
/*
** CAPI3REF: Deserialize a database
**
-** The sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) interface causes the
+** The sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) interface causes the
** [database connection] D to disconnect from database S and then
** reopen S as an in-memory database based on the serialization contained
** in P. The serialized database P is N bytes in size. M is the size of
** S argument to sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) is "temp" then the
** function returns SQLITE_ERROR.
**
-** If sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) fails for any reason and if the
+** If sqlite3_deserialize(D,S,P,N,M,F) fails for any reason and if the
** SQLITE_DESERIALIZE_FREEONCLOSE bit is set in argument F, then
** [sqlite3_free()] is invoked on argument P prior to returning.
**
** used on lines of code that actually
** implement parts of coverage testing.
**
-** OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE - This branch is allowed to alway be false
+** OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE - This branch is allowed to always be false
** and the correct answer is still obtained,
** though perhaps more slowly.
**
-** OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE - This branch is allowed to alway be true
+** OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE - This branch is allowed to always be true
** and the correct answer is still obtained,
** though perhaps more slowly.
**
** PREVENTS-HARMLESS-OVERREAD - This branch prevents a buffer overread
** that would be harmless and undetectable
-** if it did occur.
+** if it did occur.
**
** In all cases, the special comment must be enclosed in the usual
-** slash-asterisk...asterisk-slash comment marks, with no spaces between the
+** slash-asterisk...asterisk-slash comment marks, with no spaces between the
** asterisks and the comment text.
*/
#endif
/* Optionally #include a user-defined header, whereby compilation options
-** may be set prior to where they take effect, but after platform setup.
+** may be set prior to where they take effect, but after platform setup.
** If SQLITE_CUSTOM_INCLUDE=? is defined, its value names the #include
** file.
*/
#ifndef __has_extension
# define __has_extension(x) 0 /* compatibility with non-clang compilers */
#endif
-#if GCC_VERSION>=4007000 || __has_extension(c_atomic)
+#if GCC_VERSION>=4007000 || __has_extension(c_atomic)
# define SQLITE_ATOMIC_INTRINSICS 1
# define AtomicLoad(PTR) __atomic_load_n((PTR),__ATOMIC_RELAXED)
# define AtomicStore(PTR,VAL) __atomic_store_n((PTR),(VAL),__ATOMIC_RELAXED)
#endif
/*
-** The compile-time options SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE and
+** The compile-time options SQLITE_MMAP_READWRITE and
** SQLITE_ENABLE_BATCH_ATOMIC_WRITE are not compatible with one another.
** You must choose one or the other (or neither) but not both.
*/
/*
** Name of table that holds the database schema.
**
-** The PREFERRED names are used whereever possible. But LEGACY is also
+** The PREFERRED names are used wherever possible. But LEGACY is also
** used for backwards compatibility.
**
** 1. Queries can use either the PREFERRED or the LEGACY names
/*
** Default synchronous levels.
**
-** Note that (for historcal reasons) the PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_* macros differ
+** Note that (for historical reasons) the PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_* macros differ
** from the SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS value by 1.
**
** PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS
** An instance of the following structure stores a database schema.
**
** Most Schema objects are associated with a Btree. The exception is
-** the Schema for the TEMP databaes (sqlite3.aDb[1]) which is free-standing.
+** the Schema for the TEMP database (sqlite3.aDb[1]) which is free-standing.
** In shared cache mode, a single Schema object can be shared by multiple
** Btrees that refer to the same underlying BtShared object.
**
LookasideSlot *pInit; /* List of buffers not previously used */
LookasideSlot *pFree; /* List of available buffers */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TWOSIZE_LOOKASIDE
- LookasideSlot *pSmallInit; /* List of small buffers not prediously used */
+ LookasideSlot *pSmallInit; /* List of small buffers not previously used */
LookasideSlot *pSmallFree; /* List of available small buffers */
void *pMiddle; /* First byte past end of full-size buffers and
** the first byte of LOOKASIDE_SMALL buffers */
#define EnableLookaside db->lookaside.bDisable--;\
db->lookaside.sz=db->lookaside.bDisable?0:db->lookaside.szTrue
-/* Size of the smaller allocations in two-size lookside */
+/* Size of the smaller allocations in two-size lookaside */
#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_TWOSIZE_LOOKASIDE
# define LOOKASIDE_SMALL 0
#else
**
** Note that even though SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE and SQLITE_INNOCUOUS have the
** same bit value, their meanings are inverted. SQLITE_FUNC_UNSAFE is
-** used internally and if set means tha the function has side effects.
+** used internally and if set means that the function has side effects.
** SQLITE_INNOCUOUS is used by application code and means "not unsafe".
** See multiple instances of tag-20230109-1.
*/
#define INLINEFUNC_coalesce 0
#define INLINEFUNC_implies_nonnull_row 1
#define INLINEFUNC_expr_implies_expr 2
-#define INLINEFUNC_expr_compare 3
+#define INLINEFUNC_expr_compare 3
#define INLINEFUNC_affinity 4
#define INLINEFUNC_iif 5
#define INLINEFUNC_sqlite_offset 6
** PURE_DATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xFunc)
** Used for "pure" date/time functions, this macro is like DFUNCTION
** except that it does set the SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT flags. iArg is
-** ignored and the user-data for these functions is set to an
+** ignored and the user-data for these functions is set to an
** arbitrary non-NULL pointer. The bNC parameter is not used.
**
** AGGREGATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xStep, xFinal)
** foreign key.
**
** The OE_Default value is a place holder that means to use whatever
-** conflict resolution algorthm is required from context.
+** conflict resolution algorithm is required from context.
**
** The following symbolic values are used to record which type
** of conflict resolution action to take.
/*
** Macros to compute aCol[] and aFunc[] register numbers.
**
-** These macros should not be used prior to the call to
+** These macros should not be used prior to the call to
** assignAggregateRegisters() that computes the value of pAggInfo->iFirstReg.
** The assert()s that are part of this macro verify that constraint.
*/
** TK_REGISTER: register number
** TK_TRIGGER: 1 -> new, 0 -> old
** EP_Unlikely: 134217728 times likelihood
- ** TK_IN: ephemerial table holding RHS
+ ** TK_IN: ephemeral table holding RHS
** TK_SELECT_COLUMN: Number of columns on the LHS
** TK_SELECT: 1st register of result vector */
ynVar iColumn; /* TK_COLUMN: column index. -1 for rowid.
unsigned notCte :1; /* This item may not match a CTE */
unsigned isUsing :1; /* u3.pUsing is valid */
unsigned isOn :1; /* u3.pOn was once valid and non-NULL */
- unsigned isSynthUsing :1; /* u3.pUsing is synthensized from NATURAL */
+ unsigned isSynthUsing :1; /* u3.pUsing is synthesized from NATURAL */
unsigned isNestedFrom :1; /* pSelect is a SF_NestedFrom subquery */
} fg;
int iCursor; /* The VDBE cursor number used to access this table */
** conflict-target clause.) The pUpsertTargetWhere is the optional
** WHERE clause used to identify partial unique indexes.
**
-** pUpsertSet is the list of column=expr terms of the UPDATE statement.
+** pUpsertSet is the list of column=expr terms of the UPDATE statement.
** The pUpsertSet field is NULL for a ON CONFLICT DO NOTHING. The
** pUpsertWhere is the WHERE clause for the UPDATE and is NULL if the
** WHERE clause is omitted.
#define OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION 0x02 /* OP_Delete/Insert: save cursor pos */
#define OPFLAG_AUXDELETE 0x04 /* OP_Delete: index in a DELETE op */
#define OPFLAG_NOCHNG_MAGIC 0x6d /* OP_MakeRecord: serialtype 10 is ok */
-#define OPFLAG_PREFORMAT 0x80 /* OP_Insert uses preformatted cell */
+#define OPFLAG_PREFORMAT 0x80 /* OP_Insert uses preformatted cell */
/*
** Each trigger present in the database schema is stored as an instance of
/* Tuning parameters are set using SQLITE_TESTCTRL_TUNE and are controlled
** on debug-builds of the CLI using ".testctrl tune ID VALUE". Tuning
** parameters are for temporary use during development, to help find
-** optimial values for parameters in the query planner. The should not
+** optimal values for parameters in the query planner. The should not
** be used on trunk check-ins. They are a temporary mechanism available
** for transient development builds only.
**
#endif
int sqlite3CreateFunc(sqlite3 *, const char *, int, int, void *,
void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **),
- void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **),
+ void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **),
void (*)(sqlite3_context*),
void (*)(sqlite3_context*),
- void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **),
+ void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **),
FuncDestructor *pDestructor
);
void sqlite3NoopDestructor(void*);
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-**
+**
** This file defines various limits of what SQLite can process.
*/
#endif
/*
-** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to
-** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might
-** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an
+** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to
+** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might
+** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an
** expression. A value of 0 means that there is no limit.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH
** level of recursion for each term. A stack overflow can result
** if the number of terms is too large. In practice, most SQL
** never has more than 3 or 4 terms. Use a value of 0 to disable
-** any limit on the number of terms in a compount SELECT.
+** any limit on the number of terms in a compound SELECT.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_MAX_COMPOUND_SELECT
# define SQLITE_MAX_COMPOUND_SELECT 500
**
** Earlier versions of SQLite allowed the user to change this value at
** compile time. This is no longer permitted, on the grounds that it creates
-** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library
-** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database
-** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite
-** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback
+** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library
+** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database
+** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite
+** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback
** the aborted transaction. This could lead to database corruption.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
** Maximum depth of recursion for triggers.
**
** A value of 1 means that a trigger program will not be able to itself
-** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all
+** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all
** may be executed.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_MAX_TRIGGER_DEPTH
/*
** If using Tcl version 8.6 or greater, use the NR functions to avoid
-** recursive evalution of scripts by the [db eval] and [db trans]
+** recursive evaluation of scripts by the [db eval] and [db trans]
** commands. Even if the headers used while compiling the extension
** are 8.6 or newer, the code still tests the Tcl version at runtime.
** This allows stubs-enabled builds to be used with older Tcl libraries.
**
** This command usage is equivalent to the sqlite2.x COPY statement,
** which imports file data into a table using the PostgreSQL COPY file format:
- ** $db copy $conflit_algo $table_name $filename \t \\N
+ ** $db copy $conflict_algorithm $table_name $filename \t \\N
*/
case DB_COPY: {
char *zTable; /* Insert data into this table */
** Start a new transaction (if we are not already in the midst of a
** transaction) and execute the TCL script SCRIPT. After SCRIPT
** completes, either commit the transaction or roll it back if SCRIPT
- ** throws an exception. Or if no new transation was started, do nothing.
+ ** throws an exception. Or if no new transaction was started, do nothing.
** pass the exception on up the stack.
**
** This command was inspired by Dave Thomas's talk on Ruby at the
/*
** Usage: sqlite3_next_stmt DB STMT
**
-** Return the next statment in sequence after STMT.
+** Return the next statement in sequence after STMT.
*/
static int SQLITE_TCLAPI test_next_stmt(
void * clientData,
assert( sqlite3_vfs_find("__two")==&two );
/* Calling sqlite_vfs_register with non-zero second parameter changes the
- ** default VFS, even if the 1st parameter is an existig VFS that is
+ ** default VFS, even if the 1st parameter is an existing VFS that is
** previously registered as the non-default.
*/
sqlite3_vfs_register(&one, 1);
** routines, both for accuracy and for speed.
**
** An integer is written using putVarint() and read back with
-** getVarint() and varified to be unchanged. This repeats COUNT
+** getVarint() and verified to be unchanged. This repeats COUNT
** times. The first integer is START*MULTIPLIER. Each iteration
** increases the integer by INCREMENT.
**
/*
** Method:
**
-** This layer is implemented as a wrapper around the "real"
-** sqlite3_file object for the host system. Each time data is
+** This layer is implemented as a wrapper around the "real"
+** sqlite3_file object for the host system. Each time data is
** written to the file object, instead of being written to the
-** underlying file, the write operation is stored in an in-memory
+** underlying file, the write operation is stored in an in-memory
** structure (type WriteBuffer). This structure is placed at the
** end of a global ordered list (the write-list).
**
** When data is read from a file object, the requested region is
-** first retrieved from the real file. The write-list is then
-** traversed and data copied from any overlapping WriteBuffer
+** first retrieved from the real file. The write-list is then
+** traversed and data copied from any overlapping WriteBuffer
** structures to the output buffer. i.e. a read() operation following
** one or more write() operations works as expected, even if no
** data has actually been written out to the real file.
**
-** When a fsync() operation is performed, an operating system crash
-** may be simulated, in which case exit(-1) is called (the call to
+** When a fsync() operation is performed, an operating system crash
+** may be simulated, in which case exit(-1) is called (the call to
** xSync() never returns). Whether or not a crash is simulated,
-** the data associated with a subset of the WriteBuffer structures
-** stored in the write-list is written to the real underlying files
+** the data associated with a subset of the WriteBuffer structures
+** stored in the write-list is written to the real underlying files
** and the entries removed from the write-list. If a crash is simulated,
** a subset of the buffers may be corrupted before the data is written.
**
** Normal mode is used when the simulated device has none of the
** SQLITE_IOCAP_XXX flags set.
**
-** In normal mode, if the fsync() is not a simulated crash, the
+** In normal mode, if the fsync() is not a simulated crash, the
** write-list is traversed from beginning to end. Each WriteBuffer
** structure associated with the file handle used to call xSync()
** is written to the real file and removed from the write-list.
**
-** If a crash is simulated, one of the following takes place for
-** each WriteBuffer in the write-list, regardless of which
+** If a crash is simulated, one of the following takes place for
+** each WriteBuffer in the write-list, regardless of which
** file-handle it is associated with:
**
** 1. The buffer is correctly written to the file, just as if
**
** 2. Nothing is done.
**
-** 3. Garbage data is written to all sectors of the file that
+** 3. Garbage data is written to all sectors of the file that
** overlap the region specified by the WriteBuffer. Or garbage
-** data is written to some contiguous section within the
+** data is written to some contiguous section within the
** overlapped sectors.
**
** Device Characteristic flag handling:
**
-** If the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag is set, then option (3) above is
+** If the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag is set, then option (3) above is
** never selected.
**
** If the IOCAP_ATOMIC512 flag is set, and the WriteBuffer represents
**
** If either the IOCAP_SAFEAPPEND or IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL flags are set
** and a crash is being simulated, then an entry of the write-list is
-** selected at random. Everything in the list after the selected entry
+** selected at random. Everything in the list after the selected entry
** is discarded before processing begins.
**
-** If IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL is set and a crash is being simulated, option
-** (1) is selected for all write-list entries except the last. If a
+** If IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL is set and a crash is being simulated, option
+** (1) is selected for all write-list entries except the last. If a
** crash is not being simulated, then all entries in the write-list
** that occur before at least one write() on the file-handle specified
** as part of the xSync() are written to their associated real files.
** Each write operation in the write-list is represented by an instance
** of the following structure.
**
-** If zBuf is 0, then this structure represents a call to xTruncate(),
+** If zBuf is 0, then this structure represents a call to xTruncate(),
** not xWrite(). In that case, iOffset is the size that the file is
** truncated to.
*/
char *zName;
int flags; /* Flags the file was opened with */
- /* Cache of the entire file. This is used to speed up OsRead() and
+ /* Cache of the entire file. This is used to speed up OsRead() and
** OsFileSize() calls. Although both could be done by traversing the
** write-list, in practice this is impractically slow.
*/
int iDeviceCharacteristics; /* Value of simulated device characteristics */
int iCrash; /* Crash on the iCrash'th call to xSync() */
- char zCrashFile[500]; /* Crash during an xSync() on this file */
+ char zCrashFile[500]; /* Crash during an xSync() on this file */
};
static CrashGlobal g = {0, 0, SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE, 0, 0};
/*
** Wrapper around the sqlite3OsWrite() function that avoids writing to the
-** 512 byte block begining at offset PENDING_BYTE.
+** 512 byte block beginning at offset PENDING_BYTE.
*/
static int writeDbFile(CrashFile *p, u8 *z, i64 iAmt, i64 iOff){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
WriteBuffer *pWrite;
WriteBuffer **ppPtr;
- /* If this is not a crash simulation, set pFinal to point to the
+ /* If this is not a crash simulation, set pFinal to point to the
** last element of the write-list that is associated with file handle
** pFile.
**
char random;
sqlite3_randomness(1, &random);
- /* Do not select option 3 (sector trashing) if the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag
+ /* Do not select option 3 (sector trashing) if the IOCAP_ATOMIC flag
** is set or this is an OsTruncate(), not an Oswrite().
*/
if( (iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_ATOMIC) || (pWrite->zBuf==0) ){
*ppPtr = pWrite->pNext;
#ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST
if( isCrash ){
- printf("Writing %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n",
+ printf("Writing %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n",
pWrite->nBuf, (int)pWrite->iOffset, pWrite->pFile->zName
);
}
ppPtr = &pWrite->pNext;
#ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST
if( isCrash ){
- printf("Omiting %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n",
+ printf("Omiting %d bytes @ %d (%s)\n",
pWrite->nBuf, (int)pWrite->iOffset, pWrite->pFile->zName
);
}
assert(pWrite->zBuf);
#ifdef TRACE_CRASHTEST
- printf("Trashing %d sectors (%d bytes) @ %lld (sector %d) (%s)\n",
+ printf("Trashing %d sectors (%d bytes) @ %lld (sector %d) (%s)\n",
1+iLast-iFirst, (1+iLast-iFirst)*g.iSectorSize,
pWrite->iOffset, iFirst, pWrite->pFile->zName
);
if( zGarbage ){
sqlite3_int64 i;
for(i=iFirst; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<=iLast; i++){
- sqlite3_randomness(g.iSectorSize, zGarbage);
+ sqlite3_randomness(g.iSectorSize, zGarbage);
rc = writeDbFile(
pWrite->pFile, zGarbage, g.iSectorSize, i*g.iSectorSize
);
g.pWriteList = pNew;
}
g.pWriteListEnd = pNew;
-
+
return SQLITE_OK;
}
** Read data from a crash-file.
*/
static int cfRead(
- sqlite3_file *pFile,
- void *zBuf,
- int iAmt,
+ sqlite3_file *pFile,
+ void *zBuf,
+ int iAmt,
sqlite_int64 iOfst
){
CrashFile *pCrash = (CrashFile *)pFile;
** Write data to a crash-file.
*/
static int cfWrite(
- sqlite3_file *pFile,
- const void *zBuf,
- int iAmt,
+ sqlite3_file *pFile,
+ const void *zBuf,
+ int iAmt,
sqlite_int64 iOfst
){
CrashFile *pCrash = (CrashFile *)pFile;
**
** The caller will have allocated pVfs->szOsFile bytes of space
** at pFile. This file uses this space for the CrashFile structure
-** and allocates space for the "real" file structure using
+** and allocates space for the "real" file structure using
** sqlite3_malloc(). The assumption here is (pVfs->szOsFile) is
** equal or greater than sizeof(CrashFile).
*/
return pVfs->xDelete(pVfs, zPath, dirSync);
}
static int cfAccess(
- sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs,
- const char *zPath,
- int flags,
+ sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs,
+ const char *zPath,
+ int flags,
int *pResOut
){
sqlite3_vfs *pVfs = (sqlite3_vfs *)pCfVfs->pAppData;
return pVfs->xAccess(pVfs, zPath, flags, pResOut);
}
static int cfFullPathname(
- sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs,
- const char *zPath,
+ sqlite3_vfs *pCfVfs,
+ const char *zPath,
int nPathOut,
char *zPathOut
){
int nOpt;
char *zOpt = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[i], &nOpt);
- if( (nOpt>11 || nOpt<2 || strncmp("-sectorsize", zOpt, nOpt))
+ if( (nOpt>11 || nOpt<2 || strncmp("-sectorsize", zOpt, nOpt))
&& (nOpt>16 || nOpt<2 || strncmp("-characteristics", zOpt, nOpt))
){
- Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
- "Bad option: \"", zOpt,
+ Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+ "Bad option: \"", zOpt,
"\" - must be \"-characteristics\" or \"-sectorsize\"", 0
);
return TCL_ERROR;
Tcl_Obj *pFlag = Tcl_DuplicateObj(apObj[j]);
Tcl_IncrRefCount(pFlag);
Tcl_UtfToLower(Tcl_GetString(pFlag));
-
+
rc = Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct(
interp, pFlag, aFlag, sizeof(aFlag[0]), "no such flag", 0, &iChoice
);
/*
** tclcmd: sqlite3_crash_now
**
-** Simulate a crash immediately. This function does not return
+** Simulate a crash immediately. This function does not return
** (writeListSync() calls exit(-1)).
*/
static int SQLITE_TCLAPI crashNowCmd(
0, /* pNext */
"crash", /* zName */
0, /* pAppData */
-
+
cfOpen, /* xOpen */
cfDelete, /* xDelete */
cfAccess, /* xAccess */
** an argument. For -sectorsize, this is the simulated sector size in
** bytes. For -characteristics, the argument must be a list of io-capability
** flags to simulate. Valid flags are "atomic", "atomic512", "atomic1K",
-** "atomic2K", "atomic4K", "atomic8K", "atomic16K", "atomic32K",
+** "atomic2K", "atomic4K", "atomic8K", "atomic16K", "atomic32K",
** "atomic64K", "sequential" and "safe_append".
**
** Example:
zParent = Tcl_GetString(objv[1]);
if( objc==3 ){
if( strcmp(zParent, "-default") ){
- Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
+ Tcl_AppendResult(interp,
"bad option \"", zParent, "\": must be -default", 0
);
return TCL_ERROR;
/*
** The test module defined in this file uses four global Tcl variables to
-** commicate with test-scripts:
+** communicate with test-scripts:
**
** $::echo_module
** $::echo_module_sync_fail
}
/*
-** Shared-memory methods are all pass-thrus.
+** Shared-memory methods are all pass-throughs.
*/
static int devsymShmLock(sqlite3_file *pFile, int ofst, int n, int flags){
devsym_file *p = (devsym_file *)pFile;
sqlite3_mem_methods mem;
sqlite3_mutex_methods mutex;
- int mem_init; /* True if mem subsystem is initalized */
- int mem_fail; /* True to fail mem subsystem inialization */
- int mutex_init; /* True if mutex subsystem is initalized */
- int mutex_fail; /* True to fail mutex subsystem inialization */
- int pcache_init; /* True if pcache subsystem is initalized */
- int pcache_fail; /* True to fail pcache subsystem inialization */
+ int mem_init; /* True if mem subsystem is initialized */
+ int mem_fail; /* True to fail mem subsystem initialization */
+ int mutex_init; /* True if mutex subsystem is initialized */
+ int mutex_fail; /* True to fail mutex subsystem initialization */
+ int pcache_init; /* True if pcache subsystem is initialized */
+ int pcache_fail; /* True to fail pcache subsystem initialization */
} wrapped;
static int wrMemInit(void *pAppData){
**
** SELECT * FROM table WHERE x IN (?,?,?,...,?);
**
-** And then binding indivdual integers to each of ? slots, a C-language
+** And then binding individual integers to each of ? slots, a C-language
** application can create an intarray object (named "ex1" in the following
** example), prepare a statement like this:
**
/*
-** Convert a 128-bit MD5 digest into sequency of eight 5-digit integers
+** Convert a 128-bit MD5 digest into sequences of eight 5-digit integers
** each representing 16 bits of the digest and separated from each
** other by a "-" character.
*/
**
** The procedure call above will create and register a new VFS shim named
** "multiplex". The multiplex VFS will use the VFS named by zOrigVfsName to
-** do the actual disk I/O. (The zOrigVfsName parameter may be NULL, in
+** do the actual disk I/O. (The zOrigVfsName parameter may be NULL, in
** which case the default VFS at the moment sqlite3_multiplex_initialize()
-** is called will be used as the underlying real VFS.)
+** is called will be used as the underlying real VFS.)
**
** If the makeDefault parameter is TRUE then multiplex becomes the new
** default VFS. Otherwise, you can use the multiplex VFS by specifying
** URI.
**
** The multiplex VFS allows databases up to 32 GiB in size. But it splits
-** the files up into smaller pieces, so that they will work even on
+** the files up into smaller pieces, so that they will work even on
** filesystems that do not support large files. The default chunk size
** is 2147418112 bytes (which is 64KiB less than 2GiB) but this can be
** changed at compile-time by defining the SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE
#endif
#include "sqlite3ext.h"
-/*
-** These should be defined to be the same as the values in
+/*
+** These should be defined to be the same as the values in
** sqliteInt.h. They are defined separately here so that
-** the multiplex VFS shim can be built as a loadable
+** the multiplex VFS shim can be built as a loadable
** module.
*/
#define UNUSED_PARAMETER(x) (void)(x)
#endif
/* This is the limit on the chunk size. It may be changed by calling
-** the xFileControl() interface. It will be rounded up to a
+** the xFileControl() interface. It will be rounded up to a
** multiple of MAX_PAGE_SIZE. We default it here to 2GiB less 64KiB.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE
/*
** An instance of the following object represents each open connection
-** to a file that is multiplex'ed. This object is a
+** to a file that is multiplex'ed. This object is a
** subclass of sqlite3_file. The sqlite3_file object for the underlying
** VFS is appended to this structure.
*/
*/
sqlite3_vfs sThisVfs;
- /* The sIoMethods defines the methods used by sqlite3_file objects
+ /* The sIoMethods defines the methods used by sqlite3_file objects
** associated with this shim. It is initialized at start-time and does
** not require a mutex.
**
- ** When the underlying VFS is called to open a file, it might return
+ ** When the underlying VFS is called to open a file, it might return
** either a version 1 or a version 2 sqlite3_file object. This shim
** has to create a wrapper sqlite3_file of the same version. Hence
** there are two I/O method structures, one for version 1 and the other
** nul-terminator.
**
** If iChunk is 0 (or 400 - the number for the first journal file chunk),
-** the output is a copy of the input string. Otherwise, if
+** the output is a copy of the input string. Otherwise, if
** SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES is not defined or the input buffer does not contain
-** a "." character, then the output is a copy of the input string with the
-** three-digit zero-padded decimal representation if iChunk appended to it.
+** a "." character, then the output is a copy of the input string with the
+** three-digit zero-padded decimal representation if iChunk appended to it.
** For example:
**
** zBase="test.db", iChunk=4 -> zOut="test.db004"
**
** Or, if SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES is defined and the input buffer contains
-** a "." character, then everything after the "." is replaced by the
+** a "." character, then everything after the "." is replaced by the
** three-digit representation of iChunk.
**
** zBase="test.db", iChunk=4 -> zOut="test.004"
if( i>=n-4 ) n = i+1;
if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ){
/* The extensions on overflow files for main databases are 001, 002,
- ** 003 and so forth. To avoid name collisions, add 400 to the
+ ** 003 and so forth. To avoid name collisions, add 400 to the
** extensions of journal files so that they are 401, 402, 403, ....
*/
iChunk += SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET;
}else if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_WAL ){
- /* To avoid name collisions, add 700 to the
+ /* To avoid name collisions, add 700 to the
** extensions of WAL files so that they are 701, 702, 703, ....
*/
iChunk += SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_WAL_8_3_OFFSET;
sqlite3_vfs *pOrigVfs = gMultiplex.pOrigVfs; /* Real VFS */
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES
- /* If JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET is set to (say) 400, then any overflow files are
- ** part of a database journal are named db.401, db.402, and so on. A
+ /* If JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET is set to (say) 400, then any overflow files are
+ ** part of a database journal are named db.401, db.402, and so on. A
** database may therefore not grow to larger than 400 chunks. Attempting
** to open chunk 401 indicates the database is full. */
if( iChunk>=SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_JOURNAL_8_3_OFFSET ){
/*
** Return the size, in bytes, of chunk number iChunk. If that chunk
-** does not exist, then return 0. This function does not distingish between
-** non-existant files and zero-length files.
+** does not exist, then return 0. This function does not distinguish between
+** non-existent files and zero-length files.
*/
static sqlite3_int64 multiplexSubSize(
multiplexGroup *pGroup, /* The multiplexor group */
if( pSub==0 ) return 0;
*rc = pSub->pMethods->xFileSize(pSub, &sz);
return sz;
-}
+}
/*
** This is the implementation of the multiplex_control() SQL function.
int op = 0;
int iVal;
- if( !db || argc!=2 ){
- rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
+ if( !db || argc!=2 ){
+ rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}else{
/* extract params */
op = sqlite3_value_int(argv[0]);
iVal = sqlite3_value_int(argv[1]);
/* map function op to file_control op */
switch( op ){
- case 1:
- op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE;
+ case 1:
+ op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE;
break;
- case 2:
- op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE;
+ case 2:
+ op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE;
break;
- case 3:
- op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS;
+ case 3:
+ op = MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS;
break;
default:
rc = SQLITE_NOTFOUND;
}
/*
-** This is the entry point to register the auto-extension for the
+** This is the entry point to register the auto-extension for the
** multiplex_control() function.
*/
static int multiplexFuncInit(
- sqlite3 *db,
- char **pzErrMsg,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ char **pzErrMsg,
const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
){
int rc;
- rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "multiplex_control", 2, SQLITE_ANY,
+ rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "multiplex_control", 2, SQLITE_ANY,
0, multiplexControlFunc, 0, 0);
return rc;
}
memset(pGroup, 0, sz);
pMultiplexOpen->pGroup = pGroup;
pGroup->bEnabled = (unsigned char)-1;
- pGroup->bTruncate = (unsigned char)sqlite3_uri_boolean(zUri, "truncate",
+ pGroup->bTruncate = (unsigned char)sqlite3_uri_boolean(zUri, "truncate",
(flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB)==0);
pGroup->szChunk = (int)sqlite3_uri_int64(zUri, "chunksize",
SQLITE_MULTIPLEX_CHUNK_SIZE);
if( sz64==0 ){
if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ){
/* If opening a main journal file and the first chunk is zero
- ** bytes in size, delete any subsequent chunks from the
+ ** bytes in size, delete any subsequent chunks from the
** file-system. */
int iChunk = 1;
do {
- rc = pOrigVfs->xAccess(pOrigVfs,
+ rc = pOrigVfs->xAccess(pOrigVfs,
pGroup->aReal[iChunk].z, SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &bExists
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bExists ){
**
** Or, if the first overflow file does not exist and the main file is
** larger than the chunk size, that means the chunk size is too small.
- ** But we have no way of determining the intended chunk size, so
- ** just disable the multiplexor all togethre.
+ ** But we have no way of determining the intended chunk size, so
+ ** just disable the multiplexor all together.
*/
rc = pOrigVfs->xAccess(pOrigVfs, pGroup->aReal[1].z,
SQLITE_ACCESS_EXISTS, &bExists);
rc = pOrigVfs->xDelete(pOrigVfs, zName, syncDir);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
/* If the main chunk was deleted successfully, also delete any subsequent
- ** chunks - starting with the last (highest numbered).
+ ** chunks - starting with the last (highest numbered).
*/
int nName = (int)strlen(zName);
char *z;
/* xClose requests get passed through to the original VFS.
** We loop over all open chunk handles and close them.
-** The group structure for this file is unlinked from
+** The group structure for this file is unlinked from
** our list of groups and freed.
*/
static int multiplexClose(sqlite3_file *pConn){
/*
** PRAGMA multiplex_chunksize;
**
- ** Return the chunksize for the multiplexor, or no-op if the
+ ** Return the chunksize for the multiplexor, or no-op if the
** multiplexor is not active.
*/
if( sqlite3_stricmp(aFcntl[1],"multiplex_chunksize")==0
/*
** CAPI: Initialize the multiplex VFS shim - sqlite3_multiplex_initialize()
**
-** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work.
-** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL.
+** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work.
+** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL.
**
** The multiplex VFS shim is named "multiplex". It will become the default
** VFS if makeDefault is non-zero.
** This file contains a VFS "shim" - a layer that sits in between the
** pager and the real VFS.
**
-** This particular shim enforces a multiplex system on DB files.
-** This shim shards/partitions a single DB file into smaller
+** This particular shim enforces a multiplex system on DB files.
+** This shim shards/partitions a single DB file into smaller
** "chunks" such that the total DB file size may exceed the maximum
** file size of the underlying file system.
**
** shim.
**
** MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE:
-** This file control is used to set the maximum allowed chunk
-** size for a multiplex file set. The chunk size should be
+** This file control is used to set the maximum allowed chunk
+** size for a multiplex file set. The chunk size should be
** a multiple of SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, and will be rounded up
** if not.
**
** MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS:
** This file control is used to set the maximum number of chunks
-** allowed to be used for a mutliplex file set.
+** allowed to be used for a multiplex file set.
*/
#define MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE 214014
#define MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE 214015
/*
** CAPI: Initialize the multiplex VFS shim - sqlite3_multiplex_initialize()
**
-** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work.
-** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL.
+** Use the VFS named zOrigVfsName as the VFS that does the actual work.
+** Use the default if zOrigVfsName==NULL.
**
** The multiplex VFS shim is named "multiplex". It will become the default
** VFS if makeDefault is non-zero.
**
-** An auto-extension is registered which will make the function
+** An auto-extension is registered which will make the function
** multiplex_control() available to database connections. This
-** function gives access to the xFileControl interface of the
+** function gives access to the xFileControl interface of the
** multiplex VFS shim.
**
** SELECT multiplex_control(<op>,<val>);
-**
+**
** <op>=1 MULTIPLEX_CTRL_ENABLE
** <val>=0 disable
** <val>=1 enable
-**
+**
** <op>=2 MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_CHUNK_SIZE
** <val> int, chunk size
-**
+**
** <op>=3 MULTIPLEX_CTRL_SET_MAX_CHUNKS
** <val> int, max chunks
**
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-**
+**
** This file contains code used for testing the SQLite system.
** None of the code in this file goes into a deliverable build.
-**
+**
** This file contains an application-defined pager cache
** implementation that can be plugged in in place of the
** default pcache. This alternative pager cache will throw
** some errors that the default cache does not.
**
** This pagecache implementation is designed for simplicity
-** not speed.
+** not speed.
*/
#include "sqlite3.h"
#include <string.h>
int nInstance; /* Number of current instances */
unsigned discardChance; /* Chance of discarding on an unpin (0-100) */
unsigned prngSeed; /* Seed for the PRNG */
- unsigned highStress; /* Call xStress agressively */
+ unsigned highStress; /* Call xStress aggressively */
};
static testpcacheGlobalType testpcacheGlobal;
** Allocate a new page cache instance.
*/
static sqlite3_pcache *testpcacheCreate(
- int szPage,
- int szExtra,
+ int szPage,
+ int szExtra,
int bPurgeable
){
int nMem;
return 0;
}
- /* Do not allocate if highStress is enabled and createFlag is not 2.
+ /* Do not allocate if highStress is enabled and createFlag is not 2.
**
** The highStress setting causes pagerStress() to be called much more
** often, which exercises the pager logic more intensely.
int installFlag, /* True to install. False to uninstall. */
unsigned discardChance, /* 0-100. Chance to discard on unpin */
unsigned prngSeed, /* Seed for the PRNG */
- unsigned highStress /* Call xStress agressively */
+ unsigned highStress /* Call xStress aggressively */
){
static const sqlite3_pcache_methods2 testPcache = {
1,
const void *pBuf, /* Take content to write from here */
size_t size, /* Size of each element */
size_t nmemb, /* Number of elements */
- quota_FILE *p /* Write to this quota_FILE objecct */
+ quota_FILE *p /* Write to this quota_FILE object */
){
sqlite3_int64 iOfst;
sqlite3_int64 iEnd;
Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]
){
const char *zPattern; /* The glob pattern */
- const char *zText; /* Text to compare agains the pattern */
+ const char *zText; /* Text to compare against the pattern */
int rc;
if( objc!=3 ){
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "PATTERN TEXT");
}
/*
-** Return th3 emost recent error code and message
+** Return th3 most recent error code and message
*/
static int vfstraceGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, int iErr, char *zErr){
vfstrace_info *pInfo = (vfstrace_info*)pVfs->pAppData;
#endif
/*
-** Provide the function prototype for the POSIX compatiable getenv()
+** Provide the function prototype for the POSIX compatible getenv()
** function. This function is not thread-safe.
*/
/*
** Calls to sqlite3FaultSim() are used to simulate a failure during testing,
-** or to bypass normal error detection during testing in order to let
-** execute proceed futher downstream.
+** or to bypass normal error detection during testing in order to let
+** execute proceed further downstream.
**
** In deployment, sqlite3FaultSim() *always* return SQLITE_OK (0). The
** sqlite3FaultSim() function only returns non-zero during testing.
}
/*
-** Return the declared type of a column. Or return zDflt if the column
+** Return the declared type of a column. Or return zDflt if the column
** has no declared type.
**
** The column type is an extra string stored after the zero-terminator on
if( E==0 ) break;
x *= x;
}
- return r;
+ return r;
#endif
}
** 1 => The input string is a pure integer
** 2 or more => The input has a decimal point or eNNN clause
** 0 or less => The input string is not a valid number
-** -1 => Not a valid number, but has a valid prefix which
+** -1 => Not a valid number, but has a valid prefix which
** includes a decimal point and/or an eNNN clause
**
** Valid numbers are in one of these formats:
eValid = 0;
eType++;
- /* This branch is needed to avoid a (harmless) buffer overread. The
+ /* This branch is needed to avoid a (harmless) buffer overread. The
** special comment alerts the mutation tester that the correct answer
** is obtained even if the branch is omitted */
if( z>=zEnd ) goto do_atof_calc; /*PREVENTS-HARMLESS-OVERREAD*/
/* store the result */
*pResult = result;
- /* return true if number and no extra non-whitespace chracters after */
+ /* return true if number and no extra non-whitespace characters after */
if( z==zEnd && nDigit>0 && eValid && eType>0 ){
return eType;
}else if( eType>=2 && (eType==3 || eValid) && nDigit>0 ){
/* This test and assignment is needed only to suppress UB warnings
** from clang and -fsanitize=undefined. This test and assignment make
** the code a little larger and slower, and no harm comes from omitting
- ** them, but we must appaise the undefined-behavior pharisees. */
+ ** them, but we must appease the undefined-behavior pharisees. */
*pNum = neg ? SMALLEST_INT64 : LARGEST_INT64;
}else if( neg ){
*pNum = -(i64)u;
v >>= 7;
}
return 9;
- }
+ }
n = 0;
do{
buf[n++] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80);
** If the varint stored in p[0] is larger than can fit in a 32-bit unsigned
** integer, then set *v to 0xffffffff.
**
-** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the
-** single-byte case. All code should use the MACRO version as
+** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the
+** single-byte case. All code should use the MACRO version as
** this function assumes the single-byte case has already been handled.
*/
u8 sqlite3GetVarint32(const unsigned char *p, u32 *v){
** argument. The zType is a word like "NULL" or "closed" or "invalid".
*/
static void logBadConnection(const char *zType){
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
"API call with %s database connection pointer",
zType
);
}
/*
-** Attempt to add, substract, or multiply the 64-bit signed value iB against
+** Attempt to add, subtract, or multiply the 64-bit signed value iB against
** the other 64-bit signed integer at *pA and store the result in *pA.
** Return 0 on success. Or if the operation would have resulted in an
** overflow, leave *pA unchanged and return 1.
if( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) > iB + 1 ) return 1;
}
*pA += iB;
- return 0;
+ return 0;
#endif
}
int sqlite3SubInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
}
/*
-** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible. Or
+** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible. Or
** if the integer has a value of -2147483648, return +2147483647
*/
int sqlite3AbsInt32(int x){
}
#endif
-/*
+/*
** Find (an approximate) sum of two LogEst values. This computation is
** not a simple "+" operator because LogEst is stored as a logarithmic
** value.
-**
+**
*/
LogEst sqlite3LogEstAdd(LogEst a, LogEst b){
static const unsigned char x[] = {
** Conceptually:
**
** struct VList {
-** int nAlloc; // Number of allocated slots
-** int nUsed; // Number of used slots
+** int nAlloc; // Number of allocated slots
+** int nUsed; // Number of used slots
** struct VListEntry {
** int iValue; // Value for this entry
** int nSlot; // Slots used by this entry
** }
**
** During code generation, pointers to the variable names within the
-** VList are taken. When that happens, nAlloc is set to zero as an
+** VList are taken. When that happens, nAlloc is set to zero as an
** indication that the VList may never again be enlarged, since the
** accompanying realloc() would invalidate the pointers.
*/
*/
#if defined(VDBE_PROFILE) \
|| defined(SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE) \
- || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS)
+ || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS)
# include "hwtime.h"
#endif
** (possibly synchronous) transaction opened on the main database before
** sqlite3BtreeCopyFile() is called.
**
- ** An optimisation would be to use a non-journaled pager.
+ ** An optimization would be to use a non-journaled pager.
** (Later:) I tried setting "PRAGMA vacuum_db.journal_mode=OFF" but
** that actually made the VACUUM run slower. Very little journalling
** actually occurs when doing a vacuum since the vacuum_db is initially
**
** In other words, if M is 2, then I is either 0 (for fall-through) or
** 1 (for when the branch is taken). If M is 3, the I is 0 for an
-** ordinary fall-through, I is 1 if the branch was taken, and I is 2
+** ordinary fall-through, I is 1 if the branch was taken, and I is 2
** if the result of comparison is NULL. For M=3, I=2 the jump may or
** may not be taken, depending on the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL flags in p5.
** When M is 4, that means that an OP_Jump is being run. I is 0, 1, or 2
u8 eCurType /* Type of the new cursor */
){
/* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory
- ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a
+ ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a
** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a
** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons:
**
int nByte;
VdbeCursor *pCx = 0;
- nByte =
- ROUND8P(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField +
+ nByte =
+ ROUND8P(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField +
(eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0);
assert( iCur>=0 && iCur<p->nCursor );
** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER:
** SQLITE_AFF_REAL:
** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC:
-** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a
+** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a
** floating-point representation if an integer representation
** is not possible. Note that the integer representation is
** always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because
}else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){
/* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real
** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string
- ** representation. It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if
+ ** representation. It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if
** there is already a string rep, but it is pointless to waste those
** CPU cycles. */
if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
}
/*
-** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*,
+** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*,
** not the internal Mem* type.
*/
void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity(
- sqlite3_value *pVal,
- u8 affinity,
+ sqlite3_value *pVal,
+ u8 affinity,
u8 enc
){
applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc);
/*
** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or
-** none.
+** none.
**
** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags.
** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately.
/*
** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It
** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to
-** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the
+** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the
** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint.
-**
+**
** Usage:
**
** assert( checkSavepointCount(db) );
/*
** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can.
-** This is the core of sqlite3_step().
+** This is the core of sqlite3_step().
*/
int sqlite3VdbeExec(
Vdbe *p /* The VDBE */
test_trace_breakpoint((int)(pOp - aOp),pOp,p);
}
#endif
-
+
/* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt. This only happens
** if we have a special test build.
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
pOrigOp = pOp;
#endif
-
+
switch( pOp->opcode ){
/*****************************************************************************
/* Opcode: Goto * P2 * * *
**
** An unconditional jump to address P2.
-** The next instruction executed will be
+** The next instruction executed will be
** the one at index P2 from the beginning of
** the program.
**
case OP_Goto: { /* jump */
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* In debuggging mode, when the p5 flags is set on an OP_Goto, that
- ** means we should really jump back to the preceeding OP_ReleaseReg
+ /* In debugging mode, when the p5 flags is set on an OP_Goto, that
+ ** means we should really jump back to the preceding OP_ReleaseReg
** instruction. */
if( pOp->p5 ){
assert( pOp->p2 < (int)(pOp - aOp) );
/* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev,
** OP_VNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon
** completion. Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called
- ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked.
+ ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked.
**
** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean.
** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this
}
}
#endif
-
+
break;
}
** whether or not to rollback the current transaction. Do not rollback
** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback. If P2==OE_Abort,
** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the
-** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction.
+** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction.
**
** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string.
**
** P5 is a value between 0 and 4, inclusive, that modifies the P4 string.
**
** 0: (no change)
-** 1: NOT NULL contraint failed: P4
+** 1: NOT NULL constraint failed: P4
** 2: UNIQUE constraint failed: P4
** 3: CHECK constraint failed: P4
** 4: FOREIGN KEY constraint failed: P4
sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange);
pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame);
if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){
- /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program
+ /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program
** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt
** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing
** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified
/* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 *
** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4'
**
-** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed
+** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed
** into a String opcode before it is executed for the first time. During
** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored
** as the P1 parameter.
/* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */
/* no break */ deliberate_fall_through
}
-
+
/* Opcode: String P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1)
**
**
** FK constraint violations are also checked when the prepared statement
** exits. This opcode is used to raise foreign key constraint errors prior
-** to returning results such as a row change count or the result of a
+** to returning results such as a row change count or the result of a
** RETURNING clause.
*/
case OP_FkCheck: {
** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1]
**
** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2
-** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in
-** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is
+** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in
+** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is
** NULL, the result is NULL.
*/
/* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * *
** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1]
**
-** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by
-** register P1 and store the result in register P3.
+** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by
+** register P1 and store the result in register P3.
** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL.
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
*/
/* Opcode: AddImm P1 P2 * * *
** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2
-**
+**
** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1.
** The result is always an integer.
**
}
/* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * *
-**
+**
** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer. If the value
** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer
** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0
** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1])
**
** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2.
-**
+**
** <ul>
** <li> P2=='A' → BLOB
** <li> P2=='B' → TEXT
** Synopsis: IF r[P3]==r[P1]
**
** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)==reg(P1) then
-** jump to address P2.
+** jump to address P2.
**
** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
-** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
+** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause
** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
**
-** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
+** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values
** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
** jump to address P2.
**
** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or
-** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL
+** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL
** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL.
**
** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
-** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
+** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause
** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
**
-** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
+** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values
** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
** This opcode must follow an OP_Lt or OP_Gt comparison operator. There
** can be zero or more OP_ReleaseReg opcodes intervening, but no other
** opcodes are allowed to occur between this instruction and the previous
-** OP_Lt or OP_Gt.
+** OP_Lt or OP_Gt.
**
** If result of an OP_Eq comparison on the same two operands as the
** prior OP_Lt or OP_Gt would have been true, then jump to P2.
iCompare = sqlite3MemCompare(&aMem[p1+idx], &aMem[p2+idx], pColl);
VVA_ONLY( iCompareIsInit = 1; )
if( iCompare ){
- if( (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)
+ if( (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)
&& ((aMem[p1+idx].flags & MEM_Null) || (aMem[p2+idx].flags & MEM_Null))
){
iCompare = -iCompare;
** IS NOT FALSE operators.
**
** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store that
-** boolean (a 0 or 1) in register P2. Or if the value in register P1 is
+** boolean (a 0 or 1) in register P2. Or if the value in register P1 is
** NULL, then the P3 is stored in register P2. Invert the answer if P4
** is 1.
**
** The logic is summarized like this:
**
-** <ul>
+** <ul>
** <li> If P3==0 and P4==0 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS TRUE
** <li> If P3==1 and P4==1 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS FALSE
** <li> If P3==0 and P4==1 then r[P2] := r[P1] IS NOT TRUE
** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1]
**
** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store the
-** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is
+** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is
** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2.
*/
case OP_Not: { /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */
/* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * *
** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2
**
-** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.
+** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.
*/
case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */
pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using
** the MakeRecord instruction. (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional
** information about the format of the data.) Extract the P2-th column
-** from this record. If there are less than (P2+1)
+** from this record. If there are less than (P2+1)
** values in the record, extract a NULL.
**
** The value extracted is stored in register P3.
*/
if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){
/* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try
- ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field
+ ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field
*/
if( pC->iHdrOffset<aOffset[0] ){
/* Make sure zData points to enough of the record to cover the header. */
}else{
zData = pC->aRow;
}
-
+
/* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */
op_column_read_header:
i = pC->nHdrParsed;
** 2. the length(X) function if X is a blob, and
** 3. if the content length is zero.
** So we might as well use bogus content rather than reading
- ** content from disk.
+ ** content from disk.
**
** Although sqlite3VdbeSerialGet() may read at most 8 bytes from the
** buffer passed to it, debugging function VdbeMemPrettyPrint() may
** like this:
**
** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 |
+ ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 |
** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
**
** Data(0) is taken from register P1. Data(1) comes from register P1+1
** and so forth.
**
- ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the
+ ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the
** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The
** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning
** of the record to data0.
}
nByte = nHdr+nData;
- /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store
+ /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store
** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to
** be one of the input registers (because the following call to
** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used).
/* Opcode: Count P1 P2 P3 * *
** Synopsis: r[P2]=count()
**
-** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index
+** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index
** opened by cursor P1 in register P2.
**
** If P3==0, then an exact count is obtained, which involves visiting
** every btree page of the table. But if P3 is non-zero, an estimate
-** is returned based on the current cursor position.
+** is returned based on the current cursor position.
*/
case OP_Count: { /* out2 */
i64 nEntry;
zName = pOp->p4.z;
/* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open
- ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints.
+ ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints.
*/
assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 );
assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK );
if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){
if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
- /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write
+ /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write
** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles).
*/
sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot open savepoint - SQL statements in progress");
if( pNew ){
pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1];
memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1);
-
+
/* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special
** "transaction savepoint". */
if( db->autoCommit ){
/* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an
** an error is returned to the user. */
for(
- pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint;
+ pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint;
pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName);
pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext
){
sqlite3VdbeError(p, "no such savepoint: %s", zName);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
- /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are
+ /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are
** active write statements.
*/
sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot release savepoint - "
}else{
/* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so,
- ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction
- ** is committed.
+ ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction
+ ** is committed.
*/
int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint;
if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
}
}
if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
-
- /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all
+
+ /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all
** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */
while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){
pTmp = db->pSavepoint;
db->nSavepoint--;
}
- /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on
- ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred
+ /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on
+ ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred
** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored
** when the savepoint was created. */
if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
db->autoCommit = 1;
}else if( desiredAutoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
/* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing
- ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first.
+ ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first.
*/
sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot commit transaction - "
"SQL statements in progress");
(!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":(
(iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active":
"cannot commit - no transaction is active"));
-
+
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
goto abort_due_to_error;
}
**
** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already
** active.
-** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a
+** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a
** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction.
** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started. If P2 is 2 or more
** then an exclusive transaction is started.
if( p->usesStmtJournal
&& pOp->p2
- && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1)
+ && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1)
){
assert( sqlite3BtreeTxnState(pBt)==SQLITE_TXN_WRITE );
if( p->iStatement==0 ){
assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 );
- db->nStatement++;
+ db->nStatement++;
p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement;
}
*/
sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg);
p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed");
- /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie
+ /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie
** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do
** not reload the schema from the database file.
**
** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to
** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the
** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself
- ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within
+ ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within
** a v-table method.
*/
if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){
**
** Write the integer value P3 into cookie number P2 of database P1.
** P2==1 is the schema version. P2==2 is the database format.
-** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache
-** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the
+** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache
+** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the
** database file used to store temporary tables.
**
** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode.
** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3
**
** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is
-** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3.
-** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for
+** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3.
+** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for
** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached
** database. Give the new cursor an identifier of P1. The P1
** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers.
** </ul>
**
** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
** object, then table being opened must be an [index b-tree] where the
-** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating
-** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
+** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating
+** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
** value, then the table being opened must be a [table b-tree] with a
** number of columns no less than the value of P4.
**
** OPFLAG_P2ISREG bit is set in P5 - see below).
**
** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
** object, then table being opened must be an [index b-tree] where the
-** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating
-** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
+** KeyInfo object defines the content and collating
+** sequence of that index b-tree. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
** value, then the table being opened must be a [table b-tree] with a
** number of columns no less than the value of P4.
**
/* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of
** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point
** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has
- ** since moved into the btree layer. */
+ ** since moved into the btree layer. */
pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO;
open_cursor_set_hints:
pCx->ub.pBtx = pOrig->ub.pBtx;
pCx->noReuse = 1;
pOrig->noReuse = 1;
- rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, BTREE_WRCSR,
+ rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->ub.pBtx, pCx->pgnoRoot, BTREE_WRCSR,
pCx->pKeyInfo, pCx->uc.pCursor);
/* The sqlite3BtreeCursor() routine can only fail for the first cursor
** opened for a database. Since there is already an open cursor when this
** Synopsis: nColumn=P2
**
** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table.
-** The cursor is always opened read/write even if
+** The cursor is always opened read/write even if
** the main database is read-only. The ephemeral
** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed.
**
VdbeCursor *pCx;
KeyInfo *pKeyInfo;
- static const int vfsFlags =
+ static const int vfsFlags =
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
}
pCx = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
if( pCx && !pCx->noReuse && ALWAYS(pOp->p2<=pCx->nField) ){
- /* If the ephermeral table is already open and has no duplicates from
+ /* If the ephemeral table is already open and has no duplicates from
** OP_OpenDup, then erase all existing content so that the table is
** empty again, rather than creating a new table. */
assert( pCx->isEphemeral );
pCx = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, CURTYPE_BTREE);
if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem;
pCx->isEphemeral = 1;
- rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->ub.pBtx,
+ rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->ub.pBtx,
BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5,
vfsFlags);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
if( (pCx->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){
assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO );
rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->ub.pBtx, &pCx->pgnoRoot,
- BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5);
+ BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
assert( pCx->pgnoRoot==SCHEMA_ROOT+1 );
assert( pKeyInfo->db==db );
**
** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single
** row of data. The content of that one row is the content of memory
-** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the
+** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the
** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2.
**
** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single
/* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
-** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this
** else it will cause a jump to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ,
** this opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments.
** The IdxGT opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the
-** IdxGT opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. The
+** IdxGT opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. The
** OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flags is a hint to the btree layer to say that this
** is an equality search.
**
/* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
-** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than
** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order,
**
** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe
*/
-/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
+/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
-** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than
** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
/* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
-** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
** else it will cause a jump to P2. When the cursor is OPFLAG_SEEKEQ,
** this opcode must be followed by an IdxLE opcode with the same arguments.
** The IdxGE opcode will be skipped if this opcode succeeds, but the
-** IdxGE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. The
+** IdxGE opcode will be used on subsequent loop iterations. The
** OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flags is a hint to the btree layer to say that this
** is an equality search.
**
** row. If This.P5 is false (0) then a jump is made to SeekGE.P2. If
** This.P5 is true (non-zero) then a jump is made to This.P2. The P5==0
** case occurs when there are no inequality constraints to the right of
-** the IN constraing. The jump to SeekGE.P2 ends the loop. The P5!=0 case
+** the IN constraint. The jump to SeekGE.P2 ends the loop. The P5!=0 case
** occurs when there are inequality constraints to the right of the IN
** operator. In that case, the This.P2 will point either directly to or
** to setup code prior to the OP_IdxGT or OP_IdxGE opcode that checks for
**
** Possible outcomes from this opcode:<ol>
**
-** <li> If the cursor is initally not pointed to any valid row, then
+** <li> If the cursor is initially not pointed to any valid row, then
** fall through into the subsequent OP_SeekGE opcode.
**
** <li> If the cursor is left pointing to a row that is before the target
** (indicating that the target row definitely does not exist in the
** btree) then jump to SeekGE.P2, ending the loop.
**
-** <li> If the cursor ends up on a valid row that is past the target row
+** <li> If the cursor ends up on a valid row that is past the target row
** (indicating that the target row does not exist in the btree) then
** jump to SeekOP.P2 if This.P5==0 or to This.P2 if This.P5>0.
** </ol>
assert( pOp[1].p1==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p1 );
assert( pOp[1].p2==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p2 );
assert( pOp[1].p3==aOp[pOp->p2-1].p3 );
- assert( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGT
+ assert( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGT
|| aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGE );
testcase( aOp[pOp->p2-1].opcode==OP_IdxGE );
}else{
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
printf("... cursor not valid - fall through\n");
- }
+ }
#endif
break;
}
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
printf("... %d steps and then skip\n", pOp->p1 - nStep);
- }
+ }
#endif
VdbeBranchTaken(1,3);
pOp++;
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
printf("... %d steps and then success\n", pOp->p1 - nStep);
- }
+ }
#endif
VdbeBranchTaken(2,3);
goto jump_to_p2;
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
printf("... fall through after %d steps\n", pOp->p1);
- }
+ }
#endif
VdbeBranchTaken(0,3);
break;
}
}
}
-
+
break;
}
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
printf("seekHit changes from %d to %d\n", pC->seekHit, pOp->p2);
- }
+ }
#endif
pC->seekHit = pOp->p2;
}else if( pC->seekHit>pOp->p3 ){
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
printf("seekHit changes from %d to %d\n", pC->seekHit, pOp->p3);
- }
+ }
#endif
pC->seekHit = pOp->p3;
}
** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If
** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
** record.
-**
+**
** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4
-** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1
+** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1
** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control
** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the
** matching entry.
** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If
** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
** record.
-**
+**
** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4
** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2. If all terms of the
** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
if( db->flags&SQLITE_VdbeTrace ){
printf("seekHit is %d\n", pC->seekHit);
- }
+ }
#endif
if( pC->seekHit>=pOp->p4.i ) break;
/* Fall through into OP_NotFound */
**
** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
** keys). If register P3 does not contain an integer or if P1 does not
-** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.
+** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.
** Or, if P2 is 0, raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain
-** a record with rowid P3 then
+** a record with rowid P3 then
** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
** instruction.
**
** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
** keys). P3 is an integer rowid. If P1 does not contain a record with
** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. Or, if P2 is 0, raise an
-** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then
+** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then
** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
** instruction.
**
** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1.
** Write the sequence number into register P2.
** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this
-** instruction.
+** instruction.
*/
case OP_Sequence: { /* out2 */
assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
** table that cursor P1 points to. The new record number is written
** written to register P2.
**
-** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds
+** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds
** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are
-** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum,
+** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum,
** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the '
** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the
** AUTOINCREMENT feature.
** is part of an INSERT operation. The difference is only important to
** the update hook.
**
-** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is
-** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked
+** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is
+** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked
** following a successful insert.
**
** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically
x.pKey = 0;
assert( BTREE_PREFORMAT==OPFLAG_PREFORMAT );
rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x,
- (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)),
+ (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)),
seekResult
);
pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
** the cursor will be left pointing at either the next or the previous
** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then
** the next Next instruction will be a no-op. As a result, in this case
-** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If
+** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If
** OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of P5 is clear, then the cursor will be
** left in an undefined state.
**
** P1 must not be pseudo-table. It has to be a real table with
** multiple rows.
**
-** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either
+** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either
** the update or pre-update hook, or both, may be invoked. The P1 cursor must
-** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in
-** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is
-** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured,
+** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in
+** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is
+** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured,
** P4 is not NULL, and the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag is set in P2.
**
** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set in P2, then P3 contains the address
/* If the update-hook or pre-update-hook will be invoked, set zDb to
** the name of the db to pass as to it. Also set local pTab to a copy
** of p4.pTab. Finally, if p5 is true, indicating that this cursor was
- ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set
+ ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set
** VdbeCursor.movetoTarget to the current rowid. */
if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){
assert( pC->iDb>=0 );
/* Invoke the pre-update-hook if required. */
assert( db->xPreUpdateCallback==0 || pTab==pOp->p4.pTab );
if( db->xPreUpdateCallback && pTab ){
- assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE)
- || HasRowid(pTab)==0
- || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int)
+ assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE)
+ || HasRowid(pTab)==0
+ || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int)
);
sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC,
- (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE,
+ (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE,
zDb, pTab, pC->movetoTarget,
pOp->p3, -1
);
}
if( opflags & OPFLAG_ISNOOP ) break;
#endif
-
- /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */
+
+ /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */
assert( (pOp->p5 & ~(OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_AUXDELETE))==0 );
assert( OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION==BTREE_SAVEPOSITION );
assert( OPFLAG_AUXDELETE==BTREE_AUXDELETE );
** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2
**
** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the
-** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that
+** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that
** the sorter cursor currently points to. Only the first P4 fields
** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared.
**
/* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 P3 * *
** Synopsis: r[P2]=data
**
-** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at
+** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at
** which cursor P1 is currently pointing.
-** There is no interpretation of the data.
-** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as
+** There is no interpretation of the data.
+** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as
** it is found in the database file.
**
** If cursor P1 is an index, then the content is the key of the row.
*/
/* Opcode: Last P1 P2 * * *
**
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1
** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index.
** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2.
** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through
}
/* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * *
**
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index.
** If the table or index is empty, jump immediately to P2.
-** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following
+** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following
** instruction.
**
** If P2 is zero, that is an assertion that the P1 table is never
** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1. However,
** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior
** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equivalent
-** to P2.
+** to P2.
**
** This instruction only works for indices. The equivalent instruction
** for tables is OP_Insert.
x.aMem = aMem + pOp->p3;
x.nMem = (u16)pOp->p4.i;
rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x,
- (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)),
+ (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_PREFORMAT)),
((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0)
);
assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3]
**
** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form
-** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the
+** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the
** index opened by cursor P1.
**
** If P5 is not zero, then raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT_INDEX error
**
** P4 may be an array of integers (type P4_INTARRAY) containing
** one entry for each column in the P3 table. If array entry a(i)
-** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is
-** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i
+** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is
+** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i
** from P1. This information is stored in P3 and used to redirect
** reads against P3 over to P1, thus possibly avoiding the need to
** seek and read cursor P3.
}
/* Opcode: FinishSeek P1 * * * *
-**
+**
** If cursor P1 was previously moved via OP_DeferredSeek, complete that
** seek operation now, without further delay. If the cursor seek has
** already occurred, this instruction is a no-op.
/* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
-** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index
-** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index
+** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
** fields at the end.
**
** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value
/* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
-** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index
-** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index
+** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
** fields at the end.
**
** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value
/* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against
** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
** ROWID on the P1 index.
/* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against
** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
** ROWID on the P1 index.
** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database. The former
** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred -
** is stored in register P2. If no page movement was required (because the
-** table being dropped was already the last one in the database) then a
-** zero is stored in register P2. If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero
+** table being dropped was already the last one in the database) then a
+** zero is stored in register P2. If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero
** is stored in register P2.
**
** This opcode throws an error if there are any active reader VMs when
-** it is invoked. This is done to avoid the difficulty associated with
-** updating existing cursors when a root page is moved in an AUTOVACUUM
-** database. This error is thrown even if the database is not an AUTOVACUUM
-** db in order to avoid introducing an incompatibility between autovacuum
+** it is invoked. This is done to avoid the difficulty associated with
+** updating existing cursors when a root page is moved in an AUTOVACUUM
+** database. This error is thrown even if the database is not an AUTOVACUUM
+** db in order to avoid introducing an incompatibility between autovacuum
** and non-autovacuum modes.
**
** See also: Clear
*/
case OP_Clear: {
i64 nChange;
-
+
sqlite3VdbeIncrWriteCounter(p, 0);
nChange = 0;
assert( p->readOnly==0 );
*/
case OP_ResetSorter: {
VdbeCursor *pC;
-
+
assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
assert( pC!=0 );
InitData initData;
/* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes
- ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking
+ ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking
** sqlite3InitCallback().
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
}
goto abort_due_to_error;
}
- break;
+ break;
}
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE)
assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1);
if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
- break;
+ break;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */
**
** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
** the table named P4 in database P1. This is called after a table
-** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
+** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
** the internal representation of the
** schema consistent with what is on disk.
*/
**
** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
** the trigger named P4 in database P1. This is called after a trigger
-** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
+** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
** the internal representation of the
** schema consistent with what is on disk.
*/
**
** The register P3 contains one less than the maximum number of allowed errors.
** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported.
-** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are
+** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are
** seen. Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining.
**
** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integers
pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
assert( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 || sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pIn1) );
- if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0
+ if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_Blob)==0
|| sqlite3RowSetNext((RowSet*)pIn1->z, &val)==0
){
/* The boolean index is empty */
/* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
**
-** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM).
+** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM).
**
-** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory
-** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2
-** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE
-** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address
-** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the
+** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory
+** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2
+** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE
+** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address
+** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the
** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime.
**
** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program.
pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram;
pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3];
assert( pProgram->nOp>0 );
-
- /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is
+
+ /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is
** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program
** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set
** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear).
- **
- ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is
- ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one
- ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different
+ **
+ ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is
+ ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one
+ ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different
** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a
- ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token
+ ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token
** variable. */
if( pOp->p5 ){
t = pProgram->token;
/* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state
** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute
- ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt
+ ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt
** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized. */
if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Blob)==0 ){
- /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the
+ /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the
** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory
** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local
** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value.
}else{
pFrame = (VdbeFrame*)pRt->z;
assert( pRt->xDel==sqlite3VdbeFrameMemDel );
- assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem
+ assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem
|| (pProgram->nCsr==0 && pProgram->nMem+1==pFrame->nChildMem) );
assert( pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildCsr );
assert( (int)(pOp - aOp)==pFrame->pc );
/* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * *
**
-** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the
-** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory
-** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames
-** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.*
+** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the
+** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory
+** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames
+** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.*
** and old.* values.
**
** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding
Mem *pIn;
pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
pFrame = p->pFrame;
- pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1];
+ pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1];
sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem);
break;
}
** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2
**
** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive).
-** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented
-** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the
+** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented
+** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the
** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints).
*/
case OP_FkCounter: {
** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2
**
** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero.
-** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next
+** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next
** instruction.
**
** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter
**
** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is
** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed
-** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of
+** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of
** its current value and the value in register P2.
**
** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially
** and r[P2] is set to be the value of the LIMIT, r[P1].
**
** if r[P1] is zero or negative, that means there is no LIMIT
-** and r[P2] is set to -1.
+** and r[P2] is set to -1.
**
** Otherwise, r[P2] is set to the sum of r[P1] and r[P3].
*/
**
** Register P1 must contain an integer. If the content of register P1 is
** initially greater than zero, then decrement the value in register P1.
-** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2.
+** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2.
** If register P1 is initially zero, leave it unchanged and fall through.
*/
case OP_IfNotZero: { /* jump, in1 */
** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5])
**
** Execute the xStep function for an aggregate.
-** The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the
+** The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the
** FuncDef structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the
** accumulator.
**
** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] inverse(r[P2@P5])
**
** Execute the xInverse function for an aggregate.
-** The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the
+** The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the
** FuncDef structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the
** accumulator.
**
** Synopsis: accum=r[P3] step(r[P2@P5])
**
** Execute the xStep (if P1==0) or xInverse (if P1!=0) function for an
-** aggregate. The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the
+** aggregate. The function has P5 arguments. P4 is a pointer to the
** FuncDef structure that specifies the function. Register P3 is the
** accumulator.
**
/* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[]
** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code
** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it
- ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
+ ** reinitializes the relevant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
if( pCtx->pMem != pMem ){
pCtx->pMem = pMem;
for(i=pCtx->argc-1; i>=0; i--) pCtx->argv[i] = &aMem[pOp->p2+i];
** Synopsis: accum=r[P1] N=P2
**
** P1 is the memory location that is the accumulator for an aggregate
-** or window function. Execute the finalizer function
+** or window function. Execute the finalizer function
** for an aggregate and store the result in P1.
**
** P2 is the number of arguments that the step function takes and
{
rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFinalize(pMem, pOp->p4.pFunc);
}
-
+
if( rc ){
sqlite3VdbeError(p, "%s", sqlite3_value_text(pMem));
goto abort_due_to_error;
}
for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){
sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]);
- }
+ }
break;
-};
+};
#endif
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA
pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
eNew = pOp->p3;
- assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
- || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
- || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
+ assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
+ || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
+ || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
|| eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
|| eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
|| eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1);
/* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database
- ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory
+ ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory
*/
if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
&& (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0 /* Temp file */
);
goto abort_due_to_error;
}else{
-
+
if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){
/* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call
- ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log
- ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file
- ** after a successful return.
+ ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log
+ ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file
+ ** after a successful return.
*/
rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager, db);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
** as an intermediate */
sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF);
}
-
+
/* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal
** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal.
*/
** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically
** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2())
** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA.
-**
+**
** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero,
** then only the currently executing statement is expired.
**
** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3
**
** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when
-** the shared-cache feature is enabled.
+** the shared-cache feature is enabled.
**
** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database
** on which the lock is acquired. A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or
case OP_TableLock: {
u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3;
if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommit) ){
- int p1 = pOp->p1;
+ int p1 = pOp->p1;
assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb );
assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) );
assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 );
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
/* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 *
**
-** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the
+** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the
** xBegin method for that table.
**
** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
/* Opcode: VCreate P1 P2 * * *
**
-** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database
+** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database
** P1. Call the xCreate method for that table.
*/
case OP_VCreate: {
/* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the
** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during
- ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that
+ ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that
** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or
** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor.
*/
sqlite3_vtab *pVtab;
Mem *pName;
int isLegacy;
-
+
isLegacy = (db->flags & SQLITE_LegacyAlter);
db->flags |= SQLITE_LegacyAlter;
pVtab = pOp->p4.pVtab->pVtab;
**
** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values
-** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate
-** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the
+** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate
+** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the
** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate.
**
** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both.
** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3)
-** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no
-** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new
-** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new
-** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are
+** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no
+** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new
+** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new
+** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are
** the values of columns in the new row.
**
** If P2==1 then no insert is performed. argv[0] is the rowid of
** a row to delete.
**
** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call
-** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid()
+** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid()
** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted.
**
** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to
Mem **apArg;
Mem *pX;
- assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback
+ assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback
|| pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace
);
assert( p->readOnly==0 );
** The result of the function is stored
** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
**
-** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
** The result of the function is stored
** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
**
-** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
** This opcode works exactly like OP_Function. The only difference is in
** its name. This opcode is used in places where the function must be
** purely non-deterministic. Some built-in date/time functions can be
-** either determinitic of non-deterministic, depending on their arguments.
+** either deterministic of non-deterministic, depending on their arguments.
** When those function are used in a non-deterministic way, they will check
** to see if they were called using OP_PureFunc instead of OP_Function, and
** if they were, they throw an error.
/* If this function is inside of a trigger, the register array in aMem[]
** might change from one evaluation to the next. The next block of code
** checks to see if the register array has changed, and if so it
- ** reinitializes the relavant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
+ ** reinitializes the relevant parts of the sqlite3_context object */
pOut = &aMem[pOp->p3];
if( pCtx->pOut != pOut ){
pCtx->pVdbe = p;
if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
}
- assert( (pOut->flags&MEM_Str)==0
+ assert( (pOut->flags&MEM_Str)==0
|| pOut->enc==encoding
|| db->mallocFailed );
assert( !sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pOut) );
}
if( opProperty==0xff ){
/* Never happens. This code exists to avoid a harmless linkage
- ** warning aboud sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump() being defined but not
+ ** warning about sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump() being defined but not
** used. */
sqlite3VdbeRegisterDump(p);
}
p->rc = rc;
sqlite3SystemError(db, rc);
testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 );
- sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s",
+ sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s",
(int)(pOp - aOp), p->zSql, p->zErrMsg);
if( p->eVdbeState==VDBE_RUN_STATE ) sqlite3VdbeHalt(p);
if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) sqlite3OomFault(db);
if( DbMaskNonZero(p->lockMask) ){
sqlite3VdbeLeave(p);
}
- assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0
- || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0
+ assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0
+ || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0
);
return rc;
** The VdbeCoverage macros are used to set a coverage testing point
** for VDBE branch instructions. The coverage testing points are line
** numbers in the sqlite3.c source file. VDBE branch coverage testing
-** only works with an amalagmation build. That's ok since a VDBE branch
+** only works with an amalgamation build. That's ok since a VDBE branch
** coverage build designed for testing the test suite only. No application
** should ever ship with VDBE branch coverage measuring turned on.
**
** // NULL option is not possible
**
** VdbeCoverageEqNe(v) // Previous OP_Jump is only interested
-** // in distingishing equal and not-equal.
+** // in distinguishing equal and not-equal.
**
** Every VDBE branch operation must be tagged with one of the macros above.
** If not, then when "make test" is run with -DSQLITE_VDBE_COVERAGE and
** During testing, the test application will invoke
** sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE,...) to set a callback
** routine that is invoked as each bytecode branch is taken. The callback
-** contains the sqlite3.c source line number ov the VdbeCoverage macro and
+** contains the sqlite3.c source line number of the VdbeCoverage macro and
** flags to indicate whether or not the branch was taken. The test application
** is responsible for keeping track of this and reporting byte-code branches
** that are never taken.
** When a sub-program is executed (OP_Program), a structure of this type
** is allocated to store the current value of the program counter, as
** well as the current memory cell array and various other frame specific
-** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished,
+** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished,
** these values are copied back to the Vdbe from the VdbeFrame structure,
** restoring the state of the VM to as it was before the sub-program
** began executing.
**
** * MEM_Blob|MEM_Zero A blob in Mem.z of length Mem.n plus
** MEM.u.i extra 0x00 bytes at the end.
-**
+**
** * MEM_Int Integer stored in Mem.u.i.
**
** * MEM_Real Real stored in Mem.u.r.
** If the MEM_Str flag is set then Mem.z points at a string representation.
** Usually this is encoded in the same unicode encoding as the main
** database (see below for exceptions). If the MEM_Term flag is also
-** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real
+** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real
** flags may coexist with the MEM_Str flag.
*/
#define MEM_Undefined 0x0000 /* Value is undefined */
** Return true if a memory cell has been initialized and is valid.
** is for use inside assert() statements only.
**
-** A Memory cell is initialized if at least one of the
+** A Memory cell is initialized if at least one of the
** MEM_Null, MEM_Str, MEM_Int, MEM_Real, MEM_Blob, or MEM_IntReal bits
** is set. It is "undefined" if all those bits are zero.
*/
#endif
/*
-** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function
+** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function
** implementation calling sqlite3_set_auxdata() is stored in an instance
** of this structure. All such structures associated with a single VM
** are stored in a linked list headed at Vdbe.pAuxData. All are destroyed
** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() interface.
**
** aAddrRange[]:
-** This array is used by ScanStatus elements associated with EQP
+** This array is used by ScanStatus elements associated with EQP
** notes that make an SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE value available. It is
** an array of up to 3 ranges of VM addresses for which the Vdbe.anCycle[]
** values should be summed to calculate the NCYCLE value. Each pair of
#define VDBE_HALT_STATE 3 /* Finished. Need reset() or finalize() */
/*
-** Structure used to store the context required by the
+** Structure used to store the context required by the
** sqlite3_preupdate_*() API functions.
*/
struct PreUpdate {
i64 iKey1; /* First key value passed to hook */
i64 iKey2; /* Second key value passed to hook */
Mem *aNew; /* Array of new.* values */
- Table *pTab; /* Schema object being upated */
+ Table *pTab; /* Schema object being updated */
Index *pPk; /* PK index if pTab is WITHOUT ROWID */
};
# define sqlite3VdbeAssertAbortable(V)
#endif
-#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE)
+#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE)
void sqlite3VdbeEnter(Vdbe*);
#else
# define sqlite3VdbeEnter(X)
void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value *pOld){
sqlite3ValueFree(pOld);
}
-
+
/**************************** sqlite3_result_ *******************************
** The following routines are used by user-defined functions to specify
return SQLITE_TOOBIG;
}
void sqlite3_result_blob(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( n>=0 );
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, 0, xDel);
}
void sqlite3_result_blob64(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
sqlite3_uint64 n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
pOut->flags |= MEM_Subtype;
}
void sqlite3_result_text(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const char *z,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const char *z,
int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF8, xDel);
}
void sqlite3_result_text64(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const char *z,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const char *z,
sqlite3_uint64 n,
void (*xDel)(void *),
unsigned char enc
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
void sqlite3_result_text16(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n & ~(u64)1, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE, xDel);
}
void sqlite3_result_text16be(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n & ~(u64)1, SQLITE_UTF16BE, xDel);
}
void sqlite3_result_text16le(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
void sqlite3_result_error_toobig(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
pCtx->isError = SQLITE_TOOBIG;
- sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1,
+ sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1,
SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
}
** a MEM_IntReal value. See the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_RESULT_INTREAL
** test-control.
*/
-void sqlite3ResultIntReal(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
+void sqlite3ResultIntReal(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
if( pCtx->pOut->flags & MEM_Int ){
pCtx->pOut->flags &= ~MEM_Int;
/*
-** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It
+** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It
** invokes callbacks registered with sqlite3_wal_hook() as required.
*/
static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){
** statement is completely executed or an error occurs.
**
** This routine implements the bulk of the logic behind the sqlite_step()
-** API. The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a
+** API. The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a
** schema change has occurred. That detail is handled by the
** outer sqlite3_step() wrapper procedure.
*/
p->rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA;
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
if( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 ){
- /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an
+ /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an
** error has occurred, then return the error code in p->rc to the
** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same
** value.
- */
+ */
rc = sqlite3VdbeTransferError(p);
}
goto end_of_step;
AtomicStore(&db->u1.isInterrupted, 0);
}
- assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0
+ assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0
|| (db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0)
);
** sqlite3_step() after any error or after SQLITE_DONE. But beginning
** with version 3.7.0, we changed this so that sqlite3_reset() would
** be called automatically instead of throwing the SQLITE_MISUSE error.
- ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility,
+ ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility,
** since any application that receives an SQLITE_MISUSE is broken by
** definition.
**
** Nevertheless, some published applications that were originally written
- ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE
+ ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE
** returns, and those were broken by the automatic-reset change. As a
** a work-around, the SQLITE_OMIT_AUTORESET compile-time restores the
- ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the
+ ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the
** previous sqlite3_step() returned something other than a SQLITE_LOCKED
** or SQLITE_BUSY error.
*/
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
}else if( rc!=SQLITE_DONE && (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0 ){
- /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an
+ /* If this statement was prepared using saved SQL and an
** error has occurred, then return the error code in p->rc to the
** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same value.
- */
+ */
rc = sqlite3VdbeTransferError(p);
}
}
/* There are only a limited number of result codes allowed from the
** statements prepared using the legacy sqlite3_prepare() interface */
assert( (p->prepFlags & SQLITE_PREPARE_SAVESQL)!=0
- || rc==SQLITE_ROW || rc==SQLITE_DONE || rc==SQLITE_ERROR
+ || rc==SQLITE_ROW || rc==SQLITE_DONE || rc==SQLITE_ERROR
|| (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_MISUSE
);
return (rc&db->errMask);
int savedPc = v->pc;
rc = sqlite3Reprepare(v);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
- /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement.
- ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded
- ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message
+ /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement.
+ ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded
+ ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message
** from the database handle into the statement and sets the statement
- ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is
+ ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is
** finalized or reset the parser error message is available via
** sqlite3_errmsg() and sqlite3_errcode().
*/
- const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr);
+ const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr);
sqlite3DbFree(db, v->zErrMsg);
if( !db->mallocFailed ){
v->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, zErr);
** The destructor function for a ValueList object. This needs to be
** a separate function, unknowable to the application, to ensure that
** calls to sqlite3_vtab_in_first()/sqlite3_vtab_in_next() that are not
-** preceeded by activation of IN processing via sqlite3_vtab_int() do not
+** preceded by activation of IN processing via sqlite3_vtab_int() do not
** try to access a fake ValueList object inserted by a hostile extension.
*/
void sqlite3VdbeValueListFree(void *pToDelete){
** access code.
*/
void sqlite3_set_auxdata(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- int iArg,
- void *pAux,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ int iArg,
+ void *pAux,
void (*xDelete)(void*)
){
AuxData *pAuxData;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
/*
-** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been
+** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been
** called.
**
** This function is deprecated. Do not use it for new code. It is
** these assert()s from failing, when building with SQLITE_DEBUG defined
** using gcc, we force nullMem to be 8-byte aligned using the magical
** __attribute__((aligned(8))) macro. */
- static const Mem nullMem
+ static const Mem nullMem
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && defined(__GNUC__)
- __attribute__((aligned(8)))
+ __attribute__((aligned(8)))
#endif
= {
/* .u = */ {0},
}
/*
-** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a
+** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a
** column value (i.e. a value returned by evaluating an SQL expression in the
-** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If
+** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If
** malloc() has failed, the threads mallocFailed flag is cleared and the result
** code of statement pStmt set to SQLITE_NOMEM.
**
** sqlite3_column_real()
** sqlite3_column_bytes()
** sqlite3_column_bytes16()
-** sqiite3_column_blob()
+** sqlite3_column_blob()
*/
static void columnMallocFailure(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt)
{
const void *val;
val = sqlite3_value_blob( columnMem(pStmt,i) );
/* Even though there is no encoding conversion, value_blob() might
- ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob()
- ** expression.
+ ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob()
+ ** expression.
*/
columnMallocFailure(pStmt);
return val;
/******************************* sqlite3_bind_ ***************************
-**
+**
** Routines used to attach values to wildcards in a compiled SQL statement.
*/
/*
-** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the
+** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the
** the same as binding a NULL value to the column. If the "i" parameter is
-** out of range, then SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Othewise SQLITE_OK.
+** out of range, then SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
**
** A successful evaluation of this routine acquires the mutex on p.
** the mutex is released if any kind of error occurs.
if( p->eVdbeState!=VDBE_READY_STATE ){
sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_MISUSE);
sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex);
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
"bind on a busy prepared statement: [%s]", p->zSql);
return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
}
pVar->flags = MEM_Null;
p->db->errCode = SQLITE_OK;
- /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then
+ /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then
** binding a new value to this variable invalidates the current query plan.
**
** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-57496-20354 If the specific value bound to a host
** Bind a blob value to an SQL statement variable.
*/
int sqlite3_bind_blob(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const void *zData,
- int nData,
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const void *zData,
+ int nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, 0);
}
int sqlite3_bind_blob64(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const void *zData,
- sqlite3_uint64 nData,
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const void *zData,
+ sqlite3_uint64 nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
assert( xDel!=SQLITE_DYNAMIC );
}
return rc;
}
-int sqlite3_bind_text(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const char *zData,
- int nData,
+int sqlite3_bind_text(
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const char *zData,
+ int nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF8);
}
-int sqlite3_bind_text64(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const char *zData,
- sqlite3_uint64 nData,
+int sqlite3_bind_text64(
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const char *zData,
+ sqlite3_uint64 nData,
void (*xDel)(void*),
unsigned char enc
){
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
int sqlite3_bind_text16(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const void *zData,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const void *zData,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, n & ~(u64)1, xDel, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE);
}
case SQLITE_FLOAT: {
assert( pValue->flags & (MEM_Real|MEM_IntReal) );
- rc = sqlite3_bind_double(pStmt, i,
+ rc = sqlite3_bind_double(pStmt, i,
(pValue->flags & MEM_Real) ? pValue->u.r : (double)pValue->u.i
);
break;
/*
** Return the number of wildcards that can be potentially bound to.
-** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite.
+** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite.
*/
int sqlite3_bind_parameter_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
Vdbe *p = (Vdbe*)pStmt;
Vdbe *pVdbe = (Vdbe*)pStmt;
u32 v;
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
- if( !pStmt
+ if( !pStmt
|| (op!=SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_MEMUSED && (op<0||op>=ArraySize(pVdbe->aCounter)))
){
(void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
** if successful, or a NULL pointer if an OOM error is encountered.
*/
static UnpackedRecord *vdbeUnpackRecord(
- KeyInfo *pKeyInfo,
- int nKey,
+ KeyInfo *pKeyInfo,
+ int nKey,
const void *pKey
){
UnpackedRecord *pRet; /* Return value */
** only. It returns zero if the change that caused the callback was made
** immediately by a user SQL statement. Or, if the change was made by a
** trigger program, it returns the number of trigger programs currently
-** on the stack (1 for a top-level trigger, 2 for a trigger fired by a
+** on the stack (1 for a top-level trigger, 2 for a trigger fired by a
** top-level trigger etc.).
**
** For the purposes of the previous paragraph, a foreign key CASCADE, SET NULL
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
/*
** This function is designed to be called from within a pre-update callback
-** only.
+** only.
*/
int sqlite3_preupdate_blobwrite(sqlite3 *db){
PreUpdate *p = db->pPreUpdate;
idx = iScan;
pScan = &p->aScan[idx];
}else{
- /* If the COMPLEX flag is clear, then this function must ignore any
+ /* If the COMPLEX flag is clear, then this function must ignore any
** ScanStatus structures with ScanStatus.addrLoop set to 0. */
for(idx=0; idx<p->nScan; idx++){
pScan = &p->aScan[idx];
**
*************************************************************************
** This file contains code used for creating, destroying, and populating
-** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.)
+** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.)
*/
#include "sqliteInt.h"
#include "vdbeInt.h"
}
/*
-** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger
+** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger
** than its current size. nOp is guaranteed to be less than or equal
** to 1024/sizeof(Op).
**
** If an out-of-memory error occurs while resizing the array, return
-** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Vdbe.nOpAlloc remain
-** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be
+** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Vdbe.nOpAlloc remain
+** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be
** correctly deallocated along with the rest of the Vdbe).
*/
static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){
Parse *p = v->pParse;
/* The SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS compile-time option is designed to force
- ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for
+ ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for
** simulated OOM faults. SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS is generally used
** during testing only. With SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS grow the op array
** by the minimum* amount required until the size reaches 512. Normal
/*
** The following type and function are used to iterate through all opcodes
-** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may
+** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may
** invoke directly or indirectly. It should be used as follows:
**
** Op *pOp;
** VdbeOpIter sIter;
**
** memset(&sIter, 0, sizeof(sIter));
-** sIter.v = v; // v is of type Vdbe*
+** sIter.v = v; // v is of type Vdbe*
** while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter)) ){
** // Do something with pOp
** }
** sqlite3DbFree(v->db, sIter.apSub);
-**
+**
*/
typedef struct VdbeOpIter VdbeOpIter;
struct VdbeOpIter {
p->iSub++;
p->iAddr = 0;
}
-
+
if( pRet->p4type==P4_SUBPROGRAM ){
int nByte = (p->nSub+1)*sizeof(SubProgram*);
int j;
** * OP_VCreate
** * OP_VRename
** * OP_FkCounter with P2==0 (immediate foreign key constraint)
-** * OP_CreateBtree/BTREE_INTKEY and OP_InitCoroutine
+** * OP_CreateBtree/BTREE_INTKEY and OP_InitCoroutine
** (for CREATE TABLE AS SELECT ...)
**
** Then check that the value of Parse.mayAbort is true if an
while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter))!=0 ){
int opcode = pOp->opcode;
- if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename
+ if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename
|| opcode==OP_VDestroy
|| opcode==OP_VCreate
|| opcode==OP_ParseSchema
|| opcode==OP_Function || opcode==OP_PureFunc
- || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull)
+ || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull)
&& ((pOp->p1)!=SQLITE_OK && pOp->p2==OE_Abort))
){
hasAbort = 1;
if( opcode==OP_CreateBtree && pOp->p3==BTREE_INTKEY ) hasCreateTable = 1;
if( mayAbort ){
/* hasCreateIndex may also be set for some DELETE statements that use
- ** OP_Clear. So this routine may end up returning true in the case
+ ** OP_Clear. So this routine may end up returning true in the case
** where a "DELETE FROM tbl" has a statement-journal but does not
** require one. This is not so bad - it is an inefficiency, not a bug. */
if( opcode==OP_CreateBtree && pOp->p3==BTREE_BLOBKEY ) hasCreateIndex = 1;
p->bIsReader = 0;
pOp = &p->aOp[p->nOp-1];
assert( p->aOp[0].opcode==OP_Init );
- while( 1 /* Loop termates when it reaches the OP_Init opcode */ ){
+ while( 1 /* Loop terminates when it reaches the OP_Init opcode */ ){
/* Only JUMP opcodes and the short list of special opcodes in the switch
** below need to be considered. The mkopcodeh.tcl generator script groups
** all these opcodes together near the front of the opcode list. Skip
** have non-negative values for P2. */
assert( (sqlite3OpcodeProperty[pOp->opcode]&OPFLG_JUMP)==0 || pOp->p2>=0);
}
- assert( pOp>p->aOp );
+ assert( pOp>p->aOp );
pOp--;
}
resolve_p2_values_loop_exit:
/*
** This function returns a pointer to the array of opcodes associated with
** the Vdbe passed as the first argument. It is the callers responsibility
-** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the
+** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the
** vdbeFreeOpArray() function.
**
** Before returning, *pnOp is set to the number of entries in the returned
-** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and
-** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the
+** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and
+** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the
** returned program.
*/
VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeTakeOpArray(Vdbe *p, int *pnOp, int *pnMaxArg){
void sqlite3VdbeScanStatus(
Vdbe *p, /* VM to add scanstatus() to */
int addrExplain, /* Address of OP_Explain (or 0) */
- int addrLoop, /* Address of loop counter */
+ int addrLoop, /* Address of loop counter */
int addrVisit, /* Address of rows visited counter */
LogEst nEst, /* Estimated number of output rows */
const char *zName /* Name of table or index being scanned */
** Add the range of instructions from addrStart to addrEnd (inclusive) to
** the set of those corresponding to the sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() counters
** associated with the OP_Explain instruction at addrExplain. The
-** sum of the sqlite3Hwtime() values for each of these instructions
+** sum of the sqlite3Hwtime() values for each of these instructions
** will be returned for SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE requests.
*/
void sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange(
- Vdbe *p,
- int addrExplain,
- int addrStart,
+ Vdbe *p,
+ int addrExplain,
+ int addrStart,
int addrEnd
){
if( IS_STMT_SCANSTATUS(p->db) ){
** addrExplain.
*/
void sqlite3VdbeScanStatusCounters(
- Vdbe *p,
- int addrExplain,
- int addrLoop,
+ Vdbe *p,
+ int addrExplain,
+ int addrLoop,
int addrVisit
){
if( IS_STMT_SCANSTATUS(p->db) ){
/*
** Free the space allocated for aOp and any p4 values allocated for the
-** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain
-** nOp entries.
+** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain
+** nOp entries.
*/
static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){
assert( nOp>=0 );
if( pOp->p4type <= P4_FREE_IF_LE ) freeP4(db, pOp->p4type, pOp->p4.p);
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS
sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->zComment);
-#endif
+#endif
if( pOp==aOp ) break;
pOp--;
}
** the string is made into memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc().
** A value of n==0 means copy bytes of zP4 up to and including the
** first null byte. If n>0 then copy n+1 bytes of zP4.
-**
+**
** Other values of n (P4_STATIC, P4_COLLSEQ etc.) indicate that zP4 points
** to a string or structure that is guaranteed to exist for the lifetime of
** the Vdbe. In these cases we can just copy the pointer.
}
/*
-** Change the P4 operand of the most recently coded instruction
+** Change the P4 operand of the most recently coded instruction
** to the value defined by the arguments. This is a high-speed
** version of sqlite3VdbeChangeP4().
**
** routine, then a pointer to a dummy VdbeOp will be returned. That opcode
** is readable but not writable, though it is cast to a writable value.
** The return of a dummy opcode allows the call to continue functioning
-** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from
+** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from
** this routine is a valid pointer. But because the dummy.opcode is 0,
** dummy will never be written to. This is verified by code inspection and
** by running with Valgrind.
CollSeq *pColl = pKeyInfo->aColl[j];
const char *zColl = pColl ? pColl->zName : "";
if( strcmp(zColl, "BINARY")==0 ) zColl = "B";
- sqlite3_str_appendf(&x, ",%s%s%s",
- (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC) ? "-" : "",
- (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)? "N." : "",
+ sqlite3_str_appendf(&x, ",%s%s%s",
+ (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC) ? "-" : "",
+ (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[j] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)? "N." : "",
zColl);
}
sqlite3_str_append(&x, ")", 1);
**
** If SQLite is not threadsafe but does support shared-cache mode, then
** sqlite3BtreeEnter() is invoked to set the BtShared.db variables
-** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle
+** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle
** associated with the VM.
**
** If SQLite is not threadsafe and does not support shared-cache mode, this
** function is a no-op.
**
-** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared
+** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared
** statement p will ever use. Let N be the number of bits in p->btreeMask
** corresponding to btrees that use shared cache. Then the runtime of
** this routine is N*N. But as N is rarely more than 1, this should not
/* NB: The sqlite3OpcodeName() function is implemented by code created
** by the mkopcodeh.awk and mkopcodec.awk scripts which extract the
** information from the vdbe.c source text */
- fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc,
- sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3,
+ fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc,
+ sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3,
zP4 ? zP4 : "", pOp->p5,
zCom ? zCom : ""
);
assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(p) );
/* This block is really an inlined version of sqlite3VdbeMemRelease()
- ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is
+ ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is
** being set to NULL after releasing any dynamic resources.
**
- ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to
- ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7
- ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if
+ ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to
+ ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7
+ ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if
** sqlite3MemRelease() were called from here. With -O2, this jumps
- ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table
- ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind()
+ ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table
+ ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind()
** and reset(). Inserts are grouped into a transaction.
*/
testcase( p->flags & MEM_Agg );
Op *pOp = aOp + i;
if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenRead ) break;
if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite && (pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_P2ISREG)==0 ) break;
- if( pOp->opcode==OP_ReopenIdx ) break;
+ if( pOp->opcode==OP_ReopenIdx ) break;
}else
#endif
{
sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, pOp->p1);
sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+1, pOp->p2);
sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+2, pOp->p3);
- sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pMem+3, zP4, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3_free);
+ sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pMem+3, zP4, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3_free);
p->nResColumn = 4;
}else{
sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem+0, i);
** creating the virtual machine. This involves things such
** as allocating registers and initializing the program counter.
** After the VDBE has be prepped, it can be executed by one or more
-** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec().
+** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec().
**
** This function may be called exactly once on each virtual machine.
** After this routine is called the VM has been "packaged" and is ready
-** to run. After this routine is called, further calls to
+** to run. After this routine is called, further calls to
** sqlite3VdbeAddOp() functions are prohibited. This routine disconnects
** the Vdbe from the Parse object that helped generate it so that the
** the Vdbe becomes an independent entity and the Parse object can be
nMem = pParse->nMem;
nCursor = pParse->nTab;
nArg = pParse->nMaxArg;
-
+
/* Each cursor uses a memory cell. The first cursor (cursor 0) can
** use aMem[0] which is not otherwise used by the VDBE program. Allocate
** space at the end of aMem[] for cursors 1 and greater.
p->expired = 0;
/* Memory for registers, parameters, cursor, etc, is allocated in one or two
- ** passes. On the first pass, we try to reuse unused memory at the
+ ** passes. On the first pass, we try to reuse unused memory at the
** end of the opcode array. If we are unable to satisfy all memory
** requirements by reusing the opcode array tail, then the second
- ** pass will fill in the remainder using a fresh memory allocation.
+ ** pass will fill in the remainder using a fresh memory allocation.
**
** This two-pass approach that reuses as much memory as possible from
** the leftover memory at the end of the opcode array. This can significantly
}
/*
-** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor
+** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor
** happens to hold.
*/
void sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(Vdbe *p, VdbeCursor *pCx){
/*
** Close all cursors.
**
-** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory
+** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory
** cell array. This is necessary as the memory cell array may contain
** pointers to VdbeFrame objects, which may in turn contain pointers to
** open cursors.
int needXcommit = 0;
#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
- /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply
- ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used.
+ /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply
+ ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used.
*/
UNUSED_PARAMETER(p);
#endif
/* Before doing anything else, call the xSync() callback for any
** virtual module tables written in this transaction. This has to
- ** be done before determining whether a super-journal file is
+ ** be done before determining whether a super-journal file is
** required, as an xSync() callback may add an attached database
** to the transaction.
*/
rc = sqlite3VtabSync(db, p);
/* This loop determines (a) if the commit hook should be invoked and
- ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not
- ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than
+ ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not
+ ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than
** one database file has an open write transaction, a super-journal
** file is required for an atomic commit.
- */
- for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
+ */
+ for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( sqlite3BtreeTxnState(pBt)==SQLITE_TXN_WRITE ){
/* Whether or not a database might need a super-journal depends upon
if( db->aDb[i].safety_level!=PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_OFF
&& aMJNeeded[sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager)]
&& sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(pPager)==0
- ){
+ ){
assert( i!=1 );
nTrans++;
}
** super-journal.
**
** If the return value of sqlite3BtreeGetFilename() is a zero length
- ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file. In
- ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the
+ ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file. In
+ ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the
** simple case then too.
*/
if( 0==sqlite3Strlen30(sqlite3BtreeGetFilename(db->aDb[0].pBt))
}
}
- /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1.
+ /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1.
** If one of the BtreeCommitPhaseOne() calls fails, this indicates an
** IO error while deleting or truncating a journal file. It is unlikely,
** but could happen. In this case abandon processing and return the error.
}while( rc==SQLITE_OK && res );
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
/* Open the super-journal. */
- rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zSuper, &pSuperJrnl,
+ rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zSuper, &pSuperJrnl,
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE|
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE|SQLITE_OPEN_SUPER_JOURNAL, 0
);
sqlite3DbFree(db, zSuper-4);
return rc;
}
-
+
/* Write the name of each database file in the transaction into the new
** super-journal file. If an error occurs at this point close
** and delete the super-journal file. All the individual journal files
** in case the super-journal file name was written into the journal
** file before the failure occurred.
*/
- for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
+ for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt ){
rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(pBt, zSuper);
*/
disable_simulated_io_errors();
sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
- for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
+ for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt ){
sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(pBt, 1);
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** This routine checks that the sqlite3.nVdbeActive count variable
** matches the number of vdbe's in the list sqlite3.pVdbe that are
** currently active. An assertion fails if the two counts do not match.
** If the Vdbe passed as the first argument opened a statement-transaction,
** close it now. Argument eOp must be either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or
** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then the statement
-** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the
+** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the
** statement transaction is committed.
**
-** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned.
+** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned.
** Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
*/
static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
assert( db->nStatement>0 );
assert( p->iStatement==(db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint) );
- for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
+ for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
int rc2 = SQLITE_OK;
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt ){
}
}
- /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the
- ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when
+ /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the
+ ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when
** the statement transaction was opened. */
if( eOp==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
db->nDeferredCons = p->nStmtDefCons;
/*
-** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database
-** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be
+** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database
+** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be
** committed. If there are outstanding deferred foreign key constraint
** violations, return SQLITE_ERROR. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
**
-** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns
+** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns
** SQLITE_ERROR, set the result of the VM to SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY
** and write an error message to it. Then return SQLITE_ERROR.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
int sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(Vdbe *p, int deferred){
sqlite3 *db = p->db;
- if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0)
- || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0)
+ if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0)
+ || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0)
){
p->rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY;
p->errorAction = OE_Abort;
/* This function contains the logic that determines if a statement or
** transaction will be committed or rolled back as a result of the
- ** execution of this virtual machine.
+ ** execution of this virtual machine.
**
** If any of the following errors occur:
**
mrc = isSpecialError = 0;
}
if( isSpecialError ){
- /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT,
- ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint
- ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a
+ /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT,
+ ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint
+ ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a
** consistent state.
**
** Even if the statement is read-only, it is important to perform
- ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error
+ ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error
** occurred while writing to the journal, sub-journal or database
** file as part of an effort to free up cache space (see function
- ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore
+ ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore
** the pager to a consistent state.
*/
if( !p->readOnly || mrc!=SQLITE_INTERRUPT ){
if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){
sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0);
}
-
- /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer
- ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction.
+
+ /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer
+ ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction.
**
- ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled
- ** above has occurred.
+ ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled
+ ** above has occurred.
*/
- if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db)
- && db->autoCommit
- && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0)
+ if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db)
+ && db->autoCommit
+ && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0)
){
if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){
rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1);
}else if( db->flags & SQLITE_CorruptRdOnly ){
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT;
db->flags &= ~SQLITE_CorruptRdOnly;
- }else{
- /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful
+ }else{
+ /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful
** or hit an 'OR FAIL' constraint and there are no deferred foreign
- ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit
+ ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit
** is required. */
rc = vdbeCommit(db, p);
}
p->nChange = 0;
}
}
-
+
/* If eStatementOp is non-zero, then a statement transaction needs to
** be committed or rolled back. Call sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement() to
** do so. If this operation returns an error, and the current statement
p->nChange = 0;
}
}
-
+
/* If this was an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE and no statement transaction
- ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter.
+ ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter.
*/
if( p->changeCntOn ){
if( eStatementOp!=SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
}
/* If the auto-commit flag is set to true, then any locks that were held
- ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked()
+ ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked()
** to invoke any required unlock-notify callbacks.
*/
if( db->autoCommit ){
/*
** Copy the error code and error message belonging to the VDBE passed
-** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be
+** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be
** returned by calls to sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg()).
**
** This function does not clear the VDBE error code or message, just
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SQLLOG
/*
-** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run,
+** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run,
** invoke it.
*/
static void vdbeInvokeSqllog(Vdbe *v){
/* Reset register contents and reclaim error message memory.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and
+ /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and
** Vdbe.aMem[] arrays have already been cleaned up. */
if( p->apCsr ) for(i=0; i<p->nCursor; i++) assert( p->apCsr[i]==0 );
if( p->aMem ){
#endif
return p->rc & db->errMask;
}
-
+
/*
** Clean up and delete a VDBE after execution. Return an integer which is
** the result code. Write any error message text into *pzErrMsg.
** the first argument.
**
** Or, if iOp is greater than or equal to zero, then the destructor is
-** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user
-** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of
+** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user
+** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of
** VM pVdbe, and only then if:
**
** * the associated function parameter is the 32nd or later (counting
** The sizes for serial types less than 128
*/
const u8 sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[128] = {
- /* 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 */
+ /* 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 */
/* 0 */ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 8, 0, 0,
/* 10 */ 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3,
/* 20 */ 4, 4, 5, 5, 6, 6, 7, 7, 8, 8,
if( serial_type>=128 ){
return (serial_type-12)/2;
}else{
- assert( serial_type<12
+ assert( serial_type<12
|| sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type]==(serial_type - 12)/2 );
return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];
}
}
u8 sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(u8 serial_type){
assert( serial_type<128 );
- return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];
+ return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];
}
/*
-** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating
-** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the
+** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating
+** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the
** upper 4 bytes. Return the result.
**
** For most architectures, this is a no-op.
** (2007-08-30) Frank van Vugt has studied this problem closely
** and has send his findings to the SQLite developers. Frank
** writes that some Linux kernels offer floating point hardware
-** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full
+** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full
** 48-bits as required by the IEEE standard. (This is the
** CONFIG_FPE_FASTFPE option.) On such systems, floating point
** byte swapping becomes very complicated. To avoid problems,
** The few cases that require local variables are broken out into a separate
** routine so that in most cases the overhead of moving the stack pointer
** is avoided.
-*/
+*/
static void serialGet(
const unsigned char *buf, /* Buffer to deserialize from */
u32 serial_type, /* Serial type to deserialize */
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-01849-26079 Value is a big-endian 32-bit
** twos-complement integer. */
pMem->u.i = FOUR_BYTE_INT(buf);
-#ifdef __HP_cc
+#ifdef __HP_cc
/* Work around a sign-extension bug in the HP compiler for HP/UX */
if( buf[0]&0x80 ) pMem->u.i |= 0xffffffff80000000LL;
#endif
** The space is either allocated using sqlite3DbMallocRaw() or from within
** the unaligned buffer passed via the second and third arguments (presumably
** stack space). If the former, then *ppFree is set to a pointer that should
-** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the
+** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the
** allocation comes from the pSpace/szSpace buffer, *ppFree is set to NULL
** before returning.
**
}
/*
-** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the
+** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the
** UnpackedRecord structure indicated by the fourth argument with the
** contents of the decoded record.
-*/
+*/
void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(
KeyInfo *pKeyInfo, /* Information about the record format */
int nKey, /* Size of the binary record */
UnpackedRecord *p /* Populate this structure before returning. */
){
const unsigned char *aKey = (const unsigned char *)pKey;
- u32 d;
+ u32 d;
u32 idx; /* Offset in aKey[] to read from */
u16 u; /* Unsigned loop counter */
u32 szHdr;
}
if( d>(u32)nKey && u ){
assert( CORRUPT_DB );
- /* In a corrupt record entry, the last pMem might have been set up using
+ /* In a corrupt record entry, the last pMem might have been set up using
** uninitialized memory. Overwrite its value with NULL, to prevent
** warnings from MSAN. */
sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pMem-1);
/* Compilers may complain that mem1.u.i is potentially uninitialized.
** We could initialize it, as shown here, to silence those complaints.
- ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing
+ ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing
** the unnecessary initialization has a measurable negative performance
** impact, since this routine is a very high runner. And so, we choose
** to ignore the compiler warnings and leave this variable uninitialized.
*/
/* mem1.u.i = 0; // not needed, here to silence compiler warning */
-
+
idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1);
if( szHdr1>98307 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT;
d1 = szHdr1;
** sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen() in the common case.
*/
if( d1+(u64)serial_type1+2>(u64)nKey1
- && d1+(u64)sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u64)nKey1
+ && d1+(u64)sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u64)nKey1
){
break;
}
if( rc!=0 ){
assert( mem1.szMalloc==0 ); /* See comment below */
if( (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[i] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)
- && ((mem1.flags & MEM_Null) || (pPKey2->aMem[i].flags & MEM_Null))
+ && ((mem1.flags & MEM_Null) || (pPKey2->aMem[i].flags & MEM_Null))
){
rc = -rc;
}
** incorrectly.
*/
static void vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits(
- int nKey, const void *pKey, /* The record to verify */
+ int nKey, const void *pKey, /* The record to verify */
const KeyInfo *pKeyInfo /* Compare size with this KeyInfo */
){
int nField = 0;
/*
** Both *pMem1 and *pMem2 contain string values. Compare the two values
** using the collation sequence pColl. As usual, return a negative , zero
-** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than
+** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than
** *pMem2, respectively. Similar in spirit to "rc = (*pMem1) - (*pMem2);".
*/
static int vdbeCompareMemString(
f2 = pMem2->flags;
combined_flags = f1|f2;
assert( !sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pMem1) && !sqlite3VdbeMemIsRowSet(pMem2) );
-
+
/* If one value is NULL, it is less than the other. If both values
** are NULL, return 0.
*/
}
assert( pMem1->enc==pMem2->enc || pMem1->db->mallocFailed );
- assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ||
+ assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ||
pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE || pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE );
/* The collation sequence must be defined at this point, even if
/* If a NULL pointer was passed as the collate function, fall through
** to the blob case and use memcmp(). */
}
-
+
/* Both values must be blobs. Compare using memcmp(). */
return sqlite3BlobCompare(pMem1, pMem2);
}
/*
** The first argument passed to this function is a serial-type that
-** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive
+** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive
** except 7. The second points to a buffer containing an integer value
** serialized according to serial_type. This function deserializes
** and returns the value.
/*
** This function compares the two table rows or index records
** specified by {nKey1, pKey1} and pPKey2. It returns a negative, zero
-** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or
+** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or
** greater than key2. The {nKey1, pKey1} key must be a blob
** created by the OP_MakeRecord opcode of the VDBE. The pPKey2
** key must be a parsed key such as obtained from
** If argument bSkip is non-zero, it is assumed that the caller has already
** determined that the first fields of the keys are equal.
**
-** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all
-** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is
+** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all
+** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is
** returned.
**
-** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to
-** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered,
+** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to
+** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered,
** pPKey2->errCode is set to SQLITE_NOMEM and, if it is not NULL, the
** malloc-failed flag set on database handle (pPKey2->pKeyInfo->db).
*/
d1 = szHdr1;
i = 0;
}
- if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){
+ if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){
pPKey2->errCode = (u8)SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
return 0; /* Corruption */
}
VVA_ONLY( mem1.szMalloc = 0; ) /* Only needed by assert() statements */
- assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nAllField>=pPKey2->nField
+ assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nAllField>=pPKey2->nField
|| CORRUPT_DB );
assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->aSortFlags!=0 );
assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nKeyField>0 );
serial_type = aKey1[idx1];
if( serial_type>=10 ){
/* Serial types 12 or greater are strings and blobs (greater than
- ** numbers). Types 10 and 11 are currently "reserved for future
+ ** numbers). Types 10 and 11 are currently "reserved for future
** use", so it doesn't really matter what the results of comparing
- ** them to numberic values are. */
+ ** them to numeric values are. */
rc = serial_type==10 ? -1 : +1;
}else if( serial_type==0 ){
rc = -1;
}else{
int nCmp = MIN(mem1.n, pRhs->n);
rc = memcmp(&aKey1[d1], pRhs->z, nCmp);
- if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n;
+ if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n;
}
}
}
/* rc==0 here means that one or both of the keys ran out of fields and
** all the fields up to that point were equal. Return the default_rc
** value. */
- assert( CORRUPT_DB
- || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc)
+ assert( CORRUPT_DB
+ || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc)
|| pPKey2->pKeyInfo->db->mallocFailed
);
pPKey2->eqSeen = 1;
/*
-** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
-** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the
+** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
+** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the
** size-of-header varint at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single
** byte (i.e. is less than 128).
**
testcase( lhs<0 );
break;
}
- case 8:
+ case 8:
lhs = 0;
break;
case 9:
break;
/* This case could be removed without changing the results of running
- ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch
+ ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch
** statement (since the range of switch targets now starts at zero and
** is contiguous) but does not cause any duplicate code to be generated
- ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other
- ** compilers might be similar. */
+ ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other
+ ** compilers might be similar. */
case 0: case 7:
return sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2);
}else if( v<lhs ){
res = pPKey2->r2;
}else if( pPKey2->nField>1 ){
- /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing
+ /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing
** fields. */
res = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, 1);
}else{
}
/*
-** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
+** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is a string, that (b) the first field
-** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint
+** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint
** at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single byte.
*/
static int vdbeRecordCompareString(
assert( CORRUPT_DB );
}
res = pPKey2->r1; /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a number or a null */
- }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){
+ }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){
res = pPKey2->r2; /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a blob */
}else{
int nCmp;
/* varintRecordCompareInt() and varintRecordCompareString() both assume
** that the size-of-header varint that occurs at the start of each record
** fits in a single byte (i.e. is 127 or less). varintRecordCompareInt()
- ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the
+ ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the
** maximum possible legal header size plus 8 bytes. Because there is
** guaranteed to be at least 74 (but not 136) bytes of padding following each
** buffer passed to varintRecordCompareInt() this makes it convenient to
/* Get the size of the index entry. Only indices entries of less
** than 2GiB are support - anything large must be database corruption.
** Any corruption is detected in sqlite3BtreeParseCellPtr(), though, so
- ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits
+ ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits
*/
assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) );
nCellKey = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCur);
**
** pUnpacked is either created without a rowid or is truncated so that it
** omits the rowid at the end. The rowid at the end of the index entry
-** is ignored as well. Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes
+** is ignored as well. Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes
** of the keys prior to the final rowid, not the entire key.
*/
int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(
/*
** This routine sets the value to be returned by subsequent calls to
-** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'.
+** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'.
*/
void sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(sqlite3 *db, i64 nChange){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
/*
** Return a pointer to an sqlite3_value structure containing the value bound
-** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return
+** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return
** 0 instead. Unless it is NULL, apply affinity aff (one of the SQLITE_AFF_*
** constants) to the value before returning it.
**
#if defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_CURSOR_HINTS) && defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
/*
** This Walker callback is used to help verify that calls to
-** sqlite3BtreeCursorHint() with opcode BTREE_HINT_RANGE have
+** sqlite3BtreeCursorHint() with opcode BTREE_HINT_RANGE have
** byte-code register values correctly initialized.
*/
int sqlite3CursorRangeHintExprCheck(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
/*
-** If the second argument is not NULL, release any allocations associated
+** If the second argument is not NULL, release any allocations associated
** with the memory cells in the p->aMem[] array. Also free the UnpackedRecord
** structure itself, using sqlite3DbFree().
**
assert( pCsr!=0 );
assert( pCsr->eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE );
- assert( pCsr->nField==nRealCol
+ assert( pCsr->nField==nRealCol
|| (pCsr->nField==nRealCol+1 && op==SQLITE_DELETE && iReg==-1)
);
** is like Close() followed by Init() only
** much faster.
**
-** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order. Write() can
+** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order. Write() can
** only occur in between Init()/Reset() and Rewind(). Next(), Rowkey(), and
** Compare() can only occur in between Rewind() and Close()/Reset(). i.e.
**
** for each record: Write()
** Rewind()
** Rowkey()/Compare()
-** Next()
+** Next()
** Close()
**
** Algorithm:
**
-** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held
+** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held
** unsorted in main memory. Assuming the amount of memory used never exceeds
** a threshold, when Rewind() is called the set of records is sorted using
** an in-memory merge sort. In this case, no temporary files are required
-** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records
+** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records
** directly from main memory.
**
** If the amount of space used to store records in main memory exceeds the
** of PMAs may be created by merging existing PMAs together - for example
** merging two or more level-0 PMAs together creates a level-1 PMA.
**
-** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing
+** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing
** records to a PMA is roughly the same as the limit configured for the
-** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to
-** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by
+** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to
+** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by
** that returned by "PRAGMA main.cache_size", in bytes.
**
** If the sorter is running in single-threaded mode, then all PMAs generated
** than zero, and (b) worker threads have been enabled at runtime by calling
** "PRAGMA threads=N" with some value of N greater than 0.
**
-** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a
+** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a
** final PMA. So at this point the data is stored in some number of sorted
** PMAs within temporary files on disk.
**
** If there are fewer than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total and the
** sorter is running in single-threaded mode, then these PMAs are merged
-** incrementally as keys are retreived from the sorter by the VDBE. The
+** incrementally as keys are retrieved from the sorter by the VDBE. The
** MergeEngine object, described in further detail below, performs this
** merge.
**
** Or, if running in multi-threaded mode, then a background thread is
** launched to merge the existing PMAs. Once the background thread has
-** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread
+** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread
** begins reading keys from that PMA while the background thread proceeds
** with merging the next T bytes of data. And so on.
**
-** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used
+** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used
** by Write() above to determine when to create a new PMA.
**
-** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when
-** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used.
-** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on
+** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when
+** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used.
+** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on
** disk are merged together. Then T bytes of data from the second set, and
** so on, such that no operation ever merges more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT
** PMAs at a time. This done is to improve locality.
#include "sqliteInt.h"
#include "vdbeInt.h"
-/*
+/*
** If SQLITE_DEBUG_SORTER_THREADS is defined, this module outputs various
** messages to stderr that may be helpful in understanding the performance
** characteristics of the sorter in multi-threaded mode.
typedef struct IncrMerger IncrMerger; /* Read & merge multiple PMAs */
/*
-** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data
+** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data
** stored in the file.
*/
struct SorterFile {
** the MergeEngine.nTree variable.
**
** The final (N/2) elements of aTree[] contain the results of comparing
-** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of
+** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of
** comparing aReadr[2*i-N] and aReadr[2*i-N+1]. Whichever key is smaller, the
-** aTree element is set to the index of it.
+** aTree element is set to the index of it.
**
** For the purposes of this comparison, EOF is considered greater than any
** other key value. If the keys are equal (only possible with two EOF
** values), it doesn't matter which index is stored.
**
-** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described
+** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described
** above contains the index of the smallest of each block of 4 PmaReaders
-** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that
+** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that
** currently points to the smallest key value. aTree[0] is unused.
**
** Example:
**
** aTree[] = { X, 5 0, 5 0, 3, 5, 6 }
**
-** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by
+** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by
** PmaReader 5). When the Next() operation is invoked, PmaReader 5 will
** be advanced to the next key in its segment. Say the next key is
** "Eggplant":
**
** Essentially, this structure contains all those fields of the VdbeSorter
** structure for which each thread requires a separate instance. For example,
-** each thread requries its own UnpackedRecord object to unpack records in
+** each thread requeries its own UnpackedRecord object to unpack records in
** as part of comparison operations.
**
-** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then,
-** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for
+** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then,
+** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for
** two purposes:
**
** 1. When flushing the contents of memory to a level-0 PMA on disk, to
/*
-** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each
+** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each
** sorter cursor created by the VDBE.
**
** mxKeysize:
** PMA, in sorted order. The next key to be read is cached in nKey/aKey.
** aKey might point into aMap or into aBuffer. If neither of those locations
** contain a contiguous representation of the key, then aAlloc is allocated
-** and the key is copied into aAlloc and aKey is made to poitn to aAlloc.
+** and the key is copied into aAlloc and aKey is made to point to aAlloc.
**
** pFd==0 at EOF.
*/
};
/*
-** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored
+** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored
** within a temp file. However, if the PmaReader.pIncr variable points to
** an object of the following type, it may be used to iterate/merge through
** multiple PMAs simultaneously.
**
-** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and
-** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1).
+** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and
+** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1).
**
-** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0]
-** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in
-** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from
-** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the
-** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off
-** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of
-** sorted record data from pMerger.
+** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0]
+** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in
+** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from
+** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the
+** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off
+** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of
+** sorted record data from pMerger.
**
** When the PmaReader reaches the end of aFile[0], it blocks until the
** background thread has finished populating aFile[1]. It then exchanges
**
** A single-threaded IncrMerger does not open any temporary files of its
** own. Instead, it has exclusive access to mxSz bytes of space beginning
-** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a
+** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a
** background thread to prepare data for the PmaReader, with a single
** threaded IncrMerger the allocate part of pTask->file2 is "refilled" with
** keys from pMerger by the calling thread whenever the PmaReader runs out
assert( p->aBuffer );
- /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next
+ /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next
** p->nBuffer bytes of data from the file into it. Or, if there are less
** than p->nBuffer bytes remaining in the PMA, read all remaining data. */
iBuf = p->iReadOff % p->nBuffer;
assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ );
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
}
- nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf;
+ nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf;
if( nByte<=nAvail ){
/* The requested data is available in the in-memory buffer. In this
- ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a
+ ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a
** pointer into the buffer to the caller. */
*ppOut = &p->aBuffer[iBuf];
p->iReadOff += nByte;
/*
** Attempt to memory map file pFile. If successful, set *pp to point to the
-** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted
+** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted
** (because the file is too large or the VFS layer is configured not to use
** mmap), return SQLITE_OK and set *pp to NULL.
**
/*
** Attach PmaReader pReadr to file pFile (if it is not already attached to
-** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file. Return SQLITE_OK
+** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file. Return SQLITE_OK
** if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs.
*/
static int vdbePmaReaderSeek(
/*
** Initialize PmaReader pReadr to scan through the PMA stored in file pFile
-** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function
-** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the
+** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function
+** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the
** PMA is empty).
**
-** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file
+** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file
** contains a single PMA, and that that PMA omits the initial length varint.
*/
static int vdbePmaReaderInit(
/*
** A version of vdbeSorterCompare() that assumes that it has already been
-** determined that the first field of key1 is equal to the first field of
+** determined that the first field of key1 is equal to the first field of
** key2.
*/
static int vdbeSorterCompareTail(
}
/*
-** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2,
+** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2,
** size nKey2 bytes). Use (pTask->pKeyInfo) for the collation sequences
** used by the comparison. Return the result of the comparison.
**
** is non-zero and the sorter is able to guarantee a stable sort, nField
** is used instead. This is used when sorting records for a CREATE INDEX
** statement. In this case, keys are always delivered to the sorter in
-** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part
+** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part
** of the records being sorted. So if the sort is stable, there is never
** any reason to compare PK fields and they can be ignored for a small
** performance boost.
}
}
- if( pKeyInfo->nAllField<13
+ if( pKeyInfo->nAllField<13
&& (pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==0 || pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==db->pDfltColl)
&& (pKeyInfo->aSortFlags[0] & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL)==0
){
}
/*
-** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All
+** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All
** fields of *pTask are zeroed before returning.
*/
static void vdbeSortSubtaskCleanup(sqlite3 *db, SortSubtask *pTask){
}
/*
-** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create
+** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create
** level-0 PMAs.
*/
static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){
/* This function is always called by the main user thread.
**
- ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called,
+ ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called,
** it is possible that thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread
** is currently attempt to join one of the other threads. To avoid a race
- ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join
+ ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join
** thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread first. */
for(i=pSorter->nTask-1; i>=0; i--){
SortSubtask *pTask = &pSorter->aTask[i];
}
/*
-** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord
-** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or
+** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord
+** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or
** if no allocation was required), or SQLITE_NOMEM otherwise.
*/
static int vdbeSortAllocUnpacked(SortSubtask *pTask){
if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_INTEGER ){
return vdbeSorterCompareInt;
}else if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_TEXT ){
- return vdbeSorterCompareText;
+ return vdbeSorterCompareText;
}
return vdbeSorterCompare;
}
/*
-** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return
-** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if
+** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return
+** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if
** an error occurs.
*/
static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
}
pList->pList = p;
- assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK
- || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM
+ assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK
+ || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM
);
return pTask->pUnpacked->errCode;
}
memcpy(&p->aBuffer[p->iBufEnd], &pData[nData-nRem], nCopy);
p->iBufEnd += nCopy;
if( p->iBufEnd==p->nBuffer ){
- p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
- &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
+ p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
+ &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart
);
p->iBufStart = p->iBufEnd = 0;
/*
** Flush any buffered data to disk and clean up the PMA-writer object.
** The results of using the PMA-writer after this call are undefined.
-** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not
+** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not
** required. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code.
**
** Before returning, set *piEof to the offset immediately following the
static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){
int rc;
if( p->eFWErr==0 && ALWAYS(p->aBuffer) && p->iBufEnd>p->iBufStart ){
- p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
- &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
+ p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
+ &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart
);
}
}
/*
-** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return
+** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return
** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs.
*/
static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
- int nByte;
+ int nByte;
u8 aByte[10];
nByte = sqlite3PutVarint(aByte, iVal);
vdbePmaWriteBlob(p, aByte, nByte);
/*
** Write the current contents of in-memory linked-list pList to a level-0
-** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if
+** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if
** successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
**
** The format of a PMA is:
** * A varint. This varint contains the total number of bytes of content
** in the PMA (not including the varint itself).
**
-** * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys.
-** Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the
+** * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys.
+** Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the
** key). The varint is the number of bytes in the blob of data.
*/
static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
PmaWriter writer; /* Object used to write to the file */
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA.
+ /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA.
** This is used by an assert() statement at the end of this function. */
i64 iSz = pList->szPMA + sqlite3VarintLen(pList->szPMA) + pTask->file.iEof;
#endif
SortSubtask *pTask = 0; /* Thread context used to create new PMA */
int nWorker = (pSorter->nTask-1);
- /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written.
+ /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written.
** Or will be, anyhow. */
pSorter->bUsePMA = 1;
** the background thread from a sub-tasks previous turn is still running,
** skip it. If the first (pSorter->nTask-1) sub-tasks are all still busy,
** fall back to using the final sub-task. The first (pSorter->nTask-1)
- ** sub-tasks are prefered as they use background threads - the final
+ ** sub-tasks are preferred as they use background threads - the final
** sub-task uses the main thread. */
for(i=0; i<nWorker; i++){
int iTest = (pSorter->iPrev + i + 1) % nWorker;
** If using the single large allocation mode (pSorter->aMemory!=0), then
** flush the contents of memory to a new PMA if (a) at least one value is
** already in memory and (b) the new value will not fit in memory.
- **
+ **
** Or, if using separate allocations for each record, flush the contents
** of memory to a PMA if either of the following are true:
**
- ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
+ ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
** than (page-size * cache-size), or
**
- ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
+ ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
** than (page-size * 10) and sqlite3HeapNearlyFull() returns true.
*/
nReq = pVal->n + sizeof(SorterRecord);
** aFile[0] such that the PmaReader should start rereading it from the
** beginning.
**
-** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading
-** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0].
+** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading
+** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0].
**
-** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the
-** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap
+** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the
+** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap
** aFile[0] and aFile[1] in place. If the contents of pMerger have not
** been exhausted, this function also launches a new background thread
** to populate the new aFile[1].
#define INCRINIT_TASK 1
#define INCRINIT_ROOT 2
-/*
+/*
** Forward reference required as the vdbeIncrMergeInit() and
** vdbePmaReaderIncrInit() routines are called mutually recursively when
** building a merge tree.
/*
** Initialize the MergeEngine object passed as the second argument. Once this
-** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the
+** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the
** MergeEngine object in the usual fashion.
**
** If argument eMode is INCRINIT_ROOT, then it is assumed that any IncrMerge
** required is to call vdbePmaReaderNext() on each PmaReader to point it at
** its first key.
**
-** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use
-** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data
+** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use
+** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data
** to pMerger.
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
** object at (pReadr->pIncr).
**
** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_NORMAL, then all PmaReaders
-** in the sub-tree headed by pReadr are also initialized. Data is then
-** loaded into the buffers belonging to pReadr and it is set to point to
+** in the sub-tree headed by pReadr are also initialized. Data is then
+** loaded into the buffers belonging to pReadr and it is set to point to
** the first key in its range.
**
** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_TASK, then pReadr is guaranteed
** to be a multi-threaded PmaReader and this function is being called in a
-** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are
+** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are
** initialized as for INCRINIT_NORMAL and the aFile[1] buffer belonging to
** pReadr is populated. However, pReadr itself is not set up to point
** to its first key. A call to vdbePmaReaderNext() is still required to do
-** that.
+** that.
**
-** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately
+** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately
** in the INCRINIT_TASK case is that vdbePmaReaderNext() assumes that it has
** to block on thread (pTask->thread) before accessing aFile[1]. But, since
** this entire function is being run by thread (pTask->thread), that will
rc = vdbeMergeEngineInit(pTask, pIncr->pMerger, eMode);
- /* Set up the required files for pIncr. A multi-theaded IncrMerge object
+ /* Set up the required files for pIncr. A multi-threaded IncrMerge object
** requires two temp files to itself, whereas a single-threaded object
** only requires a region of pTask->file2. */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pIncr->bUseThread ){
/* Use the current thread to populate aFile[1], even though this
** PmaReader is multi-threaded. If this is an INCRINIT_TASK object,
- ** then this function is already running in background thread
- ** pIncr->pTask->thread.
+ ** then this function is already running in background thread
+ ** pIncr->pTask->thread.
**
- ** If this is the INCRINIT_ROOT object, then it is running in the
+ ** If this is the INCRINIT_ROOT object, then it is running in the
** main VDBE thread. But that is Ok, as that thread cannot return
- ** control to the VDBE or proceed with anything useful until the
+ ** control to the VDBE or proceed with anything useful until the
** first results are ready from this merger object anyway.
*/
assert( eMode==INCRINIT_ROOT || eMode==INCRINIT_TASK );
#if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0
/*
-** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in
+** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in
** background threads.
*/
static void *vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(void *pCtx){
** (if pReadr->pIncr==0), then this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it invokes
** the vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() function with the parameters passed to
** this routine to initialize the incremental merge.
-**
-** If the IncrMerger object is multi-threaded (IncrMerger.bUseThread==1),
+**
+** If the IncrMerger object is multi-threaded (IncrMerger.bUseThread==1),
** then a background thread is launched to call vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit().
** Or, if the IncrMerger is single threaded, the same function is called
** using the current thread.
** to NULL and return an SQLite error code.
**
** When this function is called, *piOffset is set to the offset of the
-** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is
+** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is
** set to the offset immediately following the last byte of the last
** PMA before returning. If an error does occur, then the final value of
** *piOffset is undefined.
/*
** This function is called as part of a SorterRewind() operation on a sorter
** that has already written two or more level-0 PMAs to one or more temp
-** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that
+** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that
** can be used to incrementally merge all PMAs on disk.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppOut set to point to the
** MergeEngine object at the root of the tree before returning. Or, if an
-** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value
+** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value
** of *ppOut is undefined.
*/
static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild(
int iTask;
#if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0
- /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level
- ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly
+ /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level
+ ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly
** one PmaReader per sub-task. */
assert( pSorter->bUseThreads || pSorter->nTask==1 );
if( pSorter->nTask>1 ){
}
for(iTask=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && iTask<pSorter->nTask; iTask++){
/* Check that:
- **
+ **
** a) The incremental merge object is configured to use the
** right task, and
** b) If it is using task (nTask-1), it is configured to run
return rc;
}
- /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite()
+ /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite()
** function flushes the contents of memory to disk, it immediately always
** creates a new list consisting of a single key immediately afterwards.
** So the list is never empty at this point. */
vdbeSorterRewindDebug("rewind");
- /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to
+ /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to
** incrementally read and merge all remaining PMAs. */
assert( pSorter->pReader==0 );
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
}
/*
-** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the
+** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the
** current key.
*/
static void *vdbeSorterRowkey(
/*
** Before a virtual table xCreate() or xConnect() method is invoked, the
** sqlite3.pVtabCtx member variable is set to point to an instance of
-** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of
+** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of
** the sqlite3_declare_vtab() and sqlite3_vtab_config() APIs, both of which
** are invoked only from within xCreate and xConnect methods.
*/
/*
** Lock the virtual table so that it cannot be disconnected.
** Locks nest. Every lock should have a corresponding unlock.
-** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.
+** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.
**
** If a disconnect is attempted while a virtual table is locked,
** the disconnect is deferred until all locks have been removed.
/*
** pTab is a pointer to a Table structure representing a virtual-table.
-** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access
+** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access
** this virtual-table, if one has been created, or NULL otherwise.
*/
VTable *sqlite3GetVTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){
/*
** Table p is a virtual table. This function moves all elements in the
** p->u.vtab.p list to the sqlite3.pDisconnect lists of their associated
-** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity.
+** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity.
** Except, if argument db is not NULL, then the entry associated with
** connection db is left in the p->u.vtab.p list.
*/
pVTable = p->u.vtab.p;
p->u.vtab.p = 0;
- /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database
- ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments
+ /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database
+ ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments
** above function sqlite3VtabUnlockList() for an explanation of why
** this makes it safe to access the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of any
** database connection that may have an entry in the p->u.vtab.p list.
** Disconnect all the virtual table objects in the sqlite3.pDisconnect list.
**
** This function may only be called when the mutexes associated with all
-** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the
+** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the
** caller. This is done to protect the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. The
** sqlite3.pDisconnect list is accessed only as follows:
**
** or, if the virtual table is stored in a non-sharable database, then
** the database handle mutex is held.
**
-** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously
+** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously
** by multiple threads. It is thread-safe.
*/
void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){
** record.
**
** Since it is a virtual-table, the Table structure contains a pointer
-** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable
+** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable
** structure is associated with a single sqlite3* user of the schema.
-** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database
-** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the
+** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database
+** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the
** structure being xDisconnected and free). Any other VTable structures
-** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated
+** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated
** database connection.
*/
void sqlite3VtabClear(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
if( pTable->u.vtab.azArg ){
int iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTable->pSchema);
assert( iDb>=0 ); /* The database the table is being created in */
- sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName,
+ sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName,
pTable->u.vtab.azArg[0], pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName);
}
#endif
addArgumentToVtab(pParse);
pParse->sArg.z = 0;
if( pTab->u.vtab.nArg<1 ) return;
-
+
/* If the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement is being entered for the
** first time (in other words if the virtual table is actually being
** created now instead of just being read out of sqlite_schema) then
}
zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE %T", &pParse->sNameToken);
- /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
+ /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
** schema table. We just need to update that slot with all
- ** the information we've collected.
+ ** the information we've collected.
**
** The VM register number pParse->regRowid holds the rowid of an
- ** entry in the sqlite_schema table tht was created for this vtab
+ ** entry in the sqlite_schema table that was created for this vtab
** by sqlite3StartTable().
*/
iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
** to this procedure.
*/
static int vtabCallConstructor(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
Table *pTab,
Module *pMod,
int (*xConstruct)(sqlite3*,void*,int,const char*const*,sqlite3_vtab**,char**),
/* Check that the virtual-table is not already being initialized */
for(pCtx=db->pVtabCtx; pCtx; pCtx=pCtx->pPrior){
if( pCtx->pTab==pTab ){
- *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"vtable constructor called recursively: %s", pTab->zName
);
return SQLITE_LOCKED;
int iCol;
u16 oooHidden = 0;
/* If everything went according to plan, link the new VTable structure
- ** into the linked list headed by pTab->u.vtab.p. Then loop through the
+ ** into the linked list headed by pTab->u.vtab.p. Then loop through the
** columns of the table to see if any of them contain the token "hidden".
** If so, set the Column COLFLAG_HIDDEN flag and remove the token from
** the type string. */
/*
** This function is invoked by the parser to call the xConnect() method
-** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned
+** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned
** and an error left in pParse.
**
** This call is a no-op if table pTab is not a virtual table.
/*
** This function is invoked by the vdbe to call the xCreate method
-** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb.
+** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb.
**
** If an error occurs, *pzErr is set to point to an English language
** description of the error and an SQLITE_XXX error code is returned.
zMod = pTab->u.vtab.azArg[0];
pMod = (Module*)sqlite3HashFind(&db->aModule, zMod);
- /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method,
- ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an
+ /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method,
+ ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an
** error. Otherwise, do nothing.
*/
if( pMod==0 || pMod->pModule->xCreate==0 || pMod->pModule->xDestroy==0 ){
initBusy = db->init.busy;
db->init.busy = 0;
sParse.nQueryLoop = 1;
- if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(&sParse, zCreateTable)
+ if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(&sParse, zCreateTable)
&& ALWAYS(sParse.pNewTable!=0)
&& ALWAYS(!db->mallocFailed)
&& IsOrdinaryTable(sParse.pNewTable)
** called is identified by the second argument, "offset", which is
** the offset of the method to call in the sqlite3_module structure.
**
-** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks.
+** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks.
*/
static void callFinaliser(sqlite3 *db, int offset){
int i;
}
/*
-** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the
+** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the
** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
*/
int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){
}
/*
-** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the
+** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the
** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
*/
int sqlite3VtabCommit(sqlite3 *db){
/* Special case: If db->aVTrans is NULL and db->nVTrans is greater
** than zero, then this function is being called from within a
- ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to
+ ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to
** virtual module tables in this case, so return SQLITE_LOCKED.
*/
if( sqlite3VtabInSync(db) ){
}
if( !pVTab ){
return SQLITE_OK;
- }
+ }
pModule = pVTab->pVtab->pModule;
if( pModule->xBegin ){
}
}
- /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the
+ /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the
** sqlite3.aVTrans[] array. */
rc = growVTrans(db);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
** as the second argument to the virtual table method invoked.
**
** If op is SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, the xSavepoint method is invoked. If it is
-** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is
+** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is
** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the xRelease method of each virtual table with
** an open transaction is invoked.
**
-** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK,
+** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK,
** processing is abandoned and the error returned to the caller of this
** function immediately. If all calls to virtual table methods are successful,
** SQLITE_OK is returned.
** This routine is used to allow virtual table implementations to
** overload MATCH, LIKE, GLOB, and REGEXP operators.
**
-** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a
+** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a
** new FuncDef structure that is marked as ephemeral using the
** SQLITE_FUNC_EPHEM flag.
*/
assert( pVtab->pModule!=0 );
pMod = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule;
if( pMod->xFindFunction==0 ) return pDef;
-
+
/* Call the xFindFunction method on the virtual table implementation
** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function.
**
/*
** Check to see if virtual table module pMod can be have an eponymous
** virtual table instance. If it can, create one if one does not already
-** exist. Return non-zero if either the eponymous virtual table instance
+** exist. Return non-zero if either the eponymous virtual table instance
** exists when this routine returns or if an attempt to create it failed
** and an error message was left in pParse.
**
** An eponymous virtual table instance is one that is named after its
** module, and more importantly, does not require a CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE
-** statement in order to come into existance. Eponymous virtual table
+** statement in order to come into existence. Eponymous virtual table
** instances always exist. They cannot be DROP-ed.
**
** Any virtual table module for which xConnect and xCreate are the same
Table *pTab = pMod->pEpoTab;
if( pTab!=0 ){
/* Mark the table as Ephemeral prior to deleting it, so that the
- ** sqlite3DeleteTable() routine will know that it is not stored in
+ ** sqlite3DeleteTable() routine will know that it is not stored in
** the schema. */
pTab->tabFlags |= TF_Ephemeral;
sqlite3DeleteTable(db, pTab);
** within an xUpdate method.
*/
int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){
- static const unsigned char aMap[] = {
- SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE
+ static const unsigned char aMap[] = {
+ SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE
};
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ) return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
}
/*
-** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide
+** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide
** the SQLite core with additional information about the behavior
** of the virtual table being implemented.
*/
**
*************************************************************************
**
-** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in
+** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in
** "journal_mode=WAL" mode.
**
** WRITE-AHEAD LOG (WAL) FILE FORMAT
** Each frame records the revised content of a single page from the
** database file. All changes to the database are recorded by writing
** frames into the WAL. Transactions commit when a frame is written that
-** contains a commit marker. A single WAL can and usually does record
+** contains a commit marker. A single WAL can and usually does record
** multiple transactions. Periodically, the content of the WAL is
** transferred back into the database file in an operation called a
** "checkpoint".
**
** Immediately following the wal-header are zero or more frames. Each
** frame consists of a 24-byte frame-header followed by a <page-size> bytes
-** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned
+** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned
** integer values, as follows:
**
** 0: Page number.
-** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
+** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
** after the commit. For all other records, zero.
** 8: Salt-1 (copied from the header)
** 12: Salt-2 (copied from the header)
** the checksum. The checksum is computed by interpreting the input as
** an even number of unsigned 32-bit integers: x[0] through x[N]. The
** algorithm used for the checksum is as follows:
-**
+**
** for i from 0 to n-1 step 2:
** s0 += x[i] + s1;
** s1 += x[i+1] + s0;
**
** Note that s0 and s1 are both weighted checksums using fibonacci weights
** in reverse order (the largest fibonacci weight occurs on the first element
-** of the sequence being summed.) The s1 value spans all 32-bit
+** of the sequence being summed.) The s1 value spans all 32-bit
** terms of the sequence whereas s0 omits the final term.
**
** On a checkpoint, the WAL is first VFS.xSync-ed, then valid content of the
** multiple concurrent readers to view different versions of the database
** content simultaneously.
**
-** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but
+** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but
** because frames for page P can appear anywhere within the WAL, the
** reader has to scan the entire WAL looking for page P frames. If the
** WAL is large (multiple megabytes is typical) that scan can be slow,
** and read performance suffers. To overcome this problem, a separate
** data structure called the wal-index is maintained to expedite the
** search for frames of a particular page.
-**
+**
** WAL-INDEX FORMAT
**
** Conceptually, the wal-index is shared memory, though VFS implementations
** might choose to implement the wal-index using a mmapped file. Because
-** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL
+** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL
** on a network filesystem. All users of the database must be able to
** share memory.
**
** byte order of the host computer.
**
** The purpose of the wal-index is to answer this question quickly: Given
-** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the
+** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the
** last frame in the wal before frame M for page P in the WAL, or return
** NULL if there are no frames for page P in the WAL prior to M.
**
** The wal-index consists of a header region, followed by an one or
-** more index blocks.
+** more index blocks.
**
** The wal-index header contains the total number of frames within the WAL
** in the mxFrame field.
**
-** Each index block except for the first contains information on
+** Each index block except for the first contains information on
** HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames. The first index block contains information on
-** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and
+** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and
** HASHTABLE_NPAGE are selected so that together the wal-index header and
** first index block are the same size as all other index blocks in the
** wal-index. The values are:
** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE 4062
**
** Each index block contains two sections, a page-mapping that contains the
-** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table
+** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table
** that allows readers to query an index block for a specific page number.
** The page-mapping is an array of HASHTABLE_NPAGE (or HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE
-** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the
+** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the
** first index-block contains the database page number corresponding to the
** first frame in the WAL file. The first entry in the second index block
** in the WAL file corresponds to the (HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+1)th frame in
**
** The hash table consists of HASHTABLE_NSLOT 16-bit unsigned integers.
** HASHTABLE_NSLOT = 2*HASHTABLE_NPAGE, and there is one entry in the
-** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash
-** table is never more than half full. The expected number of collisions
+** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash
+** table is never more than half full. The expected number of collisions
** prior to finding a match is 1. Each entry of the hash table is an
** 1-based index of an entry in the mapping section of the same
** index block. Let K be the 1-based index of the largest entry in
** reached) until an unused hash slot is found. Let the first unused slot
** be at index iUnused. (iUnused might be less than iKey if there was
** wrap-around.) Because the hash table is never more than half full,
-** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry. Let
+** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry. Let
** iMax be the value between iKey and iUnused, closest to iUnused,
** where aHash[iMax]==P. If there is no iMax entry (if there exists
** no hash slot such that aHash[i]==p) then page P is not in the
** current index block. Otherwise the iMax-th mapping entry of the
-** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references
+** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references
** page P.
**
** A hash search begins with the last index block and moves toward the
** if no values greater than K0 had ever been inserted into the hash table
** in the first place - which is what reader one wants. Meanwhile, the
** second reader using K1 will see additional values that were inserted
-** later, which is exactly what reader two wants.
+** later, which is exactly what reader two wants.
**
** When a rollback occurs, the value of K is decreased. Hash table entries
** that correspond to frames greater than the new K value are removed
** values in the wal-header are correct and (b) the version field is not
** WAL_MAX_VERSION, recovery fails and SQLite returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN.
**
-** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the
+** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the
** checksum test is successful) and finds that the version field is not
** WALINDEX_MAX_VERSION, then no read-transaction is opened and SQLite
** returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN.
**
** Technically, the various VFSes are free to implement these locks however
** they see fit. However, compatibility is encouraged so that VFSes can
-** interoperate. The standard implemention used on both unix and windows
+** interoperate. The standard implementation used on both unix and windows
** is for the index number to indicate a byte offset into the
** WalCkptInfo.aLock[] array in the wal-index header. In other words, all
** locks are on the shm file. The WALINDEX_LOCK_OFFSET constant (which
**
** The szPage value can be any power of 2 between 512 and 32768, inclusive.
** Or it can be 1 to represent a 65536-byte page. The latter case was
-** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added.
+** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added.
*/
struct WalIndexHdr {
u32 iVersion; /* Wal-index version */
** There is one entry in aReadMark[] for each reader lock. If a reader
** holds read-lock K, then the value in aReadMark[K] is no greater than
** the mxFrame for that reader. The value READMARK_NOT_USED (0xffffffff)
-** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused. aReadMark[0] is
+** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused. aReadMark[0] is
** a special case; its value is never used and it exists as a place-holder
-** to avoid having to offset aReadMark[] indexs by one. Readers holding
+** to avoid having to offset aReadMark[] indexes by one. Readers holding
** WAL_READ_LOCK(0) always ignore the entire WAL and read all content
** directly from the database.
**
** previous sentence is when nBackfill equals mxFrame (meaning that everything
** in the WAL has been backfilled into the database) then new readers
** will choose aReadMark[0] which has value 0 and hence such reader will
-** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore
+** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore
** the WAL.
**
** Writers normally append new frames to the end of the WAL. However,
** big-endian format in the first 4 bytes of a WAL file.
**
** If the LSB is set, then the checksums for each frame within the WAL
-** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit
-** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting
+** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit
+** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting
** all data as 32-bit little-endian words.
*/
#define WAL_MAGIC 0x377f0682
/*
-** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file,
+** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file,
** assuming a database page size of szPage bytes. The offset returned
** is to the start of the write-ahead log frame-header.
*/
** Candidate values for Wal.exclusiveMode.
*/
#define WAL_NORMAL_MODE 0
-#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE 1
+#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE 1
#define WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE 2
/*
/*
** This structure is used to implement an iterator that loops through
** all frames in the WAL in database page order. Where two or more frames
-** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the
+** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the
** frame most recently written to the WAL (in other words, the frame with
** the largest index).
**
#define HASHTABLE_HASH_1 383 /* Should be prime */
#define HASHTABLE_NSLOT (HASHTABLE_NPAGE*2) /* Must be a power of 2 */
-/*
+/*
** The block of page numbers associated with the first hash-table in a
** wal-index is smaller than usual. This is so that there is a complete
** hash-table on each aligned 32KB page of the wal-index.
**
** (1) rc==SQLITE_OK and *ppPage==Requested-Wal-Index-Page
** (2) rc>=SQLITE_ERROR and *ppPage==NULL
-** (3) rc==SQLITE_OK and *ppPage==NULL // only if iPage==0
+** (3) rc==SQLITE_OK and *ppPage==NULL // only if iPage==0
**
** Scenario (3) can only occur when pWal->writeLock is false and iPage==0
*/
pWal->apWiData[iPage] = (u32 volatile *)sqlite3MallocZero(WALINDEX_PGSZ);
if( !pWal->apWiData[iPage] ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}else{
- rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ,
+ rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ,
pWal->writeLock, (void volatile **)&pWal->apWiData[iPage]
);
assert( pWal->apWiData[iPage]!=0
)
/*
-** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in
+** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in
** array aByte[] and the initial values of aIn[0] and aIn[1] (or
** initial values of 0 and 0 if aIn==NULL).
**
/*
** This function encodes a single frame header and writes it to a buffer
-** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of
+** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of
** 4-byte big-endian integers, as follows:
**
** 0: Page number.
-** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
+** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
** after the commit. For all other records, zero.
** 8: Salt-1 (copied from the wal-header)
** 12: Salt-2 (copied from the wal-header)
assert( WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE==24 );
/* A frame is only valid if the salt values in the frame-header
- ** match the salt values in the wal-header.
+ ** match the salt values in the wal-header.
*/
if( memcmp(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aFrame[8], 8)!=0 ){
return 0;
}
- /* A frame is only valid if the page number is creater than zero.
+ /* A frame is only valid if the page number is greater than zero.
*/
pgno = sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[0]);
if( pgno==0 ){
}
/* A frame is only valid if a checksum of the WAL header,
- ** all prior frams, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header,
- ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8
+ ** all prior frames, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header,
+ ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8
** bytes of this frame-header.
*/
nativeCksum = (pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN);
walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aFrame, 8, aCksum, aCksum);
walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aData, pWal->szPage, aCksum, aCksum);
- if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16])
- || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20])
+ if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16])
+ || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20])
){
/* Checksum failed. */
return 0;
}
}
#endif /*defined(SQLITE_TEST) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) */
-
+
/*
** Set or release locks on the WAL. Locks are either shared or exclusive.
u32 iZero; /* One less than the frame number of first indexed*/
};
-/*
+/*
** Return pointers to the hash table and page number array stored on
** page iHash of the wal-index. The wal-index is broken into 32KB pages
** numbered starting from 0.
**
** Set output variable pLoc->aHash to point to the start of the hash table
-** in the wal-index file. Set pLoc->iZero to one less than the frame
+** in the wal-index file. Set pLoc->iZero to one less than the frame
** number of the first frame indexed by this hash table. If a
-** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number
+** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number
** (pLoc->iZero+N) in the log.
**
** Finally, set pLoc->aPgno so that pLoc->aPgno[0] is the page number of the
/*
** Return the number of the wal-index page that contains the hash-table
** and page-number array that contain entries corresponding to WAL frame
-** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages
+** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages
** are numbered starting from 0.
*/
static int walFramePage(u32 iFrame){
if( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0 ) return;
- /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing
+ /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing
** the entry that corresponds to frame pWal->hdr.mxFrame. It is guaranteed
** that the page said hash-table and array reside on is already mapped.(1)
*/
sLoc.aHash[i] = 0;
}
}
-
+
/* Zero the entries in the aPgno array that correspond to frames with
- ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame.
+ ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame.
*/
nByte = (int)((char *)sLoc.aHash - (char *)&sLoc.aPgno[iLimit]);
assert( nByte>=0 );
idx = iFrame - sLoc.iZero;
assert( idx <= HASHTABLE_NSLOT/2 + 1 );
-
+
/* If this is the first entry to be added to this hash-table, zero the
- ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding.
+ ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding.
*/
if( idx==1 ){
int nByte = (int)((u8*)&sLoc.aHash[HASHTABLE_NSLOT] - (u8*)sLoc.aPgno);
/* If the entry in aPgno[] is already set, then the previous writer
** must have exited unexpectedly in the middle of a transaction (after
- ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory).
- ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from
+ ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory).
+ ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from
** the hash-table before writing any new entries.
*/
if( sLoc.aPgno[idx-1] ){
/*
-** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file.
+** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file.
**
** This routine first tries to establish an exclusive lock on the
** wal-index to prevent other threads/processes from doing anything
}
/* If the database page size is not a power of two, or is greater than
- ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid
+ ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid
** data. Similarly, if the 'magic' value is invalid, ignore the whole
** WAL file.
*/
magic = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[0]);
szPage = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[8]);
- if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC
- || szPage&(szPage-1)
- || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
- || szPage<512
+ if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC
+ || szPage&(szPage-1)
+ || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+ || szPage<512
){
goto finished;
}
memcpy(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aBuf[16], 8);
/* Verify that the WAL header checksum is correct */
- walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN,
+ walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN,
aBuf, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum
);
if( pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[24])
assert( aShare!=0 || rc!=SQLITE_OK );
if( aShare==0 ) break;
pWal->apWiData[iPg] = aPrivate;
-
+
for(iFrame=iFirst; iFrame<=iLast; iFrame++){
i64 iOffset = walFrameOffset(iFrame, szPage);
u32 pgno; /* Database page number for frame */
pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1] = aFrameCksum[1];
walIndexWriteHdr(pWal);
- /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is
- ** currently holding locks that exclude all other writers and
+ /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is
+ ** currently holding locks that exclude all other writers and
** checkpointers. Then set the values of read-mark slots 1 through N.
*/
pInfo = walCkptInfo(pWal);
}
}
-/*
-** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must
+/*
+** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must
** already be opened on connection pDbFd. The buffer that zWalName points
** to must remain valid for the lifetime of the returned Wal* handle.
**
** were to do this just after this client opened one of these files, the
** system would be badly broken.
**
-** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and
+** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and
** *ppWal is set to point to a new WAL handle. If an error occurs,
** an SQLite error code is returned and *ppWal is left unmodified.
*/
}
/*
-** Change the size to which the WAL file is trucated on each reset.
+** Change the size to which the WAL file is truncated on each reset.
*/
void sqlite3WalLimit(Wal *pWal, i64 iLimit){
if( pWal ) pWal->mxWalSize = iLimit;
ht_slot logpage;
Pgno dbpage;
- if( (iLeft<nLeft)
+ if( (iLeft<nLeft)
&& (iRight>=nRight || aContent[aLeft[iLeft]]<aContent[aRight[iRight]])
){
logpage = aLeft[iLeft++];
#endif
}
-/*
+/*
** Free an iterator allocated by walIteratorInit().
*/
static void walIteratorFree(WalIterator *p){
}
/*
-** Construct a WalInterator object that can be used to loop over all
+** Construct a WalInterator object that can be used to loop over all
** pages in the WAL following frame nBackfill in ascending order. Frames
** nBackfill or earlier may be included - excluding them is an optimization
** only. The caller must hold the checkpoint lock.
/* Allocate space for the WalIterator object. */
nSegment = walFramePage(iLast) + 1;
- nByte = sizeof(WalIterator)
+ nByte = sizeof(WalIterator)
+ (nSegment-1)*sizeof(struct WalSegment)
+ iLast*sizeof(ht_slot);
p = (WalIterator *)sqlite3_malloc64(nByte);
}
aIndex = &((ht_slot *)&p->aSegment[p->nSegment])[sLoc.iZero];
sLoc.iZero++;
-
+
for(j=0; j<nEntry; j++){
aIndex[j] = (ht_slot)j;
}
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SETLK_TIMEOUT
/*
** Attempt to enable blocking locks. Blocking locks are enabled only if (a)
-** they are supported by the VFS, and (b) the database handle is configured
-** with a busy-timeout. Return 1 if blocking locks are successfully enabled,
+** they are supported by the VFS, and (b) the database handle is configured
+** with a busy-timeout. Return 1 if blocking locks are successfully enabled,
** or 0 otherwise.
*/
static int walEnableBlocking(Wal *pWal){
/*
** If parameter bLock is true, attempt to enable blocking locks, take
** the WRITER lock, and then disable blocking locks. If blocking locks
-** cannot be enabled, no attempt to obtain the WRITER lock is made. Return
+** cannot be enabled, no attempt to obtain the WRITER lock is made. Return
** an SQLite error code if an error occurs, or SQLITE_OK otherwise. It is not
** an error if blocking locks can not be enabled.
**
** client to write to the database (which may be this one) does so by
** writing frames into the start of the log file.
**
-** The value of parameter salt1 is used as the aSalt[1] value in the
-** new wal-index header. It should be passed a pseudo-random value (i.e.
+** The value of parameter salt1 is used as the aSalt[1] value in the
+** new wal-index header. It should be passed a pseudo-random value (i.e.
** one obtained from sqlite3_randomness()).
*/
static void walRestartHdr(Wal *pWal, u32 salt1){
** that a concurrent reader might be using.
**
** All I/O barrier operations (a.k.a fsyncs) occur in this routine when
-** SQLite is in WAL-mode in synchronous=NORMAL. That means that if
-** checkpoints are always run by a background thread or background
+** SQLite is in WAL-mode in synchronous=NORMAL. That means that if
+** checkpoints are always run by a background thread or background
** process, foreground threads will never block on a lengthy fsync call.
**
** Fsync is called on the WAL before writing content out of the WAL and
** database file.
**
** This routine uses and updates the nBackfill field of the wal-index header.
-** This is the only routine that will increase the value of nBackfill.
+** This is the only routine that will increase the value of nBackfill.
** (A WAL reset or recovery will revert nBackfill to zero, but not increase
** its value.)
**
if( (nSize+65536+(i64)pWal->hdr.mxFrame*szPage)<nReq ){
/* If the size of the final database is larger than the current
** database plus the amount of data in the wal file, plus the
- ** maximum size of the pending-byte page (65536 bytes), then
+ ** maximum size of the pending-byte page (65536 bytes), then
** must be corruption somewhere. */
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}else{
}
/* If this is an SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART or TRUNCATE operation, and the
- ** entire wal file has been copied into the database file, then block
- ** until all readers have finished using the wal file. This ensures that
+ ** entire wal file has been copied into the database file, then block
+ ** until all readers have finished using the wal file. This ensures that
** the next process to write to the database restarts the wal file.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && eMode!=SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE ){
** writer clients should see that the entire log file has been
** checkpointed and behave accordingly. This seems unsafe though,
** as it would leave the system in a state where the contents of
- ** the wal-index header do not match the contents of the
+ ** the wal-index header do not match the contents of the
** file-system. To avoid this, update the wal-index header to
** indicate that the log file contains zero valid frames. */
walRestartHdr(pWal, salt1);
if( pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_NORMAL_MODE ){
pWal->exclusiveMode = WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE;
}
- rc = sqlite3WalCheckpoint(pWal, db,
+ rc = sqlite3WalCheckpoint(pWal, db,
SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, 0, 0, sync_flags, nBuf, zBuf, 0, 0
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
);
if( bPersist!=1 ){
/* Try to delete the WAL file if the checkpoint completed and
- ** fsyned (rc==SQLITE_OK) and if we are not in persistent-wal
+ ** fsynced (rc==SQLITE_OK) and if we are not in persistent-wal
** mode (!bPersist) */
isDelete = 1;
}else if( pWal->mxWalSize>=0 ){
if( memcmp(&h1, &h2, sizeof(h1))!=0 ){
return 1; /* Dirty read */
- }
+ }
if( h1.isInit==0 ){
return 1; /* Malformed header - probably all zeros */
}
** changed by this operation. If pWal->hdr is unchanged, set *pChanged
** to 0.
**
-** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK.
+** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK.
** Otherwise an SQLite error code.
*/
static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
int badHdr; /* True if a header read failed */
volatile u32 *page0; /* Chunk of wal-index containing header */
- /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the
+ /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the
** wal-index header) is mapped. Return early if an error occurs here.
*/
assert( pChanged );
/* If the first page of the wal-index has been mapped, try to read the
** wal-index header immediately, without holding any lock. This usually
- ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently
+ ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently
** being modified by another thread or process.
*/
badHdr = (page0 ? walIndexTryHdr(pWal, pChanged) : 1);
**
** The *-wal file has been read and an appropriate wal-index has been
** constructed in pWal->apWiData[] using heap memory instead of shared
-** memory.
+** memory.
**
** If this function returns SQLITE_OK, then the read transaction has
-** been successfully opened. In this case output variable (*pChanged)
+** been successfully opened. In this case output variable (*pChanged)
** is set to true before returning if the caller should discard the
-** contents of the page cache before proceeding. Or, if it returns
-** WAL_RETRY, then the heap memory wal-index has been discarded and
-** the caller should retry opening the read transaction from the
-** beginning (including attempting to map the *-shm file).
+** contents of the page cache before proceeding. Or, if it returns
+** WAL_RETRY, then the heap memory wal-index has been discarded and
+** the caller should retry opening the read transaction from the
+** beginning (including attempting to map the *-shm file).
**
** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned.
*/
** the caller. */
aSaveCksum[0] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0];
aSaveCksum[1] = pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1];
- for(iOffset=walFrameOffset(pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1, pWal->szPage);
- iOffset+szFrame<=szWal;
+ for(iOffset=walFrameOffset(pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1, pWal->szPage);
+ iOffset+szFrame<=szWal;
iOffset+=szFrame
){
u32 pgno; /* Database page number for frame */
**
** The useWal parameter is true to force the use of the WAL and disable
** the case where the WAL is bypassed because it has been completely
-** checkpointed. If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr()
-** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr. If the
-** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication
-** to the caller that the local page cache is obsolete and needs to be
+** checkpointed. If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr()
+** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr. If the
+** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication
+** to the caller that the local page cache is obsolete and needs to be
** flushed.) When useWal==1, the wal-index header is assumed to already
** be loaded and the pChanged parameter is unused.
**
** bad luck when there is lots of contention for the wal-index, but that
** possibility is so small that it can be safely neglected, we believe.
**
-** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on
+** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on
** WAL_READ_LOCK(pWal->readLock). The pWal->readLock integer is
** in the range 0 <= pWal->readLock < WAL_NREADER. If pWal->readLock==(-1)
** that means the Wal does not hold any read lock. The reader must not
**
** Circumstances that cause a RETRY should only last for the briefest
** instances of time. No I/O or other system calls are done while the
- ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But
+ ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But
** if we are unlucky, another process that is holding a lock might get
- ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve,
+ ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve,
** during the few nanoseconds that it is holding the lock. In that case,
** it might take longer than normal for the lock to free.
**
** After 5 RETRYs, we begin calling sqlite3OsSleep(). The first few
** calls to sqlite3OsSleep() have a delay of 1 microsecond. Really this
** is more of a scheduler yield than an actual delay. But on the 10th
- ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer,
+ ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer,
** so that on the 100th (and last) RETRY we delay for 323 milliseconds.
** The total delay time before giving up is less than 10 seconds.
*/
if( pWal->apWiData[0]==0 ){
/* This branch is taken when the xShmMap() method returns SQLITE_BUSY.
** We assume this is a transient condition, so return WAL_RETRY. The
- ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS
- ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the
- ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region
+ ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS
+ ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the
+ ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region
** must be zeroed before the requested page is returned.
*/
rc = WAL_RETRY;
** snapshot. Since holding READ_LOCK(0) prevents a checkpoint from
** happening, this is usually correct.
**
- ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log
+ ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log
** is wrapped and written for that matter) before the READ_LOCK(0)
** is obtained, that is not necessarily true. A checkpointer may
** have started to backfill the appended frames but crashed before
** to read any frames earlier than minFrame from the wal file - they
** can be safely read directly from the database file.
**
- ** Because a ShmBarrier() call is made between taking the copy of
+ ** Because a ShmBarrier() call is made between taking the copy of
** nBackfill and checking that the wal-header in shared-memory still
- ** matches the one cached in pWal->hdr, it is guaranteed that the
+ ** matches the one cached in pWal->hdr, it is guaranteed that the
** checkpointer that set nBackfill was not working with a wal-index
** header newer than that cached in pWal->hdr. If it were, that could
** cause a problem. The checkpointer could omit to checkpoint
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
/*
-** Attempt to reduce the value of the WalCkptInfo.nBackfillAttempted
+** Attempt to reduce the value of the WalCkptInfo.nBackfillAttempted
** variable so that older snapshots can be accessed. To do this, loop
-** through all wal frames from nBackfillAttempted to (nBackfill+1),
+** through all wal frames from nBackfillAttempted to (nBackfill+1),
** comparing their content to the corresponding page with the database
** file, if any. Set nBackfillAttempted to the frame number of the
** first frame for which the wal file content matches the db file.
**
-** This is only really safe if the file-system is such that any page
-** writes made by earlier checkpointers were atomic operations, which
+** This is only really safe if the file-system is such that any page
+** writes made by earlier checkpointers were atomic operations, which
** is not always true. It is also possible that nBackfillAttempted
** may be left set to a value larger than expected, if a wal frame
** contains content that duplicate of an earlier version of the same
bChanged = 1;
}
- /* It is possible that there is a checkpointer thread running
+ /* It is possible that there is a checkpointer thread running
** concurrent with this code. If this is the case, it may be that the
- ** checkpointer has already determined that it will checkpoint
- ** snapshot X, where X is later in the wal file than pSnapshot, but
- ** has not yet set the pInfo->nBackfillAttempted variable to indicate
+ ** checkpointer has already determined that it will checkpoint
+ ** snapshot X, where X is later in the wal file than pSnapshot, but
+ ** has not yet set the pInfo->nBackfillAttempted variable to indicate
** its intent. To avoid the race condition this leads to, ensure that
- ** there is no checkpointer process by taking a shared CKPT lock
+ ** there is no checkpointer process by taking a shared CKPT lock
** before checking pInfo->nBackfillAttempted. */
(void)walEnableBlocking(pWal);
rc = walLockShared(pWal, WAL_CKPT_LOCK);
/* A client using a non-current snapshot may not ignore any frames
** from the start of the wal file. This is because, for a system
** where (minFrame < iSnapshot < maxFrame), a checkpointer may
- ** have omitted to checkpoint a frame earlier than minFrame in
+ ** have omitted to checkpoint a frame earlier than minFrame in
** the file because there exists a frame after iSnapshot that
** is the same database page. */
pWal->minFrame = 1;
/* If the "last page" field of the wal-index header snapshot is 0, then
** no data will be read from the wal under any circumstances. Return early
- ** in this case as an optimization. Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0,
- ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the
+ ** in this case as an optimization. Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0,
+ ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the
** WAL were empty.
*/
if( iLast==0 || (pWal->readLock==0 && pWal->bShmUnreliable==0) ){
** hash table (each hash table indexes up to HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames).
**
** This code might run concurrently to the code in walIndexAppend()
- ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash
- ** table). This means the value just read from the hash
- ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the
+ ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash
+ ** table). This means the value just read from the hash
+ ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the
** current read transaction was opened. Values added after the
** read transaction was opened may have been written incorrectly -
** i.e. these slots may contain garbage data. However, we assume
** opened remain unmodified.
**
** For the reasons above, the if(...) condition featured in the inner
- ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required
+ ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required
** if we had exclusive access to the hash-table:
**
- ** (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno):
+ ** (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno):
** This condition filters out normal hash-table collisions.
**
- ** (iFrame<=iLast):
+ ** (iFrame<=iLast):
** This condition filters out entries that were added to the hash
** table after the current read-transaction had started.
*/
return sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, pOut, (nOut>sz ? sz : nOut), iOffset);
}
-/*
+/*
** Return the size of the database in pages (or zero, if unknown).
*/
Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){
}
-/*
+/*
** This function starts a write transaction on the WAL.
**
** A read transaction must have already been started by a prior call
if( ALWAYS(pWal->writeLock) ){
Pgno iMax = pWal->hdr.mxFrame;
Pgno iFrame;
-
+
/* Restore the clients cache of the wal-index header to the state it
- ** was in before the client began writing to the database.
+ ** was in before the client began writing to the database.
*/
memcpy(&pWal->hdr, (void *)walIndexHdr(pWal), sizeof(WalIndexHdr));
- for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1;
- ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax;
+ for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1;
+ ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax;
iFrame++
){
/* This call cannot fail. Unless the page for which the page number
- ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and
+ ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and
** (b) has an outstanding reference, then xUndo is either a no-op
** (if (a) is false) or simply expels the page from the cache (if (b)
** is false).
return rc;
}
-/*
-** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32
-** values. This function populates the array with values required to
-** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current
+/*
+** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32
+** values. This function populates the array with values required to
+** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current
** point in the event of a savepoint rollback (via WalSavepointUndo()).
*/
void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){
aWalData[3] = pWal->nCkpt;
}
-/*
+/*
** Move the write position of the WAL back to the point identified by
** the values in the aWalData[] array. aWalData must point to an array
** of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 values that has been previously populated
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Write a set of frames to the log. The caller must hold the write-lock
** on the log file (obtained using sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction()).
*/
walChecksumBytes(1, aWalHdr, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, aCksum);
sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[24], aCksum[0]);
sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[28], aCksum[1]);
-
+
pWal->szPage = szPage;
pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum = SQLITE_BIGENDIAN;
pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0] = aCksum[0];
/* Check if this page has already been written into the wal file by
** the current transaction. If so, overwrite the existing frame and
- ** set Wal.writeLock to WAL_WRITELOCK_RECKSUM - indicating that
+ ** set Wal.writeLock to WAL_WRITELOCK_RECKSUM - indicating that
** checksums must be recomputed when the transaction is committed. */
if( iFirst && (p->pDirty || isCommit==0) ){
u32 iWrite = 0;
pWal->truncateOnCommit = 0;
}
- /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the
+ /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the
** wal-index to do this as the SQLITE_SHM_WRITE lock held on the wal-index
** guarantees that there are no other writers, and no data that may
** be in use by existing readers is being overwritten.
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** This routine is called to implement sqlite3_wal_checkpoint() and
** related interfaces.
**
sqlite3WalDb(pWal, db);
(void)walEnableBlocking(pWal);
- /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-62028-47212 All calls obtain an exclusive
+ /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-62028-47212 All calls obtain an exclusive
** "checkpoint" lock on the database file.
** EVIDENCE-OF: R-10421-19736 If any other process is running a
** checkpoint operation at the same time, the lock cannot be obtained and
}
if( isChanged ){
- /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was
+ /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was
** performed, then the pager-cache associated with pWal is now
** out of date. So zero the cached wal-index header to ensure that
** next time the pager opens a snapshot on this database it knows that
** operation must occur while the pager is still holding the exclusive
** lock on the main database file.
**
-** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into
+** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into
** locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE. This means that the pWal->readLock must
** be released. Return 1 if the transition is made and 0 if the
** WAL is already in exclusive-locking mode - meaning that this
assert( pWal->writeLock==0 );
assert( pWal->exclusiveMode!=WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE || op==-1 );
- /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a
- ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot
+ /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a
+ ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot
** happen if the connection is actually in exclusive mode (as no xShmLock
** locks are taken in this case). Nor should the pager attempt to
** upgrade to exclusive-mode following such an error.
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return true if the argument is non-NULL and the WAL module is using
** heap-memory for the wal-index. Otherwise, if the argument is NULL or the
-** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false.
+** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false.
*/
int sqlite3WalHeapMemory(Wal *pWal){
return (pWal && pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE );
/* Try to open on pSnapshot when the next read-transaction starts
*/
void sqlite3WalSnapshotOpen(
- Wal *pWal,
+ Wal *pWal,
sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot
){
pWal->pSnapshot = (WalIndexHdr*)pSnapshot;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return a +ve value if snapshot p1 is newer than p2. A -ve value if
** p1 is older than p2 and zero if p1 and p2 are the same snapshot.
*/
/*
** The caller currently has a read transaction open on the database.
** This function takes a SHARED lock on the CHECKPOINTER slot and then
-** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still
+** checks if the snapshot passed as the second argument is still
** available. If so, SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** If the snapshot is not available, SQLITE_ERROR is returned. Or, if
}
/* Increase the walkerDepth when entering a subquery, and
-** descrease when leaving the subquery.
+** decrease when leaving the subquery.
*/
int sqlite3WalkerDepthIncrease(Walker *pWalker, Select *pSelect){
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pSelect);
** be the continuation for the inner-most loop.
**
** It is always safe for this routine to return the continuation of the
-** inner-most loop, in the sense that a correct answer will result.
+** inner-most loop, in the sense that a correct answer will result.
** Returning the continuation the second inner loop is an optimization
** that might make the code run a little faster, but should not change
** the final answer.
int sqlite3WhereOrderByLimitOptLabel(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
WhereLevel *pInner;
if( !pWInfo->bOrderedInnerLoop ){
- /* The ORDER BY LIMIT optimization does not apply. Jump to the
+ /* The ORDER BY LIMIT optimization does not apply. Jump to the
** continuation of the inner-most loop. */
return pWInfo->iContinue;
}
** operate directly on the rowids returned by a WHERE clause. Return
** ONEPASS_SINGLE (1) if the statement can operation directly because only
** a single row is to be changed. Return ONEPASS_MULTI (2) if the one-pass
-** optimization can be used on multiple
+** optimization can be used on multiple
**
** If the ONEPASS optimization is used (if this routine returns true)
** then also write the indices of open cursors used by ONEPASS
** if pIdx!=0 and <op> is one of the WO_xx operator codes specified by
** the op parameter. Return a pointer to the term. Return 0 if not found.
**
-** If pIdx!=0 then it must be one of the indexes of table iCur.
+** If pIdx!=0 then it must be one of the indexes of table iCur.
** Search for terms matching the iColumn-th column of pIdx
** rather than the iColumn-th column of table iCur.
**
){
Table *pTab;
Index *pIdx;
- int i;
+ int i;
int iBase;
/* If there is more than one table or sub-select in the FROM clause of
- ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT
+ ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT
** clause is redundant. */
if( pTabList->nSrc!=1 ) return 0;
iBase = pTabList->a[0].iCursor;
pTab = pTabList->a[0].pTab;
- /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return
+ /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return
** true. Note: The (p->iTable==iBase) part of this test may be false if the
** current SELECT is a correlated sub-query.
*/
** Convert OP_Column opcodes to OP_Copy in previously generated code.
**
** This routine runs over generated VDBE code and translates OP_Column
-** opcodes into OP_Copy when the table is being accessed via co-routine
+** opcodes into OP_Copy when the table is being accessed via co-routine
** instead of via table lookup.
**
** If the iAutoidxCur is not zero, then any OP_Rowid instructions on
}
return 1;
}
-
+
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOMATIC_INDEX
**
** This is only required if sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() is enabled, to
** associate an SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NCYCLE and SQLITE_SCANSTAT_NLOOP
-** values with. In order to avoid breaking legacy code and test cases,
+** values with. In order to avoid breaking legacy code and test cases,
** the OP_Explain is not added if this is an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN command.
*/
static void explainAutomaticIndex(
}
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrTop);
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRecord);
-
+
/* Jump here when skipping the initialization */
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrInit);
sqlite3VdbeScanStatusRange(v, addrExp, addrExp, -1);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
/*
-** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the
+** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the
** responsibility of the caller to eventually release the structure
** by passing the pointer returned by this function to freeIndexInfo().
*/
const Table *pTab;
int eDistinct = 0;
ExprList *pOrderBy = pWInfo->pOrderBy;
-
+
assert( pSrc!=0 );
pTab = pSrc->pTab;
assert( pTab!=0 );
pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_OK;
}
- /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current
+ /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current
** virtual table then allocate space for the aOrderBy part of
** the sqlite3_index_info structure.
*/
assert( pTerm->eOperator&(WO_IN|WO_EQ|WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE|WO_AUX) );
if( op & (WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE)
- && sqlite3ExprIsVector(pTerm->pExpr->pRight)
+ && sqlite3ExprIsVector(pTerm->pExpr->pRight)
){
testcase( j!=i );
if( j<16 ) mNoOmit |= (1 << j);
** Return the index of the sample that is the smallest sample that
** is greater than or equal to pRec. Note that this index is not an index
** into the aSample[] array - it is an index into a virtual set of samples
-** based on the contents of aSample[] and the number of fields in record
-** pRec.
+** based on the contents of aSample[] and the number of fields in record
+** pRec.
*/
static int whereKeyStats(
Parse *pParse, /* Database connection */
assert( pRec!=0 );
assert( pIdx->nSample>0 );
assert( pRec->nField>0 );
-
+
/* Do a binary search to find the first sample greater than or equal
** to pRec. If pRec contains a single field, the set of samples to search
** consider prefixes of those samples. For example, if the set of samples
** in aSample is:
**
- ** aSample[0] = (a, 5)
- ** aSample[1] = (a, 10)
- ** aSample[2] = (b, 5)
- ** aSample[3] = (c, 100)
+ ** aSample[0] = (a, 5)
+ ** aSample[1] = (a, 10)
+ ** aSample[2] = (b, 5)
+ ** aSample[3] = (c, 100)
** aSample[4] = (c, 105)
**
- ** Then the search space should ideally be the samples above and the
- ** unique prefixes [a], [b] and [c]. But since that is hard to organize,
+ ** Then the search space should ideally be the samples above and the
+ ** unique prefixes [a], [b] and [c]. But since that is hard to organize,
** the code actually searches this set:
**
- ** 0: (a)
- ** 1: (a, 5)
- ** 2: (a, 10)
- ** 3: (a, 10)
- ** 4: (b)
- ** 5: (b, 5)
- ** 6: (c)
- ** 7: (c, 100)
+ ** 0: (a)
+ ** 1: (a, 5)
+ ** 2: (a, 10)
+ ** 3: (a, 10)
+ ** 4: (b)
+ ** 5: (b, 5)
+ ** 6: (c)
+ ** 7: (c, 100)
** 8: (c, 105)
** 9: (c, 105)
**
** For each sample in the aSample[] array, N samples are present in the
- ** effective sample array. In the above, samples 0 and 1 are based on
+ ** effective sample array. In the above, samples 0 and 1 are based on
** sample aSample[0]. Samples 2 and 3 on aSample[1] etc.
**
** Often, sample i of each block of N effective samples has (i+1) fields.
** Except, each sample may be extended to ensure that it is greater than or
- ** equal to the previous sample in the array. For example, in the above,
- ** sample 2 is the first sample of a block of N samples, so at first it
- ** appears that it should be 1 field in size. However, that would make it
- ** smaller than sample 1, so the binary search would not work. As a result,
- ** it is extended to two fields. The duplicates that this creates do not
+ ** equal to the previous sample in the array. For example, in the above,
+ ** sample 2 is the first sample of a block of N samples, so at first it
+ ** appears that it should be 1 field in size. However, that would make it
+ ** smaller than sample 1, so the binary search would not work. As a result,
+ ** it is extended to two fields. The duplicates that this creates do not
** cause any problems.
*/
if( !HasRowid(pIdx->pTable) && IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ){
iSamp = iTest / nField;
if( iSamp>0 ){
/* The proposed effective sample is a prefix of sample aSample[iSamp].
- ** Specifically, the shortest prefix of at least (1 + iTest%nField)
+ ** Specifically, the shortest prefix of at least (1 + iTest%nField)
** fields that is greater than the previous effective sample. */
for(n=(iTest % nField) + 1; n<nField; n++){
if( aSample[iSamp-1].anLt[n-1]!=aSample[iSamp].anLt[n-1] ) break;
assert( i<pIdx->nSample );
assert( iCol==nField-1 );
pRec->nField = nField;
- assert( 0==sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)
- || pParse->db->mallocFailed
+ assert( 0==sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)
+ || pParse->db->mallocFailed
);
}else{
/* Unless i==pIdx->nSample, indicating that pRec is larger than
** (iCol+1) field prefix of sample i. */
assert( i<=pIdx->nSample && i>=0 );
pRec->nField = iCol+1;
- assert( i==pIdx->nSample
+ assert( i==pIdx->nSample
|| sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)>0
|| pParse->db->mallocFailed );
aStat[0] = aSample[i].anLt[iCol];
aStat[1] = aSample[i].anEq[iCol];
}else{
- /* At this point, the (iCol+1) field prefix of aSample[i] is the first
+ /* At this point, the (iCol+1) field prefix of aSample[i] is the first
** sample that is greater than pRec. Or, if i==pIdx->nSample then pRec
** is larger than all samples in the array. */
tRowcnt iUpper, iGap;
/*
** If it is not NULL, pTerm is a term that provides an upper or lower
-** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated
+** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated
** that the scan will visit nNew rows. This function returns the number
** estimated to be visited after taking pTerm into account.
**
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4
-/*
+/*
** This function is called to estimate the number of rows visited by a
** range-scan on a skip-scan index. For example:
**
** CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a, b, c);
** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=? AND c BETWEEN ? AND ?;
**
-** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows
-** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate
+** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows
+** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate
** by some factor to account for the (c BETWEEN ? AND ?) expression based
-** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be peformed multiple
-** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with
+** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be performed multiple
+** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with
** by the caller.
**
** It does this by scanning through all stat4 samples, comparing values
** estimate of the number of rows delivered remains unchanged), *pbDone
** is left as is.
**
-** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise,
+** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise,
** SQLITE_OK.
*/
static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
u8 aff = sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(db, p, nEq);
CollSeq *pColl;
-
+
sqlite3_value *p1 = 0; /* Value extracted from pLower */
sqlite3_value *p2 = 0; /* Value extracted from pUpper */
sqlite3_value *pVal = 0; /* Value extracted from record */
nDiff = (nUpper - nLower);
if( nDiff<=0 ) nDiff = 1;
- /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the
+ /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the
** comparisons indicate that they are close together, use the fallback
** method (assume that the scan visits 1/64 of the rows) for estimating
** the number of rows visited. Otherwise, estimate the number of rows
**
** ... FROM t1 WHERE a = ? AND b > ? AND b < ? ...
**
-** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second
+** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second
** left-most column of the index). Or, if the query is:
**
** ... FROM t1 WHERE a > ? AND a < ? ...
** then nEq is set to 0.
**
** When this function is called, *pnOut is set to the sqlite3LogEst() of the
-** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without
-** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, then *pnOut is the number of
+** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without
+** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, then *pnOut is the number of
** rows in the index. Assuming no error occurs, *pnOut is adjusted (reduced)
** to account for the range constraints pLower and pUpper.
-**
+**
** In the absence of sqlite_stat4 ANALYZE data, or if such data cannot be
-** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4.
+** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4.
** and a pair of constraints (x>? AND x<?) reduces the expected number of
** rows visited by a factor of 64.
*/
int nBtm = pLoop->u.btree.nBtm;
int nTop = pLoop->u.btree.nTop;
- /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in
+ /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in
** the index that are less than the lower bound of the range query. The
** lower bound being the concatenation of $P and $L, where $P is the
** key-prefix formed by the nEq values matched against the nEq left-most
** Or, if pLower is NULL or $L cannot be extracted from it (because it
** is not a simple variable or literal value), the lower bound of the
** range is $P. Due to a quirk in the way whereKeyStats() works, even
- ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and
+ ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and
** ($P:$L) and the larger of the two returned values is used.
**
** Similarly, iUpper is to be set to the estimate of the number of rows
iLower = 0;
iUpper = p->nRowEst0;
}else{
- /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must
+ /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must
** have been requested when testing key $P in whereEqualScanEst(). */
whereKeyStats(pParse, p, pRec, 0, a);
iLower = a[0];
** reduced by an additional 75%. This means that, by default, an open-ended
** range query (e.g. col > ?) is assumed to match 1/4 of the rows in the
** index. While a closed range (e.g. col BETWEEN ? AND ?) is estimated to
- ** match 1/64 of the index. */
+ ** match 1/64 of the index. */
if( pLower && pLower->truthProb>0 && pUpper && pUpper->truthProb>0 ){
nNew -= 20;
}
** for that index. When pExpr==NULL that means the constraint is
** "x IS NULL" instead of "x=VALUE".
**
-** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
+** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return
** non-zero.
**
WHERETRACE(0x20,("equality scan regions %s(%d): %d\n",
p->zName, nEq-1, (int)a[1]));
*pnRow = a[1];
-
+
return rc;
}
#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 */
**
** WHERE x IN (1,2,3,4)
**
-** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
+** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return
** non-zero.
**
sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left={%d:%d}",
pTerm->leftCursor, pTerm->u.x.leftColumn);
}else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0 && pTerm->u.pOrInfo!=0 ){
- sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"indexable=0x%llx",
+ sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"indexable=0x%llx",
pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable);
}else{
sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left=%d", pTerm->leftCursor);
/*
** Return TRUE if all of the following are true:
**
-** (1) X has the same or lower cost, or returns the same or fewer rows,
+** (1) X has the same or lower cost, or returns the same or fewer rows,
** than Y.
** (2) X uses fewer WHERE clause terms than Y
** (3) Every WHERE clause term used by X is also used by Y
**
** Conditions (2) and (3) mean that X is a "proper subset" of Y.
** If X is a proper subset of Y then Y is a better choice and ought
-** to have a lower cost. This routine returns TRUE when that cost
+** to have a lower cost. This routine returns TRUE when that cost
** relationship is inverted and needs to be adjusted. Constraint (4)
** was added because if X uses skip-scan less than Y it still might
** deserve a lower cost even if it is a proper subset of Y. Constraint (5)
}
if( j<0 ) return 0; /* X not a subset of Y since term X[i] not used by Y */
}
- if( (pX->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
+ if( (pX->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
&& (pY->wsFlags&WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 ){
return 0; /* Constraint (5) */
}
if( p->iTab!=pTemplate->iTab ) continue;
if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)==0 ) continue;
if( whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(p, pTemplate) ){
- /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its
+ /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its
** subset p. */
WHERETRACE(0x80,("subset cost adjustment %d,%d to %d,%d\n",
- pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut,
+ pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut,
MIN(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun),
MIN(p->nOut - 1, pTemplate->nOut)));
pTemplate->rRun = MIN(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun);
/* Adjust pTemplate cost upward so that it is costlier than p since
** pTemplate is a proper subset of p */
WHERETRACE(0x80,("subset cost adjustment %d,%d to %d,%d\n",
- pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut,
+ pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut,
MAX(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun),
MAX(p->nOut + 1, pTemplate->nOut)));
pTemplate->rRun = MAX(p->rRun, pTemplate->rRun);
/* In the current implementation, the rSetup value is either zero
** or the cost of building an automatic index (NlogN) and the NlogN
** is the same for compatible WhereLoops. */
- assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0
+ assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0
|| p->rSetup==pTemplate->rSetup );
/* whereLoopAddBtree() always generates and inserts the automatic index
** rSetup. Call this SETUP-INVARIANT */
assert( p->rSetup>=pTemplate->rSetup );
- /* Any loop using an appliation-defined index (or PRIMARY KEY or
+ /* Any loop using an application-defined index (or PRIMARY KEY or
** UNIQUE constraint) with one or more == constraints is better
** than an automatic index. Unless it is a skip-scan. */
if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_AUTO_INDEX)!=0
**
** When accumulating multiple loops (when pBuilder->pOrSet is NULL) we
** still might overwrite similar loops with the new template if the
-** new template is better. Loops may be overwritten if the following
+** new template is better. Loops may be overwritten if the following
** conditions are met:
**
** (1) They have the same iTab.
sqlite3WhereLoopPrint(pTemplate, pBuilder->pWC);
}
#endif
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}else{
p = *ppPrev;
}
}else{
/* We will be overwriting WhereLoop p[]. But before we do, first
** go through the rest of the list and delete any other entries besides
- ** p[] that are also supplated by pTemplate */
+ ** p[] that are also supplanted by pTemplate */
WhereLoop **ppTail = &p->pNextLoop;
WhereLoop *pToDel;
while( *ppTail ){
}
}
-/*
+/*
** Term pTerm is a vector range comparison operation. The first comparison
** in the vector can be optimized using column nEq of the index. This
** function returns the total number of vector elements that can be used
nCmp = MIN(nCmp, (pIdx->nColumn - nEq));
for(i=1; i<nCmp; i++){
- /* Test if comparison i of pTerm is compatible with column (i+nEq)
+ /* Test if comparison i of pTerm is compatible with column (i+nEq)
** of the index. If not, exit the loop. */
char aff; /* Comparison affinity */
char idxaff = 0; /* Indexed columns affinity */
** the right column of the right source table. And that the sort
** order of the index column is the same as the sort order of the
** leftmost index column. */
- if( pLhs->op!=TK_COLUMN
- || pLhs->iTable!=iCur
- || pLhs->iColumn!=pIdx->aiColumn[i+nEq]
+ if( pLhs->op!=TK_COLUMN
+ || pLhs->iTable!=iCur
+ || pLhs->iColumn!=pIdx->aiColumn[i+nEq]
|| pIdx->aSortOrder[i+nEq]!=pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]
){
break;
}
/*
-** Adjust the cost C by the costMult facter T. This only occurs if
+** Adjust the cost C by the costMult factor T. This only occurs if
** compiled with -DSQLITE_ENABLE_COSTMULT
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COSTMULT
#endif
/*
-** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the
+** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the
** index pIndex. Try to match one more.
**
-** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the
-** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq
-** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this
+** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the
+** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq
+** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this
** function returns.
**
-** If pProbe->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_IPK, that means pIndex is
+** If pProbe->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_IPK, that means pIndex is
** a fake index used for the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY.
*/
static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
pNew->prereq = (saved_prereq | pTerm->prereqRight) & ~pNew->maskSelf;
assert( nInMul==0
- || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0
- || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0
- || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0
+ || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0
+ || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0
+ || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0
);
if( eOp & WO_IN ){
/* Let:
** N = the total number of rows in the table
** K = the number of entries on the RHS of the IN operator
- ** M = the number of rows in the table that match terms to the
+ ** M = the number of rows in the table that match terms to the
** to the left in the same index. If the IN operator is on
** the left-most index column, M==N.
**
int iCol = pProbe->aiColumn[saved_nEq];
pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_COLUMN_EQ;
assert( saved_nEq==pNew->u.btree.nEq );
- if( iCol==XN_ROWID
+ if( iCol==XN_ROWID
|| (iCol>=0 && nInMul==0 && saved_nEq==pProbe->nKeyCol-1)
){
- if( iCol==XN_ROWID || pProbe->uniqNotNull
- || (pProbe->nKeyCol==1 && pProbe->onError && eOp==WO_EQ)
+ if( iCol==XN_ROWID || pProbe->uniqNotNull
+ || (pProbe->nKeyCol==1 && pProbe->onError && eOp==WO_EQ)
){
pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_ONEROW;
}else{
/* At this point pNew->nOut is set to the number of rows expected to
** be visited by the index scan before considering term pTerm, or the
- ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all
+ ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all
** "x IN(...)" terms are replaced with "x = ?". This block updates
** the value of pNew->nOut to account for pTerm (but not nIn/nInMul). */
assert( pNew->nOut==saved_nOut );
}else{
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4
tRowcnt nOut = 0;
- if( nInMul==0
- && pProbe->nSample
+ if( nInMul==0
+ && pProbe->nSample
&& ALWAYS(pNew->u.btree.nEq<=pProbe->nSampleCol)
&& ((eOp & WO_IN)==0 || ExprUseXList(pTerm->pExpr))
&& OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_Stat4)
{
pNew->nOut += (pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq] - pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq-1]);
if( eOp & WO_ISNULL ){
- /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a
- ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows
+ /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a
+ ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows
** as (col=?). */
pNew->nOut += 10;
}
assert( pSrc->pTab->szTabRow>0 );
if( pProbe->idxType==SQLITE_IDXTYPE_IPK ){
/* The pProbe->szIdxRow is low for an IPK table since the interior
- ** pages are small. Thuse szIdxRow gives a good estimate of seek cost.
+ ** pages are small. Thus szIdxRow gives a good estimate of seek cost.
** But the leaf pages are full-size, so pProbe->szIdxRow would badly
** under-estimate the scanning cost. */
rCostIdx = pNew->nOut + 16;
/* Consider using a skip-scan if there are no WHERE clause constraints
** available for the left-most terms of the index, and if the average
- ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18.
+ ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18.
**
** The magic number 18 is selected on the basis that scanning 17 rows
** is almost always quicker than an index seek (even though if the index
** contains fewer than 2^17 rows we assume otherwise in other parts of
- ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower.
+ ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower.
** On the other hand, the extra seeks could end up being significantly
** more expensive. */
assert( 42==sqlite3LogEst(18) );
** all columns less than 63 (really BMS-1) are covered, so we don't need
** to check them. But we do need to check any column at 63 or greater.
**
-** If the index does not cover the column, then set pWalk->eCode to
+** If the index does not cover the column, then set pWalk->eCode to
** non-zero and return WRC_Abort to stop the search.
**
** If this node does not disprove that the index can be a covering index,
** cost = nRow * K // scan of covering index
** cost = nRow * (K+3.0) // scan of non-covering index
**
-** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative
+** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative
** estimated average size of the index and table records.
**
** For an index scan, where nVisit is the number of index rows visited
-** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on
+** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on
** the index b-tree:
**
** cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + K * nVisit) // covering index
** cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + (K+3.0) * nVisit) // non-covering index
**
-** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the
-** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when
+** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the
+** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when
** implicit "x IN (SELECT x FROM tbl)" terms are added for skip-scans.
**
** The estimated values (nRow, nVisit, nSeek) often contain a large amount
*/
static int whereLoopAddBtree(
WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, /* WHERE clause information */
- Bitmask mPrereq /* Extra prerequesites for using this table */
+ Bitmask mPrereq /* Extra prerequisites for using this table */
){
WhereInfo *pWInfo; /* WHERE analysis context */
Index *pProbe; /* An index we are evaluating */
LogEst rSize; /* number of rows in the table */
WhereClause *pWC; /* The parsed WHERE clause */
Table *pTab; /* Table being queried */
-
+
pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
pTabList = pWInfo->pTabList;
}
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOMATIC_INDEX */
- /* Loop over all indices. If there was an INDEXED BY clause, then only
+ /* Loop over all indices. If there was an INDEXED BY clause, then only
** consider index pProbe. */
- for(; rc==SQLITE_OK && pProbe;
+ for(; rc==SQLITE_OK && pProbe;
pProbe=(pSrc->fg.isIndexedBy ? 0 : pProbe->pNext), iSortIdx++
){
if( pProbe->pPartIdxWhere!=0
if( pTerm->eOperator & (WO_EQ|WO_IS) ) nLookup -= 19;
}
}
-
+
pNew->rRun = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pNew->rRun, nLookup);
}
ApplyCostMultiplier(pNew->rRun, pTab->costMult);
*/
static int isLimitTerm(WhereTerm *pTerm){
assert( pTerm->eOperator==WO_AUX || pTerm->eMatchOp==0 );
- return pTerm->eMatchOp>=SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT
+ return pTerm->eMatchOp>=SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT
&& pTerm->eMatchOp<=SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET;
}
*pbIn = 0;
pNew->prereq = mPrereq;
- /* Set the usable flag on the subset of constraints identified by
+ /* Set the usable flag on the subset of constraints identified by
** arguments mUsable and mExclude. */
pIdxCons = *(struct sqlite3_index_constraint**)&pIdxInfo->aConstraint;
for(i=0; i<nConstraint; i++, pIdxCons++){
WhereTerm *pTerm = &pWC->a[pIdxCons->iTermOffset];
pIdxCons->usable = 0;
- if( (pTerm->prereqRight & mUsable)==pTerm->prereqRight
+ if( (pTerm->prereqRight & mUsable)==pTerm->prereqRight
&& (pTerm->eOperator & mExclude)==0
&& (pbRetryLimit || !isLimitTerm(pTerm))
){
pNew->u.vtab.bOmitOffset = 1;
}
}
- if( SMASKBIT32(i) & pHidden->mHandleIn ){
+ if( SMASKBIT32(i) & pHidden->mHandleIn ){
pNew->u.vtab.mHandleIn |= MASKBIT32(iTerm);
}else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_IN)!=0 ){
/* A virtual table that is constrained by an IN clause may not
**
** Return a pointer to the collation name:
**
-** 1. If there is an explicit COLLATE operator on the constaint, return it.
+** 1. If there is an explicit COLLATE operator on the constraint, return it.
**
** 2. Else, if the column has an alternative collation, return that.
**
HiddenIndexInfo *pHidden = (HiddenIndexInfo*)&pIdxInfo[1];
u32 m = SMASKBIT32(iCons);
if( m & pHidden->mIn ){
- if( bHandle==0 ){
+ if( bHandle==0 ){
pHidden->mHandleIn &= ~m;
}else if( bHandle>0 ){
pHidden->mHandleIn |= m;
/*
** This interface is callable from within the xBestIndex callback only.
**
-** If possible, set (*ppVal) to point to an object containing the value
+** If possible, set (*ppVal) to point to an object containing the value
** on the right-hand-side of constraint iCons.
*/
int sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value(
** entries that occur before the virtual table in the FROM clause and are
** separated from it by at least one LEFT or CROSS JOIN. Similarly, the
** mUnusable mask contains all FROM clause entries that occur after the
-** virtual table and are separated from it by at least one LEFT or
-** CROSS JOIN.
+** virtual table and are separated from it by at least one LEFT or
+** CROSS JOIN.
**
** For example, if the query were:
**
**
** then mPrereq corresponds to (t1, t2) and mUnusable to (t5, t6).
**
-** All the tables in mPrereq must be scanned before the current virtual
-** table. So any terms for which all prerequisites are satisfied by
-** mPrereq may be specified as "usable" in all calls to xBestIndex.
+** All the tables in mPrereq must be scanned before the current virtual
+** table. So any terms for which all prerequisites are satisfied by
+** mPrereq may be specified as "usable" in all calls to xBestIndex.
** Conversely, all tables in mUnusable must be scanned after the current
** virtual table, so any terms for which the prerequisites overlap with
** mUnusable should always be configured as "not-usable" for xBestIndex.
/* If the call to xBestIndex() with all terms enabled produced a plan
** that does not require any source tables (IOW: a plan with mBest==0)
- ** and does not use an IN(...) operator, then there is no point in making
+ ** and does not use an IN(...) operator, then there is no point in making
** any further calls to xBestIndex() since they will all return the same
** result (if the xBestIndex() implementation is sane). */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && ((mBest = (pNew->prereq & ~mPrereq))!=0 || bIn) ){
}
}
- /* Call xBestIndex once for each distinct value of (prereqRight & ~mPrereq)
+ /* Call xBestIndex once for each distinct value of (prereqRight & ~mPrereq)
** in the set of terms that apply to the current virtual table. */
while( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
int i;
** btrees or virtual tables.
*/
static int whereLoopAddOr(
- WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder,
- Bitmask mPrereq,
+ WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder,
+ Bitmask mPrereq,
Bitmask mUnusable
){
WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
WhereLoopBuilder sSubBuild;
WhereOrSet sSum, sCur;
SrcItem *pItem;
-
+
pWC = pBuilder->pWC;
pWCEnd = pWC->a + pWC->nTerm;
pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
for(pTerm=pWC->a; pTerm<pWCEnd && rc==SQLITE_OK; pTerm++){
if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0
- && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0
+ && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0
){
WhereClause * const pOrWC = &pTerm->u.pOrInfo->wc;
WhereTerm * const pOrWCEnd = &pOrWC->a[pOrWC->nTerm];
WhereTerm *pOrTerm;
int once = 1;
int i, j;
-
+
sSubBuild = *pBuilder;
sSubBuild.pOrSet = &sCur;
}
sCur.n = 0;
#ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED
- WHERETRACE(0x400, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n",
+ WHERETRACE(0x400, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n",
(int)(pOrTerm-pOrWC->a), pTerm, sSubBuild.pWC->nTerm));
if( sqlite3WhereTrace & 0x20000 ){
sqlite3WhereClausePrint(sSubBuild.pWC);
/* TUNING: Currently sSum.a[i].rRun is set to the sum of the costs
** of all sub-scans required by the OR-scan. However, due to rounding
** errors, it may be that the cost of the OR-scan is equal to its
- ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty
- ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that
+ ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty
+ ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that
** this does not happen. Otherwise, for WHERE clauses such as the
** following where there is an index on "y":
**
}
/*
-** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables
+** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables
*/
static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
pNew->iTab = iTab;
pBuilder->iPlanLimit += SQLITE_QUERY_PLANNER_LIMIT_INCR;
pNew->maskSelf = sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pItem->iCursor);
- if( bFirstPastRJ
+ if( bFirstPastRJ
|| (pItem->fg.jointype & (JT_OUTER|JT_CROSS|JT_LTORJ))!=0
){
/* Add prerequisites to prevent reordering of FROM clause terms
** Examine a WherePath (with the addition of the extra WhereLoop of the 6th
** parameters) to see if it outputs rows in the requested ORDER BY
** (or GROUP BY) without requiring a separate sort operation. Return N:
-**
+**
** N>0: N terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied
** N==0: No terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied
-** N<0: Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied.
+** N<0: Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied.
**
** Note that processing for WHERE_GROUPBY and WHERE_DISTINCTBY is not as
** strict. With GROUP BY and DISTINCT the only requirement is that
** equivalent rows appear immediately adjacent to one another. GROUP BY
** and DISTINCT do not require rows to appear in any particular order as long
** as equivalent rows are grouped together. Thus for GROUP BY and DISTINCT
-** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order. With ORDER BY, the
+** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order. With ORDER BY, the
** pOrderBy terms must be matched in strict left-to-right order.
*/
static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
** row of the WhereLoop. Every one-row WhereLoop is automatically
** order-distinct. A WhereLoop that has no columns in the ORDER BY clause
** is not order-distinct. To be order-distinct is not quite the same as being
- ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that
+ ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that
** are NULL and NULL values are equivalent for the purpose of order-distinct.
** To be order-distinct, the columns must be UNIQUE and NOT NULL.
**
pLoop = pLast;
}
if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE ){
- if( pLoop->u.vtab.isOrdered
+ if( pLoop->u.vtab.isOrdered
&& ((wctrlFlags&(WHERE_DISTINCTBY|WHERE_SORTBYGROUP))!=WHERE_DISTINCTBY)
){
obSat = obDone;
~ready, eqOpMask, 0);
if( pTerm==0 ) continue;
if( pTerm->eOperator==WO_IN ){
- /* IN terms are only valid for sorting in the ORDER BY LIMIT
+ /* IN terms are only valid for sorting in the ORDER BY LIMIT
** optimization, and then only if they are actually used
** by the query plan */
- assert( wctrlFlags &
+ assert( wctrlFlags &
(WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT|WHERE_ORDERBY_MIN|WHERE_ORDERBY_MAX) );
for(j=0; j<pLoop->nLTerm && pTerm!=pLoop->aLTerm[j]; j++){}
if( j>=pLoop->nLTerm ) continue;
for(j=0; j<nColumn; j++){
u8 bOnce = 1; /* True to run the ORDER BY search loop */
- assert( j>=pLoop->u.btree.nEq
+ assert( j>=pLoop->u.btree.nEq
|| (pLoop->aLTerm[j]==0)==(j<pLoop->nSkip)
);
if( j<pLoop->u.btree.nEq && j>=pLoop->nSkip ){
** the loop need to be marked as not order-distinct because it can
** have repeated NULL rows.
**
- ** If the current term is a column of an ((?,?) IN (SELECT...))
+ ** If the current term is a column of an ((?,?) IN (SELECT...))
** expression for which the SELECT returns more than one column,
** check that it is the only column used by this loop. Otherwise,
** if it is one of two or more, none of the columns can be
testcase( isOrderDistinct );
isOrderDistinct = 0;
}
- continue;
+ continue;
}else if( ALWAYS(eOp & WO_IN) ){
/* ALWAYS() justification: eOp is an equality operator due to the
** j<pLoop->u.btree.nEq constraint above. Any equality other
if( iColumn==XN_EXPR ){
isOrderDistinct = 0;
}
- }
+ }
/* Find the ORDER BY term that corresponds to the j-th column
- ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off
+ ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off
*/
isMatch = 0;
for(i=0; bOnce && i<nOrderBy; i++){
/* Make sure the sort order is compatible in an ORDER BY clause.
** Sort order is irrelevant for a GROUP BY clause. */
if( revSet ){
- if( (rev ^ revIdx)
+ if( (rev ^ revIdx)
!= (pOrderBy->a[i].fg.sortFlags&KEYINFO_ORDER_DESC)
){
isMatch = 0;
#endif
/*
-** Return the cost of sorting nRow rows, assuming that the keys have
+** Return the cost of sorting nRow rows, assuming that the keys have
** nOrderby columns and that the first nSorted columns are already in
** order.
*/
int nOrderBy, /* Number of ORDER BY clause terms */
int nSorted /* Number of initial ORDER BY terms naturally in order */
){
- /* Estimated cost of a full external sort, where N is
+ /* Estimated cost of a full external sort, where N is
** the number of rows to sort is:
**
** cost = (K * N * log(N)).
- **
- ** Or, if the order-by clause has X terms but only the last Y
- ** terms are out of order, then block-sorting will reduce the
+ **
+ ** Or, if the order-by clause has X terms but only the last Y
+ ** terms are out of order, then block-sorting will reduce the
** sorting cost to:
**
** cost = (K * N * log(N)) * (Y/X)
** The constant K is at least 2.0 but will be larger if there are a
** large number of columns to be sorted, as the sorting time is
** proportional to the amount of content to be sorted. The algorithm
- ** does not currently distinguish between fat columns (BLOBs and TEXTs)
- ** and skinny columns (INTs). It just uses the number of columns as
+ ** does not currently distinguish between fat columns (BLOBs and TEXTs)
+ ** and skinny columns (INTs). It just uses the number of columns as
** an approximation for the row width.
**
** And extra factor of 2.0 or 3.0 is added to the sorting cost if the sort
** space for the aSortCost[] array. Each element of the aSortCost array
** is either zero - meaning it has not yet been initialized - or the
** cost of sorting nRowEst rows of data where the first X terms of
- ** the ORDER BY clause are already in order, where X is the array
+ ** the ORDER BY clause are already in order, where X is the array
** index. */
aSortCost = (LogEst*)pX;
memset(aSortCost, 0, sizeof(LogEst) * nOrderBy);
** in this case the query may return a maximum of one row, the results
** are already in the requested order. Set isOrdered to nOrderBy to
** indicate this. Or, if nLoop is greater than zero, set isOrdered to
- ** -1, indicating that the result set may or may not be ordered,
+ ** -1, indicating that the result set may or may not be ordered,
** depending on the loops added to the current plan. */
aFrom[0].isOrdered = nLoop>0 ? -1 : nOrderBy;
}
continue;
}
- /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop.
+ /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop.
** Compute its cost */
rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pWLoop->rSetup,pWLoop->rRun + pFrom->nRow);
rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rUnsorted, pFrom->rUnsorted);
);
}
/* TUNING: Add a small extra penalty (3) to sorting as an
- ** extra encouragment to the query planner to select a plan
+ ** extra encouragement to the query planner to select a plan
** where the rows emerge in the correct order without any sorting
** required. */
rCost = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rUnsorted, aSortCost[isOrdered]) + 3;
WHERETRACE(0x002,
("---- sort cost=%-3d (%d/%d) increases cost %3d to %-3d\n",
- aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy,
+ aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy,
rUnsorted, rCost));
}else{
rCost = rUnsorted;
** same set of loops and has the same isOrdered setting as the
** candidate path. Check to see if the candidate should replace
** pTo or if the candidate should be skipped.
- **
+ **
** The conditional is an expanded vector comparison equivalent to:
** (pTo->rCost,pTo->nRow,pTo->rUnsorted) <= (rCost,nOut,rUnsorted)
*/
- if( pTo->rCost<rCost
+ if( pTo->rCost<rCost
|| (pTo->rCost==rCost
&& (pTo->nRow<nOut
|| (pTo->nRow==nOut && pTo->rUnsorted<=rUnsorted)
mxCost = aTo[0].rCost;
mxUnsorted = aTo[0].nRow;
for(jj=1, pTo=&aTo[1]; jj<mxChoice; jj++, pTo++){
- if( pTo->rCost>mxCost
- || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted)
+ if( pTo->rCost>mxCost
+ || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted)
){
mxCost = pTo->rCost;
mxUnsorted = pTo->rUnsorted;
sqlite3StackFreeNN(pParse->db, pSpace);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
-
+
/* Find the lowest cost path. pFrom will be left pointing to that path */
pFrom = aFrom;
for(ii=1; ii<nFrom; ii++){
pWInfo->nOBSat = 0;
if( nLoop>0 ){
u32 wsFlags = pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1]->wsFlags;
- if( (wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)==0
+ if( (wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)==0
&& (wsFlags&(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN))!=(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN)
){
Bitmask m = 0;
&& pWInfo->nOBSat==pWInfo->pOrderBy->nExpr && nLoop>0
){
Bitmask revMask = 0;
- int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy,
+ int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy,
pFrom, 0, nLoop-1, pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1], &revMask
);
assert( pWInfo->sorted==0 );
** times for the common case.
**
** Return non-zero on success, if this query can be handled by this
-** no-frills query planner. Return zero if this query needs the
+** no-frills query planner. Return zero if this query needs the
** general-purpose query planner.
*/
static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
int opMask;
assert( pLoop->aLTermSpace==pLoop->aLTerm );
if( !IsUniqueIndex(pIdx)
- || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0
- || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace)
+ || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0
+ || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace)
) continue;
opMask = pIdx->uniqNotNull ? (WO_EQ|WO_IS) : WO_EQ;
for(j=0; j<pIdx->nKeyCol; j++){
}
/*
-** Return true if the expression contains no non-deterministic SQL
-** functions. Do not consider non-deterministic SQL functions that are
+** Return true if the expression contains no non-deterministic SQL
+** functions. Do not consider non-deterministic SQL functions that are
** part of sub-select statements.
*/
static int exprIsDeterministic(Expr *p){
return w.eCode;
}
-
+
#ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED
/*
** Display all WhereLoops in pWInfo
** 1) The query must not be an aggregate.
** 2) The table must be the RHS of a LEFT JOIN.
** 3) Either the query must be DISTINCT, or else the ON or USING clause
-** must contain a constraint that limits the scan of the table to
+** must contain a constraint that limits the scan of the table to
** at most a single row.
** 4) The table must not be referenced by any part of the query apart
** from its own USING or ON clause.
**
** then table t2 can be omitted from the following:
**
-** SELECT v1, v3 FROM t1
+** SELECT v1, v3 FROM t1
** LEFT JOIN t2 ON (t1.ipk=t2.ipk)
** LEFT JOIN t3 ON (t1.ipk=t3.ipk)
**
** or from:
**
-** SELECT DISTINCT v1, v3 FROM t1
+** SELECT DISTINCT v1, v3 FROM t1
** LEFT JOIN t2
** LEFT JOIN t3 ON (t1.ipk=t3.ipk)
*/
**
** OUTER JOINS
**
-** An outer join of tables t1 and t2 is conceptally coded as follows:
+** An outer join of tables t1 and t2 is conceptually coded as follows:
**
** foreach row1 in t1 do
** flag = 0
** if there is one. If there is no ORDER BY clause or if this routine
** is called from an UPDATE or DELETE statement, then pOrderBy is NULL.
**
-** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index. If
+** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index. If
** WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE is set, iIdxCur is the cursor number of an index
** to use for OR clause processing. The WHERE clause should use this
** specific cursor. If WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED is set, then iIdxCur is
u8 bFordelete = 0; /* OPFLAG_FORDELETE or zero, as appropriate */
assert( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_MULTIROW)==0 || (
- (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0
- && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0
+ (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0
+ && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0
));
/* Only one of WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE or WHERE_USE_LIMIT */
if( pOrderBy && pOrderBy->nExpr>=BMS ) pOrderBy = 0;
/* The number of tables in the FROM clause is limited by the number of
- ** bits in a Bitmask
+ ** bits in a Bitmask
*/
testcase( pTabList->nSrc==BMS );
if( pTabList->nSrc>BMS ){
return 0;
}
- /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in
+ /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in
** pTabList. But if the WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE flag is set, then we should
** only generate code for the first table in pTabList and assume that
** any cursors associated with subsequent tables are uninitialized.
pWInfo->iLimit = iAuxArg;
pWInfo->savedNQueryLoop = pParse->nQueryLoop;
pWInfo->pSelect = pSelect;
- memset(&pWInfo->nOBSat, 0,
+ memset(&pWInfo->nOBSat, 0,
offsetof(WhereInfo,sWC) - offsetof(WhereInfo,nOBSat));
memset(&pWInfo->a[0], 0, sizeof(WhereLoop)+nTabList*sizeof(WhereLevel));
assert( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF ); /* ONEPASS defaults to OFF */
*/
sqlite3WhereClauseInit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWInfo);
sqlite3WhereSplit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWhere, TK_AND);
-
+
/* Special case: No FROM clause
*/
if( nTabList==0 ){
**
** The N-th term of the FROM clause is assigned a bitmask of 1<<N.
**
- ** The rule of the previous sentence ensures thta if X is the bitmask for
+ ** The rule of the previous sentence ensures that if X is the bitmask for
** a table T, then X-1 is the bitmask for all other tables to the left of T.
** Knowing the bitmask for all tables to the left of a left join is
** important. Ticket #3015.
}
#endif
}
-
+
/* Analyze all of the subexpressions. */
sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze(pTabList, &pWInfo->sWC);
if( pSelect && pSelect->pLimit ){
** loops will be built using the revised truthProb values. */
if( sWLB.bldFlags2 & SQLITE_BLDF2_2NDPASS ){
WHERETRACE_ALL_LOOPS(pWInfo, sWLB.pWC);
- WHERETRACE(0xffffffff,
+ WHERETRACE(0xffffffff,
("**** Redo all loop computations due to"
" TERM_HIGHTRUTH changes ****\n"));
while( pWInfo->pLoops ){
}
#endif
WHERETRACE_ALL_LOOPS(pWInfo, sWLB.pWC);
-
+
wherePathSolver(pWInfo, 0);
if( db->mallocFailed ) goto whereBeginError;
if( pWInfo->pOrderBy ){
** This query optimization is factored out into a separate "no-inline"
** procedure to keep the sqlite3WhereBegin() procedure from becoming
** too large. If sqlite3WhereBegin() becomes too large, that prevents
- ** some C-compiler optimizers from in-lining the
+ ** some C-compiler optimizers from in-lining the
** sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart() procedure, and it is important to
** in-line sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart() for performance reasons.
*/
assert( pTabItem->iCursor==pLevel->iTabCur );
testcase( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF && pTab->nCol==BMS-1 );
testcase( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF && pTab->nCol==BMS );
- if( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF
+ if( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF
&& pTab->nCol<BMS
&& (pTab->tabFlags & (TF_HasGenerated|TF_WithoutRowid))==0
&& (pLoop->wsFlags & (WHERE_AUTO_INDEX|WHERE_BLOOMFILTER))==0
#endif /* SQLITE_DEBUG */
/*
-** Generate the end of the WHERE loop. See comments on
+** Generate the end of the WHERE loop. See comments on
** sqlite3WhereBegin() for additional information.
*/
void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, pIn->addrInTop+1);
if( pIn->eEndLoopOp!=OP_Noop ){
if( pIn->nPrefix ){
- int bEarlyOut =
+ int bEarlyOut =
(pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE)==0
&& (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IN_EARLYOUT)!=0;
if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){
** return the null-row. So, if the cursor is not open yet,
** jump over the OP_Next or OP_Prev instruction about to
** be coded. */
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IfNotOpen, pIn->iCur,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IfNotOpen, pIn->iCur,
sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) + 2 + bEarlyOut);
VdbeCoverage(v);
}
sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2,
pIn->iBase, pIn->nPrefix);
VdbeCoverage(v);
- /* Retarget the OP_IsNull against the left operand of IN so
+ /* Retarget the OP_IsNull against the left operand of IN so
** it jumps past the OP_IfNoHope. This is because the
** OP_IsNull also bypasses the OP_Affinity opcode that is
** required by OP_IfNoHope. */
assert( pLevel->iTabCur==pTabList->a[pLevel->iFrom].iCursor );
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, pLevel->iTabCur);
}
- if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED)
- || ((ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR) && pLevel->u.pCoveringIdx)
+ if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED)
+ || ((ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR) && pLevel->u.pCoveringIdx)
){
if( ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR ){
Index *pIx = pLevel->u.pCoveringIdx;
** from the index instead of from the table where possible. In some cases
** this optimization prevents the table from ever being read, which can
** yield a significant performance boost.
- **
+ **
** Calls to the code generator in between sqlite3WhereBegin and
** sqlite3WhereEnd will have created code that references the table
** directly. This loop scans all that code looking for opcodes
/*
** This object is a header on a block of allocated memory that will be
-** automatically freed when its WInfo oject is destructed.
+** automatically freed when its WInfo object is destructed.
*/
struct WhereMemBlock {
WhereMemBlock *pNext; /* Next block in the chain */
int iCur; /* The VDBE cursor used by this IN operator */
int addrInTop; /* Top of the IN loop */
int iBase; /* Base register of multi-key index record */
- int nPrefix; /* Number of prior entires in the key */
+ int nPrefix; /* Number of prior entries in the key */
u8 eEndLoopOp; /* IN Loop terminator. OP_Next or OP_Prev */
} *aInLoop; /* Information about each nested IN operator */
} in; /* Used when pWLoop->wsFlags&WHERE_IN_ABLE */
/* This object holds the prerequisites and the cost of running a
** subquery on one operand of an OR operator in the WHERE clause.
-** See WhereOrSet for additional information
+** See WhereOrSet for additional information
*/
struct WhereOrCost {
Bitmask prereq; /* Prerequisites */
** clause subexpression is separated from the others by AND operators,
** usually, or sometimes subexpressions separated by OR.
**
-** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure.
+** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure.
** The following identity holds:
**
** WhereTerm.pWC->a[WhereTerm.idx] == WhereTerm
int nTerm; /* Number of terms */
int nSlot; /* Number of entries in a[] */
int nBase; /* Number of terms through the last non-Virtual */
- WhereTerm *a; /* Each a[] describes a term of the WHERE cluase */
+ WhereTerm *a; /* Each a[] describes a term of the WHERE clause */
#if defined(SQLITE_SMALL_STACK)
WhereTerm aStatic[1]; /* Initial static space for a[] */
#else
** An instance of the following structure keeps track of a mapping
** between VDBE cursor numbers and bits of the bitmasks in WhereTerm.
**
-** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in
-** SrcItem.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields. For any given WHERE
+** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in
+** SrcItem.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields. For any given WHERE
** clause, the cursor numbers might not begin with 0 and they might
** contain gaps in the numbering sequence. But we want to make maximum
** use of the bits in our bitmasks. This structure provides a mapping
}
/*
-** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This
+** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This
** function appends text to pStr that describes the subset of table
** rows scanned by the strategy in the form of an SQL expression.
**
/*
** This function is a no-op unless currently processing an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN
-** command, or if stmt_scanstatus_v2() stats are enabled, or if SQLITE_DEBUG
+** command, or if stmt_scanstatus_v2() stats are enabled, or if SQLITE_DEBUG
** was defined at compile-time. If it is not a no-op, a single OP_Explain
** opcode is added to the output to describe the table scan strategy in pLevel.
**
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS
/*
** Configure the VM passed as the first argument with an
-** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() entry corresponding to the scan used to
-** implement level pLvl. Argument pSrclist is a pointer to the FROM
+** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() entry corresponding to the scan used to
+** implement level pLvl. Argument pSrclist is a pointer to the FROM
** clause that the scan reads data from.
**
-** If argument addrExplain is not 0, it must be the address of an
+** If argument addrExplain is not 0, it must be the address of an
** OP_Explain instruction that describes the same loop.
*/
void sqlite3WhereAddScanStatus(
**
** Only the parent term was in the original WHERE clause. The child1
** and child2 terms were added by the LIKE optimization. If both of
-** the virtual child terms are valid, then testing of the parent can be
+** the virtual child terms are valid, then testing of the parent can be
** skipped.
**
** Usually the parent term is marked as TERM_CODED. But if the parent
/*
** Code an OP_Affinity opcode to apply the column affinity string zAff
-** to the n registers starting at base.
+** to the n registers starting at base.
**
** As an optimization, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB and SQLITE_AFF_NONE entries (which
** are no-ops) at the beginning and end of zAff are ignored. If all entries
}
/*
-** Expression pRight, which is the RHS of a comparison operation, is
+** Expression pRight, which is the RHS of a comparison operation, is
** either a vector of n elements or, if n==1, a scalar expression.
** Before the comparison operation, affinity zAff is to be applied
** to the pRight values. This function modifies characters within the
pNew->pLeft = p;
}
if( pSelect->pOrderBy ){
- /* If the SELECT statement has an ORDER BY clause, zero the
- ** iOrderByCol variables. These are set to non-zero when an
- ** ORDER BY term exactly matches one of the terms of the
+ /* If the SELECT statement has an ORDER BY clause, zero the
+ ** iOrderByCol variables. These are set to non-zero when an
+ ** ORDER BY term exactly matches one of the terms of the
** result-set. Since the result-set of the SELECT statement may
- ** have been modified or reordered, these variables are no longer
- ** set correctly. Since setting them is just an optimization,
+ ** have been modified or reordered, these variables are no longer
+ ** set correctly. Since setting them is just an optimization,
** it's easiest just to zero them here. */
ExprList *pOrderBy = pSelect->pOrderBy;
for(i=0; i<pOrderBy->nExpr; i++){
/*
** Generate code for a single equality term of the WHERE clause. An equality
-** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...). pTerm is the term to be
+** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...). pTerm is the term to be
** coded.
**
** The current value for the constraint is left in a register, the index
testcase( iEq>0
&& (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IN_SEEKSCAN)==0
&& (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE)!=0 );
- if( iEq>0
+ if( iEq>0
&& (pLoop->wsFlags & (WHERE_IN_SEEKSCAN|WHERE_VIRTUALTABLE))==0
){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekHit, pLevel->iIdxCur, 0, iEq);
** For example, consider table t1(a,b,c,d,e,f) with index i1(a,b,c).
** Suppose the WHERE clause is this: a==5 AND b IN (1,2,3) AND c>5 AND c<10
** The index has as many as three equality constraints, but in this
-** example, the third "c" value is an inequality. So only two
+** example, the third "c" value is an inequality. So only two
** constraints are coded. This routine will generate code to evaluate
** a==5 and b IN (1,2,3). The current values for a and b will be stored
** in consecutive registers and the index of the first register is returned.
testcase( pIdx->aiColumn[j]==XN_EXPR );
VdbeComment((v, "%s", explainIndexColumnName(pIdx, j)));
}
- }
+ }
/* Evaluate the equality constraints
*/
int r1;
pTerm = pLoop->aLTerm[j];
assert( pTerm!=0 );
- /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns.
+ /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns.
** Ex: CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a,b,a); SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=0 AND b=0; */
testcase( (pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_CODED)!=0 );
testcase( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
if( pTerm->eOperator & WO_IN ){
if( pTerm->pExpr->flags & EP_xIsSelect ){
/* No affinity ever needs to be (or should be) applied to a value
- ** from the RHS of an "? IN (SELECT ...)" expression. The
- ** sqlite3FindInIndex() routine has already ensured that the
+ ** from the RHS of an "? IN (SELECT ...)" expression. The
+ ** sqlite3FindInIndex() routine has already ensured that the
** affinity of the comparison has been applied to the value. */
if( zAff ) zAff[j] = SQLITE_AFF_BLOB;
}
#ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS
/*
** If the most recently coded instruction is a constant range constraint
-** (a string literal) that originated from the LIKE optimization, then
+** (a string literal) that originated from the LIKE optimization, then
** set P3 and P5 on the OP_String opcode so that the string will be cast
** to a BLOB at appropriate times.
**
assert( pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>0 );
pOp = sqlite3VdbeGetLastOp(v);
assert( pOp!=0 );
- assert( pOp->opcode==OP_String8
+ assert( pOp->opcode==OP_String8
|| pTerm->pWC->pWInfo->pParse->db->mallocFailed );
pOp->p3 = (int)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>>1); /* Register holding counter */
pOp->p5 = (u8)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr&1); /* ASC or DESC */
/*
** Test whether or not expression pExpr, which was part of a WHERE clause,
** should be included in the cursor-hint for a table that is on the rhs
-** of a LEFT JOIN. Set Walker.eCode to non-zero before returning if the
+** of a LEFT JOIN. Set Walker.eCode to non-zero before returning if the
** expression is not suitable.
**
** An expression is unsuitable if it might evaluate to non NULL even if
** CASE WHEN col THEN 0 ELSE 1 END
*/
static int codeCursorHintIsOrFunction(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
- if( pExpr->op==TK_IS
- || pExpr->op==TK_ISNULL || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
- || pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL || pExpr->op==TK_CASE
+ if( pExpr->op==TK_IS
+ || pExpr->op==TK_ISNULL || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
+ || pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL || pExpr->op==TK_CASE
){
pWalker->eCode = 1;
}else if( pExpr->op==TK_FUNCTION ){
** that accesses any table other than the one identified by
** CCurHint.iTabCur, then do the following:
**
-** 1) allocate a register and code an OP_Column instruction to read
+** 1) allocate a register and code an OP_Column instruction to read
** the specified column into the new register, and
**
-** 2) transform the expression node to a TK_REGISTER node that reads
+** 2) transform the expression node to a TK_REGISTER node that reads
** from the newly populated register.
**
-** Also, if the node is a TK_COLUMN that does access the table idenified
+** Also, if the node is a TK_COLUMN that does access the table identified
** by pCCurHint.iTabCur, and an index is being used (which we will
** know because CCurHint.pIdx!=0) then transform the TK_COLUMN into
** an access of the index rather than the original table.
if( pTerm->wtFlags & (TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_CODED) ) continue;
if( pTerm->prereqAll & pLevel->notReady ) continue;
- /* Any terms specified as part of the ON(...) clause for any LEFT
+ /* Any terms specified as part of the ON(...) clause for any LEFT
** JOIN for which the current table is not the rhs are omitted
- ** from the cursor-hint.
+ ** from the cursor-hint.
**
- ** If this table is the rhs of a LEFT JOIN, "IS" or "IS NULL" terms
+ ** If this table is the rhs of a LEFT JOIN, "IS" or "IS NULL" terms
** that were specified as part of the WHERE clause must be excluded.
** This is to address the following:
**
** SELECT ... t1 LEFT JOIN t2 ON (t1.a=t2.b) WHERE t2.c IS NULL;
**
** Say there is a single row in t2 that matches (t1.a=t2.b), but its
- ** t2.c values is not NULL. If the (t2.c IS NULL) constraint is
+ ** t2.c values is not NULL. If the (t2.c IS NULL) constraint is
** pushed down to the cursor, this row is filtered out, causing
** SQLite to synthesize a row of NULL values. Which does match the
** WHERE clause, and so the query returns a row. Which is incorrect.
*/
if( pTabItem->fg.jointype & JT_LEFT ){
Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr;
- if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON)
+ if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON)
|| pExpr->w.iJoin!=pTabItem->iCursor
){
sWalker.eCode = 0;
if( pExpr!=0 ){
sWalker.xExprCallback = codeCursorHintFixExpr;
if( pParse->nErr==0 ) sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, pExpr);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CursorHint,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CursorHint,
(sHint.pIdx ? sHint.iIdxCur : sHint.iTabCur), 0, 0,
(const char*)pExpr, P4_EXPR);
}
/*
** Cursor iCur is open on an intkey b-tree (a table). Register iRowid contains
** a rowid value just read from cursor iIdxCur, open on index pIdx. This
-** function generates code to do a deferred seek of cursor iCur to the
+** function generates code to do a deferred seek of cursor iCur to the
** rowid stored in register iRowid.
**
** Normally, this is just:
assert( iIdxCur>0 );
assert( pIdx->aiColumn[pIdx->nColumn-1]==-1 );
-
+
pWInfo->bDeferredSeek = 1;
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_DeferredSeek, iIdxCur, 0, iCur);
if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN))
}
}
- /* Generate code that will continue to the next row if
+ /* Generate code that will continue to the next row if
** the IN constraint is not satisfied
*/
pCompare = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ, 0, 0);
int r1, rTemp; /* Registers for holding the start boundary */
int op; /* Cursor seek operation */
- /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding
+ /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding
** seek opcodes. It depends on a particular ordering of TK_xx
*/
const u8 aMoveOp[] = {
};
assert( TK_LE==TK_GT+1 ); /* Make sure the ordering.. */
assert( TK_LT==TK_GT+2 ); /* ... of the TK_xx values... */
- assert( TK_GE==TK_GT+3 ); /* ... is correcct. */
+ assert( TK_GE==TK_GT+3 ); /* ... is correct. */
assert( (pStart->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 );
testcase( pStart->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
testcase( pEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
memEndValue = ++pParse->nMem;
codeExprOrVector(pParse, pX->pRight, memEndValue, 1);
- if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight)
- && (pX->op==TK_LT || pX->op==TK_GT)
+ if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight)
+ && (pX->op==TK_LT || pX->op==TK_GT)
){
testOp = bRev ? OP_Le : OP_Ge;
}else{
}else if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED ){
/* Case 4: A scan using an index.
**
- ** The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality
+ ** The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality
** terms ("==" or "IN" operators) that refer to the N
** left-most columns of the index. It may also contain
** inequality constraints (>, <, >= or <=) on the indexed
- ** column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only
+ ** column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only
** the right-most column can be an inequality - the rest must
- ** use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the
- ** index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all
+ ** use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the
+ ** index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all
** optimized:
**
** x=5
** This case is also used when there are no WHERE clause
** constraints but an index is selected anyway, in order
** to force the output order to conform to an ORDER BY.
- */
+ */
static const u8 aStartOp[] = {
0,
0,
iIdxCur = pLevel->iIdxCur;
assert( nEq>=pLoop->nSkip );
- /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end
- ** of the range.
+ /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end
+ ** of the range.
*/
j = nEq;
if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_BTM_LIMIT ){
pRangeStart = pLoop->aLTerm[j++];
nExtraReg = MAX(nExtraReg, pLoop->u.btree.nBtm);
/* Like optimization range constraints always occur in pairs */
- assert( (pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)==0 ||
+ assert( (pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)==0 ||
(pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT)!=0 );
}
if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT ){
assert( pRangeEnd==0 || (pRangeEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 );
/* If the WHERE_BIGNULL_SORT flag is set, then index column nEq uses
- ** a non-default "big-null" sort (either ASC NULLS LAST or DESC NULLS
+ ** a non-default "big-null" sort (either ASC NULLS LAST or DESC NULLS
** FIRST). In both cases separate ordered scans are made of those
** index entries for which the column is null and for those for which
** it is not. For an ASC sort, the non-NULL entries are scanned first.
}
/* If we are doing a reverse order scan on an ascending index, or
- ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the
+ ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the
** start and end terms (pRangeStart and pRangeEnd).
*/
if( (nEq<pIdx->nColumn && bRev==(pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]==SQLITE_SO_ASC)) ){
}
if( zStartAff ){
updateRangeAffinityStr(pRight, nBtm, &zStartAff[nEq]);
- }
+ }
nConstraint += nBtm;
testcase( pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
if( sqlite3ExprIsVector(pRight)==0 ){
** of entries in the tree, so basing the number of steps to try
** on the estimated number of rows in the btree seems like a good
** guess. */
- addrSeekScan = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SeekScan,
+ addrSeekScan = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SeekScan,
(pIdx->aiRowLogEst[0]+9)/10);
if( pRangeStart || pRangeEnd ){
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1);
assert( bStopAtNull==startEq );
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2);
op = aStartOp[(nConstraint>1)*4 + 2 + bRev];
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, op, iIdxCur, addrNxt, regBase,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, op, iIdxCur, addrNxt, regBase,
nConstraint-startEq);
VdbeCoverage(v);
VdbeCoverageIf(v, op==OP_Rewind); testcase( op==OP_Rewind );
}
/* Seek the table cursor, if required */
- omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
+ omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
&& (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN))==0;
if( omitTable ){
/* pIdx is a covering index. No need to access the main table. */
** a LEFT JOIN: */
assert( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & (WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE|WHERE_RIGHT_JOIN))==0 );
}
-
+
/* Record the instruction used to terminate the loop. */
if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW ){
pLevel->op = OP_Noop;
pOrTab = pWInfo->pTabList;
}
- /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is
+ /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is
** equivalent to an empty rowset. Or, create an ephemeral index
** capable of holding primary keys in the case of a WITHOUT ROWID.
**
- ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction
+ ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction
** immediately following the OP_Return at the bottom of the loop. This
** is required in a few obscure LEFT JOIN cases where control jumps
- ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the
- ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to
+ ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the
+ ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to
** fall through to the next instruction, just as an OP_Next does if
** called on an uninitialized cursor.
*/
**
** Actually, each subexpression is converted to "xN AND w" where w is
** the "interesting" terms of z - terms that did not originate in the
- ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as
+ ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as
** indices.
**
** This optimization also only applies if the (x1 OR x2 OR ...) term
/* The extra 0x10000 bit on the opcode is masked off and does not
** become part of the new Expr.op. However, it does make the
** op==TK_AND comparison inside of sqlite3PExpr() false, and this
- ** prevents sqlite3PExpr() from applying the AND short-circuit
+ ** prevents sqlite3PExpr() from applying the AND short-circuit
** optimization, which we do not want here. */
pAndExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_AND|0x10000, 0, pAndExpr);
}
**
** Use some of the same optimizations as OP_RowSetTest: If iSet
** is zero, assume that the key cannot already be present in
- ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no
- ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never
- ** be tested for. */
+ ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no
+ ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never
+ ** be tested for. */
if( iSet ){
jmp1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, regRowset, 0, r, nPk);
VdbeCoverage(v);
** If the call to sqlite3WhereBegin() above resulted in a scan that
** uses an index, and this is either the first OR-connected term
** processed or the index is the same as that used by all previous
- ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set
- ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will
+ ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set
+ ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will
** be available.
*/
pSubLoop = pSubWInfo->a[0].pWLoop;
**
** iLoop==1: Code only expressions that are entirely covered by pIdx.
** iLoop==2: Code remaining expressions that do not contain correlated
- ** sub-queries.
+ ** sub-queries.
** iLoop==3: Code all remaining expressions.
**
** An effort is made to skip unnecessary iterations of the loop.
WO_EQ|WO_IN|WO_IS, 0);
if( pAlt==0 ) continue;
if( pAlt->wtFlags & (TERM_CODED) ) continue;
- if( (pAlt->eOperator & WO_IN)
+ if( (pAlt->eOperator & WO_IN)
&& ExprUseXSelect(pAlt->pExpr)
&& (pAlt->pExpr->x.pSelect->pEList->nExpr>1)
){
}
/* For a LEFT OUTER JOIN, generate code that will record the fact that
- ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.
+ ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.
*/
if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){
pLevel->addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
** the WHERE clause of SQL statements.
**
** This file was originally part of where.c but was split out to improve
-** readability and editabiliity. This file contains utility routines for
+** readability and editability. This file contains utility routines for
** analyzing Expr objects in the WHERE clause.
*/
#include "sqliteInt.h"
** 2019-06-14 https://sqlite.org/src/info/ce8717f0885af975
** 2019-09-03 https://sqlite.org/src/info/0f0428096f17252a
*/
- if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN
- || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT
+ if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN
+ || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT
|| (ALWAYS( ExprUseYTab(pLeft) )
&& ALWAYS(pLeft->y.pTab)
&& IsVirtual(pLeft->y.pTab)) /* Might be numeric */
** function, then no OP_Variable will be added to the program.
** This causes problems for the sqlite3_bind_parameter_name()
** API. To work around them, add a dummy OP_Variable here.
- */
+ */
int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pRight, r1);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, 0);
** 9. column IS NOT NULL SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_ISNOTNULL
**
** In every case, "column" must be a column of a virtual table. If there
-** is a match, set *ppLeft to the "column" expression, set *ppRight to the
+** is a match, set *ppLeft to the "column" expression, set *ppRight to the
** "expr" expression (even though in forms (6) and (8) the column is on the
** right and the expression is on the left). Also set *peOp2 to the
** appropriate virtual table operator. The return value is 1 or 2 if there
**
** The following is NOT generated:
**
-** x<y OR x>y --> x!=y
+** x<y OR x>y --> x!=y
*/
static void whereCombineDisjuncts(
SrcList *pSrc, /* the FROM clause */
** WhereTerm.u.pOrInfo->indexable |= the cursor number for table T
**
** A subterm is "indexable" if it is of the form
-** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and
+** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and
** <op> is one of "=", "<", "<=", ">", ">=", "IS NULL", or "IN".
** A subterm is also indexable if it is an AND of two or more
-** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable. Indexable AND
+** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable. Indexable AND
** subterms have their eOperator set to WO_AND and they have
** u.pAndInfo set to a dynamically allocated WhereAndTerm object.
**
if( !db->mallocFailed ){
for(j=0, pAndTerm=pAndWC->a; j<pAndWC->nTerm; j++, pAndTerm++){
assert( pAndTerm->pExpr );
- if( allowedOp(pAndTerm->pExpr->op)
+ if( allowedOp(pAndTerm->pExpr->op)
|| pAndTerm->eOperator==WO_AUX
){
b |= sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pAndTerm->leftCursor);
pOrTerm->leftCursor))==0 ){
/* This term must be of the form t1.a==t2.b where t2 is in the
** chngToIN set but t1 is not. This term will be either preceded
- ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a). Skip this term
+ ** or followed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a). Skip this term
** and use its inversion. */
testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_COPIED );
testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
assert( (pOrTerm->eOperator & (WO_OR|WO_AND))==0 );
if( pOrTerm->leftCursor!=iCursor ){
pOrTerm->wtFlags &= ~TERM_OK;
- }else if( pOrTerm->u.x.leftColumn!=iColumn || (iColumn==XN_EXPR
+ }else if( pOrTerm->u.x.leftColumn!=iColumn || (iColumn==XN_EXPR
&& sqlite3ExprCompare(pParse, pOrTerm->pExpr->pLeft, pLeft, -1)
)){
okToChngToIN = 0;
}
/* At this point, okToChngToIN is true if original pTerm satisfies
- ** case 1. In that case, construct a new virtual term that is
+ ** case 1. In that case, construct a new virtual term that is
** pTerm converted into an IN operator.
*/
if( okToChngToIN ){
for(i=0; i<pIdx->nKeyCol; i++){
if( pIdx->aiColumn[i]!=XN_EXPR ) continue;
assert( pIdx->bHasExpr );
- if( sqlite3ExprCompareSkip(pExpr,pIdx->aColExpr->a[i].pExpr,iCur)==0
+ if( sqlite3ExprCompareSkip(pExpr,pIdx->aColExpr->a[i].pExpr,iCur)==0
&& pExpr->op!=TK_STRING
){
aiCurCol[0] = iCur;
){
int i;
- /* If this expression is a vector to the left or right of a
- ** inequality constraint (>, <, >= or <=), perform the processing
+ /* If this expression is a vector to the left or right of a
+ ** inequality constraint (>, <, >= or <=), perform the processing
** on the first element of the vector. */
assert( TK_GT+1==TK_LE && TK_GT+2==TK_LT && TK_GT+3==TK_GE );
assert( TK_IS<TK_GE && TK_ISNULL<TK_GE && TK_IN<TK_GE );
WhereTerm *pTerm; /* The term to be analyzed */
WhereMaskSet *pMaskSet; /* Set of table index masks */
Expr *pExpr; /* The expression to be analyzed */
- Bitmask prereqLeft; /* Prerequesites of the pExpr->pLeft */
- Bitmask prereqAll; /* Prerequesites of pExpr */
+ Bitmask prereqLeft; /* Prerequisites of the pExpr->pLeft */
+ Bitmask prereqAll; /* Prerequisites of pExpr */
Bitmask extraRight = 0; /* Extra dependencies on LEFT JOIN */
Expr *pStr1 = 0; /* RHS of LIKE/GLOB operator */
int isComplete = 0; /* RHS of LIKE/GLOB ends with wildcard */
pTerm->eOperator = operatorMask(op) & opMask;
}
if( op==TK_IS ) pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_IS;
- if( pRight
+ if( pRight
&& exprMightBeIndexed(pSrc, aiCurCol, pRight, op)
&& !ExprHasProperty(pRight, EP_FixedCol)
){
pNew->prereqRight = prereqLeft | extraRight;
pNew->prereqAll = prereqAll;
pNew->eOperator = (operatorMask(pDup->op) + eExtraOp) & opMask;
- }else
+ }else
if( op==TK_ISNULL
&& !ExprHasProperty(pExpr,EP_OuterON)
&& 0==sqlite3ExprCanBeNull(pLeft)
for(i=0; i<2; i++){
Expr *pNewExpr;
int idxNew;
- pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i],
+ pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i],
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr->pLeft, 0),
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pList->a[i].pExpr, 0));
transferJoinMarkings(pNewExpr, pExpr);
Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft;
int idxNew;
WhereTerm *pNewTerm;
-
+
pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_GT,
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pLeft, 0),
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_NULL, 0, 0));
-
+
idxNew = whereClauseInsert(pWC, pNewExpr,
TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_DYNAMIC|TERM_VNULL);
if( idxNew ){
pStr2 = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStr1, 0);
assert( pStr1==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pStr1, EP_IntValue) );
assert( pStr2==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pStr2, EP_IntValue) );
-
+
/* Convert the lower bound to upper-case and the upper bound to
** lower-case (upper-case is less than lower-case in ASCII) so that
if( noCase ){
/* The point is to increment the last character before the first
** wildcard. But if we increment '@', that will push it into the
- ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the
+ ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the
** inequality. To avoid this, make sure to also run the full
** LIKE on all candidate expressions by clearing the isComplete flag
*/
if( (pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_IS)
&& (nLeft = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft))>1
&& sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pRight)==nLeft
- && ( (pExpr->pLeft->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0
+ && ( (pExpr->pLeft->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0
|| (pExpr->pRight->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0)
&& pWC->op==TK_AND
){
/* If there is a vector IN term - e.g. "(a, b) IN (SELECT ...)" - create
** a virtual term for each vector component. The expression object
- ** used by each such virtual term is pExpr (the full vector IN(...)
+ ** used by each such virtual term is pExpr (the full vector IN(...)
** expression). The WhereTerm.u.x.iField variable identifies the index within
** the vector on the LHS that the virtual term represents.
**
prereqColumn = sqlite3WhereExprUsage(pMaskSet, pLeft);
if( (prereqExpr & prereqColumn)==0 ){
Expr *pNewExpr;
- pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH,
+ pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH,
0, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pRight, 0));
if( ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_OuterON) && pNewExpr ){
ExprSetProperty(pNewExpr, EP_OuterON);
}
/*
-** Add either a LIMIT (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT) or
-** OFFSET (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET) term to the
+** Add either a LIMIT (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_LIMIT) or
+** OFFSET (if eMatchOp==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_OFFSET) term to the
** where-clause passed as the first argument. The value for the term
** is found in register iReg.
**
-** In the common case where the value is a simple integer
+** In the common case where the value is a simple integer
** (example: "LIMIT 5 OFFSET 10") then the expression codes as a
** TK_INTEGER so that it will be available to sqlite3_vtab_rhs_value().
** If not, then it codes as a TK_REGISTER expression.
if( pWC->a[ii].nChild ){
/* If this term has child terms, then they are also part of the
** pWC->a[] array. So this term can be ignored, as a LIMIT clause
- ** will only be added if each of the child terms passes the
+ ** will only be added if each of the child terms passes the
** (leftCursor==iCsr) test below. */
continue;
}
/*
-** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause.
+** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause.
**
** Note that exprAnalyze() might add new virtual terms onto the
** end of the WHERE clause. We do not want to analyze these new
/*
** For table-valued-functions, transform the function arguments into
-** new WHERE clause terms.
+** new WHERE clause terms.
**
** Each function argument translates into an equality constraint against
** a HIDDEN column in the table.
assert( ExprUseYTab(pColRef) );
pColRef->y.pTab = pTab;
pItem->colUsed |= sqlite3ExprColUsed(pColRef);
- pRhs = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_UPLUS,
+ pRhs = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_UPLUS,
sqlite3ExprDup(pParse->db, pArgs->a[j].pExpr, 0), 0);
pTerm = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ, pColRef, pRhs);
if( pItem->fg.jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT) ){
** (in this case max()) to process rows sorted in order of (c, d), which
** makes things easier for obvious reasons. More generally:
**
-** * FROM, WHERE, GROUP BY and HAVING clauses are all moved to
+** * FROM, WHERE, GROUP BY and HAVING clauses are all moved to
** the sub-query.
**
** * ORDER BY, LIMIT and OFFSET remain part of the parent query.
**
-** * Terminals from each of the expression trees that make up the
+** * Terminals from each of the expression trees that make up the
** select-list and ORDER BY expressions in the parent query are
** selected by the sub-query. For the purposes of the transformation,
** terminals are column references and aggregate functions.
** the same window declaration (the OVER bit), then a single scan may
** be used to process more than one window function. For example:
**
-** SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d),
-** min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d)
+** SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d),
+** min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d)
** FROM t1;
**
** is transformed in the same way as the example above. However:
**
-** SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d),
-** min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY a ORDER BY b)
+** SELECT max(b) OVER (PARTITION BY c ORDER BY d),
+** min(e) OVER (PARTITION BY a ORDER BY b)
** FROM t1;
**
** Must be transformed to:
** first_value(expr)
** last_value(expr)
** nth_value(expr, N)
-**
-** These are the same built-in window functions supported by Postgres.
+**
+** These are the same built-in window functions supported by Postgres.
** Although the behaviour of aggregate window functions (functions that
-** can be used as either aggregates or window funtions) allows them to
+** can be used as either aggregates or window functions) allows them to
** be implemented using an API, built-in window functions are much more
-** esoteric. Additionally, some window functions (e.g. nth_value())
+** esoteric. Additionally, some window functions (e.g. nth_value())
** may only be implemented by caching the entire partition in memory.
** As such, some built-in window functions use the same API as aggregate
-** window functions and some are implemented directly using VDBE
+** window functions and some are implemented directly using VDBE
** instructions. Additionally, for those functions that use the API, the
** window frame is sometimes modified before the SELECT statement is
** rewritten. For example, regardless of the specified window frame, the
**
** As well as some of the built-in window functions, aggregate window
** functions min() and max() are implemented using VDBE instructions if
-** the start of the window frame is declared as anything other than
+** the start of the window frame is declared as anything other than
** UNBOUNDED PRECEDING.
*/
** ROWS BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW
*/
static void row_numberStepFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
** Implementation of built-in window function dense_rank(). Assumes that
** the window frame has been set to:
**
-** RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW
+** RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW
*/
static void dense_rankStepFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
sqlite3_value *pValue;
};
static void nth_valueStepFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
#define nth_valueValueFunc noopValueFunc
static void first_valueStepFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
** Implementation of built-in window function rank(). Assumes that
** the window frame has been set to:
**
-** RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW
+** RANGE BETWEEN UNBOUNDED PRECEDING AND CURRENT ROW
*/
static void rankStepFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
** GROUPS BETWEEN CURRENT ROW AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING
*/
static void percent_rankStepFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
}
}
static void percent_rankInvFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
** GROUPS BETWEEN 1 FOLLOWING AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING
*/
static void cume_distStepFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
}
}
static void cume_distInvFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
** ROWS CURRENT ROW AND UNBOUNDED FOLLOWING
*/
static void ntileStepFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
}
}
static void ntileInvFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
** Implementation of last_value().
*/
static void last_valueStepFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
}
}
static void last_valueInvFunc(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
** is the Window object representing the associated OVER clause. This
** function updates the contents of pWin as follows:
**
-** * If the OVER clause refered to a named window (as in "max(x) OVER win"),
+** * If the OVER clause referred to a named window (as in "max(x) OVER win"),
** search list pList for a matching WINDOW definition, and update pWin
** accordingly. If no such WINDOW clause can be found, leave an error
** in pParse.
** of this file), pWin is updated here.
*/
void sqlite3WindowUpdate(
- Parse *pParse,
+ Parse *pParse,
Window *pList, /* List of named windows for this SELECT */
Window *pWin, /* Window frame to update */
FuncDef *pFunc /* Window function definition */
sqlite3WindowChain(pParse, pWin, pList);
}
if( (pWin->eFrmType==TK_RANGE)
- && (pWin->pStart || pWin->pEnd)
+ && (pWin->pStart || pWin->pEnd)
&& (pWin->pOrderBy==0 || pWin->pOrderBy->nExpr!=1)
){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"RANGE with offset PRECEDING/FOLLOWING requires one ORDER BY expression"
);
}else
if( pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_WINDOW ){
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
if( pWin->pFilter ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"FILTER clause may only be used with aggregate window functions"
);
}else{
int eStart;
int eEnd;
} aUp[] = {
- { row_numberName, TK_ROWS, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
- { dense_rankName, TK_RANGE, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
- { rankName, TK_RANGE, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
- { percent_rankName, TK_GROUPS, TK_CURRENT, TK_UNBOUNDED },
- { cume_distName, TK_GROUPS, TK_FOLLOWING, TK_UNBOUNDED },
- { ntileName, TK_ROWS, TK_CURRENT, TK_UNBOUNDED },
- { leadName, TK_ROWS, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_UNBOUNDED },
- { lagName, TK_ROWS, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
+ { row_numberName, TK_ROWS, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
+ { dense_rankName, TK_RANGE, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
+ { rankName, TK_RANGE, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
+ { percent_rankName, TK_GROUPS, TK_CURRENT, TK_UNBOUNDED },
+ { cume_distName, TK_GROUPS, TK_FOLLOWING, TK_UNBOUNDED },
+ { ntileName, TK_ROWS, TK_CURRENT, TK_UNBOUNDED },
+ { leadName, TK_ROWS, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_UNBOUNDED },
+ { lagName, TK_ROWS, TK_UNBOUNDED, TK_CURRENT },
};
int i;
for(i=0; i<ArraySize(aUp); i++){
/*
** Callback function used by selectWindowRewriteEList(). If necessary,
-** this function appends to the output expression-list and updates
+** this function appends to the output expression-list and updates
** expression (*ppExpr) in place.
*/
static int selectWindowRewriteExprCb(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
**
** * TK_COLUMN,
** * aggregate function, or
-** * window function with a Window object that is not a member of the
+** * window function with a Window object that is not a member of the
** Window list passed as the second argument (pWin).
**
** Append the node to output expression-list (*ppSub). And replace it
-** with a TK_COLUMN that reads the (N-1)th element of table
+** with a TK_COLUMN that reads the (N-1)th element of table
** pWin->iEphCsr, where N is the number of elements in (*ppSub) after
** appending the new one.
*/
static void selectWindowRewriteEList(
- Parse *pParse,
+ Parse *pParse,
Window *pWin,
SrcList *pSrc,
ExprList *pEList, /* Rewrite expressions in this list */
/*
** If the SELECT statement passed as the second argument does not invoke
-** any SQL window functions, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it
+** any SQL window functions, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it
** rewrites the SELECT statement so that window function xStep functions
** are invoked in the correct order as described under "SELECT REWRITING"
** at the top of this file.
selectWindowRewriteEList(pParse, pMWin, pSrc, p->pOrderBy, pTab, &pSublist);
pMWin->nBufferCol = (pSublist ? pSublist->nExpr : 0);
- /* Append the PARTITION BY and ORDER BY expressions to the to the
- ** sub-select expression list. They are required to figure out where
+ /* Append the PARTITION BY and ORDER BY expressions to the to the
+ ** sub-select expression list. They are required to figure out where
** boundaries for partitions and sets of peer rows lie. */
pSublist = exprListAppendList(pParse, pSublist, pMWin->pPartition, 0);
pSublist = exprListAppendList(pParse, pSublist, pMWin->pOrderBy, 0);
/* If there is no ORDER BY or PARTITION BY clause, and the window
** function accepts zero arguments, and there are no other columns
** selected (e.g. "SELECT row_number() OVER () FROM t1"), it is possible
- ** that pSublist is still NULL here. Add a constant expression here to
- ** keep everything legal in this case.
+ ** that pSublist is still NULL here. Add a constant expression here to
+ ** keep everything legal in this case.
*/
if( pSublist==0 ){
- pSublist = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0,
+ pSublist = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0,
sqlite3Expr(db, TK_INTEGER, "0")
);
}
** equivalent nul-terminated string.
*/
Window *sqlite3WindowAssemble(
- Parse *pParse,
- Window *pWin,
- ExprList *pPartition,
- ExprList *pOrderBy,
+ Parse *pParse,
+ Window *pWin,
+ ExprList *pPartition,
+ ExprList *pOrderBy,
Token *pBase
){
if( pWin ){
}
/*
-** Window *pWin has just been created from a WINDOW clause. Tokne pBase
+** Window *pWin has just been created from a WINDOW clause. Token pBase
** is the base window. Earlier windows from the same WINDOW clause are
** stored in the linked list starting at pWin->pNextWin. This function
** either updates *pWin according to the base specification, or else
zErr = "frame specification";
}
if( zErr ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"cannot override %s of window: %s", zErr, pWin->zBase
);
}else{
};
/*
-** A single instance of this structure is allocated on the stack by
+** A single instance of this structure is allocated on the stack by
** sqlite3WindowCodeStep() and a pointer to it passed to the various helper
** routines. This is to reduce the number of arguments required by each
** helper function.
**
** Each cursor (start, current and end) consists of a VDBE cursor
** (WindowCsrAndReg.csr) and an array of registers (starting at
-** WindowCodeArg.reg) that always contains a copy of the peer values
+** WindowCodeArg.reg) that always contains a copy of the peer values
** read from the corresponding cursor.
**
** Depending on the window-frame in question, all three cursors may not
}
/*
-** Generate VM code to invoke either xStep() (if bInverse is 0) or
-** xInverse (if bInverse is non-zero) for each window function in the
+** Generate VM code to invoke either xStep() (if bInverse is 0) or
+** xInverse (if bInverse is non-zero) for each window function in the
** linked list starting at pMWin. Or, for built-in window functions
** that do not use the standard function API, generate the required
** inline VM code.
regArg = reg;
if( pMWin->regStartRowid==0
- && (pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX)
+ && (pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX)
&& (pWin->eStart!=TK_UNBOUNDED)
){
int addrIsNull = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IsNull, regArg);
VdbeCoverage(v);
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTmp);
}
-
+
if( pWin->bExprArgs ){
int iOp = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
int iEnd;
pColl = sqlite3ExprNNCollSeq(pParse, pWin->pOwner->x.pList->a[0].pExpr);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0,0,0, (const char*)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ);
}
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, bInverse? OP_AggInverse : OP_AggStep,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, bInverse? OP_AggInverse : OP_AggStep,
bInverse, regArg, pWin->regAccum);
sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, pFunc, P4_FUNCDEF);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, (u8)nArg);
for(pWin=pMWin; pWin; pWin=pWin->pNextWin){
if( pMWin->regStartRowid==0
- && (pWin->pWFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX)
+ && (pWin->pWFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX)
&& (pWin->eStart!=TK_UNBOUNDED)
){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult);
int lbl = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
int tmpReg = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult);
-
+
if( pFunc->zName==nth_valueName ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column,pMWin->iEphCsr,pWin->iArgCol+1,tmpReg);
windowCheckValue(pParse, tmpReg, 2);
int lbl = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(pParse);
int tmpReg = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
int iEph = pMWin->iEphCsr;
-
+
if( nArg<3 ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, pWin->regResult);
}else{
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, op, tmpReg2, tmpReg, tmpReg);
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, tmpReg2);
}
-
+
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SeekRowid, csr, lbl, tmpReg);
VdbeCoverage(v);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, csr, pWin->iArgCol, pWin->regResult);
return regArg;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return true if the current frame should be cached in the ephemeral table,
** even if there are no xInverse() calls required.
*/
** regOld and regNew are each the first register in an array of size
** pOrderBy->nExpr. This function generates code to compare the two
** arrays of registers using the collation sequences and other comparison
-** parameters specified by pOrderBy.
+** parameters specified by pOrderBy.
**
-** If the two arrays are not equal, the contents of regNew is copied to
+** If the two arrays are not equal, the contents of regNew is copied to
** regOld and control falls through. Otherwise, if the contents of the arrays
** are equal, an OP_Goto is executed. The address of the OP_Goto is returned.
*/
KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = sqlite3KeyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pOrderBy, 0, 0);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Compare, regOld, regNew, nVal);
sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, (void*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Jump,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Jump,
sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1, addr, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+1
);
VdbeCoverageEqNe(v);
** or subtraction is a a copy of csr1.peerVal.
*/
static void windowCodeRangeTest(
- WindowCodeArg *p,
+ WindowCodeArg *p,
int op, /* OP_Ge, OP_Gt, or OP_Le */
int csr1, /* Cursor number for cursor 1 */
int regVal, /* Register containing non-negative number */
((op==OP_Ge) ? ">=" : (op==OP_Le) ? "<=" : (op==OP_Gt) ? ">" : "<"), reg2
));
- /* If the BIGNULL flag is set for the ORDER BY, then it is required to
- ** consider NULL values to be larger than all other values, instead of
+ /* If the BIGNULL flag is set for the ORDER BY, then it is required to
+ ** consider NULL values to be larger than all other values, instead of
** the usual smaller. The VDBE opcodes OP_Ge and so on do not handle this
** (and adding that capability causes a performance regression), so
** instead if the BIGNULL flag is set then cases where either reg1 or
** if( op==OP_Le ) goto lbl;
** }
**
- ** Additionally, if either reg1 or reg2 are NULL but the jump to lbl is
+ ** Additionally, if either reg1 or reg2 are NULL but the jump to lbl is
** not taken, control jumps over the comparison operator coded below this
** block. */
if( pOrderBy->a[0].fg.sortFlags & KEYINFO_ORDER_BIGNULL ){
/* This block runs if reg1 contains a NULL. */
int addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NotNull, reg1); VdbeCoverage(v);
switch( op ){
- case OP_Ge:
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, lbl);
+ case OP_Ge:
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, lbl);
break;
- case OP_Gt:
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, reg2, lbl);
- VdbeCoverage(v);
+ case OP_Gt:
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, reg2, lbl);
+ VdbeCoverage(v);
break;
- case OP_Le:
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, reg2, lbl);
- VdbeCoverage(v);
+ case OP_Le:
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, reg2, lbl);
+ VdbeCoverage(v);
break;
default: assert( op==OP_Lt ); /* no-op */ break;
}
/*
** Helper function for sqlite3WindowCodeStep(). Each call to this function
-** generates VM code for a single RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or AGGINVERSE
+** generates VM code for a single RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or AGGINVERSE
** operation. Refer to the header comment for sqlite3WindowCodeStep() for
** details.
*/
addrContinue = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
/* If this is a (RANGE BETWEEN a FOLLOWING AND b FOLLOWING) or
- ** (RANGE BETWEEN b PRECEDING AND a PRECEDING) frame, ensure the
- ** start cursor does not advance past the end cursor within the
+ ** (RANGE BETWEEN b PRECEDING AND a PRECEDING) frame, ensure the
+ ** start cursor does not advance past the end cursor within the
** temporary table. It otherwise might, if (a>b). Also ensure that,
** if the input cursor is still finding new rows, that the end
** cursor does not go past it to EOF. */
}
/*
-** Return true if it can be determined at compile time that expression
-** pExpr evaluates to a value that, when cast to an integer, is greater
+** Return true if it can be determined at compile time that expression
+** pExpr evaluates to a value that, when cast to an integer, is greater
** than zero. False otherwise.
**
-** If an OOM error occurs, this function sets the Parse.db.mallocFailed
+** If an OOM error occurs, this function sets the Parse.db.mallocFailed
** flag and returns zero.
*/
static int windowExprGtZero(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
}
/*
-** sqlite3WhereBegin() has already been called for the SELECT statement
+** sqlite3WhereBegin() has already been called for the SELECT statement
** passed as the second argument when this function is invoked. It generates
-** code to populate the Window.regResult register for each window function
+** code to populate the Window.regResult register for each window function
** and invoke the sub-routine at instruction addrGosub once for each row.
-** sqlite3WhereEnd() is always called before returning.
+** sqlite3WhereEnd() is always called before returning.
**
** This function handles several different types of window frames, which
** require slightly different processing. The following pseudo code is
** Gosub flush
** }
** Insert new row into eph table.
-**
+**
** if( first row of partition ){
** // Rewind three cursors, all open on the eph table.
** Rewind(csrEnd);
** Rewind(csrStart);
** Rewind(csrCurrent);
-**
+**
** regEnd = <expr2> // FOLLOWING expression
** regStart = <expr1> // PRECEDING expression
** }else{
-** // First time this branch is taken, the eph table contains two
+** // First time this branch is taken, the eph table contains two
** // rows. The first row in the partition, which all three cursors
** // currently point to, and the following row.
** AGGSTEP
** with arguments read from the current row of cursor csrEnd, then
** step cursor csrEnd forward one row (i.e. sqlite3BtreeNext()).
**
-** RETURN_ROW: return a row to the caller based on the contents of the
-** current row of csrCurrent and the current state of all
+** RETURN_ROW: return a row to the caller based on the contents of the
+** current row of csrCurrent and the current state of all
** aggregates. Then step cursor csrCurrent forward one row.
**
-** AGGINVERSE: invoke the aggregate xInverse() function for each window
+** AGGINVERSE: invoke the aggregate xInverse() function for each window
** functions with arguments read from the current row of cursor
** csrStart. Then step csrStart forward one row.
**
** There are two other ROWS window frames that are handled significantly
** differently from the above - "BETWEEN <expr> PRECEDING AND <expr> PRECEDING"
-** and "BETWEEN <expr> FOLLOWING AND <expr> FOLLOWING". These are special
+** and "BETWEEN <expr> FOLLOWING AND <expr> FOLLOWING". These are special
** cases because they change the order in which the three cursors (csrStart,
** csrCurrent and csrEnd) iterate through the ephemeral table. Cases that
** use UNBOUNDED or CURRENT ROW are much simpler variations on one of these
**
** For the most part, the patterns above are adapted to support UNBOUNDED by
** assuming that it is equivalent to "infinity PRECEDING/FOLLOWING" and
-** CURRENT ROW by assuming that it is equivilent to "0 PRECEDING/FOLLOWING".
+** CURRENT ROW by assuming that it is equivalent to "0 PRECEDING/FOLLOWING".
** This is optimized of course - branches that will never be taken and
** conditions that are always true are omitted from the VM code. The only
** exceptional case is:
** regEnd = <expr2>
** regStart = <expr1>
** }else if( new group ){
-** ...
+** ...
** }
** }
**
-** 2. Instead of processing a single row, each RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or
+** 2. Instead of processing a single row, each RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP or
** AGGINVERSE step processes the current row of the relevant cursor and
** all subsequent rows belonging to the same group.
**
-** RANGE window frames are a little different again. As for GROUPS, the
+** RANGE window frames are a little different again. As for GROUPS, the
** main loop runs once per group only. And RETURN_ROW, AGGSTEP and AGGINVERSE
** deal in groups instead of rows. As for ROWS and GROUPS, there are three
** basic cases:
** }
** }
**
-** In the above notation, "csr.key" means the current value of the ORDER BY
+** In the above notation, "csr.key" means the current value of the ORDER BY
** expression (there is only ever 1 for a RANGE that uses an <expr> FOLLOWING
** or <expr PRECEDING) read from cursor csr.
**
int regStart = 0; /* Value of <expr> PRECEDING */
int regEnd = 0; /* Value of <expr> FOLLOWING */
- assert( pMWin->eStart==TK_PRECEDING || pMWin->eStart==TK_CURRENT
- || pMWin->eStart==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eStart==TK_UNBOUNDED
+ assert( pMWin->eStart==TK_PRECEDING || pMWin->eStart==TK_CURRENT
+ || pMWin->eStart==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eStart==TK_UNBOUNDED
);
- assert( pMWin->eEnd==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eEnd==TK_CURRENT
- || pMWin->eEnd==TK_UNBOUNDED || pMWin->eEnd==TK_PRECEDING
+ assert( pMWin->eEnd==TK_FOLLOWING || pMWin->eEnd==TK_CURRENT
+ || pMWin->eEnd==TK_UNBOUNDED || pMWin->eEnd==TK_PRECEDING
);
assert( pMWin->eExclude==0 || pMWin->eExclude==TK_CURRENT
|| pMWin->eExclude==TK_GROUP || pMWin->eExclude==TK_TIES
s.end.csr = s.current.csr+3;
/* Figure out when rows may be deleted from the ephemeral table. There
- ** are four options - they may never be deleted (eDelete==0), they may
+ ** are four options - they may never be deleted (eDelete==0), they may
** be deleted as soon as they are no longer part of the window frame
- ** (eDelete==WINDOW_AGGINVERSE), they may be deleted as after the row
+ ** (eDelete==WINDOW_AGGINVERSE), they may be deleted as after the row
** has been returned to the caller (WINDOW_RETURN_ROW), or they may
** be deleted after they enter the frame (WINDOW_AGGSTEP). */
switch( pMWin->eStart ){
}
/* Allocate registers for the array of values from the sub-query, the
- ** samve values in record form, and the rowid used to insert said record
+ ** same values in record form, and the rowid used to insert said record
** into the ephemeral table. */
regNew = pParse->nMem+1;
pParse->nMem += nInput;
}
/* If this is not a "ROWS BETWEEN ..." frame, then allocate arrays of
- ** registers to store copies of the ORDER BY expressions (peer values)
+ ** registers to store copies of the ORDER BY expressions (peer values)
** for the main loop, and for each cursor (start, current and end). */
if( pMWin->eFrmType!=TK_ROWS ){
int nPeer = (pOrderBy ? pOrderBy->nExpr : 0);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MakeRecord, regNew, nInput, regRecord);
/* An input row has just been read into an array of registers starting
- ** at regNew. If the window has a PARTITION clause, this block generates
+ ** at regNew. If the window has a PARTITION clause, this block generates
** VM code to check if the input row is the start of a new partition.
** If so, it does an OP_Gosub to an address to be filled in later. The
** address of the OP_Gosub is stored in local variable addrGosubFlush. */
--- /dev/null
+aa
+aaa
+abc
+abcdefg
+abd
+abf
+Abortable
+acc
+accessor
+accum
+acd
+activecpu
+Adaptor
+Additionallly
+addop
+addoptrace
+addr
+adjustements
+af
+aff
+afp
+afterward
+Agg
+agg
+agginfo
+alikes
+Alloc
+alloc
+alloca
+allocator
+allocators
+alphabetics
+alphanumerics
+alternateform
+altertab
+altform
+amalgamator
+amongst
+Analyse
+analyse
+antipenultimate
+ap
+api
+appdef
+appendall
+appendchar
+appendf
+ar
+Arg
+arg
+argc
+argcount
+arglist
+argn
+args
+argv
+arrayname
+ascii
+asm
+async
+Atoi
+atomics
+auth
+authorizer
+autocheckpoint
+Autocommit
+autocommit
+autoconf
+Autoext
+autoextension
+autoinc
+autoincrement
+autoincremented
+autoindex
+autoinstall
+autovac
+autovacuum
+autovacuumed
+autovacuuming
+auxdata
+awk
+Ax
+backend
+backends
+backfill
+backfilled
+backfilling
+backtrace
+backtraces
+backtracing
+bb
+bba
+bcb
+bcc
+beginthreadex
+behavior
+Behavioral
+behaviors
+benigncnt
+bg
+bigblob
+bitcount
+Bitfield
+bitfield
+Bitmask
+bitmask
+Bitmasks
+bitmasks
+bitset
+Bitvec
+bitvec
+bitvecs
+bitwise
+blobwrite
+blockquote
+Bloomfilter
+bom
+boolean
+booleans
+Borland
+br
+breadthfirstsearch
+breakpoint
+bt
+Btree
+btree
+Btrees
+btrees
+buf
+bufpt
+butoindex
+bytearray
+bytecode
+bytecodevtab
+byteorder
+cacheflush
+cachegrind
+Cachesize
+calc'ing
+callgrind
+cardinalities
+cardinality
+carray
+cb
+cd
+cdbaa
+ce
+ceil
+cellpadding
+cellspacing
+center
+chacha
+changecounter
+changeset
+characgter
+characterset
+checkpointed
+Checkpointer
+checkpointer
+checkpointers
+checkpointing
+checksummed
+checksums
+chmod
+chng
+chown
+chroot
+chsize
+chunksize
+cid
+cis
+ckalloc'd
+ckpt
+cksum
+cksumvfs
+clientdata
+closedir
+clownshoe
+cmd
+cmp
+cmpaff
+Cmpr
+cnt
+codec
+codepage
+Collseq
+collseq
+colname
+compileoption
+Concat
+concat
+config
+confstr
+connetion
+consective
+considertion
+const
+coredump
+Coroutine
+coroutine
+coroutines
+corresonding
+cov
+crashparams
+csr
+csv
+Cte
+ctime
+Ctrl
+ctrl
+ctx
+ctype
+cume
+Cx
+cx
+Cygwin
+cygwin
+dan
+darkstar
+databasename
+databse
+datasource
+datatypes
+datetime
+dbfuzz
+dbinfo
+dbname
+dbpage
+dbpagevfs
+dbs
+dbsize
+dbsqlfuzz
+dbstat
+dbtotxt
+De
+de
+deadman
+Deallocate
+deallocate
+deallocated
+Deallocates
+deallocates
+deallocating
+Deallocation
+deallocation
+decltype
+decrementing
+Defense
+defense
+defenses
+defn
+defragment
+defragmentation
+defragmented
+deinitialization
+Deinitialize
+deinitialize
+demovfs
+dependences
+Dequote
+dequote
+Dequoted
+dequoted
+dequoting
+dereferenced
+Dereferences
+desc
+deserialization
+Deserialize
+deserialize
+deserialized
+deserializes
+deserializing
+Dest
+dest
+Destructor
+destructor
+destructors
+deterministically
+dev
+devsim
+devsym
+df
+Dfdatasync
+dflt
+dir
+directonly
+dirent
+dirs
+disjunct
+disjunction
+disjuncts
+diskfull
+divy
+dl
+dll
+dlopen
+dlsym
+docid
+docids
+dont
+dontcache
+Dotfile
+dotfile
+dotlock
+doublearray
+drh
+dryrun
+dstr
+dt
+Duint
+dup
+Durian
+dword
+Dx
+dylib
+Dyn
+Ec
+ec
+ecel
+editability
+ef
+efc
+eg
+Ei
+elif
+emcc
+emscripten
+encodings
+endeavor
+endfor
+endian
+endianness
+endif
+endthreadex
+english
+enum
+eof
+eph
+Ephem
+ephem
+epheremal
+ephermal
+Eq
+eq
+eqp
+equaling
+equalities
+errcode
+errmsg
+Errno
+errno
+errorcode
+erroroffset
+errstr
+esc
+esign
+et
+etfs
+etilqs
+eval
+exe
+expander
+explainer
+expmask
+Expr
+expr
+expresssion
+exprlist
+extern
+fakeheap
+fallocate
+fanout
+faultsim
+favor
+favors
+fb
+fc
+fchmod
+fchown
+fclose
+fcntl
+fd
+fdatasync
+feb
+fef
+Feijoa
+ferror
+ffff
+ffffeff
+ffffffe
+fffffff
+ffffffff
+fffffffffffffff
+fflush
+fg
+fgets
+fi
+fibonacci
+fid
+Fifo
+filecount
+filectrl
+filemapping
+filesize
+filesystem
+filesystems
+finalised
+finalizer
+findfirst
+findnext
+Finially
+Fixup
+fk
+fkctr
+fkey
+flattener
+fmt
+fopen
+foreach
+formatter
+fprintf
+fputs
+fread
+fred
+fred's
+freeblock
+Freeblocks
+freeblocks
+Freelist
+freelist
+freepage
+freespace
+frombind
+fs
+fsanitize
+fsctl
+fsdir
+fseek
+fstat
+fstree
+Fsync
+fsync
+fsynced
+fsyncs
+ftell
+ftruncate
+fts
+fullfsync
+fullname
+fullschema
+fullshm
+fullsync
+fullsyncs
+Func
+func
+funcs
+functino
+fuzzer
+fuzzers
+fwrite
+Fx
+gcc
+gcov
+gdb
+getcwd
+getenv
+gethostuuid
+getpagesize
+getpid
+getrusage
+getsubtype
+getter
+getters
+gibabyte
+gid
+glibc
+Globbing
+globbing
+gmtime
+Gosub
+Goto
+goto
+groupbyparent
+Groupid
+growable
+grp
+hdl
+hdr
+hexadeximal
+hexdb
+hexdouble
+hexio
+Highwater
+highwater
+hijklmno
+honor
+honored
+honoring
+hostid
+href
+html
+htsize
+hw
+Hwtime
+icecube
+ideographical
+Idx
+idx
+idxaff
+idxnum
+idxstr
+idx'th
+ieee
+ifdef
+iff
+ifndef
+imm
+impl
+implementions
+implmentation
+incr
+Incrblob
+incrblob
+incrementing
+indexable
+indexname
+infop
+ing
+Init
+init
+initalize
+initfail
+initializer
+initializers
+initiallly
+inlined
+inlines
+inlining
+ino
+inode
+inodes
+inopertune
+installable
+intarray
+inteface
+interoperate
+interp
+interpretable
+intkey
+intptr
+intreal
+intrinsics
+invalidations
+invariants
+io
+ioerr
+iotrace
+ipk
+iplan
+isalnum
+isalpha
+isatty
+isdigit
+isempty
+isexplain
+ismemdb
+isnan
+isspace
+isxdigit
+i'th
+iversion
+jfd
+jj
+jointype
+jointypes
+journaled
+journaling
+journalled
+journalling
+journalmode
+jrnl
+jsl
+json
+jt
+julian
+julianday
+keyinfo
+keywordhash
+kibibytes
+kvstorage
+kvvfs
+lappend
+lasterrno
+lbl
+ldl
+le
+leafdata
+leftjustify
+len
+leveling
+lexeme
+lexemes
+lhs
+li
+libm
+libversion
+lifecycle
+lindex
+lineno
+Linenoise
+linux
+lised
+lld
+llvm
+lm
+ln
+lncurses
+loadext
+localhost
+localtime
+lockd
+lockdata
+lockingcontext
+lockless
+lockproxy
+locktype
+logmsg
+longvalue
+longwords
+lookahead
+Lookaside
+lookaside
+lookups
+losslessly
+lpthread
+lrc
+lreadline
+lru
+lseek
+lt
+lvalue
+lwr
+makefile
+makefiles
+Malloc
+malloc
+Malloc'd
+malloc'd
+malloced
+mallocs
+manditory
+manpage
+matchinfo
+materializations
+mathfuncs
+maxsize
+mbcs
+Mcafee
+md
+Meeus
+Mem
+mem
+memcmp
+memcpy
+memdb
+memdebug
+memget
+memmove
+mempool
+memset
+memstatus
+memsys
+memvfs
+mergeable
+mergepatch
+middleware
+millisec
+mincore
+mingw
+mis
+Miscoded
+mj
+mkctimec
+mkdir
+mkkeywordhash
+mkopcodec
+mkopcodeh
+mkpragmatab
+mmap
+mmapped
+mno
+modeof
+Movepage
+mprintf
+msd
+msdos
+msec
+msg
+msgs
+msize
+msvc
+mtime
+mult
+Multibyte
+multipled
+multiplex'ed
+multiplexor
+multithreaded
+multiwrite
+Mutex
+mutex
+Mutexes
+mutexes
+mutexing
+mx
+mxpathname
+myprefix
+nal
+namecontext
+Namespace
+namespace
+natively
+nbr
+nbsp
+ncell
+ncol
+ncycle
+nd
+ndlt
+neighbors
+neq
+nestable
+newrowid
+nfs
+nlt
+nnn
+nocase
+nochange
+nochng
+nofollow
+nolock
+nomem
+nomutex
+nonblocking
+nonroot
+Noop
+noop
+noshm
+notational
+notheld
+notnull
+nowrap
+Nr
+nr
+ntile
+Nul
+nul
+nullable
+nullif
+nullvalue
+Num
+objproc
+oc
+offsetof
+ofst
+ogham
+oid
+Ok
+ok
+ol
+onecolumn
+onepass
+onoff
+onwards
+Oom
+opcodesnever
+openable
+opendir
+optimizers
+optimizible
+orconf
+orderby
+orderbylist
+os
+Oswrite
+overread
+overreads
+overrideable
+oversize
+overwriteable
+Overwritting
+ovewrite
+ovfl
+pagecache
+pagecaches
+Pagecount
+pagecount
+pagelist
+pageno
+Pagesize
+pagesize
+pagetype
+Param
+params
+passwd
+patchset
+pathname
+pathnames
+pc
+pcache
+pclose
+pcx
+pgno
+pgoffset
+pgsize
+pgsz
+pid
+pluggable
+pmasz
+pn
+popen
+pos
+Posix
+posix
+Postgres
+Powersafe
+powersafe
+pq
+pqr
+pqrstuvw
+pragma
+pragmaed
+pragma's
+pragmas
+Pre
+pre
+pread
+preallocate
+Preallocated
+preallocated
+precisions
+precompiled
+Precomputed
+precomputed
+prefetch
+prefetched
+preformated
+preformatted
+prepend
+prepended
+prepending
+prepends
+prepopulate
+preprocess
+preprocessed
+preprocessing
+preprocessor
+prereq
+prereqs
+preupdate
+primarykey
+printf
+printfs
+Prng
+prng
+proc
+procs
+profiler
+proleptic
+proxying
+proxys
+pseudocode
+Pseudotable
+pseudotable
+psow
+psz
+pthread
+Pthreads
+pthreads
+Ptr
+ptr
+ptrmap
+ptrs
+purgeable
+putsnl
+pwrite
+pz
+qbox
+Qcircle
+quotaed
+quotefix
+radix
+randomblob
+randstr
+rarr
+rc
+rcauth
+Rcvr
+rds
+readdir
+Readline
+readline
+readlock
+readonly
+Readr
+Realloc
+realloc
+reallocs
+realvalue
+rebalance
+rebalanced
+recoverability
+redefinable
+redux
+reenabled
+reentrant
+refcount
+refcounts
+Regs
+regs
+reindexed
+reinitializer
+reinitializes
+Rekey
+rekey
+rekeyed
+relevancies
+Relink
+relink
+relock
+renormalize
+reoptimize
+Reparse
+reparse
+reparsed
+reparsing
+reportable
+Reprepare
+reprepare
+reprepared
+reprepares
+representable
+repurpose
+Req'd
+requeries
+requote
+reregister
+Reseek
+reservebytes
+resumable
+Retarget
+retargeted
+retrys
+returntype
+rfc
+rhs
+Ri
+Rivest
+ro
+Rootpage
+rootpage
+Rowid
+rowid
+Rowids
+rowids
+Rowkey
+rownumber
+Rowset
+rowset
+runtime
+rw
+rwc
+samplelib
+sampleno
+sandboxed
+sandboxing
+Savepoint
+savepoint
+Savepoints
+savepoints
+scanf
+scannning
+scanstats
+scanstatus
+schemas
+sectorsize
+selecttrace
+selftest
+setrlimit
+setsubtype
+settitle
+sharable
+shm
+shmlock
+sibs
+sig
+signaling
+significand
+sizehint
+Sizeof
+sizeof
+snprintf
+Solaris
+sorterref
+soundex
+sourceid
+speedtest
+sprintf
+sql
+sqlar
+sqlite
+sqliteplocks
+sqliterc
+sqllog
+sqllogglobal
+sqlthread
+sqr
+sqrt
+src
+srcck
+statfs
+statment
+stderr
+stdin
+stdout
+Stmt
+stmt
+stmts
+Str
+str
+strace
+strcasecmp
+strcmp
+strdup
+strerror
+strftime
+strglob
+stricmp
+stringify
+strlen
+strlike
+strncmp
+strncpy
+strnicmp
+stronly
+strstr
+struct
+structs
+subbitmap
+subcases
+subclassed
+subclauses
+subcomponents
+subdirectory
+subelement
+subexpression
+subexpressions
+Subfunction
+subfunctions
+subitem
+subjournals
+sublevels
+subnode
+suboptimal
+subpages
+subprocedures
+subprog
+subprogs
+subq
+subqueries
+subquery
+Subrtn
+subsec
+subsecond
+subsequence
+substr
+Substring
+substrings
+Subsubstructure
+subsubterms
+Subtask
+subtasks
+subterm
+subterms
+subtransaction
+subtransactions
+subtree
+subtrees
+Subtype
+subtype
+subtypes
+sumint
+sunday
+superclass
+superlock
+superset
+superunlock
+symlinks
+synching
+sys
+syscall
+sz
+szosfile
+tablename
+tailval
+tailvar
+tbl
+tblname
+Tcl
+tcl
+Tclcmd
+tclcmd
+tclsh
+tclsqlite
+tclvar
+td
+tempfilename
+testcase
+testctrl
+testfixture
+testtag
+testvfs
+textarray
+th
+threadid
+threadsafe
+threadsafety
+throughs
+tht
+timediff
+tkt
+tm
+tmp
+tmpdir
+tmpfs
+tnum
+Todo
+tokenize
+tokenizer
+tokenizing
+tolower
+toobig
+toupper
+treetrace
+treeview
+trimleft
+trimright
+truesize
+trys
+Tsd
+Ts'o
+tunable
+tvfs
+txn
+txt
+Typecheck
+typedef
+typedefed
+typedefs
+typename
+typenames
+typeof
+tz
+uber
+uid
+uint
+ul
+umask
+Un
+un
+unallocated
+unanalyzed
+Unary
+unary
+unbuffered
+unclosed
+uncompiled
+uncomputed
+undefining
+underfull
+unexpanded
+unfinalized
+unfreed
+unhex
+unicode
+Unindexed
+unindexed
+uninit
+Uninitialize
+unintuitive
+unioned
+unissued
+unix
+unixepoch
+Unlink
+unlink
+unlinked
+unlinking
+unlinks
+Unmap
+unmap
+unmapped
+unmapping
+unoptimized
+unparsed
+unreduced
+unref
+unreferenced
+unrefs
+Unregister
+unregister
+Unregistering
+unregisters
+unresolvable
+unsynced
+unterminated
+untracked
+untrusted
+Upfrom
+uppercasing
+upr
+Upsert
+upsert
+upto
+uptr
+uri
+userauth
+userdata
+Userid
+usleep
+utc
+Utf
+utf
+util
+uuu
+uuuuu
+uuzzzz
+va
+Valgrind
+valgrind
+vanishingly
+vappendf
+Vararg
+varargs
+varint
+varints
+Varname
+varname
+vcolumn
+Vdbe
+vdbe
+vdbeapi
+vdbe's
+vdbes
+vdbesort
+ve
+verfication
+verifications
+veritical
+vfs
+vfslog
+vfsname
+vfs's
+vfstrace
+vm
+vmprintf
+vmstep
+vsnprintf
+vt
+vtab
+vtabs
+Vugt
+vvv
+vvvv
+vvvvv
+vvvvvv
+vwait
+vxworks
+Wal
+wal
+wasm
+wherease
+wherecode
+whereexpr
+wheretrace
+whitespace
+Willmann
+withoutrowid
+wr
+wrapup
+writeable
+writecrash
+writefile
+wsd
+ww
+wwww
+wwzzzzyy
+wxyz
+xa
+xac
+xb
+xbf
+xc
+xd
+xdg
+xe
+xf
+xfe
+Xfer
+xfer
+xff
+xfff
+xfffd
+xfffe
+xffffffff
+x'hhhhhh
+xinfo
+xlc
+xtype
+xxxx
+xxxxx
+xxxxxx
+xxxxxxx
+xxxxxxxx
+xyz
+xyzzy
+yy
+yyxxxxxx
+yyy
+yyyyy
+yyyyyy
+zeroblob
+Zeroblobs
+zerodata
+zeropad
+zipfile
+zipvfs
+zplan
+zulu
+zzzz
+zzzzyyyy
--- /dev/null
+#!/usr/bin/tclsh
+
+set usage {
+ Usage: spellsift.tcl <source_filenames>
+ The named .c and .h source files comment blocks are spell-checked.
+}
+
+if {[llength $argv] == 0} {
+ puts stderr $usage
+ exit 0
+}
+
+# Want a Tcl version with 3-argument close.
+package require Tcl 8.6
+
+set ::spellchk "aspell --extra-dicts ./custom.rws list"
+
+# Run text through aspell with custom dictionary, return finds.
+proc misspelled {text} {
+ set spellerr [open "|$::spellchk" r+]
+ puts $spellerr $text
+ flush $spellerr
+ close $spellerr write
+ set huhq [regsub {\s*$} [read $spellerr] {}]
+ close $spellerr read
+ return [split $huhq "\n"]
+}
+
+# Eliminate some common patterns that need not be well spelled.
+proc decruft {text} {
+ set nopp [regsub -all "\n *#\[^\n\]*\n" $text "\n\n" ]
+ set noticket [regsub -all {Ticket \[?[0-9a-f]+\]?} $nopp "" ]
+ return $noticket
+}
+
+# Sift out common variable spellings not in normal dictionaries.
+proc varsift {words} {
+ set rv [list]
+ foreach w $words {
+ set n [string length $w]
+ set cr [string range $w 1 end]
+ if {[string tolower $cr] ne $cr} continue
+ lappend rv $w;
+ }
+ return $rv
+}
+
+foreach fname $argv {
+ set ich [open $fname r]
+ set dtext [decruft [read $ich]]
+ close $ich
+ set cbounds [regexp -indices -inline -all {(/\*)|(\*/)} $dtext]
+ set ccb -1
+ set cblocks [list]
+ foreach {ap cb ce} $cbounds {
+ set cib [lindex $cb 1]
+ set cie [lindex $ce 0]
+ if {$cie != -1} {
+ if {$ccb != -1} {
+ set cce [expr $cie - 1]
+ set destar [string map [list * " "] [string range $dtext $ccb $cce]]
+ lappend cblocks $destar
+ set ccb -1
+ } else continue
+ } elseif {$cib != -1} {
+ set ccb [expr $cib + 1]
+ }
+ }
+ set oddspells [varsift [misspelled [join $cblocks "\n"]]]
+ if {[llength $oddspells] > 0} {
+ puts "!? Misspellings from $fname:"
+ puts [join [lsort -nocase -unique $oddspells] "\n"]
+ }
+}
projects / thirdparty / sqlite.git / commitdiff
